Home

Varispeed G7 INSTRUCTION MANUAL

1. See Table 1 4 Same for Open Chassis and Enclosed Wall mounted Inverters Table 1 4 400 VAC 185 to 300 kW Inverter Dimensions mm and Masses kg Dimensions mm Open Chassis IPOO Voltage Heat Generation W Class Enclosed Wall mounted NEMA Type1 Total Cooling dios d Heat Method w2 W3 H1 Gene Mass ation 400 V 3 phase Checking and Controlling the Installation Site NM Checking and Controlling the Installation Site Install the Inverter in the installation site described below and maintain optimum conditions Installation Site Install the Inverter under the following conditions and a pollution level of 2 or less UL standard Table 1 5 Installation Site Ambient Operating Temperature Humidity Enclosed wall mounted 10 to 40 C 95 RH or less no condensation Open chassis 10 to 45 C 95 RH or less no condensation Protection covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Inverter Be sure to remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 15
2. q er A e e zooa Control circuit TACAUTION eerte suani for svnasstionn TOTSPRET Wieitesiee Torent t inal CR Mee 180 Co vires or oawivalont RUE GCE Mor NH 20 10 them 390 j semen RIT suia ma Ce Cei i Lee 4 R L1 S Le T L3 V Tej W T3 lela ONS GOIN Main circuit A terminals um RLISLATLILS oT e2 BEIB2IUTIVTA i zij de H D ARB EC i7 35 TNEDECRUUB indi SRG 7S CEMM PRO LO ERRUCOS IUE CUR Charge indicator a e IG AD N O fa Ground terminal o e o P ud 15 kW or Less 18 5 kW or More Fig 1 5 Terminal Arrangement Exterior and Mounting Dimensions Open Chassis Inverters IP00 Exterior diagrams of the Open Chassis Inverters are shown below JUL U 1 2 A 00000 f F ti J D1 6 w oy 9 D w D1 10 for 200 V Class Inverters of 30 to 110 kW or 400 V Class Inverters of 55 to 160 kW 3 D 200 V 400 V Class Inverters of 0 4 to 15 kW
3. No Function Display Page U1 Status Monitor Constants Monitor 5 78 MENU Drive Mode U2 Fault Trace Fault Trace 5 84 U3 Fault History Fault History 5 86 Inverter can be operated and its status can be displayed A1 Initialize Mode Initialization 5 8 A2 User specified Setting Mode Paster 9 9 b1 Operation Mode Selections Sequence 5 10 b2 DC Injection Braking DC Braking 5 12 b3 Speed Search speed 5 13 7 b4 Timer Function Delay Timers 5 15 Quick Programming Mode b5 PID Control PID Control 5 15 d arie b6 Dwell Functions Reference 5 17 or H ion can be monitore b7 Droop Control Deep 58 or set b8 Energy Saving Sw 5 19 b9 Zero servo Zero Servo 5 20 C1 Acceleration Deceleration Accel Decel 5 21 C2 S curve Acceleration Deceleration 5 9 22 C3 Motor Slip Compensation Monee 5 23 i Torque x Advanced Programming Mode si Torgus Compensation Comp 92t c5 Speed Control ASR ASR Tuning 5 25 All constants can be monitored C6 Carrier Frequency Carrier Freq 5 26 or set d1 Preset Reference Rot 5 27 aa Ref d2 Reference Limits ee 5 28 d3 Jump Frequencies Frequetcies 5 29 d4 Reference Frequency Hold Sequence 5 29 d5 Torque Control Torque Control 5 30 d6 Field Weakening a 5231 VERE Mog E1 V f Pattern Vif Pattern 5 33 ety Meds E2 Motor Setup se 5 34 5 Constants changed from the E3
4. Braking Unit To yt optional je Qo L o Lever Og i detector oj E Motor i Braking Resistor Unit OR cots i optional FU FV e3 FW 3 phase power Inverter um 200 to 240 V F V T2 50 60 Hz CIMR G7A2018 W T3 i Forward Run Stop 181 Hs 1 H a gt 2mccB THRX orc ON wc ao v gt a Ground to 100 max to f i PG B2 TA r we Usap Reverse Run Stop 1 S2 SK pe P 1 Thermal relay trip contact i P e t T 4 l optional N 1 H Thermal switch contact H t i for Braking Unit i 1 External fault t Ld S3 HK TE t t Fault reset LI i Hs T3 2 t i ault reset M i MC TRX OT bd i Hy i l Shieded twisted pair l 4 90 o Multi step speed reference 1 e wires ani i E H Main speed switching i i S5 H Kl Pulse monitor output ti Multi step speed i 30 mA max i i reference 2 a dud S6 ifia distance Seuerus Roto T o o 4 i eae Jog frequency vit L selection ii L S7 H 1 T oo ritas ion External M E contact Inputs baseblock command 1 1S8 Hs MP ned ar Se E 6 5 O Pulse train output settings ro l 4 0 to 32 kHz 2 2 kQ referens o o S9 ony AC 5 Petu Output J Multi step speed to 1 Lr H j frequency reference 4 ii 10 FFK Oo 0 9 F mE H 2a Red Y P ry ammete
5. Name Control Methods oh Open Open Description CHING Teetory Vif Loop Flux Loop Display P Range Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 OHI detec tion of 0 Disabled FAN minor Inverter s L8 32 fault detection i Oorl 1 N A A A A A 4E2H 6 73 2 cooling fan 1 Enabled OH1 major fault a OH1 Detect detection Sel Carrier 0 Disabled No carrier 18 38 frequency frequency reduction i m feduenon 1 Enabled Carrier Oorl x No A A A No No 4EFH selection frequency is reduced Prtct L Spd accordingly Reduced carrier eia T 0 4 to dis E gt Z L8 39 frequency ets the reduced carrier fre 20 MUS No WIES A No No 4F0H J 3 quency is L Spd Car rier F Current alarm Allows or restricts an alarm from being triggered when L841 the relative output current a HC Alarm rises above 150 Oorl 0 No A A A A A 4F2H 6 181 Sel 0 Disabled 1 Enabled alarm will be output 1 The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0 4 kW is given 2 Applicable for G7 Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1038 or later 3 Applicable for G7 Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 or later 4 Ifa current exceeding 110 of the Inverter rated current flows through the unit the carrier frequency will automatically decrease and electromagnetic noise will occur
6. Fig 2 3 Terminal Arrangement 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW Shown Above L T a d C prz D H UI S2 SST S4 PSSTS8 187188 iia L TEES Control circuit terminals A Charge indicator x r LLL E Termina i A CAU hie USD for ieee iene M522 3 2 ANem Cu tte o ed ee owires of equiva enl wo s g s 1N m Wgig 2N 10 2Nem RILI SULel LTI L31 O Q3 R L4J S Le 1 L3 UZTI IV T8 IW T3 c eee lollo Sy e e O4 3 Ground terminal Main circuit terminals a 2 e Ca n NI Fig 2 4 Terminal Arrangement 200 V Class Inverter for 18 5 kW Shown Above iring Main Circuit Terminals Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed loop
7. 5 1 1 Name Control Methods Con aale Change Open Open stant Description Setting Factory during Vif Loop Flux Loop Number Display Range Setting Opera with Vec Vec Vec tion PG tor tor tor 1 2 Feeder resis tance adjust Setthe gain for the feeder ment gain resistance in the speed esti mator Feeder R gain 5 2 m Feed Forward N5 User constants for the feed forward control are shown in the following table Con stant Number Name Display Feed forward control selec tion Feedfoward Sel Description Select the feed forward con trol 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Setting Range Factory Setting Control Methods Vif with PG Open Loop Vec tor User Constant Tables Open Flux Loop Vec Vec tor tor 2 Motor accel eration time Motor Accel Time Set the time required to accelerate the motor at the rated torque T 9o to the rated speed Nr Je GD7 4 P Motor rated out put 20 J kgm2 Nr min 1 ta s 60 T100 N m However 60 P kW gt x 103 N T100 2n Nr min Nm Feed forward proportional gain Feedfoward Gain Set the proportional gain for feed forward control Speed reference response will increase as the setting of N5 03 is increased
8. 7 20 OPE0S Sequence Select 7 20 OPE06 PG Opt Missing 7 20 OPE07 Analog Selection 7 20 OPEO tnaa nete EResTEME TREE 7 20 OPRIJ LIs4hecc oie eee oe ee eee 7 20 OPEIO V f Ptrn Setting 7 20 open chassis type 1 4 open loop vector control 4 9 operation errors 7 20 OPR Oper Disconnect 7 9 option card communications error 7 18 option card connection error 7 11 option card selection error 7 20 option communications error 7 10 OS Overspeed Det 7 16 output open phase 7 4 OV DC Bus Overvolt 7 15 overcurrent 7 2 overspeed 7 8 7 16 overtorque 2 7 16 overtorque detected 1 7 7 overtorque detected 2 7 7 P password panin seik e e a a ee 4 17 6 156 periodic inspection 8 2 periodic maintenance of parts 8 3 PG encoder pulses 2 39 PG disconnection
9. Overload current reduction level A 100 87 200 V Class 30 to 75 kW 50 Carrier frequency 0 4 kHz 8 kHz Fig 6 36 Reduction Levels for Open loop Vector 2 Control For 400 V Class Inverters the following limitations apply to the maximum output frequency that can be set for the carrier frequency settings Maximum output frequency setting 250 Hz 400 Hz 400 Hz Applicable Inverter capacity 40P4 to 40P4 to 40P4 to CIMR G7ALILILILI TES 4110 4075 4045 6 45 Limiting Motor Torque Torque Limit Function The motor torque limit function is enabled with flux vector control and open loop vector control In the open loop vector control and flux vector control the user set value is applied to the torque limit by cal culating internally the torque output by the motor Enable this function if you do not want a torque above a specified amount to be applied to the load or if you do not want a regeneration value above a specified amount to occur Related Constants Name Control Methods 1 Change I n Open Setting Factory during vit OPen Elux Loop Range Setting Opera with LOOP vec Vec tion PG oe tor tor 2 Con NE stant Description Number Display Forward drive torque limit Torq Limit Fwd Reverse I Sets the torque limit value as a percent age of the motor rated torque Four individual regi
10. F Option Constants The following settings are made with the option constants F constants Settings for option boards BPG Option Setup F1 User constants for the PG Speed Control Board are shown in the following table Con stant Number F1 01 Name Display PG constant PG Pulses Rev Description Sets the number of PG pulse generator or encoder pulses Sets the number of pulses per motor revolution 0 to 60000 Factory Setting 600 Change during Opera tion Control Methods Open V f Loop with Vec PG tor Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vec tor 380H 6 158 F1 02 Operation selection at PG open cir cuit PGO PG Fdbk Loss Sel Sets the PG disconnection stopping method 0 Ramp to stop Deceleration stop using Deceleration Time 1 C1 02 Coast to stop Fast stop Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 Continue operation To protect the motor or machinery do not normally make this setting 0to3 No No No 381H 6 158 F1 03 Operation selection at overspeed OS PG Over speed Sel Sets the stopping method when an overspeed OS fault occurs 0 Ramp to stop Deceleration stop using Deceleration Time 1 C1 02 Coast to stop Fast stop Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 Continue operation To protect the mo
11. Control Aeon 12200 ower __ Control circuits f 4400 22400 a LSupply circuits Note Consult your Yaskawa representative before using 12 phase rectification These terminals are wired before shipment When using DC power for the main circuit power supply remove the wires between R r and S 2 then for 200 V Class Inverters input 200 VAC to r 2 5 or for 400 V Class Inverters input either 200 VAC to r 2200 5200 or 400 VAC to r 4400 7400 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals NM Standard Connection Diagrams Standard Inverter connection diagrams are shown in Fig 2 5 These are the same for both 200 V Class and 400 V Class Inverters The connections depend on the Inverter capacity BCIMR G7A20P4 to 2015 and 40P4 to BCIMR G7A2018 2022 and 4018 to 4045 4015 Braking Resistor oO Braking Resistor Unit optional DC reactor Unit optional 2d Braking Uni optional m braking nit 0 0 optional OO1 281 B2 Q Q9 Q X 5 M ORT um Ot gose wee Gi O50 V U T1 a OT L3 WIT3 LO S L2 v2 gt e OTN W VAC 400 VAC 3 phase 200 BRL W T3 VAC 400 VAC S1 L21 Q06 4 Q T1 L31 f i O a v RENE 2 Be sure to remove the short circuit bar before connecting the DC The DC reactor is
12. 7 16 PG disconnection detected 7 8 PG pulse monitor output dividing ratio 6 161 PG rotation direction 6 160 PG speed control card 6 160 PG speed control cards 2 31 PGO PG Open 7 16 PID control 6 106 PID control selection error 7 20 PID feedback reference lost 7 8 7 17 power ON 4 3 Q quick programming mode 3 5 3 8 R radio interference 2 20 rated current 6 58 RIQG a ssi Se ese a hari aie te Siete ea ee ete 6 84 run command 6 10 S S curve characteristics 6 21 setting speed limit bias 6 132 slip compensation function 6 36 speed control with PG 6 158 stabilizing speed 6 41 stall prevention function 6 23 6 25 6 50 standard connection diagrams 2 15 standard inverter specifications 9 2 stopping methods 6 12 straight solderless terminals 2 23
13. BAutotuning has not been performed with vector control Vector control will not perform if autotuning has not been performed Perform autotuning separately for the motor or set the motor constants through calculations Alternatively change the Control Method Selection A1 02 to V f control If the Torque Generated for the Motor is Insufficient Insufficient Power If autotuning has not been performed or the control method has been changed since last performing autotuning perform autotuning If the problem occurs after performing stationary autotuning perform rota tional autotuning The torque is insufficient with open loop vector 2 control insufficient power In particular if there is insufficient power at low speeds make adjustments using the following methods Low speed Electromotive Load PRG 1020 only Increase the setting of N4 29 torque adjustment gain 2 Increase the setting in intervals of approximately 0 05 If the setting is too high it may have the opposite effect and so do not change the setting by a large amount Low speed Regenerative Load PRG 1020 only Increase the setting of N4 15 low speed regeneration stability coefficient 1 Increase the setting in intervals of approximately 0 1 If the setting is too large the torque reference monitor and the actual torque accuracy may deteriorate and so do not change the setting by a large amount If the Torque Reference U1
14. 7 10 7 18 C CALL Com Calle zb oc eee ees 7 18 CE MEMOBUS Com Err 7 18 CE Memobus Com Err 7 10 CF out of control 7 8 circuit breaker 2 16 common specifications 9 4 communications on standby 7 18 communications option board A D converter error 7 11 communications option card DPRAM error 7 12 communications option card model code error 7 11 communications option card self diagnostic error 7 11 constant selection error 7 20 constant setting error 7 21 constant setting range error 7 20 control circuit terminals 2 22 control fault 7 8 control method 4 8 control method selection error 7 20 control power fault 7 4 cooling fin overheating 7 4 CPF00 CPF 7 10 CPF01 CPFO1 7 10 CPU internal A D converter error 7 11 CPU ASIC mutual diagnosis fault 7 11 crimp terminals 2 6
15. 6 183 Settings Required After Replacement of Cooling Fan or Electrolytic Capacitor 6 184 Troubleshooting esseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeenee n 7 1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions c ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeceneneeeees 7 2 Fault Detection cceccccscscseesessssessseseseesssscsessesesseseesesesesescesesecsesectereeneseceesecseseceeseess 7 2 Alarm Detection tnter tnter nennen 7 15 Operation Emors sce et eet ec ee a Recent sce cbs in en anton deese 7 20 4 Errors During Autotuning sere rete tercie edet ne ete CH den 7 22 Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function 7 23 Tro bleshootihg ae cce E 7 25 If Constant Constants Cannot Be Set cccccccccsssssesssccssesessescssesessesescesesceseseenesesseses 7 25 If the Motor Does Not Operate ccccsccsessessssssssssssssssssstesessesessesestessssstsreacsissesseataneeeeee 7 26 If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed cccsscscssesessestssestssescesestsesteseeees 7 29 if the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow ees 7 29 If the Motor Operates Higher Than the Reference ssssssssse 7 29 if the Slip Compensation Function Has Low Speed Precision ssssss 7 30 if There is Low Speed Control Accuracy at High speed Rotation in Open loop Vector Control Method ssssssseeeene een
16. 5 Ifthe setting is 0 the axis will accelerate to the specified speed for the specified acceleration time C1 01 to C1 08 16 Applicable for G7 Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1038 and later 17 Applicable for G7 Series Inverters with software versions RPG 1034 or later 18 Applicable for G7 Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 or later 9 If a current exceeding 110 of the Inverter rated current flows through the unit the carrier frequency will automatically decrease and electromagnetic noise will Occur Index INDEX Symbols speed 6 82 Numerics 2 wire sequence 6 10 3 wire sequence 6 11 A AC reactor 2 17 acceleration and deceleration times 6 18 advanced programming mode 3 5 3 10 ASIC internal RAM fault 7 11 ASIC version fault 7 11 auto restart 6 72 autotuning 4 9 autotuning mode 3 5 3 14 B baseblock circuit error 7 10 braking resistor 2 21 braking resistor unit 2 21 10 20 braking unit 10 21 BUS Option Com Err
17. 5 63 iTorque Detection L6 User constants for the torque detection function are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Con Sima an 7 Open Open stant Description SHIN RACY Vif Loop Flux Loop Number Display k Range Setting pia Nee vec Vec or or or 1 2 Overtorque 0 Overtorque undertorque Under detection disabled torque Overtorque detection only detection with speed agreement selection 1 operation continues after overtorque warning Overtorque detected continuously during operation operation continues after overtorque warning Overtorque detection only with speed agreement output stopped upon detection protected operation Overtorque detected continuously during operation output stopped upon detection protected operation Undertorque detection only Torq Det 1 with speed agreement Sel operation continues after overtorque warning Undertorque detected continuously during operation operation continues after overtorque warning Undertorque detection only with speed agreement output stopped upon detection protected operation Undertorque detected continuously during operation output stopped upon detection protected operation Overtorque Under Open loop vector control torque Motor rated torque is set as detection 100 level 1 V f control Inverter rated cur Torq D
18. B Application Precautions The number of auto restarts count is reset under the following conditions After auto restart normal operation has continued for 10 minutes After the protection operation has been performed and the fault has been verified and an fault reset has been input After the power supply is turned OFF and then ON again Do not use the auto restart function with variable loads Continuing Operation Operation Selection After Cooling Fan Fault Use the constant setting to select the operation of the motor after a cooling fan fault occurs This function can be used for times when a motor should not be stopped quickly with an emergency stop A cooling fan equipped for 200 V Class Inverters of 7 5 kW 15 kW and 30 to 110 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 5 5 to 15 kW and 55 to 300 kW iRRelated Constants Name Control Methods Con Change stant Description Number Display during vit OPen Flux Open Opera with COP Vec oop tion PG Vector Vector 1 tor 2 OHI detection 0 Disabled FAN minor fault of Inverter s detection cooling fan 1 Enabled OH1 major fault OHI Detect Se detection Applicable for G7 Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1038 or later The following table describes the operation of the motor and the display of the Digital Operator in accordance with t
19. Operation Inverter operating status sas Ul 12 0000000 L1 Run 1 Zero speed Reverse Reset signal input Speed agree Inverter ready Minor fault 4 Cannot be output Int Ctl Sts 1 Major fault 5 19 5 80 Name Display Cumulative operation time Elapsed Time Description Monitors the total operating time of the Inverter The initial value and the oper ating time power ON time selection can be set in 02 07 and o2 08 Output Signal Level During Multi Function Analog Output Cannot be output Control Methods Vit with PG Open Loop Vec tor 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vec tor 2 Software No flash memory FLASH ID Manufacturer s ID number Cannot be output Terminal Al input voltage Term Al Level Monitors the input voltage of the voltage frequency refer ence An input of 10 V corre sponds to 100 10 V 100 10 V 10 to 10 V possible Terminal A2 input current voltage Term A2 Level Monitors the input current of the multi function analog input An input of 20 mA corre sponds to 100 20 mA 100 4 to 20 mA 0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V possi ble Terminal A3 input voltage Term A3 Level Monitors the input voltage of the multi function analog input An input of 10 V corresponds to 100 10 V 100 10 V
20. 4 If the motor cable changes to 50 m or longer for the actual installation perform stationary autotuning for the line to line resistance only on site Check record constants END 5 The default control mode is open loop vector control 2 A1 02 2 6 Ifthe maximum output frequency is different from the base frequency set the maximum output frequency E1 04 after autotuning Fig 4 1 Trial Operation Flowchart Trial Operation Procedures B Trial Operation Procedures The procedure for the trial operate is described in order in this section Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper 400 V Class Inverters of 55 kW or Higher Set the power supply voltage jumper after setting E1 01 Input Voltage Setting for 400 V Class Inverters of 55 kW or higher Insert the jumper into the power tap nearest to the actual power supply voltage If the wrong jumper is selected the Inverter may be damaged The jumper is factory set to 440 V when shipped If the power supply voltage is not 440 V use the following procedure to change the setting 1 Turn OFF the power supply and wait for at least 5 minutes Confirm that the CHARGE indicator has gone out Remove the terminal cover Insert the jumper at the position for the voltage supplied to the Inverter see Fig 4 2 nA OQ WN Return the terminal cover to its original position O O 007208V 2 40V 40072415V 460V 220 230V 380V 440 48
21. CNS PNP set z O External 24 V IP24V 24 V sc 2 21 _ Control Circuit Terminal Connections Connections to Inverter control circuit terminals are shown in Fig 2 19 External frequency references 2 28 Inverter CIMR G7A2018 0 to 32 kHz 2 2 kQ KQ a 7 Multi function analog output 2 10 to 10 V 2 mA Default Output current Oto 10V 1 Ammeter adjustment Multi function analog output 1 H E T 1 1 1 ie 10 to 10 V 2 mA Q debe rs Wu UU err Output pee 010 10V cs gt Forward Run Stop S A481 Fk tot bog H l Reverse Run Stop c H S2 Ho Thermal switch contact for Braking Unit iro O i i Lg T External fault E ti 188 FK 11 L bog Fault reset zo 4 HKI 1 o i i S4 AID Multi step command 1 EE E z Main speed switching 1 1 S5 FEK o o H Multi step speed id E F setting 2 E EK FEK L 6 oL 486 U Jog frequency bg l f i selection it ju S7 Bs i x o0 H Multi function External bg 14 contact input baseblock command 4 98 Hs MP o H o i Potauns M ll csi epaod l i E E Pulse train output i og zi setting 3 soit S9 FK AC b ae Output Multi step speed
22. i I i Factory Multi step g 1 jw oa e speed setting 1 x zz i l L4 i I S12 Hs C l Emergency stop i CN5 NPN setting 24V8mA l NO contact i i 1 H l E LSC We T Fo ht l i l l i l 1 T 424V E G shield wire connection terminal Pulse train input E Frequency setting i i gt RP Master speed pulse train Fog adjustment 1 H 0 to 32 kHz 8 kQ f 2kQ 9 l High level 3 5 to 13 2 V input Y i i Frequency V Frequency setting power n rm oe 0to 410 V N 15 V SUA 10 f lt Poss T 2kO A1 Master speed reference l 4t20mA P IB I 0 to 10 V 20 kQ E P 1 ni A2 Master speed reference l N LAC 4 to 20 mA 250 Q i i E l I Fig 10 14 E gp Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 24 V Common in Sourcing Mode Set CN5 shunt connector on the control board to PNP as shown below for a sequence that uses a PNP tran sistor for an input signal 24 V common and sourcing mode and an internal 24 V power supply 1 0 0 9 9 9 i Q1 Q2 Q B B2 MCCB i i 3 phase power R C oM _____6 R L1 U T1 Motor Cc s oM O2 vit2 IM CN T omn o T L3 Inverter WT3 l i 0 to 10 V 20 k
23. Blocking Inverter Outputs Baseblock Commands Set 8 or 9 Baseblock command NO NC in one of the constants H1 01 to H1 10 multi function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection to perform baseblock commands using the terminal s ON OFF opera tion and prohibit Inverter output using the baseblock commands At this time the motor will be coasting and BB will blink on the Digital Operator Clear the baseblock command to restart the operating using speed search from frequency references from the previous baseblock command input Multi function Contact Inputs H1 01 to H1 10 Control Methods Function External baseblock NO NO contact Baseblock at ON External baseblock NC NC contact Baseblock at OFF i Time Chart The time chart when using baseblock commands is shown below Forward operation Stop OFF ON Input Baseblock command put Cleared Frequency reference Search from stored frequency reference Output frequency 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 T 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ji i Hold Fig 6 50 Baseblock Commands Y oa 4 If using baseblock commands with a variable load do not frequently input baseblock commands during oper P ation as this may cause the motor to suddenly start coasting and may result in the motor falling or slipping e IMPORTANT 6 E gee Stopping Acceleration and Decele
24. When the control method is changed the factory setting will change The flux vector factory setting is given 2 The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0 4 kW is given o Digital Operator Constants The following settings are made with the Digital Operator constants o constants Multi function selections and the copy function Monitor Select o1 User constants for Digital Operator Displays are shown in the following table Con stant Number ol 01 Name Display Monitor selection Description Set the number of the monitor item to be displayed in the earliest 4 monitor items U1 oo User Monitor Sel The output monitor voltage factory setting can be changed Setting Range 4 to 45 Factory Setting 4 to 99 Change during Opera tion Control Methods VIf with PG Open Loop Vec tor 1 Open Flux Loop Vec Vec tor tor 2 500H 5 13 Name Display Monitor selection after power up Power On Monitor Description Sets the monitor item to be displayed when the power is turned on 1 Frequency reference 2 Output frequency 3 Output current 4 The monitor item set for ol 01 Setting Range Factory Setting Control Methods Vit with PG Open Loop Vec tor 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vec tor
25. 2 00 Open loop vector control Energy saving coeffi cient Carrier frequency selection Carrier frequency selection for open loop vector 2 control Carrier frequency selection upper limit E2 01 E4 01 Motor rated current E2 02 E4 02 Motor rated slip E2 03 E4 03 Motor no load current E2 05 E4 05 Motor line to line resistance E2 06 E4 06 Motor leak inductance E2 10 Motor iron loss for torque compensation L2 02 Momentary power loss ridethru time L2 03 Min baseblock BB time L2 04 Voltage recovery time L8 02 Overheat pre alarm level L8 39 Reduced carrier frequency N1 03 Hunting prevention time constant N5 02 Note Attach a Momentary Power Interruption Compensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up to Motor acceleration time with outputs of 0 4 to 7 5 kW The initial settings for C6 02 are as follows 1 2 0 kHz 2 5 0 kHz 3 8 0 KHz 4 10 0 kHz 5 12 5 kHz 6 15 0 kHz and F optiona Inverters of 90 or 110 kW 3 0 kHz 2 The initial settings for C6 11 are as follows 1 2 0 kHz 2 4 0 kHz 3 6 0 kHz 4 8 0 kHz 2 0 seconds is required for 400 V Class Inverters setting initial value for 5 93 Constant Settings by Function Frequency Reference ccccccccc
26. Torque primary delay Speed limit d5 04 2 d5 03 Priority circuit ee a Internal torque Torque limit reference gt from analog input filter d5 02 Speed limit from analog 1 input from terminal A1 m a O t O Speed controller Z ASR Speed limit bias d5 05 Speed feedback Refer to torque limit setting via constants and analog input 9 Speed limiter to Fig 6 68 Torque Control Block Diagram i Speed Limiter and Priority Circuit Speed Limit Function If the external torque reference and load are not balanced during torque control the motor will accelerate in either the forward or reverse direction The speed limit function is used to limit the speed to a specified value and it consists of the speed limiter circuit and priority circuit When the motor speed exceeds the speed limit value during torque control the speed limiter circuit generates the suppression torque proportional to the speed above the limit value and adds to the torque reference The priority circuit switches the internal torque reference to ASR output so that the motor speed does not exceed the speed limit value Application Precautions There are two ways to set a speed limit using an input from an analog input terminal and setting a speed limit in d5 04 The inputs methods for a speed limit are liste
27. 5 The lower limits are 0 4 kHz for V f control and 1 0 kHz for flux vector control The upper limit is the same value as that of the factory setting for L8 39 5 68 User Constant Tables w N Special Adjustments The following settings are made with the special adjustments constants N constants Hunting prevention speed feedback detection control high slip braking speed estimation and feed forward control iHunting Prevention Function N1 User constants for hunting prevention are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Fact Open Open Description actor V f Loop Flux Loop P Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Display Hunting pre 0 Hunting prevention vention func function disabled tion selection 1 Hunting prevention function enabled The hunting prevention func tion suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load Hunt Prev This function is enabled in V Select f control method only If high response is to be given priority over vibration sup pression disable the hunting prevention function Hunting pre Set the hunting prevention 5 vention gain gain multiplication factor Normally there is no need to ai make this setting Make the adjustments as fol lows f vibration occurs with light load increase the set ting Ifthe motor stalls reduce the setting If the setting i
28. Slip Comp Time Slip compensation primary delay time is set in ms units Usually setting is not neces sary Adjust this constant at the fol lowing times Reduce the setting when slip compensation respon sive is slow When speed is not stabi lized increase the setting Slip compen sation limit Slip Comp Limit Sets the slip compensation limit as a percentage of motor rated slip Slip compen sation selec tion during regeneration Slip Comp Regen 0 Disabled 1 Enabled When the slip compensation during regeneration function has been activated as regen eration capacity increases momentarily it may be neces sary to use a braking option braking resistor Braking Resistor Unit or Braking Unit The factory setting will change when the control method is changed The open loop vector 1 factory se Output volt age limit operation selection Output V limit 0 Disabled 1 Enabled The motor flux will be lowered automati cally when the output voltage become satu rated tings are given 5 23 iTorque Compensation C4 User constants for torque compensation are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Con Open on inti Setting Factory stant Description Vif Loop Flux Number Display Range Setting with Vec Vec PG tor tor 1 Torque com Sets torque compensati
29. eee 8200 V Class Inverters of 15 kW 400 V Class Inverters of 11 kW and 15 kW The circulation fan is installed at the top left corner of the Inverter interior Removing the Circulation Fan 1 Remove the Digital Operator the terminal cover and the front cover 2 While pushing the relay connector tab A in direction 1 pull the relay connector out in direction 2 3 While pushing the fan tabs B in direction 3 pull the fan out in direction 2 4 Remove the relay connector connected to the fan Mounting the Circulation Fan Reverse the above procedure to mount the fan Be sure to mount the fan so that the air flows towards the bottom of the Inverter direction indicated by the arrow Mount the fan securely using the fan tabs B Confirm that there are no cables in contact with the fan s rotating parts Circulation fan Fig 8 14 Circulation Fan Replacement 200 V Class Inverters of 15 kW 400 V Class Inverters of 11 KW and 15 kW 8200 V Class Inverters of 30 kW or More 400 V Class Inverters of 55 kW or More The circulation fan is installed in front of the fan cover inside the Inverter Remove the circulation fan using the procedure for replacing the cooling fan and replace it with the new fan The installation position for 200 V Class Inverters of 75 kW is different 200 V Class Inverters of 75 kW The circulation fan is installed behind the control board mounting panel Do not subject the fan to shock dur in
30. M Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Board The control circuit terminal board can be removed and mounted without disconnecting the cables i P Always confirm that the charge indicator is not lit before removing or mounting the control circuit terminal P board e IMPORTANT iRemoving the Control Circuit Terminal Board 1 Remove the Digital Operator and front cover 2 Remove the connecting line connectors connected to FE and NC on the control circuit terminal board 3 Loosen the mounting screws 1 on the left and right sides of the control terminals until they are free It 1s not necessary to remove these screws completely They are self rising 4 Pull the terminal board out sideways in direction 2 with the screws sticking out from the board iaMounting the Control Circuit Terminal Board Reverse the removal procedure to mount the terminal board Confirm that the control circuit terminal board and the control board properly meet at connector CN5 before pressing in on the board The connector pins may be bent if the board is forced into place possibly preventing correct Inverter opera tion Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Board f uw Fig 8 17 Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Board 8 21 specifications This chapter describes the basic specifications of the Inverter and specifications for options and peripheral devices
31. Not used Using an Analog Reference Board AI 14B provides 3 channels of bi polar inputs with 14 bit A D conversion accuracy and a sign bit The func tion of each channel is determined by the setting of F2 01 AI 14U provides 2 channels of bi polar inputs with 14 bit A D conversion accuracy Channel 1 is a voltage input and channel 2 is a current input The sum of channels 1 and 2 is a frequency input F2 01 does not need to be set for the AI 14U Options E iRelated Constants Name Control Methods Open Loop Vector 1 Flux Vec tor Description Vif with PG Display Bi polar or uni Sets the functions for channel 1 to polar input 3 that are effective when the AI selection 14B Analog Reference Board is used 0 3 channel individual Chan nel 1 terminal A1 Channel 2 terminal A2 Channel 3 termi nal A3 3 channel addition Addition AI 14 Input Sel values are the frequency refer ence When set to 0 select 1 for b1 01 In this case the multi function input Option Inverter selection cannot be used i Setting Precautions Always set b1 01 Reference selection to 1 control circuit terminal when using the AI 14B for three chan nels of independent inputs When this is done H1 01 to H1 10 multi function contact inputs cannot be set to 2 Option Inverter selection Using a Digital Reference Board When using a DI 08 or DI 16H2 Digital Refer
32. User Constants Settable in Quick Programming Mode The minimum user constants required for Inverter operation can be monitored and set in quick programming mode The user constants displayed in quick programming mode are listed in the following table These and all other user constants are also displayed in advanced programming mode Refer to the overview of modes on page 3 5 for an overview of quick programming mode Name Control Methods Con ei cm Open Open stant f Description rate lene Vif loop Flux Loop Number Display n Range Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Control Set the control method for the Inverter method 0 V f control selection 1 V f control with PG xd 2 Open loop vector 1 control rud No Q Q Q Q Q ee Control 3 Flux vector control Method 4 Open loop vector 2 control Reference Set the frequency reference input selection method 0 Digital Operator b1 01 1 Control circuit terminal analog 0to4 1 No Q Q Q Q Q 180H Reference input Source 2 MEMOBUS communications 3 Option board 4 Pulse train input Operation Setthe Run Command input method method 0 Digital Operator b1 02 selection 1 Control circuit terminal sequence 0103 1 No Q Q Q Q Q 81H input Run 2 MEMOBUS communications Source 3 Option board Stopping Select stopping method when Stop method Command is sent selection 0 Deceleration to stop 1 Coast to stop b1 03 2 DC br
33. 0 Run at frequency reference E1 09 not effective 1 STOP Frequencies below E1 09 in the coast to stop state 2 Run at min frequency E1 09 3 Run at zero speed Fre quencies below E1 09 are zero Zero Speed Oper Read Used to set the responsiveness sequence of the control inputs forward inputtwice reverse and multi function inputs 0 One scan every 5 ms Use Cntl Input for fast responses 1 Two scans every 5 ms Use for possible malfunction due to noise Scans Operation Used to set the operation mode selection by switching to the Remote after mode using the Local Remote switching to Key 5 remote 0 Run signals that are input ss mode during mode switching are disregarded Input Run signals after switching the mode LOC REM Run signals become RUN Sel effective immediately after switching to the Remote mode Run Com Used to set an operation inter mand selec lock in programming modes tion in 0 Cannot operate program 1 Can operate Disabled ming modes when Digital Operator is set to select Run Command when b1 02 0 RUN CMD 2 Cannot operate Cannot be at PRG in programming mode during operation Mode selec Enable for machines that tion for rotate the motor only in the zero speed same direction as the speed reference This setting improves the control stability ModeSel of the motor at zero speed ZeroSpd 0 Disabled 1
34. 6 13 Inverter Protection This section explains the functions for protecting the Inverter and the braking resistor Performing Overheating Protection on Mounted Braking Resistors Perform overheating protection on Inverter mounted braking resistors Model ERF 150WJ OD When overheating in a mounted braking resistor is detected an alarm RH Mounted braking resistor overheat ing is displayed on the Digital Operator and the motor coasts to a stop Related Constants Name Control Methods Con piel Open Open stant Displa Description Pd pd Loop cus Loop Number play tion Pe Vector Gr Vector 1 2 Protect selec tion for internal DB resistor Type ERF 0 Disabled no overheating protection 1 Enabled overheating DB Resistor protection Prot Multi function Contact Outputs H2 01 to H2 05 Control Methods Methods Function time is too short or that the motor regeneration energy is too large In these cases lengthen the deceleration Q The most likely causes of RH Mounted braking resistor overheating being detected are that the deceleration time or replace the Braking Resistor Unit with one with a higher breaking capacity INFO Inverter Protection w Reducing Inverter Overheating Pre Alarm Warning Levels The Inverter detects the temperature of the cooling fins using the thermistor and protects the Inverter from overheating You
35. BPreset Reference d1 User constants for frequency references are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Con priscis Open Open ipfi actory uring V f Loop Flux Loo ls Display Eesenpuon Setting Opera with Vec Vec Ves tion PG tor tor tor 1 2 Frequency reference 1 Sets the frequency reference in the units used in o1 03 Reference 1 Frequency The frequency reference reference 2 when multi step speed refer ence is ON for a multi func Reference2 tion input Frequency The frequency reference reference 3 when multi step speed refer ence 2 is ON for a multi func Reference 3 tion input Frequency The frequency reference reference 4 when multi step speed refer ences 1 and 2 are ON for Reference 4 multi function inputs 5 Frequency The frequency when multi reference 5 step speed reference 3 is ON for a multi function input Reference 5 Frequency The frequency reference reference 6 when multi step speed refer ences 1 and 3 are ON for Reference 6 multi function inputs Frequency The frequency reference reference 7 when multi step speed refer ences 2 and 3 are ON for Reference 7 multi function inputs Frequency The frequency reference reference 8 when multi step speed refer ences 1 2 and 3 are ON for Reference 8 multi function inputs Frequency The frequency reference reference 9 when mu
36. Circulation Fan Replacement Outline With some capacities there is a small fan installed inside the Inverter for the purpose of increasing circulation in areas where heat has built up These fans have built in fan sensors that output an alarm when the rotation rate of the fan drops to indicate that replacement is necessary 8200 V Class Inverters of 7 5 kW 400 V Class Inverters of 5 5 kW and 7 5 kW The circulation fan is installed behind the control circuit terminal board inside the Inverter The circulation fan can be replaced by removing the control circuit terminal board Removing the Circulation Fan 1 Remove the Digital Operator the terminal cover and the front cover 2 Remove the control circuit terminal board Remove the cables connected to the terminals if necessary 3 While pushing the two tabs A in direction 1 pull the fan out in direction 2 4 Remove the relay connector connected to the fan Mounting the Circulation Fan Reverse the above procedure to mount the fan Be sure to mount the fan so that the air flows towards the top of the Inverter direction indicated by the arrow Mount the fan securely using the tabs A Confirm that there are no cables in contact with the fan s rotating parts Airflow direction Inverter with Control Circuit Terminal Board Removed Fig 8 13 Circulation Fan Replacement 200 V Class Inverters of 7 5 kW 400 V Class Inverters of 5 5 kW and 7 5 kW Maintenance and Inspection
37. Make sure that the settings in L6 02 and L6 03 are appropriate Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque UL4 blinking Under torq Det 2 Undertorque 2 There has been a current less than the setting in L6 05 for longer than the setting in L6 06 Make sure that the current setting in L6 05 and time setting in L6 06 are appropriate Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque OS blinking Over speed Det Overspeed The speed has been greater than the setting in F1 08 for longer than the setting in F1 09 Overshooting undershooting are occurring Adjust the gain again The reference speed is too high Check the reference circuit and refer ence gain The settings in F1 08 and F1 09 aren t appropriate Check the settings in F1 08 and F1 09 PGO blinking PG Open The PG is Disconnected The Inverter is outputting a frequency but PG pulses aren t being input There is a break in the PG wiring Fix the broken disconnected wiring The PG is wired incorrectly Fix the wiring Power isn t being supplied to the PG Supply power to the PG properly Brake is applied to the motor Check for open circuit when using brake motor DEV blinking Speed Devia tion Excessive Speed Deviation The speed deviation has been greater than the setting in F1 10 for longer than the setting in F1 11 The l
38. Meaning Inverter Overload The Inverter overload protection func tion has operated based on the internal electronic thermal value Protective and Diagnostic Functions w Probable Causes The load is too heavy The accelera tion time deceleration time and cycle time are too short Corrective Actions Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration deceler ation and cycle times The constant setting for speed search is incorrect Motor overload occurred due to motor hunting and vibration Use the speed search function Adjust the settings of the Speed search operating current b3 02 and Speed search deceleration time b3 03 Use the estimated speed search function Perform stationary autotuning for line to line resis tance only The directions of the motor and PG are different Only in flux vector con trol Correct the PG wiring Correct the motor wiring Change the setting of PG rota tion F1 05 The V f characteristics voltage is too high Check the V f characteristics The Inverter capacity is too low Replace the Inverter with one that has a larger capacity A short circuit between V V and AC terminals occurred Overload in the control circuit ter minal Make sure that incorrect wiring has not been done Check the resistance and wir ing for the frequency setting potentiometer etc Check that th
39. Performance Switching the ASR proportional gain and integral time accord ing to the output fre quency Factory Setting Recom mended Setting 0 0 to max output fre quency Adjustment Method Set the output frequency at which to change the ASR proportional gain and inte gral time when the same val ues cannot be used for both high speed and low speed operation ASR primary delay time C5 06 Carrier frequency selection C6 11 Controlling hunting and vibration Reducing motor magnetic noise Controlling hunting and vibration at low speeds 3 Hz or less Depends on the capacity The setting is given for 200 V Class Inverters Double the voltage for 400 V Class Inverters 4 20 Default value Increase the setting if machine rigidity is low and the system vibrates easily Enabled in the range 0 to 35 Hz Refer to Procedure for Increasing the Speed Response below Increase the setting if motor magnetic noise is high Reduce the setting if hunt ing or vibration occurs at low to middle range speeds Adjustment Suggestions w Procedure for Increasing the Speed Response PRG 1020 only Increase the speed response Increase the setting for the ASR proportional gain C5 01 Typically increase in intervals of 5 Reduce the setting for the ASR primary delay time C5 06 Typically reduce in interv
40. Setting Range Factory Setting Change during Opera tion VIf Control Methods Vif with PG Open Loop Vector 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vector MEMO BUS Regis ter Speed feed back detection control AFR time constant AFR Time Set the time constant to decide the rate of change in the speed feed back detection control Speed feed back detection control AFR time constant 2 AFR Time 2 Increase the setting if overvoltage OV failures occur at the comple tion of acceleration or when the load changes radically 6 41 Machine Protection This section explains functions for protecting the machine Reducing Noise and Leakage Current The switching frequency of the Inverter s output transistor can be changed to reduce carrier noise and leakage current from the motor Related Constants Con stant Number Name Display Carrier fre quency selection Carrier Freq Sel Description Select carrier wave fixed pattern Select F to enable detailed settings using constants C6 03 to C6 07 Setting Factory Range Setting Change during Opera tion Vif Control Methods Vif with PG Open Loop Vector 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vec tor 2 MEMO BUS Regis ter Carrier frequency upper limit Carrier Freq Max Carrier frequency lower limit Carrier Freq
41. Slot Fig 1 15 Removing the Top Protection Cover Model CIMR G7A43P7 Shown Above iBottom Protection Cover Remove the terminal cover as described on Page 1 11 Loosen the two screws and remove the protection cover Return the screws to their original position and tighten them M d Terminal Cover BOUM c Reattach the terminal cover as described on Page 1 12 Screws Cover Fig 1 16 Removing the Bottom Protection Cover Model CIMR G7A43P7 Shown Above 1 17 _ Attaching the Protection Cover HTop Protection Cover The protection cover has four hooks two hooks on the bottom and two on the sides Fit the bottom hooks into the holes bend the cover slightly and press the cover down until the hooks on the side snap Holes for bottom hooks Fig 1 17 Attaching the Top Protection Cover Model CIMR G7A43P7 Shown Above iBottom Protection Cover To attach the bottom protection cover reverse the procedure used to remove it 1 18 Wiring This chapter describes wiring terminals main circuit terminal connections main circuit termi nal wiring specifications control circuit terminals and control circuit wiring specifications Connections to Peripheral Devices 2 2 Connection Diagram uscire Etre onec been p Cm nb ciinis 2 3 Terminal Block Config
42. Torque detec tion level 2 Torq Det 2 Lvl Torque detec tion time 2 Torq Det 2 Time Overtorque undertorque detection 1 NO NO contact Overtorque undertorque detec tion at ON Multi function output for over torque detection 1 is output to multi function contact output when overtorque detection 1 NO or overtorque detection 1 NC is selected Multi function output for overtorque detection 2 is out put to multi function contact out put when overtorque detection 2 NO or overtorque detection 2 NC is selected Multi function Output H2 01 to H2 05 Function Control Methods Overtorque undertorque detection 1 NC NC Contact Overtorque undertorque detec tion at OFF Overtorque undertorque detection 2 NO NO Contact Overtorque undertorque detec tion at ON Overtorque undertorque detection 2 NC NC Contact Overtorque undertorque detec tion at OFF Machine Protection BL6 01 and L6 04 Set Values and LCD Indications The relationship between alarms displayed by the Digital Operator when overtorque or undertorque is detected and the set values in L6 01 and L6 04 is shown in the following table LCD Indications Function Overtorque Overtorque Undertorque Undertorque Detection 1 Detection 2 0 Overtorque undertorque detection disabled 1 Overtorque d
43. 100 to 150 100 17 6 to 22 5 4 0 to 300 4 0 0 5 to 5 5 125 20 to 10 16 R LI S L2 T L3 1 U T1 V T2 31410392 9010200 80 x 2P W T3 RI L11 S1 L21 TI L31 3 0 to 400 3 0 x 2P Q3 8 8 to 10 8 bake G7A4132 8 to 2 0 50 to 150 50 x 2P 31 4 to 39 2 1 0 to 300 1 0 x 2P 0 5 to 5 5 125 20 to 10 16 R LI S L2 T L3 1 U TI V T2 31410392 10010200 100x2P W T3 RI L11 S1 L21 TI L31 4 0 to 400 4 0 x 2P Q3 8 8 to 10 8 80 to 60 G7A4160 8 to 2 0 50 to 150 50 x 2P 31 4 to 39 2 1 0 to 300 1 0 x 2P 0 5 to 5 5 125 20 to 10 16 G7A4090 8 to 2 0 17 6 to 22 5 r 1 4 200 3200 2 400 45400 1 3 to 1 4 r 1 4200 3200 400 t 400 1 3 to 1 4 r 1 4 200 3200 2400 2 5400 131014 r 4 amp 200 5200 2400 2 5400 131014 Inverter Model CIMR O G7A4185 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals NM M Table 2 2 400 V Class Wire Sizes Continued Terminal Symbol R LI S L2 T L3 Termi nal Screws Tightening Torque Nem 78 4 to 98 Possible Wire Sizes mm AWG 100 to 325 4 0 to 600 Recom mended Wire Size mm AWG 150 x 2P 300 x 2P U TI V T2 W T3 R1 L11 1 L21 TI L33 78 4 to 98 100 to 325 4 0 to 600 125 x 2P 250 x 2P O l 78 4 to 98 100 to 325 4 0 to 600 200 x
44. Adjust the speed estimator s integral time N4 07 or proportional gain N4 08 If the machine rotates only in the same direction as the sign of the speed limit set b1 10 to 1 U1 50 10 If the machine rotates only in the same direction as the sign of the speed limit winding operation set d5 07 to 1 Ensure that the motor s speed is not 0 or that it does not rotate in the opposite direction U1 50 20 If the machine rotates in the opposite direction to the sign of the speed limit rewinding operation set d5 07 to 0 Start with speed control and then Use in open loop vector 1 control Switch to torque control when the frequency exceeds 3 Hz Meaning of CR Error Codes Meaning Stop error Refer to Autotuning on page 4 9 Execute autotuning after the control method is changed Refer to Autotuning on page 4 9 Execute autotuning after changing cables Refer to Torque Limits L7 on page 5 65 In particular if the regenerative torque limit has been reduced to prevent overvoltages set L3 11 to 1 and set the regenerative torque limit to a large value Refer to Speed Search on page 6 64 Refer to Procedure for Increasing the Speed Response PRG 1020 only on page 4 21 Refer to Speed Torque Control Switching Function on page 6 134 Magnetic flux calculation error 1 Magnetic flux calculation error 2 Speed estimator gain adjustme
45. Charge indicator is lit Replace the Digital Operator Replace the board or the Inverter Charge indicator is not lit Check the input power supply voltage Replace the Inverter Malfunction occurred in the control power circuit Turn OFF the power wait for 5 minutes and turn ON the power again 7 13 ilCorrective Actions for Control Faults CF CF occurs Inverter connected properly Yes Are the motor constants set correctly Yes Has autotuning been executed for line to line resistance Are the torque limit settings L7 0 to L7 04 analog input or the torque reference input too small Is the stopping method appropriate Is an operation reference being input while the motor is coasting What is the CF error code U1 50 Fix the wiring U1 50 01 02 No Execute autotuning for the motor constants U1 50 00 01 No 02 08 Execute autotuning for the line to line resistance Increase the torque limit or torque reference until is it within the allowable range for the machine U1 50 00 No If deceleration stop is not possible or unnecessary for the machine set b1 03 to 1 coast to stop Input the operation reference after the motor stops Set b3 01 to 1 or 3 speed search enabled U1 50 04
46. H E liec T Multi step speed rt Jog frequency por 1 s7 T zK selection Se gt t 0 0 o External m 1 H Multifunction baseblock command bg l S8 Fk MEL i Pulse train output Factory P Multi step speed MES Te pt I 0 to 32 kHz 2 2 kQ a4 3K A Default Output Eas 3 o oic S9 P o puro p J ulti step speet bd 1 l reference 4 z i 10 ERNI i tot fs 1 i t 4 gt li 17 7 Ammeter adjustment Acc dec time 1 LT 1 S11 gt i E i o l L D AM Lf iuto Multi function analog output 2 Emergency stop fo n s 10 to 10 V 2 mA 1 NO To bd 12 Req Default Output current HE N Oto 10V i CNS NPNset ng 24V 8mA i Ber it j Ammeter adjustment i tase me 1 H es 1e di Multi function analog output 1 BE on a i 10 to 10 V 2 mA BE Default Output frequency J bg 2av Oto 10 V Shield wire connection l j temna l Pulse train input d RP Master speed rt PO pulse train l Error contact output Frequency setting 0 to 32 kHz 3 kQ 250 VAC 10 mA min 1 A max 2kQ adjustment i I i High level 3 5 to 13 2 V input i Mc 30 VDC 10 mA min 1 A max Frequency it V Frequency setting power setter Cd z 15 V 20 mA l 1 D 0 to 10V t mli External 2k0 a ET 0 A1 Master speed reference 9 e qi Multi function contact output frequency 1 4to20mA P E i A2 Nub Mi c M21 250 VAC 10 mA min 1 A max LI2LTIILIL4d Q 2 L L4 references Feu 4to20ma 2
47. Name T Control Methods Co 1 inti Setting Factory during VIf Open FI stant f Description 4l Loo ux Number Display Range Setting Opera with Vedios Vec tion PG 1 tor Zero servo movement Shows the number of PG pulses pulses times 4 for the movement range when stopped at zero Zero Servo Pulse i Time Chart A time chart for the zero servo function is given in Time Chart for Zero servo Run Command ON OFF Zero servo command ON i OFF Frequency speed reference Excitation level b2 01 Motor speed Zero Servo End signal Zero servo status Fig 6 81 Time Chart for Zero servo Individual Functions a M BApplication Precautions Be sure to leave the Run Command input ON If the Run Command is turned OFF the output will be inter rupted and the zero servo function will become ineffective The holding force of the zero servo is adjusted in b9 01 The holding force will increase if the value of the setting is increased but oscillation and hunting will occur if the setting is too large Adjust b9 01 after adjusting the speed control gain The zero servo detection width is set as the allowable position offset from the zero servo start position Set 4 times the number of pulses from the PG The Zero servo End signal will go OFF when the zero servo command is turned OFF errors may result Extended per
48. Power cables e g 600 V vinyl power cables Table 2 2 400 V Class Wire Sizes Continued i i Possible Recom Inverter Temi Tightening dedu Model Terminal Symbol nal Torque Wire Sizes Wire Size Wire Type CIMR O Screws Nem mm AWG mm AWG R LI S L2 T L3 1 U T1 V T2 Ter 50 to 60 W T3 RI L11 S1 L21 TI L31 1 to 1 0 8 to 22 G7A4045 4 0 to 5 0 3 i 8 to 4 22 to 38 9 0 to 10 0 9 i 4 to 2 R LI S L2 T L3 1 U T1 V T2 17610225 5010100 W T3 RI L11 S1 L21 T1 L31 1 0 to 4 0 Q3 8 8to10 8 291022 G7A4055 10 to 4 38 to 60 17 6 to 22 5 2 2 to 2 0 0 5 to 5 5 20 to 10 R LI S L2 T L3 1 U T1 V T2 17610225 8010100 W T3 RI L11 S1 L21 TI L31 3 0 to 4 0 Q3 8 8 to 10 8 81022 p G7A4075 8 to 4 50 to 100 50 17 6 to 22 5 9 1 to 4 0 1 0 5 to 5 5 1 25 20 to 10 16 R LI S L2 T L3 1 U T1 V T2 17 6to22 5 50to100 50 x 2P W T3 RI L11 S1 L21 T1 L33 1 0 to 4 0 1 0 x 2P G3 8 8 to 10 8 deme 1 1 4200 42200 2 400 5400 1 3 to 1 4 i 4200 4200 2400 2400 131014 Power cables 60 to 150 60 e g 600 V 2 0 to 300 2 0 vinyl power 0 5 to 5 5 1 25 cables 20 to 10 16 R LI S L2 T L3 1 U T1 V T2 17 6to22 5 60to 100 80 x 2P W T3 R1 L11 S1 L21 T1 L33 2 0 to 4 0 3 0 x 2P Q3 8 8 to 10 8 8 to 60 G7A4110 8 to 2 0
49. Standard Inverter Specifications Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices 9 6 Standard Inverter Specifications The standard Inverter specifications are listed by capacity in the following tables Specifications by Model Specifications are given by model in the following tables 8200 V Class Table 9 1 200 V Class Inverters Model Number CIMR G7A O 21P5 Max applicable motor output kW PP P i 5 7 5 15 22 30 Rated input current A j 7 40 79 88 106 143 Rated output capacity B kVA i j Rated output current A 34 66 80 96 130 3 phase 200 208 220 230 or 240 VAC Proportional to input voltage 25 30 37 50 Max output voltage V Output ratings Max output frequency Hz Rated voltage V Rated frequency Hz Frequencies supported up to 400 Hz using constant setting 3 phase 200 208 220 230 240 VAC 50 60 Hz Rape voltage fluctua 1096 15 Allowable frequency fluc tuation a o a E E o 2 Q g c S o E a amp a B 5 A Measures for DC reactor Optional Built in power supply 12 phase rec harmonics tification Not possible Possible The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4 pole Yaskawa motor When selecting the actual motor and Inverter be sure that the Inverter s rated current is applicable for the mot
50. 200 V Class Inverters of 18 5 to 110 kW 400 V Class Inverters of 18 5 to 160 kW 400 V Class Inverters of 185 to 300 kW Fig 1 6 Exterior Diagrams of Open Chassis Inverters Exterior and Mounting Dimensions m M Enclosed Wall mounted Inverters NEMA1 Type 1 Exterior diagrams of the Enclosed Wall mounted Inverters NEMA1 Type 1 are shown below w1 4 d lt I Ix l ULL 1 wool a a eee j e e t w I D1 3 D 7 5 for 200 V Class Inverters of 30 to 75 kW or 400 V 200 V 400 V Class Inverters of 0 4 to 15 kW Class Inverters of 55 to 160 kW 200 V Class Inverters of 18 5 to 75 kW 400 V Class Inverters of 18 5 to 160 kW Fig 1 7 Exterior Diagrams of Enclosed Wall mounted Inverters Table 1 3 200 VAC and 400 VAC 0 4 kW to 300 kW Inverter Dimensions mm and Masses kg Dimensions mm Heat Genera tion W Total E Heat xter Inter Gen D W1 HO H1 H2 H3 D1 t1 nal nal Mass era d Open Chassis IP00 Enclosed Wall mounted NEMA1 Type 1 D W1 H1 H2 D1 tion
51. 50 Open loop vector contro 2 00 Open loop vector control Energy saving coefficient 51 79 46 27 38 16 31 35 23 10 20 65 18 12 Carrier frequency selection 4 4 4 4 4 1 1 Carrier frequency selection for open loop vector 2 con trol Carrier frequency selection upper limit E2 01 E4 01 Motor rated current E2 02 E4 02 Motor rated slip E2 03 E4 03 Motor no load current E2 05 E4 05 Motor line to line resis tance E2 06 E4 06 Motor leak inductance E2 10 Motor iron loss for torque compensation L2 02 Momentary power loss ride thru time L2 03 Min baseblock BB time L2 04 Voltage recovery time L8 02 Overheat pre alarm level L8 39 Reduced carrier frequency N1 03 Hunting prevention time constant N5 02 Note Attach a Momentary Power Interruption C Motor acceleration time Inverters with outputs of 0 4 to 7 5 kW The initial settings for C6 02 are as follow carrier frequency is set higher than the fac s 0 Low noise PWM 1 2 0 kHz 2 5 0 2 The initial settings for C6 11 are as follows 1 2 0 kHz 2 4 0 kHz 3 6 0 kHz 4 8 0 kHz ompensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2 0 seconds is required for 200 V Class kHz 3 8 0 kHz 4 10 0 kHz 5 12 5 kHz and 6 15 0 kHz If the ory setting for
52. Display Description S curve characteris tic time at accelera tion start SCrv Acc Start S curve characteris S 3 D All sections of the S curve characteris tic time at sb 2s 5 y tic time are set in seconds units accelera PER ee When the S curve characteristic time is tion end z x set the accel decel times will increase SCrv Acc by only half of the S curve characteris End tic times at start and end S curve Run Command Output 77 characteris frequency tic time at decelera tion start SCrv Dec Start S curve characteris tic time at decelera tion end SCrv Dec End 5 22 iMMotor Slip Compensation C3 User constants for slip compensation are shown in the following table Con stant Number Name Display Slip compen sation gain Slip Comp Gain Description Used to improve speed accu racy when operating with a load Usually setting is not neces sary Adjust this constant at the fol lowing times When actual speed is low increase the set value When actual speed is high decrease the set value Usedas the applicable control gain when using flux vector control Factory Setting Control Methods Vit with PG Open Loop Vec tor 1 User Constant Tables w ammm Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vec tor 2 Slip compen sation pri mary delay time
53. Open collector 1 Default zero speed Flywheel bg i diode P24 mi d p f b Open collector 2 Pc Default Freq agree fe Hj l Multi function i open collector output i i 48 VDC 50 mA max PRET EIEEE EIEE tend i l Fig 10 17 supply User Constants NM User Constants Factory settings are given in the following table Table 10 7 User Constants Language selection for Digital Operator display Fac tory Setting Speed search wait time Fac tory Setting Constant access level Speed search detection compensa tion gain speed calculation Control method selection Proportional gain of the speed esti mator during speed search Initialize Rotation direction search selection Password Speed search retrial current level Password setting Speed search retrial detection time User setting constants Number of speed search retrials Reference selection Timer function ON delay time Operation method selection Timer function OFF delay time Stopping method selection PID control method selection Prohibition of reverse operation Proportional gain P Operation selection for setting E1 09 or less Integral I time Read sequence input twice Integral I limit Operation selection after switching to remote mode Derivative D time Run Command selection in pro gramming modes PID upper limit Mode sele
54. PG tor tor tor 1 2 Capacitor maintenance setting C Mainte nanceSet Applical Allows the user to set the maintenance time for the electrolytic capacitors U1 61 The user can reset the accumulated operation time back to zero or to some other desired value ble for G7 Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 or later Troubleshooting This chapter describes the fault displays and countermeasure for the Inverter and motor prob lems and countermeasures Protective and Diagnostic Functions 7 2 Troubleshooting rp 7 25 7 2 Protective and Diagnostic Functions This section describes the alarm functions of the Inverter The alarm functions include fault detection alarm detection operation error detection and autotuning error detection Fault Detection When the Inverter detects a fault the fault contact output operates and the Inverter output is shut OFF causing the motor to coast to a stop The stopping method can be selected for some faults and the selected stopping method will be used with these faults A fault code is displayed on the Digital Operator When a fault has occurred refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the fault Use one of the following methods to reset the fault before restarting the Inverter Set a multi function contact input H1 01 to H1 05 to 14
55. PGO PG Fdbk Loss Sel Sets the PG disconnection stop ping method 0 Ramp to stop Deceleration stop using Deceleration Time 1 C1 02 Coast to stop Fast stop Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 Continue operation To protect the motor or machinery do not normally make this setting Operation selection at overspeed OS PG Overspeed Sel Sets the stopping method when an overspeed OS fault occurs 0 Ramp to stop Deceleration stop using Deceleration Time 1 C1 02 Coast to stop Fast stop Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 Continue operation To protect the motor or machinery do not normally make this setting Operation selection at deviation PG Deviation Sel Sets the stopping method when a speed deviation DEV fault occurs 0 Ramp to stop Deceleration stop using Deceleration Time 1 C1 02 Coast to stop Fast stop Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 Continue operation DEV is displayed and operation continued PG rotation PG Rotation Sel Phase A leads with Forward Run Command Phase B leads with Reverse Run Com mand Phase B leads with Forward Run Command Phase A leads with Reverse Run Com mand Con stant Number Name Display PG division rate PG pulse mon itor Description Sets the division ratio for the PG speed c
56. Press the MENU Key from the mode selection display to switch between the modes Press the DATA ENTER Key from the mode selection key to monitor data and from a monitor display to access the setting display Display at Startup DESC uency Rel U1 01 60 00H Mode Selection 95 Display Monitor Display Setting Display DATA ENTER ENTER E DRIVE DRIVE Rdy DRIVE Rdy Psl rence Sourc Main Menu Monitor pr 01 60 00Hz U1 K60 00Hz 1 01q950 00Hz Operation e a U1 02260 00Hz 60 0 00 lt 360 00 U1 03 10 05A 0 00Hz ESC ENTER QUICK Main Menu Quick Setting al s m Q C ENTER ADV Main Menu Programming gt VERIFY Main Menu Modified Consts A TUNE Main Menu ADV Select Language al s E ENTER The constant number will be displayed if a constant has been changed Press the DATA ENTER Key to enable the change None Modified ENTER E Ti BEO 0 T1 01 f8l o Standard Tuning Standard Tuning o o Fig 3 3 Mode Transitions 1 P When running the Inverter after using Digital Operator press the MENU Key to select the drive mode dis e hr played on the LCD screen and then press the DATA ENTER Key from the drive mode display to bring up the monitor display Run Commands can t be receive
57. Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants for details on the constants displayed in quick programming mode iExample Operations Key operations in quick programming mode are shown in the following figure Modes _ Mode Selection Display DRIVE Main Menu QUICK Main Menu Quick Setting ADV Main Menu Main Menu ATUNE Main Menu Auto Tuning Monitor Display A1 022277 Open Loop Vector H Frequency Setting Display Control Method AT02 Xy Open Loop Vector QUICK Reference Source b1 01 Kll Terminals QUICK Run Source b1 02 y QUICK MOL Fault Select L1 01 1 1 Std Fan Cooled QUICK StallP Decel Sel QUICK eb Fault Select LT 012 E Std Fan Cooled QUICK StallP Decel Sel L3 04 M 777 Enabled Fig 3 5 Operations in Quick Programming Mode Advanced Programming Mode In advanced programming mode all Inverter constants can be monitored and set Constants can be changed from the setting displays Use the Increment Decrement and Shift RESET Keys to change the frequency The user constant will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants for details on the constants iE
58. Sets the upper limit after PID control as a percentage of the maximum output frequency PID offset adjustment PID Offset Sets the offset after PID control as a percentage of the maximum output frequency PID first order lag time con stant PID Delay Time Sets the time constant for low pass filter for PID control outputs in 1 second units Not usually necessary to set PID output characteristics selection Output Level Sel Select forward reverse for PID output 0 PID output is forward 1 PID output is reverse highlights the output code PID output gain Output Gain Sets output gain PID reverse output selection Output Rev Sel 0 0 limit when PID output is negative 1 Reverses when PID output is negative 0 limit when reverse prohibit is selected using b1 04 Name Control Methods Con eae open ee Oper stant Description res Vit Toop FX Coop Number Display id with Vector Y vector PG 1 tor 2 Selection of 0 No detection of loss of PID PID feedback feedback command loss 1 Detection of loss of PID detection feedback Operation continues during detection with the b5 12 malfunctioning contact not 0to2 0 No A A A A A 1BOH operating Fb los Det Sel 2 Detection of loss of PID feedback Coasts to stop during detection and fault contact operates PID feedback Sets the PID feedback loss de
59. Table 4 5 Constants Indirectly Affecting Control and Applications Name Constant Number Application Dwell function b6 01 to b6 04 Used for heavy loads or large machine backlashes Droop function b7 01 to b7 02 Used to soften the torque or to balance the load between two motors Can be used when the control method A1 02 is set to 3 or 4 Acceleration deceleration times C1 01 to C1 11 Adjust torque during acceleration and deceleration S curve characteristics C2 01 to C2 04 Used to prevent shock when completing acceleration Jump frequencies d3 01 to d3 04 Used to avoid resonance points during operation Analog input filter time constant H3 12 Used to prevent fluctuations in analog input signals caused by noise Stall prevention L3 01 to L3 06 L3 11 L3 12 Used to prevent overvoltage errors and motor stalling for heavy loads or rapid acceleration deceleration Stall prevention is enabled by default and the setting does not normally need to be changed When using a braking resistor however disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3 04 to 0 4 21 Table 4 5 Constants Indirectly Affecting Control and Applications Continued Name Constant Number Application Torque limits L7 01 to L7 04 L7 06 L7 07 Set the maximum torque during vector control If a setting is increased use a motor with higher capacity than the Inverter If a settin
60. The unit is set in 01 03 frequency units of reference setting and monitor User Constant Tables Name Control Methods Output Signal Level Open Open Description During Multi Function Vif Loop Flux Loop with Vec Vec Vec Display Analog Output PG tor tor tor 1 2 Input termi Shows input ON OFF status nal status U1 10 00000000 FWD command S1 is ON REV command S2 is ON Multi input 1 is ON ulti input 2 is ON ulti input 3 is ON ulti input 4 is ON ulti input 5 is ON Multi input 6 S8 is ON Cannot be output Input Term st The ON OFF status of the fol s lowing input terminals can be checked by displaying U1 10 and pressing the Enter Key Press the Enter Key again to return to the original dis play U1 10 0000 1 Multi input 7 so is ON 1 Multi input 8 S10 is ON 5 1 Multi input 9 S11 is ON 1 Multi input 10 S12 is ON Output ter Shows output ON OFF status minal status U1 11 00000000 i l 4 Multi function contact output M1 M2 is ON Multi funtion contact output 1 P1 is ON Multi funtion contact output 2 P2 is ON Multi function contact output 3 P3 is ON 1 Multi function contact output 4 P4 is ON Not used always 0 L 1 Error output MA AB MC is ON Cannot be output
61. This function is available when the multi function inputs accel decel Ramp Hold or up down com mands are set Memory Set the frequency to be added to or subtracted from the ana log frequency reference as a percent taking the maximum output frequency to be 100 Enabled when the increase Trim Control Lvl speed command or decrease speed command is set for a multi function input 5 29 iTorque Control d5 User constants for the torque control are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Con Setti Fact Open Open stant Description Cung Factory v f Loop Flux Loop Number Display P Range Setting ud vec vec os or or or 1 2 Torque con 0 Speed control C5 01 to trol selection C5 07 1 Torque control This function is only avail able in flux vector control method To use the function Torq Control for switching between speed Sel and torque control set to 0 and set the multi function input to speed torque control change Torque Set the torque reference delay reference time in ms units delay time This function can be used to adjust the noise of the torque control signal or the respon Torq Ref siveness with the host con Filter troller When oscillation occurs during torque control increase the set value Speed limit Set the speed limit command selection method for the torque
62. Torque detection level 2 Hunting prevention gain Torque detection time 2 Hunting prevention time constant Forward drive torque limit Speed feedback detection control AFR gain Reverse drive torque limit Speed feedback detection control AFR time constant Forward regenerative torque limit Speed feedback detection control AFR time constant 2 Reverse regenerative torque limit High slip braking deceleration fre quency width Integral time setting for torque limit High slip braking current limit Control method selection for torque limit during acceleration deceleration High slip braking stop dwell time High slip braking OL time Protect selection for internal DB resistor Type ERF Overheat pre alarm level Integral time of speed estimator Operation selection after overheat pre alarm Proportional gain of speed estima tor Input open phase protection selec tion High speed proportional gain of speed estimator Output open phase protection selection Speed estimator switching fre quency Ground protection selection Low speed regeneration stability coefficient 1 Cooling fan control selection Torque adjustment gain Cooling fan control delay time Feeder resistance adjustment gain Ambient temperature Speed estimator switching fre quency 2 OL2 characteristics selection at low speeds Torque adjustmen
63. Use the speed search function Adjust the settings of the Speed search operating current b3 02 and Speed search deceleration time b3 03 Use the estimated speed search function Perform stationary autotuning for line to line resis tance only Motor overload occurred when run ning at low speed If a general pur pose motor is used motor overload can occur when running at low speed even if running within the rated current Motor protection selection L1 01 is set to general purpose motor pro tection 1 when an Inverter duty motor is used Check the size of the load Check the setting of L1 01 Increase the frame size of the Inverter The directions of the motor and PG are different Only in flux vector con trol Correct the PG wiring Correct the motor wiring Change the setting of PG rota tion F1 05 The V f characteristics voltage is too high Check the V f characteristics The Motor Rated Current E2 01 is incorrect Check the Motor Rated Current E2 01 A short circuit between V V and AC terminals occurred Overload in the control circuit ter minal Make sure that incorrect wiring has not been done Check the resistance and wir ing for the frequency setting potentiometer etc Check that the current for terminals V and V is 20 mA or less Display OL2 Inv Over loaded Table 7 1 Fault Displays and Processing Continued
64. 0 Disabled speed calculation 1 Enabled speed calculation 2 Disabled current detection 3 Enabled current detection Speed Calculation When the search is started the motor speed is calculated and acceleration deceleration is performed from the calculated speed to the specified frequency motor direction is also searched Current Detection The speed search is started from the frequency when power was momentarily lost and the maximum frequency and the speed is detected at the search current level Setting Range Factory Setting Change during Opera tion Control Methods Vit with PG Continuing Operation Open Open Loop Loop Vector pad Vector 1 2 Flux Speed search operating cur rent current detection SpdSrch Cur rent Sets the speed search operation current as a percentage taking the Inverter rated current as 100 Not usually necessary to set When restarting is not possible with the factory settings reduce the value Speed search deceleration time current detection SpdSrch Dec Time Sets the output frequency deceler ation time during speed search in 1 second units Set the time for deceleration from the maximum output frequency to the minimum output frequency Speed search wait time cur rent detection or speed calcu lation Search Delay Sets the magnetic contactor oper ating delay time when there is a magne
65. 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 3 Multi function PHC output 3 terminal P3 C3 1 ON 0 OFF Bit4 Multi function PHC output 4 terminal P4 C4 1 ON 0 OFF Bits 5 to F Not used 002EH 0030H Not used 0031H Main circuit DC voltage 0032H Torque monitor Unit 1 0 1 0033H Output power U1 08 0034H 0037H Not used 0038H PID feedback quantity Input equivalent to 100 Max output frequency 10 196 without sign 0039H PID input quantity 100 Max output frequency 10 196 with sign 003AH PID output quantity 100 Max output frequency 10 196 with sign 003BH CPU software number 003CH Flash software number Register No Contents Communications error details Bit 0 CRC error Bit 1 Invalid data length Bit 2 Not used Bit 3 Parity error Bit 4 Overrun error Bit 5 Framing error Bit 6 Time out Bits 7toF Not used kVA setting Control method Note Communications error details are stored until an fault reset is input you can also reset while the Unit is operating Broadcast Data The following table shows the broadcast data You can also write this data Register Address Contents Operation signal Bit 0 Run Command 1 Operating 0 Stopped Bit 1 Reverse operation command 1 Reverse 0 Forward Bits 2 and3 Not used Bit 4 External fault 1 Error set usi
66. 10 2 Inverter Application Precautions 10 6 Motor Application Precautions 10 9 Conformance to UL Standard 10 11 Conformance to CE Markings 10 13 Wiring Examples coetu tt dne S brennt cL tU L MU tun Bie au 10 20 Us r Constani S asec eaten iieiaei 10 29 10 10 2 Varispeed G7 Control Methods Details of the Varispeed G7 Series Inverter control methods and their features are provided in this section Control Methods and Features Varispeed G7 Series Inverters support the following five control methods allowing the selection of a control method to suit the required purpose Zable 10 1 provides an overview of the control methods and their fea tures Control Method Constant Setting Table 10 1 Overview and Features of Control Methods V f Control V f Control with PG Open loop Vec tor 1 Control Al 02 2 factory setting Flux Vector Con trol Open loop Vec tor 2 Control A1 02 4 Basic Control Voltage frequency fixed ratio control Voltage frequency fixed ratio control with speed com pensation using a PG Current vector control without a PG Current vector control with a PG Current vector control without a PG using a high performance mag netic flux and speed estimator software Main Applications Variable speed control par
67. 10 to 10 V possible Motor sec ondary cur rent Iq Mot SEC Current Monitors the calculated value of the motor secondary cur rent The motor rated secondary current corresponds to 100 10 V Motor rated secondary current 10 to 10 V output Motor exciting current Id Mot EXC Current Monitors the calculated value of the motor excitation cur rent The motor rated secondary current corresponds to 100 10 V Motor rated secondary current 10 to 10 V output Output fre quency after soft start SFS Output Monitors the output frequency after a soft start The frequency given does not include compensations such as slip compensation The unit is set in 01 03 10 V Max frequency 10 to 10 V possible ASR input ASR Input Monitors the input to the speed control loop The maximum frequency cor responds to 100 10 V Max frequency 10 to 10 V possible ASR output ASR Out put Monitors the output from the speed control loop The motor rated secondary current corresponds to 100 10 V Motor rated secondary current 10 to 10 V possible User Constant Tables NM Name Control Methods Output Signal Level Open _ Open Description During Multi Function Vif Loop Flux Loop Display Analog O with Vec Vec Vec nalog Output PG tor tor tor 1 2 ebd Monitors the feedba
68. 2 Frequency units of refer ence setting and monitor Display Scal ing Sets the units that will be set and displayed for the fre quency reference and fre quency monitor 0 0 01 Hz units 1 0 01 units Maximum output frequency is 100 2 to 39 min units Sets the motor poles 40 to 39999 User desired display Set the desired values for setting and display for the max output frequency L sa 4 digit number excluding the decimal point Set the number of digits below the decimal point to display Example When the max out put frequency value is 200 0 set 12000 Setting unit for frequency constants related to V f characteris tics V f Display Unit Set the setting unit for fre quency reference related con stants 0 Hz l min LCD bright ness adjust ment LCD Contrast Set a smaller value to lighten the LCD and a larger value to darken the LCD stan dard 3 Multi function Selections o2 User constants for Digital Operator key functions are shown in the following table Con stant Number Name Display Description Factory Setting Control Methods Vit with PG Open Loop Vec tor 1 User Constant Tables w Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vec tor 2 cm LOCAL Sets the Digital Operator REMOTE Local Re
69. 3 RETURN _ Power loss TIME Frequency Sets as a percent the about to reduction reduce the output frequency at gain at KEB the beginning of deceleration at Fto L2 08 start momentary power loss KEB 300 100 No A A A A A 48CH Reduction slip frequency KEB Decel before KEB operation x L2 08 Time x2 Note Attach a Backup Capacitor Unit for Momentary Power Loss if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2 0 seconds is required for 200 V 400 V Class Inverters with outputs of 0 4 to 7 5 kW The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0 4 kW is given These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter Value for a 400 V Class Inverter is double If the setting is 0 the axis will accelerate to the specified speed for the specified acceleration time C1 01 to C1 08 oko amp WN 5 60 User Constant Tables 5 iStall Prevention L3 User constants for the stall prevention function are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Con Open Open stant Description Factory Vif Loop Flux Loop Number Display Setting 2 bed ve Vet or or or 1 2 Stall pre 0 Disabled Acceleration as vention set With a heavy load the selection motor may stall during accel 1 Enabled Acceleration stopped when L3 02 level is exceeded Acceleration starts again when the current is returned StallP Intelligent acceleration Acce
70. 6 MERRY Set the changed data using the DATA ENTER Key The VERIFY function will DATA VERIFYING start ADV VERIFY o B T VERIFY COMPLETE If the VERIFY function ends normally End is displayed on the Digital Operator ADV Copy Funtion Sel Bo T 03 FO v The display returns to 03 01 when a key is pressed COPY SELECT An error may occur during the comparison If an error is displayed press any key to cancel the error display and return to the 03 01 display Error displays and their meanings are shown below Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Function mm Error Display Meaning VYE VERIFY ERROR Verify error Settings in the Digital Operator and the Inverter do not match CPE ID UNMATCH Inverter product code and Inverter software number are different BApplication Precautions When using the copy function check that the following settings are the same between the Inverter and the Digital Operator nverter product and type nverter capacity and voltage Software number Control method Use the copy function off line or with a communications option board removed A CPF03 fault EEPROM error can occur if the power is shut down while the Inverter constants are being copied Do not shut down the power while copying the constants Prohibiting Writing Constants from the Digital Operator If you set A1 01 to 0 you can refer to and set the Al and A2
71. A phase pulse output A phase pulse output B phase pulse output B phase pulse output A phase pulse monitor output oS B phase pulse monitor output Shielded twisted pair wires must be used for signal lines Do not use the pulse generator s power supply for anything other than the pulse generator encoder Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise The length of the pulse generator s wiring must not be more than 100 meters The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user constant F1 05 The factory preset if for forward rotation A phase advancement Fig 2 26 PG B2 Wiring PG power supply 12 V A phase pulse monitor output A phase pulse input B phase pulse monitor output z a s o g g S c e E a B phase pulse input When connecting to a voltage output type PG encoder select a PG that has an output impedance with a current of at least 12 mA to the input circuit photocoupler diode The pulse monitor dividing ratio can be changed using constant F1 06 PG division rate A phase pulses B phase pulses The pulse monitor emitter is connected to common inside the PG B2 The emitter common must be used for external circuits Fig 2 27 I O Circuit Configuration of the PG B2 2 36 Installing and Wiring Option Boards _ BWiring the PG D2 Wiring examples are pr
72. Com Control data was not normally dad sionals Call received when power was turned ON RUNC Reset during Run Command Input BA Error Check that a Run Command is not blinking 1 Ext Run The reset signal was input during Run being input from an external terminal Active Command input from an external ter or other source minal or other source E5 SI T Watchdog Error Detected blink A Watchdog error was detected when Synchronizati b t t ing the Run Command or a frequency ref ynearonizaton error between Master Check the communications timing controller and Inverter for control l SLT erence was set from an option board data such as communications cycle WDT and continuous operation was set for Err the E5 operation selection AEr Check the setting of the station num blink Station number setting error A SI T Station Number Setting Error ber ai Station number of SI T option board i Check the communications devices Address EN Out OF setting range Circuit of SI T option board is faulty gra Er and signals CyC lise SIT Communications Cycle sels Locas deca nE cycle of SI T option Check the communication cycle of SI ing ting Error f board set in master controller was out T option board set in master control SET Communications cycle of SI T option erate ler Cycle board was out of range ae e Err BB Receiving External Baseblock blink poda j An external baseblock signal
73. Enabled 1 Oor 1 for flux vector control and open loop vector 2 control 2 Applicable for G7 series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 or later 5 11 HDC Injection Braking b2 User constants for injection braking are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Setting Fact Auk s opan Open Description eung Factory gung Vif Loop Flux Loop p Range Setting Opera with Vec Vec Vec tion PG tor tor tor 1 2 Display Zero speed Used to set the frequency level DC which starts DC injection injection braking in units of Hz when braking start deceleration to stop is ing fre selected quency When b2 01 is less than E1 09 E1 09 becomes the DC DCInj Start injection braking starting fre Freq quency DC injection braking cur rent Sets the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the DCInj Cur Inverter rated current rent DC injection Used to set the time to per braking time form DC injection braking at at start start in units of 1 second Used to stop coasting motor DCInj and restart it When the set Time Start value is 0 DC injection brak ing at start is not performed DC injection Used to set the time to per braking time form DC injection braking at at stop stop in units of 1 second Used to prevent coasting after the Stop Command is input DCInj When the set value
74. Fault Reset and turn ON the fault reset signal Press the RESET Key on the Digital Operator Turn the main circuit power supply OFF and then ON again Display Table 7 1 Meaning Fault Displays and Processing Probable Causes Corrective Actions A short circuit or ground fault occurred at the Inverter output A short or ground fault can be caused by motor burn damage worn insu lation or a damaged cable The load is too large or the accelera tion deceleration time is too short A special purpose motor or motor with a capacity too large for the Inverter is being used A magnetic contactor was switched Reset the fault after correcting its cause Note Before turning the power ON again make sure that no short circuit or ground fault occurs at the Inverter output OC Overcurrent at the Inverter output Over Cur The Inverter output current exceeded Fix the broken di dwi irit the overcurrent detection level 200 There is a break in the PG wiring ces IE OTOKE COMM MAK of rated current e The PG is wired incorrectly Fix the wiring Power isn t being supplied to the PG Supply power to the PG properly Make sure that incorrect wiring A short circuit between V V and has not been done AC terminals wooed Check the resistance and wir Overload in the control circuit ter mg for the frequency setting ital potentiometer etc Check that the current for terminals V
75. Frequency FOUT Detection 2 L4 01 Output frequency Frequency FOUT Detection 4 L4 01 lt Output frequency Output frequency or motor speed Freq Detection 2 OFF ON Multi function output setting 5 Output frequency or motor speed Freq Detection 4 OFF on Multi function output setting 16 Frequency FOUT Detection 5 L4 01 Output frequency Output frequency or motor speed Freq Detection 5 OFF ON Multi function output setting 36 OFF during baseblock Machine Protection Detecting Motor Torque If an excessive load is placed on the machinery overtorque or the load is suddenly lightened undertorque you can output an alarm signal to multi function output terminal M1 M2 P1 PC P2 PC P3 C3 or P4 C4 To use the overtorque undertorque detection function set B 17 18 19 overtorque undertorque detection NO NC in one of the following constants H2 01 to H2 05 multi function output terminals M1 M2 P1 PC P2 PC P3 C3 and P4 C4 function selection The overtorque undertorque detection level is the current level Inverter rated output current 100 in V f control and the motor torque motor rated torque 100 in vector control Related Constants Name Control Methods ane Open Description vif pu Flux Display with Vector Vec PG 1 tor Torque detec Overtorque undertorque tion selection 1 de
76. Selection Observe the following precautions in selecting an Inverter Binstalling Reactors A large peak current will flow in the power input circuit when the Inverter is connected to a large capacity power transformer 600 kVA or higher or when switching a phase advancing capacitor Excessive peak cur rent can destroy the convertor section To prevent this install a DC or AC reactor optional to improve the power supply power factor DC reactors are built into 200 V Class Inverters of 18 5 to 110 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 18 5 to 300 kW If a thyristor convertor such as a DC drive is connected in the same power supply system connect a DC or AC reactor regardless of the power supply conditions shown in the following diagram 4000 Power supply capacity kVA 600 C or AC reactor Required DC or AC reactor Not required 0 60 400 Inverter capacity kVA Fig 10 5 Inverter Capacity When connecting special motors or multiple motors in parallel to an Inverter select the Inverter capacity so that the rated output current of the Inverter is 1 1 times the sum of all the motor rated currents BApplications with Repetitive Loads Applications with repetitive loads cranes elevators presses washing machines etc using Inverters require derating for the repetitive load reducing carrier frequency and current changing accel decel timing increas ing the frame size of the Inverter Refer to Current Alarm F
77. Set in increments of 0 196 taking the maximum output frequency to be 100 Set the low pass filter time constant for the PID control output in b5 08 Enable this constant to prevent machinery resonance from occurring when machinery adhesive abrasion is great or rigidity is poor In this case set the constant to be greater than the resonance frequency cycle Increase this time constant to reduce Inverter responsiveness Using b5 09 you can invert the PID output polarity Consequently if you increase the PID target value you can apply this constant to applications to lower the Inverter output frequency Using b5 10 you can apply gain to the PID control output Enable this constant to adjust the amount of compensation if adding PID control output to the frequency reference as compensation When PID control output is negative you can use constant b5 11 to invert the Inverter When b1 04 Pro hibition of Reverse Operation is set to 1 enabled however PID output limit is 0 With the Inverter by setting an independent acceleration deceleration time in constant b5 17 you can increase or decrease the PID target value using the acceleration deceleration time The acceleration deceleration function constant C1 used normally however is allocated after PID control so depending on the settings resonance with PID control and hunting in the machinery may occur If this happens reduce constant C1 until hunting does not occur and maintain the
78. V T2 W T3 2 to 5 5 14 to 10 G7A43P7 R L1 S L2 T L3 OC 1 C2 B1 B2 U TI V T2 W T3 2 to 5 5 14 to 10 G7A45P5 R LI S L2 T L3 C1 C02 B1 B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 1 2 to 1 5 3 5 to 5 5 12 to 10 G7A47P5 R L1 S L2 T L3 1 C2 B1 B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 5 5 to 14 10 to 6 G7A4011 R L1 S L2 T L3 1 C2 B1 B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 2 5 2 5 4 0 to 5 0 8 to 14 8 to 6 5 5 to 14 10 to 6 G7A4015 R LI S L2 T L3 1 Q2 U T1 V T2 W T3 4 0 to 5 0 8 to 14 8 to 6 B1 B2 2 5 8 8 4 0 to 5 0 8 to 22 8 to 4 G7A4018 R LI S L2 T L3 1 3 U T1 V T2 W T3 RI L11 SUL21 T1 L31 4 0 to 5 0 14 to 22 6 to 4 9 0 to 10 0 14 to 38 6 to 2 G7A4022 R LI S L2 T L3 O 1 3 U T1 V T2 W T3 RI L11 SUL21 TI L31 4 0 to 5 0 22 4 D 9 0 to 10 0 22 to 38 4to2 G7A4030 R LI S L2 T L3 1 U T1 V T2 W T3 R1 L11 SI L21 T1 L31 9 0 to 10 0 22 to 60 4 to 1 0 3 4 0 to 5 0 8 to 22 8 to 4 o 9 0 to 10 0 22 to 38 4 to 2 G7A4037 R LI S L2 T L3 1 U T1 V T2 W T3 R1 L11 SI L21 T1 L31 9 0 to 10 0 30 to 60 2 to 1 0 3 4 0 to 5 0 8 to 22 8 to 4 9 0 to 10 0 22 to 38 4to2 Wire Type
79. circuit voltage Fig 2 17 Flywheel Diode Connection iShunt Connector CN5 and DIP Switch S1 The shunt connector CN 5 and DIP switch S1 are described in this section Pd SSi F4 CN5 g4 i Odaroh lt 4 A V a i o J Analog input switch i wa Factory settings V VO exe f Note Refer to Table 2 12 for S1 functions and to Table 2 13 for CN5 functions S E a ee ee ee ee a Fig 2 18 Shunt Connector CN5 and DIP Switch S1 The functions of DIP switch S1 are shown in the following table Table 2 12 DIP Switch S1 Seng RS 485 and RS 422 terminating resis OFF No terminating resistance tance ON Terminating resistance of 110 Q OFF 0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V internal resistance 20 kQ ON 4 to 20 mA internal resistance 250 Q Input method for analog input A2 E Sinking Sourcing Mode The input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode 0 V common and sourcing mode 24 V common if shunt connector CNS is used An external 24 V power supply is also supported providing more freedom in signal input methods 2 26 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals NM Table 2 13 Sinking Sourcing Mode and Input Signals Internal Power Supply External Power Supply CN5 7 O CN5 NPN set Factory setting E s CN5 EXT set AY J Su OO 4 Shunt G position Ed IP24V 24 V External 24 V IP24V 24 V gt s1 e O v lk S2
80. rane j 255 0 f No AJA A A A 30BH 6 121 is not required 7 3 Mid Voltage B Base voltage 0 0 to 0 0 V E1 13 255 0 i No AJA Q Q Q 30CH 6 121 Base E Voltage These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double The factory setting will change when the control method is changed The open loop vector 1 factory settings are given El 11 and E1 12 are disregarded when set to 0 0 El 13 is set to the same value as E1 05 by autotuning The setting range for open loop vector 2 control is 0 to 66 0 0 to 132 0 for PRG 1030 UR T iaMotor Setup E2 User constants for motor 1 are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Con Setting Fact yis vi Open Open ipti eung Factory during Vif Loop Flux Loo pe Display Description Range Setting Opera with vee Vec Ver tion PG tor tor tor 1 2 Motorrated Sets the motor rated current in current A units These set values will become the reference values for motor Motor Rated protection torque limits and FLA torque control This constant is automatically set during autotuning Motor rated Sets the motor rated slip in slip Hz units These set values will become the reference values for slip compensation This constant is automatically set during autotuning Motor Rated Slip Motor no Sets the motor no load cur load current rent in 1 A
81. retrial current Sets the current level to retry a b3 17 level speed search as a percentage tak 0 to 150 No A No A No v 1FOH 2 ing the Inverter rated current as 200 SrchRestart 100 Lvl Speed search b3 18 retrial detec Sets the time for detection in a 0 00to S tion time speed search retrial in units of 1 00 0 10s No A No A No A IFIH SrchRestart seconds Time Number of speed search b3 19 retrials Sets the number of times that a 0 to 10 0 No A No m No A IPOH 2 speed search can be retried Num of SrchRestr Min baseblock Sets the Inverter s minimum base time block time in units of one second when the Inverter is restarted after power loss ridethrough Sets the time to approximately 0 7 Olto 02 L2 03 times the motor secondary circuit x 3 No A A A A A 487H PwrL Base time constant 2m i block t When an overcurrent or overvolt age occurs when starting a speed search or DC injection braking increase the set values Voltage recov Sets the time required to return ery time the Inverter output voltage to nor mal voltage at the completion of a 12 04 speed search in units of one sec 0 0to 0 35 No A A A A A 488H PwrL V F ond 50 Ms Ramp t Sets the time required to recover from 0 V to the maximum volt age The factory setting will change when the control method is changed The open loop vector 1 control factory settings are given 2 Applicable for G7 Series Invert
82. the Inverter is stopped e 83 li Setting Precautions To switch command inputs between the Communications Option Board and the control circuit terminals set the following constants Set b1 01 Reference Selection to 1 Control circuit terminal analog input Set b1 02 Operation Method Selection to 1 Control circuit terminal sequence inputs Set one of the constants H1 01 to H1 10 multi function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selec tion to 2 Option Inverter selection Terminal Status Frequency Reference and Run Command Selection Inverter nal Can be operated from frequency reference or control circuit terminal from analog input termi Communications Option Board Frequency reference and Run Command are enabled from Communications Option Board Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands FJOG RJOG The FJOG RJOG command functions operate the Inverter using jog frequencies by using the terminal ON OFF operation When using the FIOG RJOG commands there is no need to input the Run Command To use this function set one of the constants H1 01 to H1 10 multi function contact input terminal S3 to 12 function selection to 12 FJOG command or 13 RJOG command iRRelated Constants Name Con stant Description Number Display Jog frequency The frequency reference when the reference jog frequency reference selec tion FIOG c
83. tion PG tor tor tor ter 1 2 Reference Set the frequency reference selection input method 0 Digital Operator ee 4 5 1 Control circuit terminal 62 b1 01 analog input 0to4 1 No Q Q Q Q Q 180H Reference 2 MEMOBUS communica yea Source tions 6 94 3 Option board 4 Pulse train input Operation Set the Run Command input method method selection 0 Digital Operator 4 5 1 Control circuit terminal 6 10 b1 02 s quence input 0 to 3 1 No QIQ Q Q Q 181H 6 76 Run Source 2 MEMOBUS communica 6 94 tions 3 Option board Stopping Used to set the stopping method method used when a Stop selection Command is input 0 Deceleration to stop 1 Coast to stop 2 DC injection braking stop 4 6 b1 03 Stops faster than coast to 0 to 3 0 No Q Q Q Q Q 182H 6 12 Stopping stop no regenerative Method operation 3 Coast to stop with timer Run Commands are disregarded during deceleration Prohibition of reverse b1 04 operation 0 Reverse enabled Oorl 0 No A A A A A 183H 6 62 1 Reverse disabled Reverse Oper User Constant Tables _ Name Control Methods Setti Fact Open Open Description ND PRBCOTY Vif Loop Flux Loop 4 Range Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Display Operation Used to set the method of selection operation when the fre for setting quency reference input is less E1 09 or than the minimum output fre less quency E1 09
84. 00H place place CRC 16 Lower FOH Higher 00H place Next stor place age register Lower 00H 6 place Higher 01H Next stor place age register Lower FAH place Higher AFH place CRC 16 Lower 82H place 6 97 _ Loopback Test The loopback test returns command messages directly as response messages without changing the contents to check the communications between the master and slave You can set user defined test code and data values The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave 1 Inverter Command Message Response Message Response Message Writing to Multiple Storage Registers During Normal Operation During Error Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Function code 08H Function code 08H Function code 89H Higher og Higher ggg Error Code 01H place place Test Code Test Code T HoR ower 00H ower 00H igher 86H place place place zh TET CRC 16 Higher ASH igher ASH ower 50H place place place Data Data Lower 37H Lower 37H place place Higher DAH Higher DAH place place CRC 16 CRC 16 Lower 8DH ower 8DH place place Write the specified data to each specified storage register from the specified addresses The written data must be in the following order in the command message Higher place 8 bits then lower place 8 bits in storag
85. 00L ON ON SPA S A sei eDeyoA v0 Bojeue days pug A OLT 9600 LF S9A SAA S A SOA z aouaiajal 0 Aouanbay Menxny Bojeue deis puz A 0L3 9500 L SAA S A S9A SAA 39u 1 4 1 ZO Kouenbeuj Mexny AOL OOL SPA S9A SOA SOA ure Aouenbal4 LO A OLT 600 LF SA S A SA S9A y jeuruue 0 ppv 00 idi oan Od 6 Jeveiindu 99A Gog HM VA uonounj un 12007 ajoway uonouny zv Jeuiuue1 60 H uonoun gy euruue S0 cH Soy Lem ssd 10 24 50 S squayjal Aguanbay U YM sseo2oJd uoneoiunuiuioo snqow w 0 SI e2ue1jo fouenbeJj ndut ures asin Bumes 10 24 34 40 sse p1eDo1 p uuop d eq iiM L L0 24 u ym se uone1edo aes y pejunoui jou s gp L L V J 9oN ev C eujus ev 12u 1wa Iv C leu jwaag SHG LL LL 95y ees ndu jy e SHG ELF Lu 8ri iv ar 1 y ueu Jeu pJeoq uondo 9 Primary delay filter A es H3 03 0 V 10 V Frequency Reference 5 H3 12 2 Primary delay filter H3 12 Primary delay filter H3 01 gt O OO 1 H3 08 H3 09 7 0 2 O O O 1 z0 1 2 is current input H3 04 H3 05 0 H3 12 The same value can not be set in H3 05 and H3 09 pi Fig 6 9 Al Input Detaile
86. 02 3 ee ing to the output fre quency ues cannot be used for both quency high speed and low speed operation ASR primary delay Controlling hunting 0 004 s 0 004 to cad s and time C5 06 and vibration 0 020 s gr y the system vibrates easily Increase the setting if Reducing motor motor magnetic noise is magnetic noise Depends high Neg frequency Controlling hunting on the 2 0 kHz Reduce the setting if hunt selection C6 02 E default oM and vibration at low capacity ing or vibration occurs at speeds 3 Hz or less low to middle range speeds Increase the setting if ASR proportional gain Torque and speed torque or speed response slow Refer to Procedure 1 C5 01 and response 10 00 to 10 00 Jor Increasing the Speed Open loop ASR proportional gain Controlling hunting 50 00 2 C5 03 and vibration ROT OE vector 2 Reduce the setting if hunt control ing or vibration occurs A1 02 4 ASR integral time 1 Reduce the setting if Torque and speed high speed C5 02 torque or speed response is d response 0 500 s 0 300 to Jow p e Controlling hunting 1 000 s ASR integral time 2 low speed C5 04 and vibration Increase the setting if hunt ing or vibration occurs 4 19 Control Method Open loop vector 2 control A1 02 4 Table 4 4 Adjusted User Constants Continued Name Constant Number ASR switching fre quency C5 07
87. 06 Digital Operators Oorl 0 No A aAl A A Ison disconnected 1 Enabled OPR is detected Oper Detec at Digital Operator tion disconnection Inverter output is cut off and fault contact is operated Cumulative operation Sets the cumulative operation time settin time in hour units 0 to D20 E Operation time is calculated 65535 Ohr N A A Bis URED oclo Elapsed Time Set from the set values 5 15 Open Setting Factory V f Loop Range Setting with Vec PG tor 1 Description Display Cumulative 0 Cumulative time when the operation Inverter power is on All time selection time while the Inverter power is on is accumulated Elapsed Time Cumulative Inverter run Run time Only Inverter output time is accumulated Fan opera tion time set Set the initial value of the fan operation time using time Name Control Methods Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vec tor 2 02 10 ting units Oto owr No A al A A A som e 65535 6 184 Fan ON Time The operation time accumu Set lates from the set value Fault trace fault history 0 Disabled U2 and U3 con clear function stants are on hold 02512 1 Enabled Initializes U2 Sord 0 No E s 5 SIDET Fault Trace and U3 constants Init Output power monitor clear 0 Holds output power moni o2 14 Selection urn Oorl 0 No lalala a a Ves pH san 1 Initializ
88. 1 Control circuit terminal sequence input 0 to3 1 6 76 MA E 2 MEMOBUS communications 6 94 3 Option board Acceleration time Set the acceleration time in seconds for the output 5 21 o 1 frequency to climb from 0 to 100 DA as 6 18 Deceleration time Set the deceleration time in seconds for the output 5 21 C192 1 frequency to fall from 100 to 0 9 0 10 6990 9 bas 6 18 200 V Set the Inverter s nominal input voltage in volts 199 10 233 V QOON E1 01 Input voltage set This setting is used as a ae vlc in id 200V ca 793 ting a a P 310t0510 V 400V 6 120 400 V Class 400 V Class Setting for general 10 to 200 purpose 5 34 E2 01 Motor tated ciir Set the motor rated current of Inverter s motorof 6 57 rent rated current same 6 117 capacity as Inverter Set to enable or disable the motor overload protec tion function using the electronic thermal relay Motor protection 0 Disabled 5 58 LAG selection 1 General motor protection yee l 6 57 2 Inverter motor protection 3 Vector motor protection Con stant Number Table 4 2 Constants that Are Set as Required Description Select stopping method when Stop Command is sent Setting Range Factory Setting Stopping method 0 Deceleration to stop 5 10 noon selection 1 Coast to stop ae 6 12 2 DC braking stop 3 Coast to stop with timer Depends on capac C6 02 Carrier fre l l to F ity volt 5 26 quency selection ag
89. 1 eel eerte uh ste tese tesctts etie sel abate alse Uh c Rc dtes 6 170 Stall Prevention during Deceleration s 6 172 49 Futon secet tese Ld Due Saca cuum Asie LIP I OO 6 172 Braking Resistor Overheating Protection ccc sccssssesssscssesessessstsseseeesestesesteseeeseeees 6 172 Momentary Power Loss Restart tete 6 172 Torque Limit teneret tne 6 172 1 O Open phase Protection and Overtorque Detection 6 173 External Baseblock Signal cccccccsccsssessescssssesesnesessesecsesecsesessesecsesessseceesecssees 6 173 Acceleration Deceleration Time s cccssccsssccsssessssescesesesseseceesecseseceesecessecseseeseses 6 173 Magnetic Contactor on the Inverter s OutpUut Side ses 6 173 Control related Adjustments 6 174 XIV Reducing Shock during Elevating Machine Start Stop Acceleration and Deceleraliori cun oO eO shaved EUER abe 6 176 Confirming Startup Current and Reducing Carrier Frequency sssssss 6 179 Overvoltage Inhibit Function eccesescssescssescesesessssecssseccsecsssescsecsesescesesceneesene 6 180 Current Alarm Function ssssssssss Hem 6 181 Peak Hold Current Monitoring Function seen 6 182 Maintenance Timer Display Function eeeeeeeeneee 6 183 Settings Required to Use Maintenance Timer Display Function
90. 10 V 20 mA is input Terminal A2 Set according to the 100 value for the function set for H3 09 Gain Bias terminal gets the input gain level when 0 A2 V 4 mA is input Terminal A2 Set according to the 100 value for the function set for H3 09 Bias Analog input filter time con Sets primary delay filter time con stant stant in seconds for the analog input terminal Filter Avg Effective for noise control etc Time E Adjusting Analog Frequency Reference Using Constants The frequency reference is input from the control circuit terminals using analog voltage and current If using frequency reference terminal A1 as an input terminal perform adjustments using constants H3 02 and H3 03 If using multi function analog input terminal A2 as a frequency reference terminal perform adjust ments using H3 10 and H3 11 Adjustment can be made using H3 06 and H3 07 when multi function analog input terminal A3 is used as a frequency reference terminal Frequency reference Frequency reference H3 02 H3 10 H3 06 H3 03 i Terminal A1 A3 ET Terminal A2 input H3 07 input voltage voltage current oy id 0 V 4 mA 10 V 20 mA Terminal A1 A3 input Terminal A2 input Fig 6 26 Terminals A1 and A2 Inputs 6 29 E gee EAdjusting Frequency Gain Using an Analog Input When H3 09 or H3 05 is set to 1 frequency gain you can adjust the fre
91. 130 150 180 210 230 Rated output current A 80 97 128 165 195 240 270 302 Max output voltage V 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480 VAC Proportional to input voltage Max output frequency Hz Frequencies supported up to 400 Hz using constant seti ing Max voltage V Rated frequency Hz 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480 VAC 50 60 Hz Allowable voltage fluctua tion 10 15 Power supply characteristics Allowable frequency fluc tuation 5 M easures for DC reactor Built in power supply 12 phase rec harmonics tification Possible 1 The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4 pole Yaskawa motor When selecting the actual motor and Inverter be sure that the Inverter s rated current is applicable for the motor s rated current 2 A 3 wire transformer optional is required on the power supply for 12 phase rectification Common Specifications The following specifications apply to both 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters Table 9 3 Common Specifications Model Number Specification CIMR G7A O P Sine wave PWM Control method Flux vector control open loop vector 1 2 control V f control V f with PG control switched by constant setting Torque characteristics 150 0 3 Hz Open loop vector 2 control 150 0 min Flux vector contro
92. 2 22 2 38 D daily inspection 8 2 DC reactor 2 17 detecting motor overspeed 6 161 detecting motor torque 6 53 detecting PG open circuit 6 161 DEV Speed Deviation 7 16 digital operator 3 2 digital operator communications error 1 7 10 digital operator communications error 2 7 10 Index 1 digital operator connection fault 7 9 digital output cards 6 162 drive mode 3 5 3 7 dwell function 6 22 E EEPROM error 7 10 EEPROM write error 7 21 EF External Fault 7 15 EFO Opt External Flt 7 9 7 17 emergency stop 6 17 enclosed wall mounted type 1 4 energy saving 6 115 ERR EEPROM R W Err 7 21 excessive speed deviation 7 8 7 16 external fault function 6 85 F FBL Feedback Loss 7 8 7 17 FJOG 6 84 forward reverse run command
93. 2 38 surge absorber 2 17 switching motors when the power supply is ON 6 149 T terminal block 2 5 thermal overload relay 2 19 tightening torque 2 38 timer function 6 105 torque compensation 6 38 torque limit function 6 46 trial operation 4 1 troubleshooting 7 1 7 25 U UL3 Undertorg Det 1 7 16 UL4 Undertorg Det 2 7 16 undertorque l 7 16 undertorque 2 7 16 undertorque detected 1 7 8 undertorque detected 2 7 8 user constant access levels 4 17 UV DC Bus Undervolt 7 15 V Vif control 4 8 V f control with PG 4 8 V f pattern 6 120 6 122 verify mode 3 5 3 13 VS operator 10 24 W watchdog timer fault 7 11 wire size 2 22 wiring 2 1 Ind
94. 37 iSetting Number of PG Pulses Set the number of PG Pulse Generator Encoder pulses in pulses rotation Set the number of A phase or B phase pulses per 1 motor rotation in F1 01 iaMatching PG Rotation Direction and Motor Rotation Direction Constant F1 05 matches the PG rotation direction and the motor rotation direction If the motor is rotating for wards set whether it is A phase driven or B phase driven Make this setting when using PG B2 or PG X2 Inverter Motor PG encoder Forward command O Pr output A phase driven when set value 0 B phase driven when set value 1 A phase LT LT L A hase T L_J LJ 1 B phase _ J LI LJ 1 B phase J ae ge Ce ay Example Forward rotation of standard Yaskawa motor PG used Samtack KK Motor output axis rotates counter clockwise during In das verter Forward Command omman Rotation x CCW A phase B phase zt esp H Yaskawa standard PG used is A phase driven CCW when motor rotation is forward Fig 6 82 PG Rotation Direction Setting Generally PG is A phase driven when rotation is clockwise CW see from the input axis Also motor rota tion is counter clockwise CCW seen from the output side when Forward Commands are output Conse quently when motor rotation is forward PG is normally A phase driven when a load is applied and B phase driven when a load is not applied Options E i Setting Number of Gear Teeth Between PG and Motor Set the num
95. 4 0 50 1 0 1 11 4 15 1 3 to 1 4 0 5 to 5 5 20 to 10 1 25 16 G7A2055 O 01 31 4 to 392 80 to 125 3 0 to 250 80 x 2P 3 0 x 2P R LI S L2 T L3 U TI V T2 W T3 R1 L11 SI L21 TI L31 17 6 to 22 5 80 to 100 3 0 to 4 0 80 x 2P 3 0 x 2P Q3 8 8 to 10 8 5 5 to 60 10 to 2 0 17 6 to 22 5 80 to 200 2 0 to 400 30 2 0 1 1 4 15 1 3 to 1 4 0 5 to 5 5 20 to 10 1 25 16 G7A2075 R LI S L2 T L3 O 1 31 4 to 392 150 to 200 250 to 350 150 x 2P 250 x 2P U T1 V T2 W T3 RI L11 SI L21 T1 L31 31 4 to 392 100 to 150 4 0 to 300 100 x 2P 4 0 x 2P 3 8 8 to 10 8 5 5 to 60 10 to 2 0 31 4 to 39 2 60 to 150 2 0 to 300 60 x 2P 2 0 x 2P 1 4 Alta 1 3 to 1 4 0 5 to 5 5 20 to 10 1 25 16 G7A2090 R LI S L2 T L3 O 81 31 4 to 392 200 to 325 350 to 600 200 x 2P or 50 x 4P 350 x 2P or 1 0 x 4P U TI V T2 W T3 RI L11 1 L21 TI L31 31 4 to 39 2 150 to 325 300 to 600 150 x 2P or 50 x 4P 300 x 2P or 1 0 x 4P Q3 8 8 to 10 8 5 5 to 60 10 to 2 0 31 4 to 39 2 150 300 150 x 2P 300 x 2P 1 3 to 1 4 0 5 to 5 5 20 to 10 1 25 16 M Wire Type Power cables e g 600 V vinyl power cables 2 8 Table 2 1 20
96. A arm Detection Chapter 9 Revision Input noise filter model numbers under Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices Addition Notes 4 and 5 under Common Specifications Chapter 10 Revision Precautions for Open loop Vector 2 Control Addition Applications with Repetitive Loads September 2004 Addition Warranty Information Chapter 1 Addition Removing and Attaching the Protection Cover Chapter 2 Revision Inverter main circuit configuration diagrams for models CIMR F7A2037 to 2110 and CIMR F7A4075 to 4300 Addition LONWORKS Communications Boards SI J and SI W1 in Table 2 14 Option Board Specifications Chapter 4 Addition Setting 3 for Constant T1 01 ChapterS 5 Addition Constant N1 03 January 2005 3 Addition DATA ENTER Key is invalid when UV is detected Table 3 2 Relation of Inverter to RUN and STOP Indicators E 7 Revision Note about GF in Table 7 1 Fault Displays and Processing Addition Note about OC and GF in the Meaning column in Table 7 1 Fault Displays and Process ing September 2005 v me 3 Revision Address Date of Rev June 2006 Preface Addition Safety Precautions Setting User Constants Stationary autotuning precautions Trial Operation Inverter settings precautions Maintenance and Inspection Precaution about using an Inverter with an elevator Precaution about times when a holding brake is necessary Chapter 1 Revision Fig1 9 Removing the Terminal Cover Model CIMR G7A23P7 Sh
97. C5 04 i i Motor speed Hz 0 E1 09 E1 04 Min output frequency Max output frequency 6 Fig 6 76 Speed Control Gain Integral Time Adjustment for V f Control with PG mm Gain Adjustments at Minimum Output Frequency Operate the motor at the minimum output frequency Increase C5 03 ASR proportional gain 2 to a level where there is no oscillation Decrease C5 04 ASR integral time 2 to a level where there is no oscillation Monitor the Inverter s output current and verify that it is less than 50 of the Inverter rated current If the out put current exceeds 5096 of the Inverter s rated current decrease C5 03 and increase C5 04 Gain Adjustments at Maximum Output Frequency Operate the motor at the maximum output frequency Increase C5 01 ASR proportional gain 1 to a level where there is no oscillation Decrease C5 02 ASR integral time 1 to a level where there is no oscillation Fine Adjustments When you want even finer gain adjustment adjust the gain while observing the speed waveform The adjust ment method is the same as that for vector control Enable integral operation during acceleration and deceleration by setting F1 07 to 1 when you want the motor speed to closely follow the frequency reference during acceleration and deceleration Reduce the setting of C5 01 if overshooting occurs during acceleration and reduce the setting of C5 03 and increase the setting of C5 04 if undershooting occurs when stopping If overshoo
98. Con stant Number Name Display Reference selection Reference Source Factory Description Setting Set the frequency reference input method 0 Digital Operator Control circuit terminal analog input MEMOBUS communications Option board Pulse train input Control Methods Vit with PG Open loop Vec tor 1 Flux Vec tor Pulse train input func tion selec tion Pulse Input Sel Frequency reference PID feedback value PID target value Input the Reference Frequency from the Digital Operator Pulse train input scal ing PI Scaling Set the number of pulses in hertz tak ing the reference to be 100 When b1 01 is set to 0 you can input the reference frequency from the Digital Operator Input the reference frequency from the Digital Operator s reference frequency setting display For details on setting the reference frequency refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes DRIVE Rdy Frequency Ref NA U1 01 0 0 0 0 0Hz 0 00 60 00 0 00Hz Fig 6 1 Frequency Setting Display Frequency Reference 5 M Binputting the Frequency Reference Using Control Circuit Terminal Analog Setting When b1 01 is set to 1 you can input the frequency reference from control circuit terminal A1 voltage input or control circuit terminal A2 voltage or current input Input
99. Connectors Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from to Table 2 3 Refer to instruction manual TOBPC72060000 for wire sizes for Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units Table 2 1 200 V Class Wire Sizes Inverter Temi Tightening Possible ide Model Terminal Symbol nal Torque Wire Sizes wire Size Wire Type CIMR O Screws Nem mm AWG mm AWG R L1 S L2 T L3 O 0 1 2 B1 B2 G7A20P4 U T1 V T2 W T3 1 2 to 1 5 R LI S L2 T L2 1 2 B1 B2 G7A20P7 U T1 V T2 W T3 1 2 to 1 5 R LI S L2 T L3 O1 C2 B1 B2 G7A21P5 U T1 V T2 W T3 1 2 to 1 5 R LI S L2 T L3 1 C2 B1 B2 G7A22P2 U T1 V T2 W T3 1 2 to 1 5 R LI S L2 T L3 O1 C2 B1 B2 G7A23P7 U TI V T2 W T3 R LI S L2 T L3 O1 C2 B1 B2 G7A25PS U T1 V T2 W T3 R LI S L2 T L3 Q1 C2 B1 B2 G7A27PS U T1 V T2 W T3 6 ee g e g 600 V R L1 S L2 T L3 1 2 U TI 22 to 30 vinyl pow r 4 0 to 5 0 V T2 W T3 4 to 3 cables G7A2011 B1 B2 25 m 22 4 0 to 5 0 o 6 R LI S L2 T L3 O 1 2 U TI 22 to 38 0 to 10 0 V T2 W T3 4 to 2 G7A2015 BI B2 2 5 81014 8 to 6 22 4 0 to 5 0 d 4 R LI S L2 T L3 1 U T1 V T2 30 to 60 9 0 to 10 0 W T3 R1 L11 SI L21 TI L31 3 to 1 8 to 22 G7A2018 93 4 0 to 5 0 o 22 to 38 4 to 2 R LI S L2 T L3 O amp 1U TI 50 to 60 9 0 to 10 0 V T2 W T3 RULI11 S1 L
100. Control quency to be 100 Lvl Enabled when the increase speed command or decrease speed command is set for a multi function input i Trim Control Increase Decrease Command and Frequency Reference The frequency references using Trim Control Increase Decrease command ON OFF operations are shown below Set Frequency Set Frequency Frequency Reference Reference Reference Set Frequency Command d4 02 d4 02 Trim Control Increase Command Terminal Trim Control Decrease Command Terminal BApplication Precautions Trim Control Increase Decrease command is enabled when speed reference gt 0 and the speed reference is from an analog input When the analog frequency reference value d4 02 0 the frequency reference is set to O f only the Trim Control Increase command or Trim Control Decrease command has been set for a multi function contact input terminal S3 to S12 operation error OPE03 invalid multi function input selected will occur Input Terminal Functions Hold Analog Frequency Using User set Timing When one of H1 01 to H1 10 multi function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection is set to 1E sample hold analog frequency command the analog frequency reference will be held from 100 ms after the terminal 1s turned ON and operation will continue thereafter at that frequency The analog value 100 ms after the command
101. Fan Heatsink Circulation Fan Heatsink Cooling Heatsink Circulation Fan Fan NI N N N N N N N N NI NIN ND Cn A AJ NINI N N N N N N N NINININI NI ND Cooling Fan Replacement Outline 8200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 15 kW or Less A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Inverter If the Inverter 1s installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Inverter the cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel Removing the Cooling Fan 1 Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows 1 and pull the fan out in the direction of arrow 2 2 Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the relay connector 3 Open the fan cover on the left and right sides and remove the fan cover from the fan Mounting the Cooling Fan 1 Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan Be sure that the airflow direction indicated by the arrows above faces into the Inverter 2 Connect the relay connector securely and place the relay connector and cable into the fan cover 3 Mount the fan cover on the Inverter Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on the Inverter Airflow direction Fan cover Fig 8 1 Cooling Fan Replacement 200 V Class Inverters of 3 7 kW M
102. IM T L3 MRG z 4 i Inverter 1 1 i i al i i ja Ground to 100 Q max d i 7 1 i 1 I 1 1 i MEM z Fw Low scs AMA e E ste Fault contacts Forward Run Stop ry 0 O Forward Run Command forward run when ON Reverse Run Command reverse run when ON 1 Remove the short circuit bar normally connected from C 1 and 2 when connecting a DC Reactor Optional 2 Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3 04 when using a Braking Resistor Unit The motor may not stop within the decel eration time if this setting is not changed Fig 10 10 Using Braking Units in Parallel This example shows wiring for using two Braking Units in parallel There are connectors for selecting whether each Braking Unit is to be a Master or Slave Select Master for the first Braking Unit only and select Slave for all other Braking Units i e from the second Unit onwards A sequence is required to turn OFF the power supply for the thermal overload relay trip contacts of the Braking Resistor Unit Thermal protector 1 2Brak ing Resis 4 ator Unit ie 1 amp Thermal protector MCCB on C Motor 3 phase power R 2 4 Um 200 to 220 V 50 Hz 20010230 V 60 Hz 8 t Mo IM _ WIT3 r ee a ee THRX oFF ON MC E F i 41 0 VOTE Ta D 4 fOverload relay trip Sontact 1l Ground to 100 Q max 1 lofBrak
103. Inductance Setting Set the amount of voltage drop due to motor leak inductance in E2 06 using the percentage over the motor rated voltage Make this setting when the high speed motor inductance is small If the inductance is not writ ten on the motor nameplate consult the motor manufacturer Motor Iron Saturation Coefficients 1 2 and 3 Settings E2 07 E2 08 and E2 12 are set automatically using rotational autotuning Motor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation Setting E2 10 is displayed only when in V f control method To increase the torque compensation accuracy when in V f control method set the motor iron loss in Watts Motor Mechanical Loss When using flux vector control adjust mechanical loss in the following cases There is normally no reason to make this adjustment The mechanical loss setting is used to compensate the torque There is excessive torque loss from the motor bearings There is excessive torque loss from a fan pump etc Setting the V f Pattern In V f control method you can set the Inverter input voltage and the V f pattern as the need arises iRelated Constants Name Control Methods TAA Factory Open Open Description Vif Flux Settin oop Loop Display id Vector hi Vector 1 or 2 Input voltage Set the Inverter input voltage in 1 setting volt 155 to 200 V E
104. Inverters with outputs of 5 5 kW or more the Inverter rated current will need to be reduced 5 91 5 92 8400 V Class Inverters Name Factory Setting Inverter Capacity Motor Rated Capacity 2nd Motor Rated Capacity kVA selection Energy saving filter time constant 0 50 Open loop vector control Energy saving coefficient 313 60 245 80 236 44 189 50 Carrier frequency selec 4 tion l Carrier frequency selec tion for open loop vector 2 control Carrier frequency selec tion upper limit E2 01 E4 01 Motor rated current E2 02 E4 02 Motor rated slip E2 03 E4 03 Motor no load current E2 05 E4 05 Motor line to line resis tance E2 06 E4 06 Motor leak inductance E2 10 Motor iron loss for torque compensation L2 02 Momentary power loss ridethru time L2 03 Min baseblock BB time L2 04 Voltage recovery time L8 02 Overheat pre alarm level L8 39 Reduced carrier frequency N1 03 Hunting prevention time constant N5 02 Motor acceleration time Name User Constant Tables 5 Factory Setting Inverter Capacity Motor Rated Capacity 2nd Motor Rated Capacity kVA selection Energy saving filter time constant 0 50 Open loop vector control
105. Loo Maus Display Bes iption Range Setting Opera vit with Veo Vec Veo Regis 29 tion PG tor tor tor ter 1 2 Accelera Sets the acceleration time to 4 5 tion time 1 C1 01 accelerate from 0 to the maxi Yes Q Q Q Q Q 200H 4 21 Accel Time um output frequency in 1 6 18 1 second units Decelera Sets the deceleration time to 4 5 tion time 1 e C1 02 decelerate from the maximum Yes Q Q Q Q Q 201H 4 21 Decel Time Output frequency to 0 in 1 6 18 1 second units Accelera The acceleration time when tion time 2 3 TM T C1 03 the multifunction input Ys A A A A A 2020 1 Accel Time accel decel time 1 is set to 6 18 j ON 5 Decelera The deceleration time when tion time 2 E th Iti funct t 4 21 C1 04 EFE M Ys A A A A A 20H Decel Time accel decel time 1 is set to 6 18 2 ON Accelera The acceleration time when tion time 3 E C1 05 He En 2 oe No A A A A A 204 47 Accel Time accel decel time 2 is set to 0 0 to 6 18 3 ON 6000 0 10 0s Decelera The deceleration time when tion time 3 DET ear aa T C1 06 the multi function input No A A A A A 05H 4 21 Decel Time accel decel time 2 is set to 6 18 3 ON Accelera The acceleration time when tion time 4 the multi function input 421 C1 07 accel decel time 1 and No A A A A A 206H 6 18 Accel Time accel decel time 2 are set to 4 ON Decelera The deceleration time when tiontime4 the multi functio
106. MEMOBUS communications error 7 10 7 18 modes 3 5 motor constants 6 117 motor overheating 7 16 motor overheating alarm 7 5 motor overheating fault 7 5 motor overload 7 6 motor protection operation time 6 59 mounting dimensions 1 6 Index multi function analog input 6 47 multi function analog input selection error 7 20 multi function input selection error 7 20 multi speed operation 6 5 N noise filter 2 17 no load operation 4 16 number of gear teeth between PG and motor 6 161 number of PG pulses 6 160 O OH Heatsink Overtemp 7 15 OH2 Over Heat 2 7 15 OH3 Motor Overheat 1 7 16 OL3 Overtorque Det 1 7 16 OL4 Overtorque Det 2 7 16 OPEO01 kVA Selection 7 20 OPEO011 Carr Freq On Delay 7 21 OPE02 Limit 7 20 OPE03 Terminal
107. Machines W Ea Table 6 4 Control related Adjustments Continued ASR propor tional P gain 1 ASR propor tional P gain 2 Performance Increasing torque and speed response Controlling hunting and vibration Factory Setting Recom mended Setting 10 00 to 50 00 Adjustment Method Torque or speed response is insufficient Increase the setting Hunting or vibration occurs Reduce the setting ASR inte gral I time 1 ASR inte gral I time 2 Increasing torque and speed response Controlling hunting and vibration 0 300 to 1 000 s Torque or speed response is insufficient Reduce the setting Hunting or vibration occurs Increase the set ting ASR switch ing fre quency Switching the ASR pro portional gain and inte gral time according to the output frequency 0 0 Hz no switching 0 0 to max output fre quency Set the output frequency at which to change the ASR proportional gain and inte gral time when the same val ues cannot be used for both high speed and low speed operation ASR pri mary delay time Controlling hunting and vibration 0 004 to 0 020 Machine rigidity is low and the system vibrates easily Increase the setting V f control A1 02 0 or 1 Hunting pre vention gain Controlling hunting and vibration in mid dle range speeds 10 to 40 Hz 0 50 to 2 00 Torque is insufficient for heavy loads Reduce the
108. Motor 2 V f Pattern Vif Patten 2 5 36 i default settings can be moni E4 Motor 2 Setup Motor Setup 5 38 tored oret Fi PG Option Setup PG Onion 6 39 F2 Analog Reference Board Al 14 Setup 5 41 F3 Digital Reference Board Setup 542 F4 Analog Monitor Boards Alp 5 43 F5 Digital Output Boards Pogos 5 44 F6 Communications Option Boards C99 5 45 Autotuning Mode D H1 Multi function Contact Inputs Inputs 5 46 Automatically sets motor con H2 Multi function Contact Outputs Onna 5 49 stants if autotuning data from H3 Analog Inputs p 5 51 motor nameplate is input for H4 Multi function Analog Outputs ous 9 54 open loop vector control or to Sew f H5 MEMOBUS Communications eun 5 55 measure the line to line resis Eu tance for V f control H6 Pulse Train Sep 9 97 L1 Motor Overload or 5 58 L2 Power Loss Ridethrough purtoss 5 59 L3 Stall Prevention Prevction 9 61 7 Ret L4 Reference Detection Detection 9 02 L5 Fault Restart Fault Restart 5 63 L6 Torque Detection poe 5 64 L7 Torque Limits Torque Limit 5 65 L8 Hardware Protection pe 5 66 N1 Hunting Prevention Function Hunting Prev 5 69 N2 Speed Feedback Protection Control AFR 5 70 N3 High slip Braking High Slip 5 70 N4 Speed Estimation Observer 5 71 N5 Feed Forward Feedioward 5 73 o1 Monitor Select Montor 5 73 02 Multi function Selections e as 5 75 o3 Copy Function Ao 5 76 T Motor Autotuning Auto Tuning 5 77 5 4
109. Motor Application Precautions m Motor Application Precautions This section provides precautions for motor application Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor When a standard motor is operated with the Inverter power loss is slightly higher than when operated with a commercial power supply Observe the following precautions when using an Inverter for an existing standard motor mLow Speed Ranges Cooling effects diminish in the low speed range resulting in an increase in the motor temperature Therefore the motor torque should be reduced in the low speed range whenever using a motor not made by Yaskawa If 100 torque is required continuously at low speed consider using a special Inverter or vector motor Installation Withstand Voltage If the input voltage is higher than the motor rated voltage or the wiring distance is long the motor insulation voltage must be considered Contact your Yaskawa representative for details iHigh speed Operation When using the motor at a speed higher than the rated speed problems may arise in dynamic balance and bearing durability Contact your Yaskawa representative for details iTorque Characteristics The motor may require more acceleration torque when the motor is operated with the Inverter than when oper ated with a commercial power supply Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be used with the motor to set a proper V f pattern iVibration The Inve
110. Motor Line to Line Resistance E2 05 and cable resis tance will be automatically measured a ra 1 Power will be supplied to the motor when stationary autotuning for line to line resistance is performed ut even though the motor will not turn Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed e 2 When performing stationary autotuning connected to a conveyor or other machine ensure that the IMPORTANT holding brake is not activated during autotuning Stationary Autotuning 2 T1 01 4 If using Inverters for applications with constant loads such as for elevators or with a motor load ratio exceed ing 30 at startup and rotational autotuning without loads cannot be performed perform stationary autotun ing 2 T1 01 4 Stationary autotuning 2 is used for open loop vector control and flux vector control Set T1 04 to 4 and Motor no load current T1 09 will be added as a setting item Input the data from the nameplate Be sure to input the value or motor no load current motor exciting current from motor examination results to T1 09 After auto tuning the value of T1 09 will be written in E2 03 When not setting T1 09 the value of Yaskawa standard motor s no load current will be written in E2 03 i e 1 Power will be supplied to the motor when stationary autotuning 2 is performed even though the motor will not turn Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed e 2 When performing stationary autotuning 2 connec
111. Motor no load current Not initialized Japanese standard specifications A1 00 1 A1 02 2 When the control method is changed the factory setting will change The open loop vector 1 factory settings are given The factory setting is 1 0 when using flux vector control BwWNe The factory setting is 2 00 s when Inverter capacity is 55 kW min The factory setting will change when the control method is changed The open loop vector factory setting is given By setting E2 11 Motor rated output the appropriate value will be set The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity The values for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0 4 kW are given When the control method is changed the factory settings will change The flux vector factory settings are given O0 1 QN tA This constant can be monitored or set only when F is set for C6 02 9 These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double 10 E1 11 and E1 12 are disregarded when set to 0 0 11 E1 13 is set to the same value as E1 05 by autotuning 12 The same capacity as that of the Inverter will be set if the constants are initialized 13 Applicable for G7 Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1038 and later Refer to MECHATROLINK COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE CARD INSTRUCTIONS TOBPC73060008 for details 14 The factory settings in the parentheses are for 3 wire sequence 10 36 User Constants E
112. N e m Wire Thickness mm aWiring Method and Precautions The wiring method is the same as the one used for straight solderless terminals Refer to page 2 23 Observe the following precautions when wiring Separate the control signal lines for the PG Speed Control Board from main circuit lines and power lines Connect the shield when connecting to a PG The shield must be connected to prevent operational errors caused by noise Also do not use any lines that are more than 100 m long Refer to Fig 2 20 for details on connecting the shield Connect the shield to the shield terminal E Do not solder the ends of wires Doing so may cause contact faults When not using straight solderless terminals strip the wires to a length of approximately 5 5 mm 2 38 Installing and Wiring Option Boards _ Selecting the Number of PG Encoder Pulses The setting for the number of PG pulses depends on the model of PG Speed Control Board being used Set the correct number for your model BPG A2 PG B2 The maximum response frequency is 32 767 Hz Use a PG that outputs a maximum frequency of approximately 20 kHz for the rotational speed of the motor Motor speed at maximum frequency output min 60 x PG rating p rev 20 000 Hz Some examples of PG output frequency number of pulses for the maximum frequency output are shown in Table 2 21 Table 2 21 PG Pulse Selection Exa
113. Overtorque and Undertorque Detection Levels Using an Analog Input 6 56 4 Motor Overload Protection x seio rete esate ti tees tm ved tap utotes ae 6 57 Setting Motor Protection Operation Time ss ne 6 59 Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs 6 60 Limiting Motor Rotation Direction sssee n 6 62 Continuing OpSPallonissto oca tiet pec Phe et ep tha hac eot Eoo Pt qum enc 6 63 Restarting Automatically After Power Is Restored cccccccccsssssesesceseeceseeeeseseeseeeeseaens 6 63 9 Speed Search tee et Reeth entitle et es netu AA esd meee RA UM IUE 6 64 Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is Lost 6 71 Restarting Operation After Transient Fault Auto Restart Function 6 72 Operation Selection After Cooling Fan Fault 6 73 Inverter Protection sensoa e ia aa eene nnne nnne nnne 6 74 Performing Overheating Protection on Mounted Braking Resistors 6 74 Reducing Inverter Overheating Pre Alarm Warning Levels sssseee 6 75 Input Terminal Functions seeesseeessssssssssssesseeeeen nennen 6 76 Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and Control Circuit Terminals 1 rer rre re true aw ei rere eee 6 76 Blocking Inverter Outputs Baseblock Commands ssssssetttee 6 77 Stopping Acceleration and Decele
114. PG cable is PG noise PG disconnection connected properly 7 The regenerative energy when an In vector control enable set to 1 overshoot occurs after acceleration is the overvoltage inhibit selection mi completed is too large L3 11 The power supply voltage is too high Decrease the voltage so it s within specifications UVI DC Bus Undervolt Main Circuit Undervoltage The main circuit DC voltage is below the Undervoltage Detection Level L2 05 200 V Class Approx 190 V 400 V Class Approx 380 V Main Circuit Magnetic Connector Operation Failure The magnetic connector stopped responding during Inverter operation Applicable Inverter Capacities 200 V Class 37 to 110 kW 400 V Class 75 to 300 kW An open phase occurred with the input power supply A momentary power loss occurred The wiring terminals for the input power supply are loose The voltage fluctuations in the input power supply are too large A fault occurred in the surge pre vention circuit The magnetic contactor in the con trol circuit was released Contact failure in the auxiliary contact The contact of the magnetic contac tor in the control circuit was cor roded due to environmental dust or gas Reset the fault after correcting its cause Improve the power supply envi ronment Check to see if the correct power tap is selected Improve the operating environ ment Replace the In
115. Perform autotuning separately for the motor or set the motor constants through calculations Alternatively change the control method selection A1 02 to V f control 0 or 1 Oscillation and hunting are occurring with V f control The gain adjustment may be insufficient Reset the gain to a more effective level by adjusting constants C4 02 Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant N1 02 Hunting Prevention Gain and C3 02 Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time in order Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time setting Oscillation and hunting are occurring with V f w PG control The gain adjustment may be insufficient Adjust the various types of speed control loop ASR gain If the oscillation cannot be eliminated in this way set the hunting prevention selection constant N1 01 to 0 disabled and then try adjusting the gain again BOscillation and hunting are occurring with open loop vector 2 control Adjust the control constants with reference to Adjusted User Constants on page 18 in Chapter 4 Trial Opera tion If autotuning has not been performed or the control method has been changed since last performing auto tuning perform autotuning If the problem occurs after performing stationary autotuning perform rotational autotuning If oscillation and hunting occur under the following special conditions perform the adjustments described here Low speed regenerative load PRG 1020 only If oscillat
116. Reactors for Suppressing Harmonics RIL S12 713 PE Remove the paint on the ground side Inputs Inverter Filter Outputs UTA ViT2 WIT3 m3 QD Dru se Wiring length 40 cm max Metallic plate SI ed W length 20 Remove the paint on the ground side MS ores Fig 10 7 Installation Method for Filter and Inverter CIMR G7A20P4 to 2015 40P4 to 4015 10 RU s12 3 PE Filter Outputs Wiring length 40 cm max Metallic plate Inverter Qu stan ae mD Remove the paint on the ground side Fig 10 8 Installation Method for Filter and Inverter CIMR G7A2018 to 2110 4018 to 4300 Inverter Model Number CIMR G7A Table 10 5 EMC Noise Filters Noise Filter Made by Shaffner Rated Current A Model Number FS5972 10 07 Weight kg Dimensions mm 141 x 46 x 330 FS5972 10 07 141 x 46 x 330 FS5972 18 07 141 x 46 x 330 FS5973 35 07 141 x 46 x 330 FS5973 35 07 141 x46 x 330 FS5973 60 07 141 x46 x 330 FS5973 60 07 206 x 60 x 355 FS5973 100 07 236 x 80 x 408 FS5973 100 07 236 x 80 x 408 FS5973 130 35 90 x 180 x 366 FS5973 130 35 90 x 180 x 366 FS5973 160 40 120 x 170 x 451 FS5973 240 37 130 x 240 x 610 FS5973 240 37 130 x 240 x 610 FS5972 400 99 300 x 160 x 610 FS5972 4
117. Resistor Unit Brak ing Unit is used always set to 0 or 3 e setting range for acceleration deceleration times depends on the setting of C1 10 Acceleration deceleration Time Setting Unit If C1 10 is set to 0 e setting range is 0 00 to 600 00 s e factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity The values for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW are given ese are values for a 200 V Class Inverter Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double Sages e factory setting will change when the control method is changed The open loop vector 1 factory settings are given 1 13 is set to the same value as E1 05 by autotuning e setting range is from 10 to 200 of the Inverter rated output current The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW is given or the motor no load current set E2 03 to a value less than that of E2 01 e setting range for open loop vector 2 control is 0 to 66 0 0 to 132 0 for PRG 1030 e same capacity as that of the Inverter will be set if the constants are initialized dadudm 9 The setting range for flux vector and open loop vector 2 control is 0 to 2 10 0 or 1 for flux vector control and open loop vector 2 control 11 The setting range depends on the capacity of the Inverter The values for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW are given 2 Displayed in Quick Programming Mode when motor 2 is set for a multi function input 3 The CHI output can be adjusted wh
118. Set Value 5 25 50 Hz Set Value 9 0 13 2 5 50 Hz Set Value C to E Set Value D 200 50 60 Hz Set Value 6 30 Set Value A Set Value E Set Value 7 60 Hz Set Value B Individual Functions m M 55 to 300 kW V f Pattern The diagrams show characteristics for a 200 V class motor For a 400 V class motor multiply all voltages by 2 Constant Torque Characteristics Set Value 0 to 3 Set Value 0 0 1 3 25 Set Value 8 0 1 3 25 Fixed Output Operation Set Value C 50 Hz 50 Hz 60 90 Hz Set Value 1 Initial value of set value F 50 Hz Set Value 9 0 1 3 2 5 50 Hz Set Value C to E Set Value D 60120 Hz Set Value 2 Set Value A Set Value E 50 60 Hz 60180 Hz Set Value 3 6072 Hz Set Value 7 60 Hz Set Value B 60 Hz When E1 03 is set to F User defined V f pattern you can set constants E1 04 to E1 10 If E1 03 is set to anything other than F you can only refer to constants E1 04 to E1 10 If the V f characteristics are linear set E1 07 and E1 09 to the same value In this case E1 08 will be ignored Output voltage V E1 08 VC E1 10 VMIN i i i i Frequency Hz E1 09 E1 07 E1 06 E1 04 FMIN FB FA FMAX Fig 6 67 User Set V f Pattern i Setting Precautions When the setting is to user defined V f pattern beware
119. Signal Level During Multi Function Analog Output Cannot be output User Constant Tables w Control Methods Open Open V f Loop Flux Loop with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 A A A A 8AH A A A A 8BH A A A A 8CH 1 A A A A 8DH hr 0 01 l A A A A 7E6H A 0 0 A A A A 7E7H Hz 2 If the PUF fault is already indicated in U2 O0 or U3 LILI even if the PUF fault is detected again the fault trace is not updated 1 The minimum unit differs depending on the Inverter capacity 0 01 A for Inverter of 0 4 kW to 7 5 kW and 0 1 A for Inverter of 11 kW or more 2 Applicable for G7 Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 or later 5 85 Fault History U3 User constants for the error log are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Cor 4 Output Signal Level Open Open stant Display Description During Multi Function cr pux pis Number wi ec ec ec Analog Output PG tor tor tor 1 2 Most recent fault The error contents of 1st previous fault Last Fault Second most recent fault The error contents of 2nd Fault Mes previous fault sage 2 Third most recent fault The error contents of 3rd Fault Mes previous fault sage 3 Fourth oldest fault The error contents of 4th Fault Mes previous fault sage 4 Cumulative operation The total operatin
120. T1 04 when 2 is set for T1 01 Only set value 2 2 or 3 for Control Boards ETC618046 S1033 and later is possible for V f control or V fcontrol with PG These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW is given The setting range is from 10 to 200 of the Inverter rated output current The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW is given Applicable for Control Boards ETC618046 S1033 and later Refer to Chapter 8 Procedure for Adjusting Constants after Replacement of Control Board Page 8 3 for the details of setting 3 Shipping adjustment When the control method is changed the factory setting will change The open loop vector 1 control factory setting is given 7 Applicable for G7 Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 or later 8 The setting range depends on the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0 4 kW is given The upper limit depends on the setting of E2 01 x X X AP OC P2 EO 5 f U Monitor Constants The following settings are made with the monitor constants U constants Setting constants for monitoring in drive mode B Status Monitor Constants U1 The constants used for monitoring status are listed in the following table Con stant Number Name Display Frequency reference Fre
121. Terminals 2st cef ttr Rn o ro Ph egt 2 22 Wire Sizes and Closed loop Connectors csccccscsecsesecsesecsesecsssecsssesceescenesceescenescens 2 22 Control Circuit Terminal Functions 0 0cccsccccscsecsssecessecessesesseceescsescesescesesceeseeseseens 2 24 Control Circuit Terminal Connections cscccssessesesesessssessesesesesssestsreacessetseceeeeeeeees 2 28 Control Circuit Wiring Precautions c ccccscscssessesesesessssessesesesesssescsccseeeceeseceteceeeees 2 29 Wiring GNC G de 2 30 die ra ese ela in oc eed adage enone 2 30 Installing and Wiring Option BOaFds iuco cii de eee ettet lesse 2 31 Option Board Models and Specifications 2 31 S di e 2 32 PG Speed Control Board Terminals and Specifications sssssssssss 2 33 AP Wide roe Mt e AA Me M UA M A ea 2 35 Wiring Terminal BlobekSaan cett ttedenta dedisti even tdtat e Donoso 2 38 Selecting the Number of PG Encoder Pulses ssssssssseeeteees 2 39 3 Digital Operator and Modes esse 3 1 Digital Operator iecoris e ettet Mose sert dca er aeter dad 3 2 4 Digital Operator Display ssuissesdxitue dotitotoe dt tabaco N tis esset ar 3 2 9 Digital Operator Keys o ER OE p DOE o e tuit 3 2 ere TM 3 5 Inverier MOUBS us otra on etae te erases ate actam nete e eu 3 5 Switching Modes tette tentent ttt tee
122. The Frequency Setting Display will not be displayed when using an analog reference The fault name will be displayed if the DATA ENTER Key is pressed while a constant is being displayed for which a fault code is being displayed DRIVE Rdy U2 02 OV DC Bus Overvolt DRIVE U3 01 oc Over Current Fig 3 4 Operations in Drive Mode DRIVE U3 02 ov DC Bus Overvolt 3 8 E gp Note When changing the display with the Increment and Decrement Keys the next display after the one for the last parameter number will be the one for the first parameter number and vise versa For example the next display after the one for U1 01 will be U1 40 This is indicated in the figures by the letters A and B and the numbers 1 to 6 The monitor item displayed at startup can be set in 01 02 Monitor Selection after Power Up 1 P The display for the first monitor constant frequency reference will be displayed when power is turned ON e Operation cannot be started from the mode selection display IMPORTANT Quick Programming Mode In quick programming mode the constants required for Inverter trial operation can be monitored and set Constants can be changed from the setting displays Use the Increment Decrement and Shift RESET Keys to change the frequency The user constant will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting
123. The minimum unit differs depending on the Inverter capacity 0 01 A for Inverter of 0 4 kW to 7 5 kW and 0 1 A for Inverter of 11 kW or more 2 The setting unit can be selected in 01 03 3 Applicable for G7 Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 or later 5 83 5 84 iFault Trace U2 User constants for error tracing are shown in the following table Con stant Number Name Display Current fault Current Fault Description The contents of the current fault Previous fault Last Fault The contents of the error that occurred just prior to the current fault Reference frequency at fault Frequency Ref The reference frequency when the previous fault occurred Output fre quency at fault Output Freq The output frequency when the previous fault occurred Output cur rent at fault Output Cur rent The output current when the pre vious fault occurred Motor speed at fault Motor Speed The motor speed when the previ ous fault occurred Output volt age reference at fault Output Volt age The output reference voltage when the previous fault occurred DC bus volt age at fault DC Bus Volt age The main current DC voltage when the previous fault occurred Output power at fault Output kWatts The output power when the pre vious fault occurred Torque refer ence at
124. The motor has overheated Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration deceler ation and cycle times Check the V f characteristics Check the Motor Rated Current E2 01 RH DynBrk Resistor Installed Braking Resistor Over heating Braking resistor protection function set in L8 01 has operated The deceleration time is too short and the regenerative energy from the motor is too large Reduce the load increase the deceleration time or reduce the motor speed Change to a Braking Resistor Unit RR DynBrk Transistr Internal Braking Transistor Fault The braking transistor is not operating properly The braking transistor is damaged The Inverter s control circuits are faulty Try turning the power supply off and on Replace the Inverter if the fault continues to occur Display OLI Motor Overloaded Table 7 1 Fault Displays and Processing Continued Meaning Motor Overload The motor overload protection func tion has operated based on the internal electronic thermal value Probable Causes The load is too heavy The accelera tion time deceleration time and cycle time are too short Corrective Actions Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration deceler ation and cycle times The constant setting for speed search is incorrect Motor overload occurred due to motor hunting and vibration
125. UL 564 1000 to 1800 CR6L 100 U 1022 1500 to 4100 CR6L 150 U 3070 530 to 5800 CR6L 150 U 3070 1130 to 5800 CR6L 150 U 3070 1700 to 5800 CR6L 150 U 3070 2000 to 13000 CR6L 200 U 5200 3000 to 13000 CR6L 200 U 5200 6800 to 55000 CR6L 300 U 17700 9000 to 55000 CR6L 300 U 17700 12000 to 23000 A70P400 4 19000 18000 to 64000 A70P450 4 24000 28000 to 250000 A70P600 4 43000 40000 to 250000 A70P700 4 59000 43000 to 400000 A70P900 4 97000 63000 to 400000 A70P900 4 97000 94000 to 920000 A7OP 1000 4 120000 Conformance to CE Markings m M BEMC Directive Varispeed G7 Series Inverters satisfy testing for conformance to the EMC Directive under the conditions described in European Standard EN61800 3 Installation Method In order to ensure that the machinery or installation incorporating the Inverter conforms to the EMC Directive perform installation according to the method below nstall a noise filter that conforms to European Standards on the input side Refer to Table 10 5 EMC Noise Filters Use a shielded line or metal piping for wiring between the Inverter and Motor Make the wiring as short as possible To suppress harmonics install a DC reactor in CIMR G7A20P4 20P7 40P4 and 40P7 models Refer to Table 10 6 DC
126. a time until output COEF power reaches a minimum value Power detec tion filter i time constant Set the time constant for out put power detection kW Filter Time Search opera Set the limit value of the volt tion voltage age control range during limiter search operation Perform search operation to optimize operations using minute variations in voltage Search V using energy saving control Limit Set to 0 to disable the search operation 100 is the motor base voltage 1 The factory setting is 1 0 when using flux vector control 2 The factory setting is 2 00 s when Inverter capacity is 55 kW min The factory setting will change when the control method is changed The open loop vector factory setting is given 3 By setting E2 11 Motor rated output the appropriate value will be set 4 The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0 4 kW is given 5 19 BZero servo b9 User constants for dwell functions are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Con Open Open ae er Setting Factory stant Description V f Loop Flux Loop Number Display Range Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Zero servo Adjust the strength of the gain zero servo lock Enabled when the zero servo command is set for the multi function input Wh
127. accel erate from 0 to the maximum output frequency in 1 second units Deceleration time 1 Decel Time 1 Sets the deceleration time to decel erate from the maximum output fre quency to 0 in 1 second units Acceleration time 2 Accel Time 2 The acceleration time when the multi function input accel decel time 1 is set to ON Deceleration time 2 Decel Time 2 The deceleration time when the multi function input accel decel time 1 is set to ON Acceleration time 3 Accel Time 3 The acceleration time when the multi function input accel decel time 2 is set to ON Deceleration time 3 Decel Time 3 The deceleration time when the multi function input accel decel time 2 is set to ON Acceleration time 4 Accel Time 4 The acceleration time when the multi function input accel decel time 1 and accel decel time 2 are set to ON Deceleration time 4 Decel Time 4 The deceleration time when the multi function input accel decel time 1 and accel decel time 2 are set to ON Factory Setting Control Methods Vif with PG Open Loop Vector 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vector 2 Accel decel time setting unit Acc Dec Units 0 0 01 second units 1 0 1 second units Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics Bi Name Cont
128. acceleration deceleration time using b5 17 Also you can disable the set value in b5 17 from the external terminals during operation using multi function input set value 34 PID soft starter ON OFF Individual Functions m EPID Control Block The following diagram shows the PID control block in the Inverter e x 1 iine euin 60 3q dai Nyeauaq uonoejes sonsuejoeleuo 1ndino did 319S 20 99 uawysnfpe 90 sa mes dis v2 Ln anen xoeq pee Cid sonsiejoeieyo indulgid sjndui uonouny ninui 99 9S L 10 Sg eun a eanenued iuejsuoo owp PFT Old vo sq 0 Sd zo sq orbi Bej jepJo 1sil euin eum I d ueb M IS 1 je Beu je6eiu O nm Jeuon1odoud v c L0 Sq sjndui uonounj ninua sjndui uonoun Buisn jess e16eyu Buisn e16e1ui e101S 01 Sq ure 98 LN indino did euinjoA indui dlid dH eure jndul esind xoeqpeoj ld Y 10 zv eurer indui Boyeue uonounj ninui UI en eA 19618 Ald 19S en eA 1eBJ 1 01 H40 46151684 Ald V 10 zv euw SNAOWAW JO L 4q 19S en eA 2618 Ald H 90 19491691 8 L0 suoneoiunuiuio9 SNEGOWAWN Gi enje 49618 did Jojuoul jndino did dH jeuiuue yndul easing Fig 6 64 PID Control Block 60 1xxeui ywl 90 9L LP indui pueuiuoo gorf Buung 0 7 L0 Sq suonipuoo Buiworloj eui jepun 440 S Cid NO S Jeubis e No dig 189429 102009 id indui uogouny ninyy O f ipsa O O i 440 Ald P d
129. acceleration mode Using the L3 02 level as a basis acceleration is automatically adjusted Set acceleration time is disregarded Change during Opera tion Vif with PG Open Loop Vector 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vector 2 Stall preven tion level dur ing accel StallP Accel Lvl Effective when L3 01 is set to 1 or 2 Set as a percentage of Inverter rated current Usually setting is not necessary The factory setting reduces the set values when the motor stalls Stall preven tion limit dur ing accel StallP CHP Lvl Sets the lower limit for stall pre vention during acceleration as a percentage of the Inverter rated current when operation is in the frequency range above E1 06 Usually setting is not necessary 6 23 _ i Time Chart The following figure shows the frequency characteristics when L3 01 is set to 1 Output current Stall level during L3 02 acceleration L3 02 159 Time Output frequency Output frequency is controlled to prevent the motor stalling Time Fig 6 23 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration i Setting Precautions f the motor capacity is small compared to the Inverter capacity or if the motor is operated using the fac tory settings resulting in the motor stalling lower the set value of L3 02 f using the motor in the constant output range L3 02 will be automati
130. and V is 20 mA or less Reset the fault after correcting its A ground fault occurred at the Inverter cause output A ground fault can be caused Note Before turning the power by motor burn damage worn insula ON again make sure that no Ground Fault tion or a damaged cable short circuit or ground fault GF The ground fault current at the occurs at the Inverter output Ground Inverter output exceeded approxi Make sure that incorrect wiring Fault mately 50 of the Inverter rated out put current A short circuit between V V and AC terminals occurred Overload in the control circuit ter minal has not been done Check the resistance and wir ing for the frequency setting potentiometer etc Check that the current for terminals V and V is 20 mA or less The ground fault here is one which occurs in the motor wiring w ile the motor is running A ground fault may not be detected in the following cases A ground fault with low resistance which occurs in motor cables or terminals A ground fault occurs when the power is turned ON Display PUF Main IGBT Fuse Blown Table 7 1 Fault Displays and Processing Continued Meaning Fuse Blown The fuse in the main circuit is blown Protective and Diagnostic Functions m M Probable Causes The output transistor has failed because of a short circuit or ground fault at the Inverter output Check whether
131. and negative torque set a multi SWI function analog input to 78 The input can be used for torque compen sation by setting H3 09 to 14 To switch the torque reference between Between A2 and AC H3 08 2 positive and negative torque set a multi Current input 4 to 20 mA Turn ON pin 2 of H3 09 13 function analog input to 78 SWI The input can be used for torque compen sation by setting H3 09 to 14 Option board AI 14B pee The input can be used for torque compen Between TC2 and TC4 H3 08 1 10 to 10 V H3 09 13 sation by setting H3 05 to 14 The direction of the torque output from the motor will be determined by the sign of the analog signal input It does not depend on the direction of the Run Command The direction of torque will be as follows Positive analog reference Torque reference for forward motor rotation counterclockwise as viewed from the motor output axis Negative analog reference Torque reference for reverse motor rotation clockwise as viewed from the motor output axis Application Precautions If the analog signal input level is 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA a forward torque reference will not be applied To apply reverse torque use an input level of 10 V to 10 V or switch the direction using a multi function input set to 78 polarity Reverse Command for external torque reference Torque compensation Individual Functions m eee from analog input Torque reference
132. are configured using 1 master PLC and a maximum of 31 slaves Serial com munications between master and slave are normally started by the master and the slave responds The master performs signal communications with one slave at a time Consequently you must set the address of each slave beforehand so the master can perform signal communications using that address Slaves receiv ing commands from the master perform the specified function and send a response to the master MEMOCON series PLC 1 RS 485 connections example Inverter Inverter Inverter Fig 6 58 Example of Connections between PLC and Inverter ilCommunications Specifications The MEMOBUS communications specifications are shown in the following table Item Specifications Interface RS 422 RS 485 Communications Cycle Asynchronous Start stop synchronization Communications Parameters Baud rate Select from 1 200 2 400 4 800 9 600 and 19 200 bps Data length 8 bits fixed Parity Select from even odd or none Stop bits bit fixed Communications Protocol MEMOBUS RTU mode only Number of Connectable Units 6 92 31 units max when using RS 485 Individual Functions m e i Communications Connection Terminal MEMOBUS communications use the following terminals S S R and R Set the terminating resistance by turning ON pin 1 of switch S1 for the l
133. are described in this sec tion Inverters of 15 kW or Less To attach optional boards or change the terminal board connector remove the Digital Operator and front cover in addition to the terminal cover Always remove the Digital Operator from the front cover before removing the terminal cover The removal and attachment procedures are given below iRemoving the Digital Operator Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock the Digital Operator and lift the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the Digital Operator as shown in the follow ing illustration Fig 1 11 Removing the Digital Operator Model CIMR G7A43P7 Shown Above 1 13 E gp Removing the Front Cover Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the directions of arrows and lift the bottom of the cover in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration Fig 1 12 Removing the Front Cover Model CIMR G7A43P7 Shown Above Mounting the Front Cover After wiring the terminals mount the front cover to the Inverter by performing in reverse order to the steps to remove the front cover 1 Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover otherwise Digital Operator may malfunctio
134. arrow in the corresponding dia gram Confirm that there are no cables in contact with the fan s rotating parts Fan cable Fix the fan cable with Insulok ties E Frame Frame fixing screws Fan airflow direction Fan airflow nm direction Fan cable Fig 8 15 Circulation Fan Replacement 400 V Class Inverters of 185 kW and 220 kW 8 19 _ 400 V Class Inverters of 300 kW Two circulation fans are installed as described in the following sections Removing the Circulation Fan 1 Remove the terminal cover and top and bottom front covers 2 Unscrew the frame fixing screws and takeoff the frame 3 Remove the relay connector connected to the fan 4 Remove the fan cover mounting screws and pull the fan cover out 5 Remove the fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one Mounting the Circulation Fan Reverse the above procedure to mount the fan Be sure to mount the fan so that the air flows in the direction indicated by the arrow in the corresponding dia gram Confirm that there are no cables in contact with the fan s rotating parts Fan cable Fix the fan cable with Insulok ties Frame Frame fixing screws Fan airflow direction Fan airflow direction Enlarged view Fix the fan cable with Insulok ties Fan cover mounting scerws Fig 8 16 Circulation Fan Replacement 400 V Class Inverters of 300 kW 8 20 Maintenance and Inspection
135. as mechanical a percentage of motor rated loss output W No Usually setting is not neces sary Adjust in the following cir 0 0 to E2 09 cumstances 10 0 0 0 No No No A A 316H e When torque loss is large f due to motor bearing Mechanical e When the torque loss in the A Loss pump or fan is large The set mechanical loss will compensate for torque Motor iron loss for ig Pe iron loss iW Oto 14W No A A No No No 317H 6 18 pensation units 65535 I Tcomp Iron Loss Motor rated Set the rated output of the output motor in units of 0 01 kW 0 00 to 0 40 peu Mtr Rated This constant is automatically 650 00 4 No Q Q Q Q Q SESH pes Power set during autotuning Motor iron Sets the motor iron saturation saturation coefficient at 130 of mag DU E2 12 coefficient 3 netic flux 1 60 1 30 No No No A A A 328H 6 118 Saturation This constant is automatically j Comp3 set during autotuning 1 The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0 4 kW is given 2 The setting range is from 10 to 200 of the Inverter rated output current The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW is given For the motor no load current set E2 03 to a value less than that of E2 01 3 The setting range depends on the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0 4 kW is given The upper limit depends on the setting of E2 01 4 The same capacity as that of the Inverter w
136. b1 01 1 0 A2 Master speed referennce 4 to 20 mA Auxiliary speed frequency1 H3 09 2 0 A3 Auxiliary speed frequency 0 to 10 V Auxiliary speed frequency 2 H3 05 3 0 AC Analog common 0 V Fig 6 6 Control Circuit Terminal During 9 step Operation Frequency Reference Frequency reference 8 Frequency reference 7 Frequenc reference 6 Frequency reference 5 Frequenc referen ce Frequency Frequency reference 3 reference Frequency ref Auxiliary erence 2 Auxil SPeed fre iary speed quency 2 frequency 1 Frequency reference 1 Master speed frequency Jog frequency Forward stop Multi step speed reference 1 Multi step speed reference 2 Multi step speed reference 3 Jog frequency selection Fig 6 7 Multi step speed reference Jog Frequency Selection Time Chart Varispeed G7 Function Block 9oU9J9 91 KouenbeJ4 jndui si jndui j9ejuoo uonpuny ninur jo pueuiuioo Aousnbay Bor 9Ory ors ueuM LL Lp puewwo Aouanbay Bof ue c el e9uo1eje1 peeds d s yN NW The following diagram shows the function block diagram of Varispeed G7 91 1b 9 e2uoJojo1 AouenbeJ4 st Lb G 92uoJojoJ Aouenbal4 P L LP pL 99uo1ojo1 Aouanbal4 L LP 92uoJojo1 Aouanbal4 ZL LP ZL 92uoJojo1 Aouanbal4 LL LP 92ue9Jo1 Aouanbas4 O1 LP OL 92ue19jo1
137. bd i j eona setting 4 ii S10 FEK t o 0o 9 P f is Acc dec time 1 bd Hs j i S11 Oo 0 rr LEE A Emergency stop NO S12 Hs 0 0 1 1 9 A pT I 1 H 1 CN5 NPN setting 24V 8mA IN E gin FM tot ow lsc mt Pb O D i NEM ro ld AC ii bog LEJI L 1 T 24v i EG a E G z Shield wire 7 connection terminal Pulse train input bd ki Napi 90RP Master speed pulse train o o MAG 4 3 Error contact output E j 0 to 32 kHz 3 kQ MB i i Frequency setting to o MES 250 VAC 10 mA min 1 A max Min load 2kQ adjustment lla MC 30 VDC 10 mA min 1 A max VDC ioma 5d B L o n dep 1 V Frequency setting power 3 0to 10 V i 15V 20 mA m 2kQ x OA1 Master speed reference oo Ms Multi function contact output 41020mA P il 0910 V 20 kQ M2j 250 VAC 10 mA min 1 A max ie load cC TTT 4 i 6 A2 Master speed reference o J 30 DC 10 mA min 1 A max 5 VDC 10 mA hg 4 to 20 mA 250 Q ur Running Oto 10V PF 0 to 10 V 20 kQ input 1 signal i AS Multi function anlog input Pq bd Pt AC Oto 10 V 20 KQ 4 1 O Open collector 1 FO OV Factory seting K x Default Zero uxiliary frequency we c bound C E speed o V e PCR 4 Open collector 2 Ls Def
138. can receive Inverter overheating pre alarms in units of 1 C The following overheating pre alarm warnings are available Stopping the Inverter as error protection and continuing operation with the alarm OH Radiation fins overheating on the Digital Operator flashing iRelated Constants Son TT m Setting Factory prin a Open BUS eater Display VOTE Range Seting Opera vir wih Jana Vec ya Reale 1 tor 2 Overheat pre Sets the detection temperature for alarm level the Inverter overheat detection L8 02 mo 500 loscC No A A A A A 4AEH OH Pre Alarm The pre alarm detects when the 130 Lvl heatsink temperature reaches the set value Operation Sets the operation for when the selection after Inverter overheat pre alarm goes overheat pre ON alarm 0 Decelerate to stop in deceleration time C1 02 1 Coast to stop L8 03 2 Fast stop in fast stop time C1 0 to 3 3 No A A A A A 4AFH 09 OH Pre Alarm 3 Continue operation Monitor Sel display only A fault will be given in setting 0 to 2 and a minor fault will be given in setting 3 The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity The value for 200 V Class Inverter of 0 4 kW is given 6 5 Input Terminal Functions This section explains input terminal functions which set operating methods by switching functions for the multi function contact input terminals S3 to S12 Tempora
139. compensation gain C3 01 during V f control A1 02 0 It is not used with the factory setting 4 Use the ASR constants C5 01 to C5 05 in their factory settings when using V f control with PG A1 02 1 Vibration may occur if these constants are changed greatly from their factory settings 5 The torque and speed response of high resistance high slip motors are insufficient Use appropriate adjustments to improve them On the contrary low resistance low slip motors are easily subject to hunting and vibration Here too use appropriate adjustments to improve them 6 The current during startup may increase when C4 02 Torque compensation primary delay time constant is increased Check the current during star tup while adjusting this constant Reducing Shock during Elevating Machine Start Stop Acceleration and Deceleration When the riding comfort during start stop acceleration and deceleration is of high importance as it is for ele vators in which people ride adjust the following constants m S curve Characteristics Acceleration Deceleration Times High speed C2 02 2 03 Output frequency d as Low speed C2 03 xC2 04 C2 01 gt Acceleration time Deceleration time DC injection braking when stopping Zero speed control for flux vector control 1 P 1 The factory setting for C2 04 S curve characteristic time at deceleration end is 0 00 second while the fac P tory setting for a
140. computer using DeviceNet communications to start stop Inverter opera tion read set parameters and read set monitor constants out put frequencies output currents etc Document Number ProfiBus DP Communica tions Inter face Board SI P ProfiBus DP Communica tions Inter face Board SI P1 Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer using ProfiBus DP communications to start stop Inverter operation read set parameters and read set monitor constants output frequencies output currents etc InterBus S Communica tions Inter face Board SI R Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer using InterBus S communications to start stop Inverter opera tion read set parameters and read set monitor constants out put frequencies output currents etc CANopen Communica tions Inter face Board SI SI Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer using CANopen communications to start stop Inverter opera tion read set parameters and read set monitor constants out put frequencies output currents etc ControlNet Communica tions Inter face Board SI U Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer using ControlNet communications to start stop Inverter opera tion read set parameters and read set monitor constants out put frequencies output currents etc CC Link Communica tions Inter face Board SI C Used to communic
141. constant groups and refer to drive mode using the Digital Operator If you set one of the constants H1 01 to H1 10 multi function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selec tion to 1B write constants permitted you can write constants from the digital operator when the terminal that has been set is ON When the set terminal is OFF writing constants other than the frequency reference is prohibited You can however reference constants Name Control Methods Open Loop Vector 1 Flux Vec tor Description vif Display TER with PG Constant access Used to set the constant access level level set read 0 Monitoring only Monitoring drive mode and setting A1 01 and A1 04 Used to select user constant Only constants set in A2 01 to A2 32 can be read and set Advanced Constants can be read and set in both quick programming mode and advanced programming A mode Access Level Setting a Password When a password is set in A1 05 if the set values in A1 04 and A1 05 do not match you cannot refer to or change the settings of constants A1 01 to A1 03 or A2 01 to A2 32 You can prohibit the setting and referencing of all constants except A1 00 by using the password function in combination with setting A1 01 to 0 Monitor only iRelated Constants Name Control Methods Factory Vif foe Flux Setting with P Vec PG MEE tor Display Description Cons
142. control Baseblock i b2 03 b1 05 3 d Zero speed Injection brake i time at start Baseblock b2 03 i ib2 04 Baseblock Fig 6 14 Deceleration to Stop for Flux Vector Control Setting Precautions When using flux vector control the zero speed control starts when motor speed drops to b2 01 during deceleration Also the setting b2 01 E1 09 is possible The current level during injection brake time at start is the value of E2 03 motor no load current Accord ingly b2 02 is invalid in flux vector control ilCoast to Stop If the Stop Command is input 1 e the Run Command is turned OFF when b1 03 is set to 1 the Inverter out put voltage is interrupted The motor coasts to a stop at the deceleration rate that counterbalances damage to the machine and inertia including the load Run Command ON OFF Output frequency Inverter output freqeuencty interrupted Fig 6 15 Coast to Stop Stopping Methods NM Q After the Stop Command is input Run Commands are ignored until the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 has elapsed INFO BDC Braking Stop If the Stop Command is input i e the Run Command is turned OFF when b1 03 is set to 2 a wait is made for the time set in L2 03 Minimum Baseblock BB Time and then the DC injection brake current set in b2 02 is sent to the motor to apply a DC injection brake to stop the motor The DC injection brake time is deter mi
143. control method 1 The analog input limit Speed Limit from a frequency refer Sel ence 2 Limited by d5 04 constant setting values Speed limit Set the speed limit during torque control as a percentage of the maximum output fre quency This function is enabled when Speed Lmt d5 03 is set to 2 Directions Value are as follows Run Command direction Run Command opposite direction Speed limit Set the speed limit bias as a bias percentage of the maximum output frequency Bias is given to the specified Speed Lmt speed limit It can be used to Bias adjust the margin for the speed limit 5 30 Name Display Speed torque control switching timer Ref Hold Time Description Set the delay time from input ting the multi function input speed torque control change from On to OFF or OFF to ON until the control is actually changed in ms units This function is enabled when the multi function input speed torque control change is set In the speed torque control switching timer the analog inputs hold the values of when the speed torque control change changes Always be sure to allow time for this process to finish completely Setting Range Factory Setting User Constant Tables _ Control Methods Vif with PG Open Loop Vec tor 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vec tor 2 Rotation dire
144. control Outputs the amount of operation proportional to the deviation You cannot however set the deviation to zero using P control alone I control Outputs the amount of operation that integrates the deviation Used for matching feedback value to the target value I control is not suited however to rapid variations D control Outputs the amount of operation derived from the deviation Can respond promptly to rapid variations BPID Control Operation To understand the differences between each PID control operation P I and D the variation in the amount of operation output frequency is as shown in the following diagram when the deviation i e the difference between the target value and feedback value is fixed Deviation Time PID control Amount of operation control D control P control Time Fig 6 63 PID Control Operation BPID Control Applications The following table shows examples of PID control applications using the Inverter Applica Control Details Example of Sen tion sor Used Feeds back machinery speed information and matches speed to the target value Inputs speed information from other machinery as the target value and performs synchronous control using the actual speed feedback Speed Con trol Tachometer genera tor Pressure Control Feeds back pressure information and performs constant pressure control Pressure sensor ontro Flow Rate Control Feeds back flo
145. control selection Frequency reference 3 Torque reference delay time Frequency reference 4 Speed limit selection Frequency reference 5 Speed limit Frequency reference 6 Speed limit bias Frequency reference 7 Speed torque control switching timer Frequency reference 8 Rotation direction limit operation selection Frequency reference 9 Field weakening level Frequency reference 10 Field frequency Frequency reference 11 Field forcing function selection Frequency reference 12 AOR time constant Frequency reference 13 Field forcing limit Frequency reference 14 Input voltage setting Frequency reference 15 V f pattern selection Frequency reference 16 Max output frequency Jog frequency reference Max voltage Frequency reference upper limit Base frequency Frequency reference lower limit Mid output frequency Master speed reference lower limit Mid output frequency voltage 10 32 Table 10 7 User Constants Continued Min output frequency Fac tory Setting Motor 2 rated current Fac tory Setting Min output frequency voltage Motor 2 rated slip Mid output frequency 2 Motor 2 no load current Mid output frequency voltage 2 Motor 2 number of poles number of poles Base voltage Motor 2 line to line resistance Motor rated current Mot
146. deceleration time changes S curve acceleration deceleration 3 wire sequence autotuning rotational or stationary dwell functions cooling fan ON OFF control slip compensation torque compensation jump frequencies upper and lower limits for frequency references DC braking for starting and stopping high slip braking PID control with sleep function energy saving control MEMOBUS communications RS 485 422 19 2 kbps maximum fault reset function copying droop control flux vec tor control only torque control speed torque control switching etc Main control functions Motor protection Protection by electronic thermal overload relay Instantaneous overcurrent protection Stops at approx 200 of rated output current Fuse blown protection Stops for fuse blown Overload protection 150 of rated output current per minute 200 Class Inverter Stops when main circuit DC voltage is approximately above 410 V Overvoltage protection 400 Class Inverter Stops when main circuit DC voltage is approximately above 820 V 200 Class Inverter Stops when main circuit DC voltage is approximately below 190 V Undervoltage protection 400 Class Inverter Stops when main circuit DC voltage is approximately below 380 V Momentary power loss Stops for 15 ms or more ridethrough With a suitable constant setting operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s Protective functions Cooling fin overheatin
147. drive mode and will not operate If the MENU Key is pressed during operation the Inverter will not start even if the Run Command is sent at the next operation Press the DATA ENTER Key Try turning the power supply off and on again Set b8 01 Run Command selection in programming modes to 1 Cannot oper ate to remain in the drive mode and continue operation even if the MENU Key or ESC Key is pressed The LOCAL REMOTE Key was pressed If the LOCAL REMOTE Key is pressed while the Inverter is stopped the Inverter will switch to Digital Operator operation and cannot be operated with the external input terminals Press the LOCAL REMOTE Key Try turning the power supply off and on again Set 02 01 LOCAL REMOTE Key enable disable to 0 Disabled to dis able the LOCAL REMOTE Key The STOP Key was pressed If the STOP Key is pressed during opera tion the Inverter will decelerate to a stop Turn the Run Command off and then on again Set o2 02 STOP key during control cir cuit terminal operation to 0 Disabled to disable the STOP Key Wrong selection of a 2 wire or a 3 wire sequence If 0 is set to one of H1 01 to H1 10 a 3 wire sequence is set Make sure that H1 01 to H1 10 are set to a value other than 0 to use a 2 wire sequence Reverse run prohibited is selected If b1 04 Prohibition of reverse operation is set to 1 Reverse disabled the motor will not star
148. electronic thermal value is greater than 90 of the detection level This output function is valid when the motor overload protection function is enabled L1 01 1 This output can be used to warn of overheating before the protection function itself operates Inverter Overheat OH Pre alarm Setting 20 The cooling fin temperature is less than the OH Pre Alarm Level set in L8 02 The cooling fin temperature exceeds the OH Pre Alarm Level set in L8 02 This output function indicates that the temperature of the cooling fins reaches the temperature set in L8 02 the Inverter overheating alarm detection level Speed reference limit Setting 31 Other than ON condition Enables the speed reference limit in the following conditions During flux vector control method 1 Frequency reference Frequency reference upper limit d2 01 Frequency reference lt Frequency reference lower limit d2 02 Frequency reference Output frequency lower limit of the multi function analog input Setting 9 2 The frequency reference is less than the Min output frequency E1 09 and b1 05 is set to 1 2 or 3 Zero servo End Setting 33 The zero servo command isn t being input or zero servo position control hasn t been completed The position has been brought within the zero servo completion width b9 02 after the zero servo command was input 6 This output function indicates that zero servo position control h
149. emergency Stop Command has been input operation cannot be restarted until the Inverter has stopped To cancel the emergency stop turn OFF the Run Command and emergency Stop Command 6 iRelated Parameters Name Control Methods pum Change 5 T Setting Factory during VIf pen stant Description Range Setting Opera Loop Number Display tion with Vector PG 1 Flux Vec tor Emergency stop The deceleration time when the time multi function input Emergency fast stop is set to ON This function can be used as a Fast Stop Time stopping method when a fault has been detected The setting range for acceleration deceleration times depends on the setting of C1 10 Acceleration deceleration Time Setting Unit If C1 10 is set to 0 the setting range is 0 00 to 600 00 s 6 17 Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics This section explains the acceleration and deceleration characteristics of the Inverter Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times Acceleration time indicates the time taken for the output frequency to climb from 0 to 100 Deceleration time indicates the time taken for the output frequency to reduce to 0 The factory setting of the acceleration time is C1 01 and the factory setting of the deceleration time is C1 02 Related Parameters Name Display Acceleration time 1 Accel Time 1 Description Sets the acceleration time to
150. for no voltage contacts or NPN transistors These are the default settings For PNP transistor sequence connections 24V common and sourcing mode or to provide a 24 V exter nal power supply refer to Table 2 13 8 The multi function analog output is a dedicated meter output for an analog frequency meter ammeter volt meter wattmeter etc Do not use this output for feedback control or for any other control purpose 9 DC reactors to improve the input power factor are built into 200 V Class Inverters for 18 5 to 110 kW and 400 V Class Inverters for 18 5 to 300 kW A DC reactor is thus an option only for Inverters for 15 kW or less 10 Set constant L8 01 to 1 when using a breaking resistor model ERF When using a Braking Resistor Unit a shutoff sequence for the power supply must be made using a thermal relay trip 11 The minimum permissible load of a multi function contact output and an error contact output is 10 mA Use a multi function open collector output for a load less than 10 mA 12 Do not ground nor connect the AC terminal on the control circuit to the unit Doing so may result in a mal function or a breakdown of the Inverter 13 If turning off the power only for the main circuit but leaving the power ON for the control circuit use a sep arate power supply for the control circuit and a specially designed Inverter which are sold as options o 14 X indicates shield wire and fre indicates twisted pair shield wire Terminal Bloc
151. frequency voltage 2 Mid Voltage B Base voltage Base Voltage The factory setting will c ee x ox 0X tod OD Po o Description Set only to fine adjust V f for the output range Normally this setting is not required Factory Setting Control Methods Vit with PG Individual Functions Open Loop Vector Open Loop Vector Flux Vec 1 tor 2 These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double ange when the control method is changed The open loop vector factory settings are given El 11 and El 12 are disregarded when set to 0 0 E1 13 is set to the same value as E1 05 by autotuning The setting range for open loop vector 2 control is 0 to 66 0 0 to 132 0 for PRG 1030 iSetting Inverter Input Voltage Set the Inverter input voltage correctly in E1 01 to match the power supply voltage This set value will be the standard value for the protection function and similar functions The overvoltage detection level OV and the braking transistor operation level BTR vary depending on the input voltage as shown in the following table Inverter Class E1 01 Setting OV Detection Level BTR Operation Level 200 V Class All values Approx 410 V Approx 394 V 400 V or more Approx 820 V Approx 788 V 6 400 V Cl m Less than 400 V Approx 720 V Approx 682 V These are values of opera
152. function operates the motor while avoiding resonance caused by characteristic frequen cies in the machinery This function is effective in creating a frequency reference dead band During constant speed operation operation within the jump frequency range is prohibited Smooth operation still used during acceleration and deceleration i e jumps are not performed iRelated Constants Name Control Methods Change __ 4 6 Setting Factory during Vit ed Flux ur Range Setting Opera Oop oop 9 i with Vector Mee Vector tion PG 1 tor 2 Con stant F Description Number Display Jump fre Set the center values of the jump quency 1 frequencies in Hz This function is disabled by set ting the jump frequency to 0 Hz Jump fre Always ensure that the following quency 2 applies d3 01 2 d3 02 2 d3 03 Jump Freq 1 Jump Freq 2 Operation in the jump frequency range is prohibited but during acceleration and deceleration speed changes smoothly without Jump Freq 3 jump Jump fre quency 3 Jump fre Sets the jump frequency band quency width width in Hz Jump Band The jump frequency will be the width jump frequency d3 04 The relationship between the output frequency and the jump frequency reference is as follows 6 31 Output frequency Jump frequency width d3 04 VE f i o refe
153. have all turned OFF and then wait until at least five minutes has elapsed before beginning the inspection Be sure not to touch terminals right after the power has been turned off Doing so can result in electric shock External terminals mounting bolts connec tors etc Table 8 1 Periodic Inspections Inspection Are all screws and bolts tight Corrective Procedure Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly Are connectors tight Reconnect the loose connectors Heatsinks Are the fins dirty or dusty Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 39 2 x 10 to 58 8 x 10 Pa 4 to 6 kgecm Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the PCBs Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 39 2 x 10 to 58 8 x 10 Pa 4 to 6 kgecm Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean Cooling fan Is there any abnormal noise or vibration or has the total operating time exceeded 20 000 hours Replace the cooling fan Power elements Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the elements Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 39 2 x 10 to 58 8 x 10 Pa 4 to 6 kgecm Smoothing capacitor Are there any irregularities such as dis coloration or odor Replace the capacitor or Inverter Maintenance and Inspection w Periodic Maintenance of Parts The Inverter is c
154. injection brake E1 09 b2 01 DC injection brake DC injection braking at DC injection braking at startup is used for flux startup is used for flux vector control vector control If you input the DC injection brake command from an external terminal or if the Run Com mand and jog command are input the DC injection brake will be disabled and operation will resume Fig 6 18 DC Injection Brake Time Chart Stopping Methods NM i Changing the DC Injection Brake Current Using an Analog Input If you set H3 09 Multi function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection or H3 05 Multi function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection to 6 DC injection brake current you can change the DC injection brake current level using the analog input At 10 V input voltage or 20 mA input current 100 of the Inverter rated current will be applied DC injection brake voltage level 100 Peer eee ee eee eee eee ee tee Inverter rated current 0 10 V 4 20 mA Fig 6 19 DC Injection Brake Current Using an Analog Input Using an Emergency Stop Set a multi function input terminal H1 LILT to 15 or 17 emergency stop to decelerate to a stop at the decel eration time set in C1 09 If inputting the emergency stop with an NO contact set the multi function input ter minal H1 O1D to 15 and if inputting the emergency stop with an NC contact set the multi function input terminal H1 O1D to 17 After the
155. is OFF Injury may occur AN CAUTION Don t touch the radiation fins heatsink braking resistor or Braking Resistor Unit These can become very hot Otherwise a burn injury may occur Be sure that the motor and machine is within the applicable ranges before starting operation Otherwise an injury may occur Provide a separate holding brake if necessary Always construct the external sequence to confirm that the holding brake is activated in the event of an emergency a power failure or an abnormality in the Inverter Failure to observe this caution can result in injury If using an Inverter with an elevator take safety measures on the elevator to prevent the elevator from dropping Failure to observe this caution can result in injury Don t check signals while the Inverter is running Otherwise the equipment may be damaged Be careful when changing Inverter settings The Inverter is factory set to suitable settings For the Inverters in the 400 V class of 55 kW or more however select the correct power supply voltage jumper according to the input voltage Otherwise the equipment may be damaged B Maintenance and Inspection A WARNING Do not touch the Inverter terminals Some of the terminals carry high voltages and are extremely dangerous Doing so can result in electric shock Always have the protective cover in place when power is being supplied to the Inverter When attaching the cover always turn OFF
156. is turned ON is used as the frequency reference ON ON ON Sample hold command E 100 j D0 4 100 msec imsec imsec Analog input A Frequency reference Fig 6 54 Sample Hold Analog Frequency Precautions When setting and executing sample and hold for analog frequency references observe the following precau tions Setting Precautions When using sample hold of analog frequency reference you cannot use the following commands at the same time If these commands are used at the same time operation error OPEO3 invalid multi function input selec tion will occur 6 Acceleration Deceleration Ramp Hold command EN UP DOWN command Trim Control Increase Decrease command Application Precautions When performing sample hold of analog frequency references be sure to store references of 100 ms mini mum If the reference time is less than 100 ms the frequency reference will not be held The analog frequency reference that is held will be deleted when the power supply is turned OFF Switching Operations between a Communications Option Board and Control Circuit Terminals You can switch reference input between the Communications Option Board and the control circuit terminals Set one of the constants H1 01 to H1 10 multi function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection to 2 Option Inverter selection to enable switching reference input using the terminal ON OFF status when
157. it eas ier to read and set user constants The Inverter is equipped with 5 modes The 5 modes and their primary functions are shown in the Table 3 3 Table 3 3 Modes Mode Primary function s The Inverter can be run in this mode Drive mode Use this mode when monitoring values such as frequency references or output cur rent displaying fault information or displaying the fault history Use this mode to reference and set the minimum user constants to operate the Quick programming mode Inverter e g the operating environment of the Inverter and Digital Operator Advanced programming mode Use this mode to reference and set all user constants Use this mode to read set user constants that have been changed from their factory set values Verify mode Use this mode when running a motor with unknown motor constants in the vector 3 Autotuning mode control method The motor constants are calculated and set automatically z This mode can also be used to measure only the motor line to line resistance Always perform autotuning with the motor before operating using vector control Autotuning mode will not be displayed during operation or when an error has occurred The default setting of the Inverter is for open loop vector 1 control A1 02 2 3 6 Switching Modes The mode selection display will appear when the MENU Key is pressed from a monitor or setting display
158. ity and voltage Default to Default 3 to 5 V Increase the setting if torque is insufficient at low speeds Reduce the setting if shock at startup is large Open loop vector 1 control A1 02 2 Speed feedback detec tion control AFR gain N2 01 Increasing torque and speed response Controlling hunting and vibration in mid dle range speeds 10 to 40 Hz 0 50 to 2 00 Reduce the setting if torque or speed response is slow Increase the setting if hunt ing or vibration occurs Torque compensation primary delay time constant C4 02 Increasing torque and speed response Controlling hunting and vibration Reduce the setting 1f torque or speed response is slow Increase the setting if hunt ing or vibration occurs Slip compensation pri mary delay time C3 02 Increasing speed response mproving speed sta bility Reduce the setting if speed response is slow Increase the setting if the speed is not stable Slip compensation gain C3 01 Improving speed accuracy 0 5 to 1 5 Increase the setting if speed response is slow Reduce the setting if the speed is too fast Control Method Table 4 4 Adjusted User Constants Continued Name Constant Number Performance Reducing motor magnetic noise Factory Setting Recom mended Setting Adjustment Suggestions ER Adjustment Method In
159. kW or less in a panel Refer to Page 1 17 on how to remove the protection covers Observe the following precautions when mounting the Inverter Install the Inverter in a clean location free from oil mist and dust It can be installed in a totally enclosed panel that is completely shielded from floating dust When installing or operating the Inverter always take special care so that metal powder oil water or other foreign matter does not get into the Inverter Do not install the Inverter on combustible material such as wood Install the Inverter in a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materials Install the Inverter in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids Install the Inverter in a location without excessive oscillation Install the Inverter in a location free from chlorides Install the Inverter in a location not in direct sunlight Controlling the Ambient Temperature To enhance the reliability of operation the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme temperature increases If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment such as a box use a cooling fan or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 45 C Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal powder produced by drilling Always remove the cover from the Inverter after completing installation Ot
160. manner Mid Volt 3 02 FMAX 2 E3 04 FA gt E3 age 05 FB gt E3 07 FMIN Motor 2 min out put fre quency FMIN Min Fre quency Motor 2 min out put fre quency voltage VMIN Min Volt age 1 These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double 2 The factory setting will change when the control method is changed The open loop vector 1 factory settings are given 3 The setting range for open loop vector 2 control is 0 to 66 0 0 to 132 0 for PRG 1030 5 37 5 38 Motor 2 Setup E4 User constants for motor 2 are shown in the following table Con stant Number Name Display Motor 2 rated current Motor Rated FLA Description Sets the motor rated current in 1 A units These set values will become the reference values for motor protection torque limits and torque control This constant is automatically set during autotuning Setting Range Factory Setting Control Methods Vit with PG Open Loop Vec tor 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vec tor 2 Motor 2 rated slip Motor Rated Slip Sets the motor rated slip in Hz units These set values will become the reference values for slip compensation This constant is automatically set during autotuning Motor 2 no load current No Load Current S
161. mode NO contact NC contact Detection mode Normal during operation PID control integral reset reset when reset command is input or when stopped during PID control PID control integral hold ON Hold Multi step speed reference 4 PID soft starter ON OFF PID input characteristics switch DC injection braking command ON Performs DC injection braking External search command 1 ON Speed search from maximum output frequency External search command 2 ON Speed search from set frequency Field weakening command ON Field weakening control set for d6 01 and d6 02 External speed search command 3 NC contact KEB deceleration at momentary power loss command NC contact KEB deceleration at momentary power loss command NO contact Communications test mode Pass is displayed when the communications test is passed High slip braking HSB Speed torque control change ON Torque control Zero servo command ON Zero servo Speed control ASR proportional gain switch ON C5 03 Polarity reversing command for external torque reference Brake ON signal Brake Signal Ifthe multi function input is set to 79 and the input value is closed operation will be performed with a speed specification of 0 User Constant Tables w eee B Multi function Contact Outputs H2 User constants for multi function outputs are sho
162. motor and Inverter must be connected 1 1 The speed search must be performed at a frequency of 130 Hz or less and with a motor with the same number of frames as or one frame less than the Inverter capacity During high slip braking motor loss increases so use a high slip braking frequency of 5 ED or less and a braking time of 90 seconds or less Once high slip braking has started the motor cannot be restarted until it has stopped Feed forward control is a function that improves the proportional gain of the motor speed in relation to the change in the speed reference Adjust the response to interference loads using the speed controller ASR constants The torque limit function will not operate during acceleration or deceleration during soft start transition when using a control method such as open loop vector 1 control Even if the motor speed drops due to torque limiting while set to a fixed speed the speed will not fall below the minimum frequency and the motor will not slip into reverse rotation These conditions also apply to open loop vector 2 control and other application functions iPrecautions for Open loop Vector 2 Control PRG 1020 only In open loop vector 2 control two speed estimators are switched between and if used at a maximum fre quency exceeding 70 Hz there may be instances of shock occurring at the switchover If switching shock is a problem reduce the switching frequency N4 11 and N4 28 If the problem still occ
163. multi function input speed a 0 No No No No A A 29FH torque control change is set In Ref Hold Time the speed torque control switch ing timer the analog inputs hold the values of when the speed torque control change changes Always be sure to allow time for this process to finish completely Rotation 0 Disabled direction limit 1 Enabled operation Usually use a setting of 1 do ee ena NR Oorl 1 No No No No No A 2A6H Be sure to enable this setting Drctn SpdLmt when rotating the motor in the Sel same direction as the speed limit winding operation Me s 0 0 to 10V selection ter 1 10 to 10V H3 04 minal A3 11 bit polarity positive Wort No i A A A A ASH Term A3 Signal negative input Multi function analog input terminal A3 f H3 0s function selec Select multi function analog input Oto IF 2 No A A A A A 414H tion function for terminal A3 Terminal A3 Sel js terminal Sets the input gain level when H3 06 POTUM nel 1000 gs falala Jafa asn Terminal A3 Set according to the 100 value 1000 0 Gain selected from H3 05 Bias terminal A3 Sets the input gain level when 100 0 H3 07 9 Vis DUE to 0 0 Ys A A A A A 416H Terminal A3 Set according to the 100 value 100 0 Bias selected from H3 05 Signal level 0 0 to 10V selection 1 10V to 10V 13 08 terminal A2 2 4 to 20 mA 9 bit input 0to2 2 No A P 5 P A 417H Switch current and voltage input Term A2 S
164. of the PG can be set in user constant F1 05 PG Rotation The factory preset if for motor forward rotation A phase advancement Fig 2 29 PG X2 Wiring 2 37 Wiring Terminal Blocks Use no more than 100 meters of wiring for PG encoder signal lines and keep them separate from power lines Use shielded twisted pair wires for pulse inputs and pulse output monitor wires and connect the shield to the shield connection terminal BWire Sizes Same for All Models Terminal wire sizes are shown in Table 2 19 Table 2 19 Wire Sizes Terminal 2 Terminal Screws Wire Thickness mm Wire Type Shielded twisted pair wire Shielded polyethylene covered vinyl sheath cable KPEV S by Hitachi Electric Wire or Shield connection terminal 0 5 to 2 equivalent Pulse generator power supply Pulse input terminal Pulse monitor output terminal Stranded wire 0 5 to 1 25 Single wire 0 5 to 1 25 i Straight Solderless Terminals for Control Circuit Terminals We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability Refer to Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes for specifications i Closed loop Connector Sizes and Tightening Torque The closed loop connectors and tightening torques for various wire sizes are shown in Table 2 20 Table 2 20 Closed loop Connectors and Tightening Torques 2 Terminal ATOMS Crimp Terminal Size Tightening Torque
165. ouenbeJ4 60 LP 6 eouoJojo1 ouenboJ4 9 eoueJojo1 ouenboJ4 4 9ouoJojo1 Aouanbas4 90 LP 9 eoueJojo1 ouenboJ4 g e2ueJojo1 ouenboJ4 p 9oueJojo1 Aouanbal4 eouaJojo1 fouenbeJ4 z eouoJojo1 Aouanbal4 aouasajas fouenbeJ4 pwu Jewo Aouanbay 19jse A 0 cP JeyeAu yoo g uonounJ 75 peedsueA 8 9 Bi4 S9A S A SAA SAA pesn jou jndui Bojeuv 44 qu AOL OOL SPA SPA ON ON anbo eAneBeu eAnisod Sr A 013 9600 LX SPA SPA ON ON esu dwos anbioy vL d A OLH 001F S9A ON ON ON anbioyoouonoionbio l AOLP O0L SeA SEA ON ON anbioy ennesouaboy Zt A OL 00L SPA SPA ON ON quin anbsoy aaneBan LL AOL 00L SPA SAA ON ON jui ANI eAnisod OL A OL3 9600LT S9A S9A S9A SAA 1ndur eunjezeduie ozo 30 A 0L3 9500 Lt S8A S A SOA SOA z seieq Aouenbeg4 Go A OLH OOLF S9A S9A SOA S9A ane 39612 Aid 20 A OLH 001LF SPA S A SAA S9A oeqpeej Ald 80 A 0L 9500L S9A S A SAA SOA ouenbeJj dunf vo AOLP ODL Se 24 SeA A souessjeu Rouanbasd 60 unu Buunp AOLPAO0L ON ON S9A SPA lenoj uoquenaid eis 80 AOL SO0 SA saa sea SA l anbioyiepunjenbiouewo 29 jueuuno Bupjeuq AOL 500L ON SA S9A SOA uonelur5q 90 ALI O01 saa sea sea sey FUSUIPC ORP co AOL
166. output frequency is different from the base frequency set the maximum output frequency E1 04 after autotuning Fig 4 3 Settings According to the Control Method iSetting the Control Method Any of the following five control methods can be set Control Method Constant Ser Basic Control Main Applications ting Variable speed control particularly control of multiple motors with one Inverter and replacing existing Invert ers V f control A1 02 0 Voltage frequency ratio fixed control Applications requiring high precision speed control using a PG on the machine side Voltage frequency ratio fixed control VERSO MA EG Uta Std with speed compensation using a PG Variable speed control applications Op n loopveetor 11 A102752 Current vector control without a PG requiring speed and torque accuracy cone factory setting using vector control without a PG Very high performance control with a Flux vector control A1 02 3 Flux vector control PG simple servo drives bigh preci sion speed control torque control and torque limiting Very high performance control with out a PG torque control without a PG torque limiting applications requiring Current vector control without a PG Open loop vector 2 with an ASR speed controller A1 02 4 control Always perform rotational autotun yS p a 1 200 speed control range without a 8 PG Note With vector control the motor and I
167. set b1 02 Run Command selection to 1 Control circuit terminal iRelated Constants Name Control Methods TT Open Displ Description d s n Isplay witl Vector ec PG 1 tor 6 Frequency ref po erence upper limit Set the output frequency upper limit as a percent taking the max Ref Upper output frequency to be 100 Limit Frequency ref erence lower 2E Sets the output frequency lower limit limit as a percentage of the maxi Ref Lower mum output frequency Limit Master speed reference lower limit Set the master speed reference lower limit as a percent taking the max output frequency to be Refl Lower 10095 Limit Precautions When setting and using UP and DOWN commands observe the following precautions Setting Precautions If multi function input terminals S3 to S12 are set as follows operation error OPE03 Invalid multi function input selection will occur Only either the UP command or DOWN command has been set UP DOWN commands and Acceleration Deceleration Ramp Hold have been allocated at the same time 6 19 _ Application Precautions Frequency outputs using UP DOWN commands are limited by the frequency reference upper and lower limits set in constants d2 01 to d2 03 Here frequency references from analog frequency reference termi nal Al becomes the frequency reference lower limit If using a combination of the frequency r
168. setting will change when the control method is changed The open loop vector 1 factory settings are given 2 Applicable for G7 Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 or later User Constant Tables 5 BTimer Function b4 User constants for timer functions are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Con Open Open Factory Vif Loop Flux Loop Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 stant Description Number Display Timer func Sets the timer function out tion ON put ON delay time dead delay time band for the timer function input in 1 second units Delay ON Enabled when a timer func tion is set in H1 O00 or H2 oo Timer Timer func Sets the timer function out tion OFF put OFF delay time dead delay time band for the timer function input in 1 second units Delay OFF Enabled when a timer func tion is set in H1 O00 or H2 Oo Timer BPID Control b5 User constants for PID control are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Fact Open Open Description AG Ory V f Loop Flux Loop E Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Display PID control Disabled method Enabled Deviation is D selection controlled 2 Enabled Feedback value is D controlled PID control enabled frequency reference PID output D control of deviation PID control enable
169. termi nal A3 function selection Gain terminal A3 Trace sampling from Communica tions Option Board Bias terminal A3 Torque reference torque limit selection from optical option Signal level selection terminal A2 Operation selection after SI T WDT error Multi function analog input termi nal A2 function selection Number of SI T BUS error detec tion Gain terminal A2 Terminal S3 function selection Bias terminal A2 Terminal S4 function selection Analog input filter time constant Table 10 7 User Constants Continued Monitor selection terminal FM Fac tory Setting Alarm operation selection during motor overheating Fac tory Setting Gain terminal FM Motor overheating operation selec tion Bias terminal FM Motor temperature input filter time constant Monitor selection terminal AM Momentary power loss detection Gain terminal AM Momentary power loss ridethru time Bias terminal AM Min baseblock time Analog output 1 signal level selec tion Voltage recovery time Analog output 2 signal level selec tion Undervoltage detection level Slave address KEB deceleration time Communication speed selection Momentary recovery time Communication parity selection Frequency reduction gain at KEB start Stopping method after communi cation error Stall prevent
170. the adjustments as follows Ifvibration occurs with light load increase the setting Ifthe motor stalls reduce the setting If the setting is too large the volt age will be too suppressed and the motor may stall 1 Applicable for G7 Series Inverters with software version PRG 1034 and later Hunting pre vention time constant Hunt Prev Time Set the hunting prevention pri mary delay time in units of ms 2 The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0 4 kW is given Improved Operating Efficiency _ lt Stabilizing Speed Speed Feedback Detection Function The speed feedback detection control AFR function measures the stability of the speed when a load is sud denly applied by calculating the amount of fluctuation of the torque current feedback value and compensat ing the output frequency with the amount of fluctuation Related Constants Con stant Number Name Display Speed feed back detection control AFR gain Description Set the internal speed feedback detection control gain using the multiplication function Normally there is no need to make this setting Adjust this constant as follows If hunting occurs increase the set value Ifresponse is low decrease the set value Adjust the setting by 0 05 at a time while checking the response
171. the decimal point Set the number of digits below the decimal point to display Example When the max output frequency value is 200 0 set 12000 iSelecting Input Terminal Functions for the DI 16H2 Digital Reference Board The frequency reference from the DI 16H2 Board is determined by the setting of F3 01 and the 12 16 bit switch on the option board The possible settings are listed in the following table Options 12 bit Binary 16 bit Binary 3 digit BCD with 4 digit BCD with 5 digit BCD with with Sign with Sign Sign Sign out Sign F3 01 7 F3 01 7 F3 01 0 to 5 F3 01 0 to 5 F3 01 6 S1 12 bit S1 16 bit S1 12 bit S1 16 bit S1 16 bit Terminal Bit 1 2 Bit 1 2 grein ME BCD digit 1 Bit 1 2 Bit 1 2 BCD digit 1 BCD digit 1 0 2 4 6 8 Bit 1 22 Bit 1 22 0 to 9 0 to 9 Bit 1 2 Bit 1 23 Bit 1 24 Bit 1 2 BCD digit 2 gt i 0 to 9 Bit 1 2 Bit 1 2 BCD digit 2 BCD digit 2 Bit 1 2 Bit 1 26 0 to 9 0 to 9 Bit 1 27 Bit 1 27 Bit 1 25 Bit 1 25 BCD digit 3 0 to 9 2 9 2 9 Bit 1 2 Bit 1 2 BCD digit 3 BCD digit3 Bit 1 219 Bit 1 219 0 to 9 0 to 9 Bit 1 21 Bit 1 2 12 Bit 1 27 BCD digit 4 0 to 9 13 Bit 1 27 BCD digit 4 Bit 1 2 4 0 0 3 Bit 1
172. there is a short circuit between the following terminals A short circuit will damage the output transistor B1 3 gt U V W 2U VW Corrective Actions Replace the Inverter after correct ing the cause OV DC Bus Overvolt Main Circuit Overvoltage The main circuit DC voltage exceeded the overvoltage detection level 200 V Class Approx 410 V 400 V Class Approx 820 V E1 01 gt 400 V Approx 720 V E1 01 lt 400 V The deceleration time is too short and the regenerative energy from the motor is too large Increase the deceleration time or connect a braking resistor or Braking Resistor Unit Alterna tively enable set to 1 the stall prevention selection during decel eration L3 04 Motor ground fault Ground fault current flowed to the capacitor in the control circuit of the Inverter through the power supply Check the output cable relay ter minal or motor terminal box and correct the cause of ground fault Incorrect constant setting for speed search The speed search can be performed during momentary power loss recov ery and auto restart after a fault Use the speed search function Adjust the settings of the Speed search operating current b3 02 and Speed search deceleration time b3 03 Use the estimated speed search function Perform stationary autotuning for line to line resis tance only Improper PG cable connection Check to see if the
173. thermal overload relay Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block Input power supply can be connected to any terminal R S or T on the terminal block the phase sequence of input power supply is irrelevant to the phase sequence Installing an AC Reactor or DC Reactor 2 If the Inverter is connected to a large capacity power transformer 600 kW or more or the phase advancing m capacitor is switched an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit causing the con verter unit to break down To prevent this install an optional AC Reactor on the input side of the Inverter or a DC reactor to the DC reac tor connection terminals This also improves the power factor on the power supply side Installing a Surge Absorber Always use a surge absorber or diode for inductive loads near the Inverter These inductive loads include mag netic contactors electromagnetic relays solenoid valves solenoids and magnetic brakes Installing a Noise Filter on Power Supply Side Install a noise filter to eliminate noise transmitted between the power line and the Inverter e Correct Noise Filter Installation Power MCCB supply ag _ M Noise os T O lfilter Inverter n 6 OM MCCB 6 OM Other SOM controllers Use a special purpose noise filter for Inverters Fig 2 7 Correct Power supply Noise Filter Installation 2 17 ncorrec
174. time continues while the PID control target value is at an insufficient level to operate the PID sleep function When the PID sleep delay time continues and the PID control target value is above the PID sleep function operation level Inverter operation will automatically resume When PID control is disabled the PID sleep function is also disabled When using the PID sleep function select decelerate to stop or coast to stop as the stopping method The PID sleep time chart is shown below PID target value Sleep operation levelibss15 Nee ie ee m iem m c meds Sleep operation i Sleep operation delay time 1 delay time Cd b5 16 hb5 16 Internal Run Command Operation Stopped External Run Command Run Command has been input Operation status output Operating Fig 6 66 PID Sleep Time Chart Individual Functions w Energy saving To perform energy saving set b8 01 Energy Saving Mode Selection to 1 Energy saving control can be per formed using both V f control and vector control The constants to be adjusted are different for each In V f control adjust b8 04 to b8 06 and in vector control adjust b8 02 and b8 03 iRelated Constants Name Control Methods Co 77 Open stant Description Vra Vit Loop Flux Number Display g with Vector VeC PG 1 tor Ds Sel
175. time using the equation given in N5 02 of Chapter 5 User Constants or set the time that corresponds to the motor capacity referring to Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method A1 02 Page 5 87 When setting the feed forward proportional gain N5 03 take the inertia of the motor to be equivalent to 1 If the speed reference response is slow increase the feed forward proportional gain N5 03 If over shoot occurs with the actual speed or if a negative torque reference is output when acceleration is com pleted reduce the feed forward proportional gain N5 03 When using the droop control function i e if b7 01 is not set to 0 0 disable feed forward control 1 e set N5 01 to 0 Droop Control Function Droop control is a function that allows the user to set the amount of motor slip When a single load is operated with two motors such as in a crane conveyor a high resistance motor is nor mally used This is to use torque characteristics that exhibit proportion movements due to changes in the sec ondary resistor to maintain torque balance with the load and overall speed balance with the load If droop control is used a high resistance motor characteristics can be set for a general purpose motor The balance of the load is very different with different amounts of slip p i m Torque Motor A s torque Torque ya Motor A s torque characteristics characteristics Motor B s torque cha
176. tion analog input termi Select multi function analog nal A2 func 6 29 H3 09 input function for terminal 0 to IF 0 No A A A A A 418H 6 128 tion selection A5 Refer to the next table Terminal A2 Sel Gain Sets the input gain level terminal A2 when 10 V 20 mA is input 0 0 to 6 29 H3 10 f Set according to the 100 1000 0 100 0 Yes A JA A A A 419H 6 129 Terminal A2 value for the function set for Gain H3 09 Bias Sets the input gain level terminal A2 when 0 V 4 mA is input 100 0 6 29 H3 11 Set according to the 100 to 0 0 Yes A A A A A 41AH 6 129 Terminal A2 value for the function set for 100 0 Bias H3 09 Analog input Sets primary delay filter time filter time constant in seconds for the 0 00t 0 03 H3 12 Constant analog input terminal 35 Mi i No A A A A A 4IBH 6 29 Filter Avg Effective for noise control Time etc 5 52 User Constant Tables w H3 05 H3 09 Settings Function Add to terminal A1 Contents 10096 Maximum output frequency Control Methods Open V f Loop Flux with Vec Vec PG tor tor Frequency gain Frequency reference voltage command value Auxiliary frequency reference 1 2nd step analog Maximum output frequency Auxiliary frequency reference 2 3rd step analog Maximum output frequency Voltage bias 200 V 200 V Class 400 V 400 V Cl
177. to 10 V 100 to 100 0 to 10 V 100 Factory setting Auxiliary speed frequency reference H3 05 2 10 to 10 V 0 to 10 V Input impedance 20 kQ Analog reference common 0V Shield wire optional ground line connection point Wiring Control Circuit Terminals _ Table 2 11 Control Circuit Terminals Continued Signal Name Function Factory setting Zero speed Signal Level ee QUIDURT Zero speed level b2 01 or below when ON Factory setting Frequency agreement detec tion Pos Multi funetion PHC QUID Frequency within 2 Hz of set frequency when ON Photo coupler PC Photocoupler output common 7 50 mA max at 48 VDC Maca for P1 and P2 P3 Multi function PHC output 3 Factory setting Ready for operation when C3 PU ON P4 Multi function PHC output 4 Factory setting Minor fault C4 MA Fault output signal NO con tact Fault when CLOSED across MA and MC Dry contacts 7 Fault output signal NC con Fault when OPEN across MB and MC Contact capacity tact 10 mA min 1 A max at 250 VAC Rela es MC Relay contact output com m 10 mA min 1 A max at MON 30 VDC MI Minimum permissible Multi function contact output Factory setting Operating load 5 VDC 10 mA 4 M2 NO contact Operating when ON across M1 and M2 FM Multi function analog moni Factory setting Output frequency t
178. units No Load This constant is automatically Current set during autotuning Number of Sets the number of motor motor poles poles Number of This constant is automatically Poles set during autotuning Motor line Sets the motor phase to phase resistance in Q units This constant is automatically set during autotuning to line resis tance Term Resis tance 5 34 User Constant Tables w Name Control Methods Factory Open Open ipti V f Loop Flux Loo Display Description Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Motor leak Sets the voltage drop due to inductance motor leakage inductance as a E2 06 percentage of the motor rated 0 0 to 18 2 No No No A A A 313H 6 117 Leak Induc voltage 40 0 tance This constant is automatically set during autotuning Motor iron Sets the motor iron saturation saturation coefficient at 50 of mag Par E2 07 coefficient 1 netic flux 0 50 0 50 No No No A A A 314H 6 117 Saturation This constant is automatically i Compl set during autotuning Motor iron Sets the motor iron saturation saturation coefficient at 75 of mag doot E2 08 coefficient2 netic flux 0 75 0 75 No No No A A A 315H 6 117 Saturation This constant is automatically Comp2 set during autotuning Motor Sets motor mechanical loss
179. val ues When the motor is oscillating decrease the set values Adjust the output current range at minimum speed rotation so that it does not exceed the Inverter rated output current Do not alter the torque compensa tion gain from its default 1 00 when using the open loop vectorl control method Torq Comp Gain Torque com The torque compensation delay pensation pri time is set in ms units mary delay time Usually setting is not necessary constant Adjust in the following circum stances When the motor is oscillating increase the set values When the responsiveness of the 6 motor is low decrease the set values Torq Comp Time The factory setting will change when the control method is changed The open loop vector factory settings are given BAdjusting Torque Compensation Gain Normally there is no need to make this adjustment Do not adjust the torque compensation gain when using open loop vector control Adjust the torque compensation gain using V f control in the following circumstances fthe cable is very long increase the set value fthe maximum applicable motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity increase the set value f the motor is vibrating reduce the set value Adjust this constant so that the output current during low speed rotation does not exceed the Inverter rated output current range BAdjusting the Torque Co
180. value 2 PID output becomes the Inverter output frequency and D control is used in the PID feedback value 3 PID output is added as compensation value of the Inverter output frequency and D control is used in the difference between PID target value and feedback value PID output is added as compensation value of the Inverter output frequency and D control is used in the PID feedback value BPID Input Methods Enable PID control using constant b5 01 and set the PID target value and PID feedback value PID Target Value Input Methods Select the PID control target value input method according to the setting in b1 01 Reference Selection Normally the frequency reference selected in b1 01 is the PID target value but you can also set the PID target value as shown in the following table PID Target Input Method Setting Conditions t H3 05 or H3 09 t PID target value AI re to set H6 01 pulse train input Multi Function Analog Ter Se orH 09 to C get value Also be sure to se pulse pu function selection to 1 PID feedback value minal A2 or A3 Input UE The negative inputs cannot be used for target values Set MEMOBUS bit 1 in register address 000FH to 1 enable disable PID target value MEMOBUS register 0006H from communications to be able to use register number 0006H as the PID target value Pulse train input Set H6 01 to 2 PID target value PID Feedback Input Methods Select one of the
181. when the main power supply is restored while the control power supply 1 e power supply to the control panel is backed up the Inverter will restart Consequently alarm UV1 main circuit undervoltage will not be detected Related Constants Con stant Number Name Display Momentary power loss detection PwrL Selection Description 0 Disabled main circuit undervoltage UV1 detection Enabled Restarted when the power returns within the time for L2 02 When L2 02 is exceeded main circuit undervoltage UV1 is detected Enabled while CPU is operating Restarts when power returns during control operations Does not detect main circuit undervoltage UV1 Setting Range Factory Setting Change during Opera tion Vif Control Methods Vit with PG Open Loop Vector 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vector 2 MEMO BUS Regis ter Momentary power loss ride thru time PwrL Ridethru t Ridethrough time when Momen tary Power Loss Selection L2 01 is set to 1 in units of seconds Min baseblock time PwrL Base block t Sets the Inverter s minimum base block time in units of one second when the Inverter is restarted after power loss ridethrough Sets the time to approximately 0 7 times the motor secondary circuit time constant When an overcurrent or overvolt age occurs when starting a speed search or DC injection braking increase the se
182. with sign 100 1 to 4 1599 to 1599 5th digit of 01 03 set ios digit setting of o1 03 4 digit BCD with sign 100 1 to 4 9999 to 9999 when o1 03 9999 ting X 0 unit 1 X 1 unit 0 1 16 bits DI 08 Reference Ranges Reference Input Mode 2 digit BCD with sign 1 4 digit BCD with sign 100 10000 Reference Setting Range 110 to 110 1000 to 1000 2 digit BCD with sign 0 1 15 9 to 15 9 2 digit BCD with sign 0 01 1 59 to 1 59 2 digit BCD with sign 1 Hz 159 to 159 Hz 2 digit BCD with sign 0 1 Hz 15 9 to 15 9 Hz 2 digit BCD with sign 0 01 Hz 1 59 to 1 59 Hz 8 bit binary with sign 100 255 255 to 255 X 2 unit 0 01 X 3 unit 0 001 When using the DI 08 the following ranges can be set depending on the settings of the constants U1 01 Monitor Unit 01 03 0 01 03 1 Using Inverters for Elevating Machines This section describes precautions to be observed when using the Varispeed G7 for elevating machines such as elevators and cranes SED P e IMPORTANTS rent When performing trial operation enable Current alarm function L8 41 71 and be sure to make adjustments to the braking sequence by using Peak hold functions refer to Current Alarm Function and Peak Hold Cur rent Monitoring Function in Chapter 6 so that the startup current is less than 150 of the Inverter r
183. with the host controller When oscillation occurs during torque control increase the set value 0 to 1000 No No No No A 29BH d5 03 Speed limit selection Speed Limit Sel Set the speed limit command method for the torque control method 1 The analog input limit from a frequency reference 2 Limited by d5 04 constant set ting values lor2 29CH d5 04 Speed limit Speed Lmt Value Set the speed limit during torque control as a percentage of the maximum output frequency This function is enabled when d5 03 is set to 2 Directions are as follows Run Command direction Opposite of Run Command 120 to 120 29DH d5 05 Speed limit bias Speed Lmt Bias Set the speed limit bias as a per centage of the maximum output frequency Bias is applied to the specified speed limit It can be used to adjust the margin for the speed limit 0 to 120 29EH Con stant Number Name Display Speed torque control switching timer Description Set the delay time from inputting the multi function input speed torque control change from ON to OFF or OFF to ON until the control is actually changed in ms units This function is enabled when the Factory Setting Control Methods Vif with PG Open Loop Vector 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vector 2 d5 06
184. 0 23 Using a V5 OP era Oe ederent caen etra eaat bare tid aa SE EaR EE 10 24 Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 0 V Common in Sinking Mode with an Internal Power Supply 1 tede t a ted idein iiai 10 25 Xvi Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 24 V Common in Sourcing Mode 10 26 Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 0 V Common in Sinking Mode with an External Power Supply ite r E a aA AA E S DA E d Dee onu Ed 10 27 Using Contact and Open Collector Outputs ssssssseenttes 10 28 User Constants 5 nter re teme A te ve tert hs ee p ERAT 10 29 INDEX Revision History Handling Inverters This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving or installing an Inverter Varispeed G7 Introduction cccceceeceesseeeeeeeeeees 1 2 Confirmations upon Delivery se 1 3 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions 1 6 Checking and Controlling the Installation Site 1 9 Installation Orientation and Space 1 10 Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover 1 11 Removing Attaching the Digital Operator and Front 5B 6 p E 1 13 Removing and Attaching the Protection Cover 1 17 arispeed G7 Introduction Varispeed G7 Models The Varispeed G7 Series of Inverters included two Inverters in two voltage classes 200 V and 400 V
185. 0 60Hz 3 8A Speeneationg Output eee specifications gt OUTPUT AC3PH 0 230V 0 400Hz 3 2A 1 2kVA Lot number ON MASS 3 Okg L Mass Serial number S N PRG 1020 Version of software UL file number FILE NO E131457 IP20 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION WADE IN JAPAN Fig 1 1 Nameplate Inverter Model Numbers The model number of the Inverter on the nameplate indicates the specification voltage class and maximum motor capacity of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes CIMR G7 A 2 0P4 Inverter Varispeed G7 No Specification No Max Motor Capacity A Standard domestic model OP4 0 4 kW OP7 0 75 kW to to No Voltage Class 300 300 kW 2 AC input 3 phase 200 V P indicates the decimal point AC input 3 phase 400 V Fig 1 2 Inverter Model Numbers Inverter Specifications The Inverter specifications SPEC on the nameplate indicate the voltage class maximum motor capacity the protective structure and the revision of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes 20P41 A No Voltage Class 2 AC input 3 phase 200 V Design revision order 4 AC input 3 phase 400 V No Max Motor Capacity No Protective Structure OP4 0 4 kw 0 Open chassis IEC IPOO OP7 0 75 kW 1 Enclosed wall mounted IEC IP20 to to NEMA 1 Type 1 300 300 kW P indicates the decimal point Fi
186. 0 V H3 04 multi function analog input terminal A3 signal level T IAL 1 10 to 10 V H3 05 multi function analog input terminal A3 function selection 14 torque compensation Use H3 06 and H3 07 for fine tuning Fig 6 88 Torque Compensation Sequence Circuit Configuration Time Chart Lifting The analog signals corresponding to the load size are input as torque compensation signals from before the Inverter starts until operation stops Factory setting 10 V 100 torque Positive polarity is input for motor loads and negative polarity is input for regenerative loads The following diagram shows the time chart for lifting UP Forward an OFF SI OFF HIGH LOW ON Torque compensation i f signal 0 Gara signals corresponding to load size Motor load Inputs positive polarity N Same as above Regenerative load Inputs negative polarity Output frequency Zero speed control 0 t 1 Motor torque d LJ Motor load U _ Regenerative load During run 2 a ON OFF Holding brake operation OPEN 3 R CLOSE Fig 6 89 Torque Compensation Time Chart Lifting Lowering In the same way as for lifting when the torque decreases the analog signals corresponding to the load size are input as torque compensation signals from before the Inverter starts until operation stops Factory setting 10 V 100 torque Negative polarity is input for motor loads and positive polarity i
187. 0 V Class Wire Sizes Continued Possible Wire Sizes mm AWG Inverter Model Terminal Symbol CIMR O R LI S L2 T L3 O1 Termi nal Screws Tightening Torque Nem 31 4 to 39 2 200 to 325 350 to 600 Recom mended Wire Size mm AWG 200 x 2P or 50 x 4P 350 x 2P or 1 0 x 4P Wire Type U T1 V T2 W T3 R1 L11 SI L21 T1 a7a2ii9 L3 31 4 to 39 2 150 to 325 300 to 600 150 x 2P or 50 x 4P 300 x 2P or 1 0 x 4P Power cables e g 600 V vinyl power Q3 8 8 to 10 8 5 5 to 60 10 to 2 0 cables 31 4 to 39 2 150 300 150 x 2P 300 x 2P 1 1 4 15 The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75 C 1 3 to 1 4 0 5 to 5 5 20 to 10 1 25 16 Inverter Model CIMR O G7A40P4 Table 2 2 400 V Class Wire Sizes Terminal Symbol R LI S L2 T L3 1 C02 B1 B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 Termi nal Screws Tightening Torque Nem 1 2 to 1 5 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals eee Possible Wire Sizes mm AWG 2 to 5 5 14 to 10 Recom mended Wire Size mm AWG G7A40P7 R L1 S L2 T L3 1 2 B1 B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 1 2 to 1 5 2 to 5 5 14 to 10 G7A41P5 R L1 S L2 T L3 OC 1 2 B1 B2 U T1 V T2 W T3 1 2 to 1 5 2 to 5 5 14 to 10 G7A42P2 R LI S L2 T L3 1 C2 B1 B2 U T1
188. 00 99 300 x 160 x 610 FS5972 460 99 300 x 160 x 610 Conformance to CE Markings NM Table 10 5 EMC Noise Filters Continued Inverter Model Noise Filter Made by Shaffner UU Model Number Rated Current A Weight kg Dimensions mm 40P4 FS5972 10 07 10 1 1 141 x 46 x 330 40P7 FS5972 10 07 10 1 1 141 x 46 x 330 41P5 FS5972 10 07 10 1 1 141 x 46 x 330 42P2 FS5972 18 07 18 1 3 141 x 46 x 330 43P7 FS5972 18 07 18 1 3 141 x 46 x 330 44P0 FS5972 18 07 18 1 3 141 x 46 x 330 45P5 FS5972 35 07 35 2 1 206 x 50 x 355 47P5 FS5972 35 07 35 2 1 206 x 50 x 355 4011 FS5972 60 07 60 4 0 236 x 65 x 408 4015 FS5972 60 07 60 4 0 236 x 65 x 408 4018 FS5972 70 52 70 3 4 80 x 185 x 329 400V 4022 FS5972 70 52 70 3 4 80 x 185 x 329 Class 4030 FS5972 130 35 130 4 7 90 x 180 x 366 4037 FS5972 130 35 130 4 7 90 x 180 x 366 4045 FS5972 130 35 130 4 7 90 x 180 x 366 4055 FS5972 170 40 170 6 120 x 170 x 451 4075 FS5972 170 40 170 6 120 x 170 x 451 4090 FS5972 250 37 250 11 130 x 240 x 610 4110 FS5972 250 37 250 11 130 x 240 x 610 4132 FS5972 410 99 410 10 5 260 x 115 x 386 4160 FS5972 410 99 410 10 5 260 x 115 x 386 4185 FS5972 600 99 600 18 5 260 x 135 x 386 4220 FS5972 800 99 800 31 300 x 160 x 716 4300 FS5972 800 99 800 31 300 x 160 x 716 Table 10 6 DC Reactors for Suppressing Harmonics Voltage Class 200 V Class Inverter Model DC Reactor
189. 09 at Low Speeds in Open loop Vector 2 Control is Large Compared to That at Medium and High Speeds If the torque reference U1 09 at low speeds is large compared to that at medium and high speeds for the same load conditions make adjustments in the way described below Reduce the setting for N4 17 torque adjustment gain If the problem still occurs after making the above adjustment linearize the V f characteristics This means making the ratios E1 10 E1 09 and E1 08 E1 07 closer to the ratio E1 13 E1 06 Linearizing the V f char acteristics will however reduce the power and so check that the power is sufficient after changing the set tings Do not change the settings more than necessary If Shock Occurs Near the Speed Estimator Switching Frequency in Open loop Vector 2 Control PRG 1020 only The switching frequency refers to the frequency range near the N4 11 setting during acceleration and near the N4 28 setting during deceleration In open loop vector 2 control two speed estimators are switched between and there may be instances of shock occurring at the switchover If switching shock is a problem make the adjustments described below f shock occurs during acceleration ncrease the acceleration time within the allowable range Alternatively reduce the torque limit Troubleshooting H Reduce the setting for N4 11 to a value less than the factory setting Reduce the setting in intervals o
190. 0V Power tap al 22 4 r Zal 420 2200 2400 02400 CHAI Q B 200 V Class power supply __ Jumper factory set position 400 V class power supply Power supply input terminals Be CHARGE indicator Fig 4 2 Power Supply Voltage Jumper Power ON Confirm all of the following items and then turn ON the power supply Check that the power supply is of the correct voltage 200 V Class 3 phase 200 to 240 VDC 50 60 Hz 400 V Class 3 phase 380 to 480 VDC 50 60 Hz Make sure that the motor output terminals U V W and the motor are connected correctly Make sure that the Inverter control circuit terminal and the control device are wired correctly Set all Inverter control circuit terminals to OFF When using a PG Speed Control Board make sure that it is wired correctly Make sure that the motor is not connected to the mechanical system no load status _ Checking the Display Status If the Digital Operator s display at the time the power is connected is normal it will read as follows Display for normal operation DRIVE Frequency Ref U1 60 0 oHz U1 02 60 00Hz U1 03 10 05A Rdy The frequency reference monitor is dis played in the data display section When an fault has occurred the details of the fault will be displayed instead of the abo
191. 10 Constant C1 10 is set to 1 at the factory 0 The acceleration deceleration time settings range is 0 00 to 600 00 in units of 0 01 s 1 The acceleration deceleration time settings range is 0 00 to 6000 0 in units of 0 1 s lilSwitching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using Multi Function Input Terminal Commands Using the Inverter you can set four acceleration times and four deceleration times When the multi function input terminals H1 OD are set to 7 acceleration deceleration time selection 1 and 1A acceleration decel eration time selection 2 you can switch the acceleration deceleration time even during operation by combin ing the ON OFF status of the terminals The following table shows the acceleration deceleration time switching combinations 6 19 Acceleration Decelera Acceleration Decelera tion Time Selection 1 Ter tion Time Selection 2 Ter Acceleration Time Deceleration Time minal minal OFF OFF C1 01 C1 02 ON OFF C1 03 C1 04 OFF ON C1 05 C1 06 ON ON C1 07 C1 08 iSwitching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Automatically Use this setting when you want to switch acceleration deceleration time automatically using the set frequency When the output frequency reaches the set value in C1 11 the Inverter switches the acceleration deceleration time automatically as shown in the following diagram Set C1 11 to a value other than 0 0 Hz If C1 11 is set to 0 0 Hz the function will be d
192. 16 Frequency detection 4 ON Output frequency 2 L4 03 L4 04 used Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 51 17 Overtorque undertorque detection 1 NC NC Contact Torque detection at OFF Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 54 18 Overtorque undertorque detection 2 NO NO Contact Torque detection at ON Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 54 19 Overtorque undertorque detection 2 NC NC Contact Torque detection at OFF Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 54 1A During reverse run ON During reverse run Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1B During baseblock 2 OFF During baseblock Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1C Motor selection Motor 2 selected Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1D During regeneration ON During regeneration No No No Yes Yes 1E Restart enabled ON Restart enabled Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 72 IF ean E OLI including OH3 pre alarm ON 90 or more of the detec Ves Yes Yes Yes Yes 20 Inverter overheat OH pre alarm ON Temperature exceeds L8 02 setting Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 87 User Constant Tables 5 Control Methods Open Function Vif Loop Flux with Vec Vec PG tor tor 1 Maintenance Time 2F ON The operation time of either the electrolytic capacitors or the cooling fan has Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes reached the specified maintenance time 30 During torque limit current limit ON During torque limit No No Yes Yes Yes 31 During speed limit ON
193. 2 5 BCD digit 5 0 to 3 Sign signal 0 Forward 1 Reverse SET read signal 1 Read Input signal common 0 V Shield wire connection terminal E Application Precautions The maximum frequency 100 speed reference will be used when the binary input is set setting 6 or 7 and all bits are 1 Setting F3 01 to 6 is valid only when the D1 16H2 is used Using this setting a frequency from 0 00 to 399 8 Hz can be set in BCD The sign bit is used as a data bit so only positive plus data can be set Also the digit starts from 0 so the minimum setting is 0 02 Hz iSelecting the Input Terminal Function for a DI 08 Digital Reference Board The frequency reference from a DI 08 Board is determined by the setting of F3 01 as shown in the following table Terminal 8 bit Binary with Sign Bit 1 2 2 digit BCD with Sign Bit 1 2 BCD digit 1 Bit 1 27 0 to 9 Bit 1 23 Bit 1 2 Bit 1 2 BCD digit 2 Bit 1 2 0 to 15 Bit 1 27 Sign signal SET read signal Reference common signal 0 V BApplication Precautions The DI 08 will not function if F3 01 is set to 6 iSelecting the Digital Reference The range of the digital references is determined by the combination of the settings of 01 03 and F3 01 The information monitored in U1 01 Frequency reference will also change DI 16H2 Reference Ran
194. 21 T1 L31 1 to 1 0 810 22 G7A2022 4 0 to 5 0 3 8 to 4 22 to 38 4 to 2 2 to 5 5 14 to 10 2 to 5 5 14 to 10 2 to 5 5 14 to 10 2 to 5 5 14 to 10 2 to 5 5 14 to 10 8to 14 8 to 6 9 0 to 10 0 9 0 to 10 0 Inverter Model CIMR O G7A2030 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals NM Table 2 1 200 V Class Wire Sizes Continued Terminal Symbol R LI S L2 T L3 1 U TI V T2 W T3 RI L11 S1 L21 TI L31 Termi nal Screws Tightening Torque Nem 17 6 to 22 5 Possible Wire Sizes mm AWG 60 to 100 2 0 to 4 0 Recom mended Wire Size mm AWG Q3 8 8 to 10 8 5 5 to 22 10 to 4 17 6 to 22 5 30 to 60 2 to 2 0 30 Q t 14 Alta 1 3 to 1 4 0 5 to 5 5 20 to 10 1 25 16 G7A2037 R LI S L2 T L3 O 1 U TI V T2 W T3 R1 L11 SUL21 T1 L31 17 6 to 22 5 80 to 125 3 0 to 250 80 3 0 amp 3 8 8 to 10 8 5 5 to 22 10 to 4 17 6 to 22 5 38 to 60 1 to 2 0 38 1 t 11 Alta 1 3 to 1 4 0 5 to 5 5 20 to 10 1 25 16 G7A2045 R LI S L2 T L3 1 U T1 V T2 W T3 R1 L11 1 L21 T1 L31 17 6 to 22 5 50 to 100 1 0 to 4 0 50 x 2P 1 0 x 2P Q3 8 8 to 10 8 5 5 to 60 10 to 2 0 17 6 to 22 5 30 to 60 3 to
195. 2110 40P4 to 4300 ie Resistor Unit connec M7 20P4 to 2015 40P4 to 4015 DC reactor connection Qi 2 20P4 to 2015 40P4 to 4015 2 Braking Unit connection 3 O 2018 to 2110 4018 to 4300 s Ground 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300 Note The 1 and input terminals for the DC power do not conform to UL cUL standards 2 13 Main Circuit Configurations The main circuit configurations of the Inverter are shown in Fig 2 5 Table 2 5 Inverter Main Circuit Configurations 200 V Class 400 V Class CIMR G7A20P4 to 2015 CIMRG7A40P4 to 4015 B1 B2 FN CONES SIUE A i R L1 6 1 S L2 T L3 6 Control circuits Power Control supply circuits i 15 Cooling fan is provided for Inverters of 1 5 kW or more T L3 Ri L11 1 L21 T1 L31 TiL31 iS Control i Control circuits circuits R L1 S2 TIL3 R1 L11 1 L21 T1 L31 o 04
196. 22 kW 45 kW 55 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 18 5 kW to 75 kW Removing the Cooling Fan 1 Remove the terminal cover Inverter cover Digital Operator and front cover from the front of the Inverter 2 Pull the cooling fan power cable connector that extends from the fan cover cable hole out of the cooling fan power relay board 3 Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter 4 Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one Mounting the Cooling Fan After attaching a new cooling fan reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components Refer to the next page for attaching the fan cover When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket be sure that the airflow faces the top of the Inverter Front cover mounting screws Front cover Terminal cover Terminal cover mounting screws Circulation fan mounting screws Fan cable pullout position Circulation fan Airflow direction Fan support mounting screws Fan support Fan support Re Airflow direction AER Cooling fans T e 1 l 900 P eip 200 Fan power relay board Bann 900 Cooling fans Cooling fan mounting screws J ART INGA P f rt Fan power cable pullout p
197. 2P 400 x 2P 93 78 4 to 98 100 to 325 4 0 to 600 78 4 to 98 100 to 325 4 0 to 600 150 300 r 41 4 200 2 3200 a 400 3400 1 3 to 1 4 0 5 to 5 5 20 to 10 1 25 16 G7A4220 R LI S L2 T L3 78 4 to 98 100 to 325 4 0 to 600 200 x 2P 400 x 2P U TI V T2 W T3 R1 L11 1 L21 TI L33 78 4 to 98 100 to 325 4 0 to 600 150 x 2P 350 x 2P OQ Q1 78 4 to 98 100 to 325 4 0 to 600 250 x 2P 500 x 2P 93 78 4 to 98 100 to 325 4 0 to 600 D 78 4 to 98 100 to 325 4 0 to 600 200 400 r 4 amp 200 2 3200 a 400 4 5400 1 3 to 1 4 0 5 to 5 5 20 to 10 1 25 16 G7A4300 R L1 S L2 T L3 78 4 to 98 100 to 325 4 0 to 600 325 x 2P 600 x 2P 125 x 4P 250 x 4P U T1 V T2 W T3 RI L11 SI L21 T1 L33 78 4 to 98 100 to 325 4 0 to 600 325 x 2P 600 x 2P 125 x 4P 250 x 4P O l 78 4 to 98 100 to 325 4 0 to 600 200 x 4P 400 x 4P 3 78 4 to 98 100 to 325 4 0 to 600 78 4 to 98 100 to 325 4 0 to 600 125 x 2P 250 x 2P 325 600 r 4200 2 5200 400 1 5400 The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75 C 1 3 to 1 4 0 5 to 5 5 20 to 10 1 25 16 Wire Type Power cables 2 e g 600 V vinyl power s cables 2 11 Table 2 3 Closed loop Conne
198. 43 Mutual Connections During Motor Overheating Protection 6 61 Limiting Motor Rotation Direction If you set motor reverse rotation prohibited a Reverse Run Command will not be accepted even if it is input Use this setting for applications in which reverse motor rotation can cause problems e g fans pumps etc Related Constants Name Control Methods ils Factory Open Description Vif Flux p Setting with TE Vec PG 1 tor Display Prohibition of TOVETSCOpera 0 Reverse enabled tion 1 Reverse disabled Reverse Oper 6 62 Continuing Operation Continuing Operation E This section explains functions for continuing or automatically restarting Inverter operation using speed search even if an error occurs Restarting Automatically After Power Is Restored Even if a temporary power loss occurs you can perform estimated current detection speed search using the speed search function b3 01 and restart the Inverter automatically after power is restored to continue motor operation To restart the Inverter after power has been restored set L2 01 to 1 or 2 Make settings of L2 01 to L2 05 and b3 01 for related details of restarting f L2 01 is set to 1 when power is restored within the time set in L2 02 the Inverter will restart If the time set in L2 02 is exceeded alarm UV1 main circuit undervoltage will be detected e f L2 01 is set to 2
199. 50 Q2 Multi function contact output Default Running signal P1 m Open collector 1 Default Zero speed signal Multi function open Open collector 2 Default collector output 48 V Speed agreement signal 50 mA max MTR CAL analog output et QAM Multi function Frequency meter F1 Multi function FM analog output Default Output frequency AC Multi function output on common a EZ LLIL L a Fig 10 13 Wiring Examples NM Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 0 V Common in Sinking Mode with an Internal Power Supply Set CN5 shunt connector on the control board to NPN as shown below for a sequence that uses an NPN tran sistor for an input signal 0 V command and sinking mode and an internal 24 V power supply p Q 9Q Q Q9 9 j 91 2 B1 B2 l MCCB ay 3 phase power R oM__ O R L1 UTi Motor FN z s o 0M O sn v2 1M a To oM ms Inverter w T3 7 Ground S1 FR OO wn N gt H 4 ja yy Y L3 Forward Run Stop Fi E Reverse Run Stop f I S3 Ye T L3 4 L r External fault EU S4 ii Fault reset I F I m nm Fz Multi function contact inputs lt 0 to 10 V 20 KQ input OV Sard I
200. 5000 l d 30 VDE us mA min 1 A max B bg 0 to 10 V 20 kQ input i l fe d EE 0 to 10V it L Multi function anlog input FT PAS Qo10V 20kQ B P1 l PHEAC ay ecg senna meal Open collector 1 LO qp Not used K Default Zero J e i y speed Multi function i open collector outputs OV Avm 00 oO ey Open collector 2 48 VDC 50 mA max E zl Default Frequency x Temi agree signal 1 resistance I fan i ior y H E ne p3 MEMOBUS NH l 4 rh 94 Open collector 3 communications rot zie i Factory setting RS 485 422 rag T KIT C3 gt event operation i D j Ten pod P4 P ae aam IL eT 416 AIT C4d ge minor fauit I V i 3 arai aera eens eee eee cid The main circuit is separated from the terminal cover for safety reasons 2 The contact output circuit is separated from the main circuit and the control circuit by reinforced insulation It can be connected to extra low voltage circuits or circuits that are 250 VAC 1 A 30 VDC 1 A or less connect it to extra low voltage circuits Fig 10 6 The control circuit is an extra low voltage circuit and separated from the main circuit and the contact output circuit by reinforced insulation Always Input Fuses Conformance to CE Markings m e In order to conform to the Low Voltage Directive fuses must be provided for inputs Use UL compatible input fuses with ratings higher than the voltages and currents an
201. 6 2 Using Multi Step Speed Operation tette 6 5 49 Varispeed G7 Function Block eedem tte ce dee a i repe 6 8 Run Command T T r E a e r Ea aa e ae Taa nennen nennen nnne nennen 6 10 Selecting the Run Command Source sscsssescsssscesessessesesesseseecesesteseeeeseseseseeeeeeees 6 10 Stopping Methods Wedd ceres anes aea EET Reve ee b o Pe e RE Da ene 6 12 Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Sent ssss 6 12 Using the DC Injection Brake eee er te t ele Doug 6 16 Using an Emergency Stop tenent tenens 6 17 Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics esssssssssss 6 18 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times 6 18 Accelerating and Decelerating Heavy Loads Dwell Function ssss 6 22 Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration Stall Prevention During Acceleration Function sse 6 23 Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration Stall Prevention During Deceleration Function see 6 25 Preventing Overvoltage by Automatically Reducing the Regenerative Torque Limit Overvoltage Inhibit Function PRG 1020 only seem 6 26 Adjusting Frequency References 22 ccccceseseeeenceeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeneees 6 28 Adjusting Analog Frequency References ccsccccccsesssscsesesestsesesessestensesesstetsneneseees 6 28 Operat
202. 8 41 Current Alarm to 1 Enabled and check the motor current using the peak hold current monitoring function U1 83 of the Digital Operator or a clamp ammeter with and without a mechanical load An extremely high current will flow if the motor torque at start is insufficient or if timing is not correct and the motor locks with the holding brake If a current exceeding 150 of the Inverter rated current flows the IGBT in the Inverter will be subject to heat stress resulting in a shortened life span In this case take measures such as retuning and reduction of the load to reduce the current to a value less than 150 of the Inverter rated current Unless low noise operation is required reduce the Inverter carrier frequency to a value between 2 kHz and 2 5 kHz to reduce the influence of heat stress Overvoltage Inhibit Function Leave L3 11 Overvoltage inhibit function selection set to 0 disabled This function is used to prevent over voltage tripping when the braking resistor is not used with a regenerative load When this function is enabled the torque reference on the regenerative side is automatically inhibited in the Inverter during regeneration Using this function in elevating machines is dangerous because the elevator may slip and fall Contact your Yaskawa representative for details on applications such as high speed elevators speed 2 m s or higher direct drive elevators or Inverters designed for cran
203. ADV Accel Time 1 12 HF 20 0Sec The monitor display for C1 01 returns 0 0 6000 0 10 0Sec 3 11 E gee EExternal Fault Setting Procedure Examples of the Digital Operator displays that appear when setting an eternal error for a multi function con tact input in Advanced Programming Mode are shown in the following diagram Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display ADV Main Menu NO Always Det Coast to Stop ADV Digital Inputs Gi 02 14 Terminal S4 Sel ES ey Bop KDV Digital Inputs TATUNE rA 5o o 1 IE 08 08 H1 01 vane i NO During RUN Auto Tuning L HERE EE Coast to H1 DRIVE ADV 4 TMenMenu M Digital Inputs NG During RUN Operation EA01 0 e ei ic ADV k monga l Pulse VO Setup pe een E 01 0 Quick Setting Pulse Input Sel A iM Fig 3 7 External Fault Function Setting Example Modes Verify Mode Verify mode is used to display any constants that have been changed from their default settings in a program ming mode or by autotuning None will be displayed if no settings have been changed Of the environment mode settings only A1 02 will be displayed 1f it has been changed Other environment modes settings will not be displayed even if they have been changed from their default settings Even in verify mode the same procedures can be used to change setting
204. ASR during vector control adjusts the torque reference so that the deviation between the speed reference and the estimated speed PG feedback or speed estimator is 0 Speed control ASR during V f control with a PG adjusts the output frequency so that the deviation between the speed reference and the esti mated speed PG feedback or speed estimator is 0 The following block diagram shows the structure of the speed control for vector or V f control with a PG Torque reference C5 01 C5 03 Y Primary gt O P i filter s l limit C5 06 C5 10 C5 02 C5 04 C5 08 Speed Control Block Diagram for Vector Control L7 01 to L7 04 gt Output frequency reference Detected speed Name Display ASR propor tional P gain 1 ASR P Gain 1 Change EO rate P limiter F C5 01 C5 03 C5 02 C5 04 C5 05 Limit Speed Control Block Diagram for V f Control with a PG Fig 6 71 Speed Control Block Diagrams iRelated Constants Description Sets the proportional gain of the speed loop ASR Control Methods Open Open V f Loop Flux Loop with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 2 ASR inte gral I time 1 ASR I Time 1 Sets the integral time of the speed loop ASR in I second units Individual Functio
205. BUS communications the master sends commands to the slave and the slave responds The mes sage format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below and the length of data packets is changed by the command function contents Slave address Function code Data Error check The space between messages must support the following PLC to Inverter Inverter to PLC PLC to Inverter ommand message Response message Command message Time Seconds bb 24 bits noch TT 24 bits TAS t 5 ms min setting Fig 6 60 Message Spacing Slave Address Set the Inverter address from 0 to 20 Hex If you set 0 commands from the master will be broadcast i e the Inverter will not return responses e 95 Function Code The function code specifies commands There are three function codes as shown below Function Code Hexadecimal Function Read storage register contents Command Message Response Message Loopback test Data Write multiple storage registers Configure consecutive data by combining the storage register address test code for a loopback address and the data the register contains The data length changes depending on the command details Error Check Errors are detected during communications using CRC 16 Perform calculations using the following method 1 The factory setting for CRC 16 communications is usually 0 but when using the MEMOBU
206. CIMR G7A4220 422000 CIMR G7A4300 430000 200 V Class Confirmations upon Delivery E Confirmations upon Delivery Checks Check the following items as soon as the Inverter is delivered Table 1 2 Checks Item Method Has the correct model of Inverter been delivered Check the model number on the nameplate on the side of the Inverter Inspect the entire exterior of the Inverter to see if there are any scratches or i Pte Inverter daniaged imany way other damage resulting from shipping Are any screws or other components loose Use a screwdriver or other tools to check for tightness If you find any irregularities in the above items contact the agency from which you purchased the Inverter or your Yaskawa representative immediately Nameplate Information There is a nameplate attached to the side of each Inverter The nameplate shows the model number specifica tions lot number serial number and other information on the Inverter B Example Nameplate The following nameplate is an example for a standard domestic Japan Inverter 3 phase 200 VAC 0 4 kW IEC IP20 and NEMA 1 Type 1 standards Inverter model MODEL CIMR G7A20P4 SPEC 20P41 pe Inverter Input specifications NPUT AC3PH 200 240V 5
207. Constants Name Control Methods Pere Open Description v f ed Flux with V Vec ector PG 1 tor Display Frequency ref erence upper Set the output frequency upper limit limit as a percent taking the max Ref Upper output frequency to be 100 Limit Limiting Minimum Frequency If you do not want the motor to rotate at below a given frequency use constants d2 02 or d2 03 There are two methods of limiting the minimum frequency as follows Adjust the minimum level for all frequencies Adjust the minimum level for the master speed frequency 1 e the lower levels of the jog frequency multi step speed frequency and auxiliary frequency will not be adjusted iRelated Constants Name Control Methods Change k Setting Factory during Vif Open Flux Open Range Setting Opera with LOOP vec Loop tion PG Vector Vector 1 tor 2 Con bes stant Description Number Display Frequency ref erence lower Sets the output frequency lower limit limit as a percentage of the maxi Ref Lower mum output frequency Limit Master speed reference lower Set the master speed reference limit lower limit as a percent taking the max output frequency to be Refl Lower 100 Limit 6 34 Speed Limit Frequency Reference Limit Function ee Adjusting Frequency L
208. Constants Name Control Methods Change k_l Setting Factory during vir OPen py Open Range Setting Opera with LOOP Vec Loop Vector Vector tion PG 1 tor 2 Con EON stant Description Number Display Copy function 0 Normal operation selection 1 READ Inverter to Operator Copy Function 2 COPY Operator to Inverter Sel 3 Verify compare Read permitted selection 0 Read prohibited 1 Read permitted Copy Allow able _ iStoring Inverter Set Values in the Digital Operator READ To store Inverter set values in the Digital Operator make the settings using the following method Set 03 02 Read permitted selection to 1 read permitted Digital Operator Display ADV Main Menu Table 6 1 READ Function Procedure Explanation Press the Menu Key and select advanced programming mode ADV Initialization Select Language Press the DATA ENTER Key and select the constants monitor display ADV COPY Function Copy Funtion Sel Display 03 01 Copy Function Selection using the Increment Key and Decrement Key ADV Copy Funtion Sel COPY SELECT Press the DATA ENTER Key and select the constants setting display ADV Copy Funtion Sel INV OP READ Change the set value to 1 using the Increment Key READ INV OP READING Set the changed data using the DATA ENTER K
209. Display Motor rated current Motor Rated FLA Description Sets the motor rated current in 1 A units These set values will become the reference values for motor protec tion torque limits and torque con trol This constant is automatically set during autotuning Factory Setting Control Methods Vif with PG Open Loop Vector 1 Flux Vec tor Motor rated slip Motor Rated Slip Sets the motor rated slip in Hz units These set values will become the reference values for slip compen sation This constant is automatically set during autotuning Motor no load current No Load Cur rent Sets the motor no load current in 1 A units This constant is automatically set during autotuning Number of motor poles Number of Poles Sets the number of motor poles This constant is automatically set during autotuning Motor line to line resistance Term Resis tance Sets the motor phase to phase resistance in Q units This constant is automatically set during autotuning Motor leak inductance Leak Induc tance Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percent age of the motor rated voltage This constant is automatically set during autotuning Motor iron sat uration coeffi cient 1 Saturation Compl Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 50 of magnetic flux This constant is automatically set dur
210. During speed limit No No No Yes No 6 87 Speed control circuit operating for torque control except when stopped The external torque reference will be limited if torque control is selected internal 32 No No No Yes Yes 6 129 torque reference external torque reference Output when the motor is rotating at the speed limit 6 87 33 Zero servo end ON Zero servo function completed No No No Yes No 6 146 Frequency FOUT detection 5 ON Output frequency 2 L4 01 or output 2 E 36 frequency L4 01 L4 02 used OFF during baseblock EE S S aes TeS SRM 37 During run 2 ON Frequency output OFF Base block DC injection braking ini Yes ves Ves Yes Yes 6 86 tial excitation operation stop 3D Inverter s Cooling Fan Fault detected Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 73 1 Applicable for G7 Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 or later 2 Applicable for G7 Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1038 or later BAnalog Inputs H3 User constants for analog inputs are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Setti Fact Open Open ime Description eng Factory V f Loop Flux Loop p Range Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Display Signal level selection ter 0 0to 10 V minal A1 1 10V to 10 V 11 bit polarity posi Term A1 Sig tive negative input nal Gain termi nal A1 Se
211. E E Ly Jeuiuue 60 LX XBW 20 LP yu 1eddp O itur 1001 LO LP Kouenboei pum 96601X xew quu jeddr nem L0 10 aanebau si jndino q ueuw v 10 sq 9u 19 1 ouenbeu4 uoneiedo esije eiJ ejqesip e qeu3 0 10 Sq wog jenas pueuuuioo deijs nnuu Bursn 90u819Je1 ouenbeJ4 peg uondo jndui uren easing _ BPID Feedback Loss Detection When performing PID control be sure to use the PID feedback loss detection function If PID feedback is lost the Inverter output frequency may accelerate to the maximum output frequency When setting b5 12 to 1 and the status of the PID feedback value detection level in b5 13 is insufficient and continues for the time set in b5 14 an FbL PID feedback reference lost alarm will be displayed on the Digi tal Operator and Inverter operation will continue When b5 12 is set to 2 an FbL PID feedback reference lost error alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator the error contact will operate and Inverter operation will be stopped The time chart for PID feedback loss detection set b5 12 to 2 is shown below PID feedback value Loss detection level b5 13 Time NoFbL detection B kh FbL detection Loss detection time Loss detection time b5 14 b5 14 4 l l l I l Fig 6 65 PID Feedback Loss Detection Time Chart BPID Sleep The PID sleep function stops the Inverter when the PID sleep function delay
212. Harbour Ring Plaza Shanghai 200001 China hone 86 21 5385 2200 Fax 86 21 5385 3299 ASKAWA ELECTRIC SHANGHAI CO LTD BEIJING OFFICE oom 1011A Tower W3 Oriental Plaza No 1 East Chang An Ave ong Cheng District Beijing 100738 China hone 86 10 8518 4086 Fax 86 10 8518 4082 ASKAWA ELECTRIC TAIWAN CORPORATION F 16 Nanking E Rd Sec 3 Taipei Taiwan hone 886 2 2502 5003 Fax 886 2 2505 1280 sel D lt vic D lt o lt VOUK VZ2 lt v YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION YASKAWA In the event that the end user of this product is to be the military and said product is to be employed in any weapons systems or the manufacture thereof the export will fall under the relevant regulations as stipulated in the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Regulations Therefore be sure to follow all procedures and submit all relevant documentation according to any and all rules regulations and laws that may apply Specifications are subject to change without notice MANUAL NO TOE S616 60 1E for ongoing product modifications and improvements Published in Japan June 2008 01 5 4 0 2001 2008 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION All rights reserved 08 5 10
213. Heatsnk tp Ses potentiometer etc Check that MAX i the current for terminals V and Temp V is 20 mA or less Inverter s Cooling Fan Fault 200 V Class 7 5 kW or more 400 V Class 5 5 kW or more This fault is detected when L8 32 is set to 1 The Inverter s cooling fan has stopped The heatsink is clogged Replace the cooling fan Con tact our sales representative Clean the heatsink Display FAN Cooling Fan Fault Table 7 1 Fault Displays and Processing Continued Meaning Inverter s Cooling Fan Fault An Inverter s cooling fan fault was detected and the Inverter overload protection was activated based on the internal electric thermal value This fault is detected when L8 32 is set to 0 Protective and Diagnostic Functions w Probable Causes The Inverter continued running with an overload after the cooling fan stopped Corrective Actions Replace the cooling fan Contact our sales representative OH3 Motor Overheat 1 Motor Overheating Alarm The Inverter will stop or will continue to operate according to the setting of L1 03 The motor has overheated Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration deceler ation and cycle times Check the V f characteristics Check the Motor Rated Current E2 01 OH4 Motor Overheat 2 Motor Overheating Fault The Inverter will stop according to the setting of L1 04
214. ISM This setting is used as a reference 2 No Q Q Q Q Q 3008 Input Voltage value in protection functions V f pattern 0 to E Select from the 15 preset selection patterns E1 03 F Custom user set patterns Oto F F No Q Q No No No 302H V F Selection Applicable for settings E1 04 to E1 10 Max output frequency 40 0to 60 0 E1 04 4000 Hz No Q Q Q Q Q 303H Max 5 2 Frequency Max voltage 0 0to 200 0 E1 05 255 0 V No Q Q Q Q Q 304H Max Voltage 1 2 Base Output voltage V frequency gem j E 0 0to 60 0 E1 06 miel 400 0 Hz No Q Q Q Q Q 305H Base 5 2 Frequency um Mid output LT s frequency E ru dri E ai E1 07 Frequency Hz 0 010 30HZ No a A A No No 3068 Mid 400 0 2 Frequency A To set vif characteristics in a straight line set the same values for Mid output E1 07 and E1 09 In this case the frequency setting for E1 08 will be disre 0 0 t0 f ioy E1 08 voltage garded 255 0 4 No A A A No No 307H Always ensure that the four fre is Mid Voltage A quencies are set in the following manner Min output E1 04 FMAX 2 E1 06 FA gt E1 gt El eae frequency 07 FB 2 E1 09 FMIN 0 0 to 0 5 Hz 400 0 No Q OQ Q A Q 308H Min 5 Frequency Min output frequency 0 0 to 20V El 10 voltage 255 0 4i D No A A A No No 309H Min Voltage Name Con stant Number Display Mid output frequency 2 Mid Frequency B Mid output
215. Improved Operating Efficiency lt e E Adjusting Slip Compensation Gain You can switch the C3 01 constant settings as shown below by changing the control method V f control 0 0 Open loop vector control 1 0 Flux vector control 1 0 Set C3 01 to 1 0 to compensate the rated slip set using the rated torque output status Adjust the slip compensation gain using the following procedure 1 Set E2 02 Motor Rated Slip and E2 03 Motor No load Current correctly You can calculate the motor rated slip from the values on the motor nameplate using the following for mula Amount of motor rated slip Hz Motor rated frequency Hz No of rated rotations min X No of motor poles 120 Set the values for rated voltage rated frequency and no load current in the motor unladen current The motor rated slip is set automatically in the vector control using autotuning 2 In V f control set C3 01 to 1 0 Setting this constant to 0 0 disables slip compensation 3 Apply a load and measure the speed to adjust the slip compensation gain Adjust the slip compensation gain by 0 1 at a time If the speed is less than the target value increase the slip compensation gain and if the speed is greater than the target value reduce the slip compensation gain For flux vector control the slip compensation gain is used as the motor temperature compensation gain When the motor temperate increases the motor s internal constant increases resu
216. Input voltage 24 V isolated Input current 8mA With 16 bit 12 bit switch TOE C736 40 7 Moni toring Option Boards Analog Mon itor Board AO 08 Converts analog signals to monitor the Inverter s output status output frequency output current etc to absolute values and outputs them Output resolution 8 bits 1 256 Output voltage 0 to 10 V not insulated Output channels 2 channels TOE C736 30 21 Analog Mon itor Board AO 12 Output analog signals to monitor the Inverter s output status output frequency output current etc Output resolution 11 bits 1 2048 sign Output voltage 10 to 10 V not insulated Output channels 2 channels TOE C736 30 22 Digital Out put Board DO 08 Outputs isolated digital signals to monitor the Inverters oper ating status alarm signals zero speed detection etc Output form Photocoupler output 6 channels 48 V 50 mA max Relay contact outputs 2 channels 250 VAC 1 A max 30VDC 1 A max TOE C736 30 24 2C Relay Output Board DO 02C Provides two multi function outputs DPDT relay contacts in addition to those provided by the Inverter TOE C736 40 8 Table 9 5 Option Boards Continued Code Num ber Function Document Number Built in con nect to con nector PG Speed Con trol Boards PG A2 73600 A012X Used for V f with PG control Speed feedba
217. Levels 5 3 User Constants Settable in Quick Programming Mode ssseseseene 5 4 User Constant Tables ooo pcttu tec de aaaea Seit v op tussis teme fu tu tate 5 8 Setup ESLa S 5 8 9 b Application Coristanis eo eee i eie LA D e ee 5 10 C Autotuning Constants qu oreet het eee ae uai t CE Ra ha gea oiu 5 21 Sd Reference Constants Cose ooo iste etie d edtsre pontes ie t De toic ie 5 27 9 E Motor Constant Constants eoe e RE E ER Ue pa eU Sube 5 33 F Option Constable eatp apan eataa tee einean aai a AT Ld utere mae ord 5 39 H Terminal Function Constants ccccccccssscecssssssssescosesconescesescesescesescsesceneseseseese 5 46 L Protection Function Constants ccccccscssssssessssesssssssscesssesssscsceseesessseseesesteseseees 5 58 N Special Adjustments ascen aces aah ae ste eee a ceecte esses tete sarete ramekins 5 69 o Digital Operator Constant Arno is ae a a ot aed Na rinne 5 73 T Motor Attn sree Ber cate co eee ed Are sce o caesa eet 5 77 Ws Monitor Constantsice Meche tenet enced hak eee eed aah nade ate eae D E 5 78 Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method A1 02 ssssss 5 87 Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity 02 04 5 90 Constant Settings by Function 6 1 Frequency erererica uc oes aod pae due uecape te di tui oa Sub SU tes eese den 6 2 Selecting the Frequency Reference Source
218. Loop Number Display Range Setting Opera with Vec Vec Vec tion PG tor tor tor 1 2 Droop control Sets the slip as a percentage gain of maximum frequency when the maximum output fre quency is specified and the rated torque occurs Droop Quan Droop control is not per tity formed when the setting is 0 0 Droop control Droop control responsive delay time ness constant When hunting or oscillation occurs increase the value Droop Delay Time User Constant Tables iEnergy Saving b8 User constants for energy saving control functions are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Con Open Open stant Description Number Display Setting Factory V f Loop Flux Loop Range Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Energy sav ing mode selection Select whether to enable or disable energy saving con trol Energy Save 0 Disable Sel 1 Enable Energy sav ing gain Set the energy saving gain with the open loop vector Energy Save control method Gain Energy sav ing filter time constant Set the energy saving filter time constant with the open loop vector control method Energy Save ET Energy sav Set the maximum motor effi ing coeffi ciency value cient Set the motor rated capacity in E2 11 and adjust the value Energy Save by 5 at
219. Low speed and High speed Switch between low speed and high speed gain when oscillation occurs because of resonance with the mechanical system at low speed or high speed The proportional gain P and integral time I can be switched according to the motor speed as shown below P C5 01 x C5 02 P C5 03 C5 04 Low speed Motor speed Hz Oo C5 07 If C5 07 is set to 0 P C5 01 and C5 02 Fig 6 74 Low speed and High speed Gain Settings Setting the Gain Switching Frequency C5 07 Set the switching frequency to about 80 of the motor operating frequency or the frequency at which oscilla tion occurs Low speed Gain Adjustments C5 03 C5 04 Connect the actual load and adjust these constants at zero speed Increase C5 03 ASR proportional gain 2 until there is no oscillation Decrease C5 04 ASR integral time 2 until there is no oscillation High speed Gain Adjustments C5 01 C5 02 Adjust these constants at normal operating speed Increase C5 01 ASR proportional gain 1 until there is no oscillation Decrease C5 02 ASR integral time 1 until there is no oscillation Refer to Fine Adjustments on page 6 138 for details on making fine adjustments of high speed operation ASR Proportional Gain Switch Setting When one of the multi function inputs H1 01 to H1 10 is set to 77 the input can be used to switch between C5 01 proportional gain 1 and C5 03 proportional gain 2 Proportional gain 2 is used wh
220. MOTE operation using the control circuit terminals when the Run Command is sent from the external terminal Switched from the Quick or Advanced Quick programming mode to the Drive mode when the Run Command is sent from the external terminal Stopped The Inverter is run at a frequency below the minimum output frequency The Run Command is carried out when the External Baseblock Com mand using the multi function contact input terminal is issued Stopped Stopped Running During deceleration to a stop During DC injection braking when using the multi function contact input terminal During initial excitation of DC injection braking while the Inverter is stopped Running During emergency deceleration Stop Command is sent from the Digital Operator when operating the Inverter using the control circuit terminals Emergency Stop Command is sent from the control circuit terminal Note X Lit Blinking Not lit Run Command is issued During initial excitation of DC injection braking when starting the Inverter Tf planning to run the Inverter again first turn OFF the Run Command and Emergency Stop Command from the control circuit terminal and send the Run Command Modes en Modes This section describes the Inverter s modes and switching between modes Inverter Modes The Inverter s user constants and monitoring functions are organized in groups called modes that make
221. Maximum motor capacities vary from 0 4 to 300 kW 41 models Table 1 1 Varispeed G7 Models Specifications Always specify through the protective structure when ordering Maximum Varispeed G7 Voltage Motor Class Capacity kW Output Open Chassis Enclosed Wall mounted Capacity Basic Model Number IEC IP00 IEC IP20 NEMA 1 Type 1 kVA CIMR G7000000 CIMR G7ADOO000 CIMR G7A20P4 20P410 CIMR G7A20P7 20P710 CIMR G7A21P5 21P510 CIMR G7A22P2 Remove the top and bottom cov 22P210 CIMR G7A23P7 ers from the Enclosed Wall 23P710 CIMR G7A25P5 mounted model 25P510 CIMR G7A27P5 27P510 CIMR G7A2011 20110 CIMR G7A2015 201510 CIMR G7A2018 201800 201810 CIMR G7A2022 202200 202210 CIMR G7A2030 203000 203010 CIMR G7A2037 203700 203710 CIMR G7A2045 204500 204510 CIMR G7A2055 205500 205510 CIMR G7A2075 207500 207510 CIMR G7A2090 209000 CIMR G7A2110 211000 CIMR G7A40P4 40P410 CIMR G7A40P7 40P710 CIMR G7A41P5 41P510 CIMR G7A42P2 Remove the top and bottom cov 42P210 CIMR G7A43P7 ers from the Enclosed Wall 43P710 CIMR G7A45P5 mount model 45P510 CIMR G7A47P5 47P510 CIMR G7A4011 401110 CIMR G7A4015 401510 CIMR G7A4018 401800 401810 CIMR G7A4022 402200 402210 400 V Class CIMR G7A4030 403000 403010 CIMR G7A4037 403700 403710 CIMR G7A4045 404500 404510 CIMR G7A4055 405500 405510 CIMR G7A4075 407500 407510 CIMR G7A4090 409000 409010 CIMR G7A4110 411000 411010 CIMR G7A4132 413200 413210 CIMR G7A4160 416000 416010 CIMR G7A4185 418500
222. Min Carrier fre quency propor tional gain Carrier Freq Gain Set the carrier frequency upper limit and lower limit in kHz units The carrier frequency gain is set as fol lows With the vector control method the upper limit of the carrier frequency is fixed in C6 03 Carrier frequency Output frequency x C6 05 x K Output pi i frequency Max output frequency K is a coefficient that depends on the setting of C6 03 C6 03 2 10 0 kHz K 3 10 0 kHz gt C6 03 5 0 kHz K 2 5 0 kHz gt C6 03 K 1 nA kB UT Carrier fre quency selection for open loop vector 2 control Carrier Freq Sel Select the carrier frequency when open loop vector 2 control is used 1 2 kHz 2 4 kHz 3 6 kHz 4 8 kHz The factory settings depend on the capacity of the Inverter The values This constant can be monitored or set only when F is set for C6 02 or a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW are given Displayed in Quick Programming Mode when motor 2 is set for a multi function input The maximum output frequency depends on the setting for the carrier frequency refer to page 6 43 The setting ranges depend on the capacity of the Inverter The values for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW are given Machine Protection NM il Control Method and Carrier Frequency Settings Carrier frequency settings are restricted
223. Motor output power to the capacity of the connected motor DRIVE Rated Current T1 04 95 0A 16 5 330 0 95 0A Press the Increment Key to view the motor rated current display Set T1 04 Motor rated current to the value of motor rated current DRIVE OHz 0 0A Tuning Ready Press RUN Key Press the Increment Key to view the shipping adjustment display After confirming that the motor has been connected press the RUN Key to start autotuning Note Do not touch the motor terminals Although the motor does not rotate voltage is being supplied to the motor though the motor is not rotating Maintenance and Inspection E _ Types and Number of Cooling Fans Used in the Drive Cooling fans used for the Drive has two types Heatsink cooling fan and heatsink circulation fan Heatsink cooling fan blows air to the Drive cooling fin Heatsink circulation fan stirs up the air inside the Drive unit Table 8 3 shows the number of cooling fans used in the Drive For more information on models and specifica tions of cooling fans contact your Yaskawa representative or YASKAWA ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COR PORATION When replacing the fan use the specified type of the fan If the inapplicable fans are used performance of the Drive will not be fully obtained Maximum Motor Table 8 3 Number of Cooling Fans to be Used 200 V Class 400 V Class Capacity Heatsink Cooling kW
224. Multi function Analog Inputs H3 05 H3 09 Control Methods Function Add to terminal A1 Torque reference torque limit at speed control Torque compensation Monitor Function Name Control Methods Con Output Signal Level Open stant Description During Multi Func V f Loop Flux Number Display with Vec Vec tion Analog Output PG tor tor 1 Torque refer ence Monitor in internal torque reference value for vector Torque Ref control erence 10 V Motor rated torque 10 to 10 V possible Binputting Torque References and Torque Reference Directions The torque reference can be changed according to an analog input by setting H3 09 Multi function analog input terminal A2 selection or H3 05 Multi function analog input terminal A3 selection to 13 torque refer ence or 14 torque compensation The torque reference input methods are listed in the following table Torque ibam Input Reference Location oe Remarks Set H3 04 to 0 for a 0 to 10 V torque ref H3 04 1 erence Between A3 and AC ib 05 e 13 To switch the torque reference between positive and negative torque set a multi function analog input to 78 Voltage input 10 to 10 V Set H3 08 to 0 for a 0 to 10 V torque ref erence Between A2 and AC x To switch the torque reference between H3 08 1 n Turn OFF pin 2 of H3 09 13 positive
225. Number CIMR G7A Model Number Manufacturer YASKAWA Ratings 5 4 A 8 mH Code Number X010084 400 V Class YASKAWA 3 2 A 28 mH X010052 M iring Examples This section provides wiring examples to connect a Braking Unit and other peripheral devices to the main circuits examples of wiring a transformer to Inverter I O and other aspects of Inverter wiring Using a Braking Resistor Unit This example shows wiring for a Braking Resistor Unit CIMR G7A20P4 to G7A2015 200 V Class Inverters of 0 4 to 15 kW CIMR G7A40P4 to G7A4015 400 V Class Inverters of 0 4 to 15 kW Braking Resistor overheating contacts A sequence is required to tum DC Reactor ou overload relay trip contacts OFF the power supply for the ther improve input mal overload relay trip contacts of power factor the Braking Resistor Unit Optional CODY ro Short circuit bar gt q 55 O 2 w 19 99 phase power 4 200 to 230 V 50 60 Hz a m RT or 380 to 460 V S wernt SIL2 50 60 Hz 7 ia TIL3 WIT3 i 1 400 200 V Inverter FSS Nai Un CC Si 14 i De 200 V Class Inverters Ground to 5 100 Q max 400 V Class Inverters S 6 SK Overload relay trip contact 7 E lof Braking Resistor Unit L Ground to 10 Q max RS i D i i L TAL Imm Din t i i l 1 en AN aed conticts Atransformer is not required for 200
226. Number Display Allows or restricts an alarm from Current alarm being triggered when the relative output current rises above 150 0 Disabled 6 1 Enabled alarm will be output HC Alarm Sel Applicable for G7 Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 or later If load is applied to an induction motor at startup before motor magnetic flux has been produced as when acceleration starts while the motor is locked by a brake mechanism or acceleration is too sudden a high start ing current may flow In this case use the following functions and constants to accelerate the motor after the magnetic flux is pro duced Startup current can be reduced by producing motor magnetic flux Magnetic flux compensation function See related constants b2 02 and b2 08 Dwell function See related constants b6 01 and b6 02 nitial excitation function See the setting 60 of the multi function contact input H1 For flux loop vector control a multi function input terminal can be used for initial excitation by setting HI LILI to 60 Field forcing function See related constant d6 03 Peak Hold Current Monitoring Function This function saves the peak value effective value of the Inverter output current and displays it on the Digital Operator for monitoring U1 83 The Inverter output frequency at the moment the peak current value is saved can be also monitored U1 84 At trial op
227. O1D 0 00to F4 02 Gain 1 00 Yes A A A A A 392H AO Chl Gain Set the multiple of 10 V for out 220 putting monitor items 4 10 to 14 25 28 34 39 40 can 1 to 45 not be set 29 to 31 and 41 are not AO Ch Select used When the AO 12 Analog 1 to 99 Monitor Board is used outputs of 10 V are possible To output 0 V set F4 07 or F4 08 to 1 When the AO 08 Analog Monitor 9 gg to F4 04 Board is used only outputs of Oto 9 59 0 50 Yes A A A A A 394H Channel 2 mon F4 03 itor selection 3 No A A A A A 393H Channel 2 gain AO Ch2 Gain 10 V are possible A meter calibration function is available Channel 1 out put monitor Sets the channel 1 item bias to 10 0 F4 05 bias 100 10 V when the Analog t 10 0 0 0 Yes A A A A A 395H Monitor Board is used PONE AO Chl Bias Channel 2 out put monitor Sets the channel 2 item bias to 10 0 6 F4 06 bias 100 10 V when the Analog T 10 0 0 0 Yes A A A A A 396H Monitor Board is used E AO Ch2 Bias Analog output signal level for channel 1 0 0to10V F4 07 1 10 to 10 V Oor1 0 No A A A A A 397H AO Opt Level Sel Analog output signal level for channel 2 0 0to 10 V F4 08 1 1045 H0y Oorl 0 No A A A A A 398H AO Opt Level Sel ESelecting Analog Monitor Items The digital operator monitor items U1 OO status monitor are output from multi function analog output terminals FM AC and AM AC Ref
228. Operation Example Diagrams of winding and rewinding operation during torque control Application precautions in Copying Constants Using Inverters for Elevating Machines Fig 6 85 Brake ON OFF Sequence Circuit Configuration Description in Confirming Startup Current and Reducing Carrier Frequency Fault Detections Descriptions of FAN SER and ES Alarm Detections Descriptions of FAN E5 AEr CyC BB HCA LT F and LT C Table 7 2 Causes and Corrective Actions for When the Digital Operator Goes Dark Note in Table 7 3 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings Adjusted Silp Value in Table 7 5 Errors During Autotuning CPE in Table 7 6 Errors during Copy Function Following descriptions in Troubleshooting The Inverter does not operate Acoustic Noise from the Motor Changes Probable causes and corrective actions for the OC GF PUF OV UVI UV2 UV3 OH OH1 OL1 OL2 PGO DEV CPF03 to CPF05 and CPF23 faults and OH FBL PGO and DEV alarms Deletion Alarm Detections Chapter 8 Addition Revision Chapter 9 Addition Chapter 10 Addition Descriptions of E 15 Descriptions in Periodic Maintenance of Parts Description of how to attach the fan cover for 200 V Class Inverters of 22 kW 45 kW 55 kW 400 V Class Inverters of 18 5 kW to 75 kW Description of how to replace the cooing fan and circulation fan for 400 V Class Inverters of 185 kW 220 kW and 300 kW Procedure for Adjusting Constants after Re
229. Operation Procedures If the values of E2 02 and E2 03 differed greatly from the reference data of the motor in the test report or the instruction manual hunting motor vibrations insufficient motor torque or an overcurrent may occur because the motor is operated although the aforementioned conditions have not been fulfilled after stationary autotun ing 1 For elevators failure to observe this caution may result in the cage falling or injury If so perform sta tionary autotuning again and run the motor using the aforementioned procedure under the recommended conditions or perform stationary autotuning 2 or rotational autotuning Usually the standard setting for E2 02 is 1 Hz to 3 Hz and that for E2 03 is 30 to 65 of the rated current for a general purpose motor Generally the larger the motor capacity is the smaller the rated slip and the ratio of the no load current to the rated current become Use the data given in Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity 02 04 of Chapter 5 User Constants as a reference 4 13 B Constant Settings for Autotuning The following constants must be set before autotuning Name Display Table 4 3 Constant Settings before Autotuning Display Setting Range Factory Setting Data Displays during Autotuning Motor 1 2 When switching to motor 2 is selection selected set the motor for which autotuning
230. Q input P i Ground l S1 FEK a m a l Forward Run Stop i b i i S2 I HK Reverse Run Stop st 2 an S3 Z l f p o r3 L E koi L m l External fault Fog 71 RI ii j o LLBSR Fault reset r L Multi function bd J1 55 Hs contact inputs Fog i Facti Multi step it A Au a 1 Eo speed setting 1 i i Ww pog k I io S812 _ Bes l EN i Emergency stop Root CN5 PNP setting 24 V8 mA NO contact ES ete X Dm todo l i m LSC if i RT v H9 T ME l l 1 i 1 l Ux l i A T 24V Shield wire connection terminal I l Pulse train input p gt b RP Master speed pulse train l r Frequency setting Cg 0 to 32 kHz 3kQ adjustment H 2k i i High level 3 5 to 13 2 V input i E Fo l l i Frequency i V Frequency setting power External setter OOV pa 415 V 20 mA O erT 2 kQ z t A1 Master speed reference l t i 1 4 to 20 mA pf 0 to 10 V 20 kQ E H H 7 A2 Master Speed reference Peis AC 4 to 20 mA 2500 i A M bi 7 s Fig 10 15 Wiring Examples NM Using Transistors for Input Signals and a 0 V Common in Sinking Mode with an External Power Supply Set CN5 shunt connector on the control board to EXT as shown below for a sequence that uses an NPN tran sistor for an input signal 0 V common and sinking mode and an external 24 V power su
231. S errors Applicable for G7 Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1038 or later Refer to MECHATROLINK COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE CARD INSTRUCTIONS TOBPC73060008 for details 5 45 H Terminal Function Constants The following settings are made with the terminal function constants H constants Settings for external ter minal functions Multi function Contact Inputs H1 User constants for multi function contact inputs are shown in the following tables Name Control Methods Setti Fact Open Open Description eung Factory V f Loop Flux Loop P Range Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Display Terminal S3 function selec tion Multi function contact input 1 Terminal S3 Sel Terminal S4 function selec tion Multi function contact input 2 Terminal S4 Sel Terminal S5 function selec tion Multi function contact input 3 Terminal S5 Sel Terminal S6 function selec tion Multi function contact input 4 Terminal S6 Sel Terminal S7 function selec tion Multi function contact input 5 Terminal S7 Sel Terminal S8 function selec tion Multi function contact input 6 Terminal S8 Sel Terminal S9 function selec tion Multi function contact input 7 Terminal S9 Sel Terminal S10 function selec tion Multi function contact input 8 Te
232. S system set the factory setting to 1 1 e set all 16 bits to 1 2 Calculate CRC 16 using MSB as slave address LSB and LSB as the MSB of the final data 3 Also calculate CRC 16 for response messages from the slaves and compare them to the CRC 16 in the response messages Individual Functions w BMEMOBUS Message Example An example of MEMOBUS command response messages is given below Reading Storage Register Contents Read the contents of the storage register only for specified quantities whose addresses are consecutive starting from a specified address The contents of the storage register are separated into higher place 8 bits and lower place 8 bits and comprise the data within response messages in address order The following table shows message examples when reading status signals error details data link status and frequency references from the slave 2 Inverter Response Message Response Message Command Message During Normal Operation During Error Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H Function Code 03H Function Code 03H Function Code 83H Higher 00H Data quantity 08H Error code 03H l Start pace Address Lower 20H Higher 00H Higher FI place place place Rs CRC 16 Higher 00H Lower 65H Lower 31H place place place Quantity Lower 04H Higher 00H place Next stor place age register Higher ASH Lower
233. Set in L2 03 Loss Time Longer Than the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 AC power supply ON OFF Start using speed detected Set frequency y Ld reference Output frequency Output current p EORR 10ms Minimum baseblock time Speed Search Wait Time L2 03 b3 05 Fig 6 46 Speed Search After Baseblock Estimated Speed Loss Time gt L2 03 _ ilCurrent Detection Speed Search b3 01 2 or 3 The time charts for current detection speed search is shown below Speed Search at Startup b3 01 3 The time chart when speed search at startup or external speed search command is selected is shown below Run Command OFF ON Deceleration time set in b3 03 Maximum output dae frequency or set frequency A Set frequency reference Output frequency Output current er Minimum baseblock time Lower limit is set using Speed Search Time b3 05 L2 03 Fig 6 47 Speed Search at Startup Using Current Detection Speed Search after Short Baseblock b3 01 2 The time chart when the Inverter operation is restarted after power has been restored is shown below Loss Time Shorter Than Minimum Baseblock Time AC power supply ON OFF Outputfrequency before power loss Set frequency Deceleration reference time set in b3 03 Output frequency b3 02 Speed search operating current Outpu
234. Slip compensation selection during regeneration Energy saving filter time constant Output voltage limit operation selection Energy saving coefficient Torque compensation gain Power detection filter time con stant Torque compensation primary delay time constant Search operation voltage limiter Forward starting torque Zero servo gain Reverse starting torque Zero servo completion width Starting torque time constant Acceleration time 1 ASR proportional P gain 1 Deceleration time 1 ASR integral I time 1 Acceleration time 2 ASR proportional P gain 2 Deceleration time 2 ASR integral T time 2 Acceleration time 3 ASR limit Deceleration time 3 ASR primary delay time Acceleration time 4 ASR switching frequency Deceleration time 4 ASR integral T limit Emergency stop time ASR primary delay time 2 Table 10 7 User Constants Continued Carrier frequency selection Fac tory Setting Jump frequency 1 User Constants BE Fac tory Setting Carrier frequency upper limit Jump frequency 2 Carrier frequency lower limit Jump frequency 3 Carrier frequency proportional gain Jump frequency width Carrier frequency for open loop vector 2 control Frequency reference hold function selection Frequency reference 1 Speed limits Frequency reference 2 Torque
235. Stall Prevention Level during Running is too low the speed will drop before out putting torque Check to be sure that the set value is suitable Autotuning has not been performed for vector control Vector control will not perform if autotuning has not been performed Perform autotuning separately for the motor or set the motor constants through calculations Alternatively change the Control Method Selection A1 02 to V f control 0 or 1 If the Motor Operates Higher Than the Reference Use the following information if the motor operates higher than the reference 7 29 E gee EThe analog frequency reference bias setting is wrong the gain setting is wrong The frequency reference bias set in constant H3 03 is added to the frequency reference Check to be sure that the set value is suitable BA signal is being input to the frequency reference current terminal A2 or A3 When 0 Add to terminal A1 is set for constant H3 09 Multi function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection or H3 05 Multi function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection a frequency correspond ing to the terminal A2 or A3 input voltage current is added to the frequency reference Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are suitable If the Slip Compensation Function Has Low Speed Precision If speed control accuracy is low for the slip compensation function the slip compensation limit has been reached Wit
236. TROL UNMATCH The Inverter control method in which you are trying to copy and the Inverter control method stored in the Digital Operator are different CYE COPY ERROR Comparison between the constant written to the Inverter and the constant in the Digital Operator shows they are different CSE SUM CHECK ERROR After copying has ended comparison between the sum value of the Inverter constant area and the sum value of the Digital Operator constant area shows they are different Comparing Inverter Constants and Digital Operator Constant Set Values VERIFY To compare Inverter constants and Digital Operator constant set values make the settings using the following method ADV Main Menu Table 6 3 VERIFY Function Procedure Digital Operator Display Explanation Press the MENU Key and select advanced programming mode ADV Initialization Select Language Press the DATA ENTER Key and select the constants monitor display Digital Operator Functions m M Table 6 3 VERIFY Function Procedure Continued Digital Operator Display Explanation ADV 3 COPY Function Display 03 01 Copy Function Selection using the Increment Key and Decrement Key 4 Press the DATA ENTER Key and select the function setting display 5 Change the set value to 3 using the Increment Key OP INV VERIFY ADV
237. V 15V 20mA P2 N OOV ZMA ii i They Open collector 2 m I K k d Default a i Terminating hy PC agree signal queen Multi function ia l P3 j open collector outputs tot 48 VDC 50 mA 3 MEMOBUS E i o gt Open collector 3 C 50 mA max E m I ca Factory setting communications bg j KI inserter operation RS 485 422 E b Q gt ready bd P4 pm gt Open collector 4 Adr Pe a 3K Factory setting T LIG P C4 pe minor fault V Fig 2 2 Connection Diagram Model CIMR G7A2018 Shown Above _ Y esa P a 1 Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown below e IMPORTANT 2 The output current capacity of the V and V terminals are 20 mA Do not short circuit between the V V and AC terminals Doing so may result in a malfunction or a breakdown of the Inverter 3 Disable the stall prevention during deceleration set constant L3 04 to 0 when using a Braking Resistor Unit If this user constant is not changed to disable stall prevention the system may not stop during decel eration 4 Main circuit terminals are indicated with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicated with single circles 5 The wiring for a motor with a cooling fan is not required for self cooling motors PG circuit wiring i e wiring to the PG B2 Board is not required for control without a PG 7 Sequence input signals S1 to S12 are labeled for sequence connections 0 V common and sinking mode
238. V Class Remove the short circuit bar normally connected from 1 and 2 when connecting a DC Reactor Optional Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3 04 and using a Braking Resistor Unit The motor may not stop within the decel eration time if this setting is not changed When connecting a separately installed type Braking Unit model CDBR to Inverters with built in braking transistor 200 V 400 V 15 kW or less connect the B1 terminal of the Inverter to the terminal of the Braking Unit and connect the terminal of the Inverter to the ter minal of the Braking Unit The B2 terminal is not used in this case Fig 10 9 Wiring Examples NM Using a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit When using a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit create a sequence to detect overheating of the braking resistor and cut off the power supply to the Inverter CIMR G7A2018 G7A2022 200 V Class Inverters of 18 5 kW 22 kW Braking Resistor Unit Optional DC Reactor to Braking Unit A sequence is required to turn CE apat Optional OFF the power supply for the 0 tional thermal overload relay trip con P bn orte Braking Resistor OS oS Braking Resistor overheating contacts j m 4_J Thermal overload relay trip contacts Short circuit bar p m OTD MCCB T iQ G2 3 I 1 y 3 phase power R e a R L1 U T1 Motor 200 to 230 V 50 60 Hz s OL Posie VIT2 6
239. Varispeed G7 INSTRUCTION MANUAL GENERAL PURPOSE INVERTER ADVANCED VECTOR CONTROL zem 200V CLASS 0 4 to 110kW 1 2 to 160kVA 400V CLASS 0 4 to 300kW 1 4 to 460kVA Upon receipt of the product and prior to initial operation read these instructions thoroughly and retain for future reference YASKAWA MANUAL NO TOE S616 60 1E Preface This manual is designed to ensure correct and suitable application of Varispeed G7 Series Inverters Read this manual before attempting to install operate main tain or inspect an Inverter and keep it in a safe conve nient location for future reference Be sure you understand all precautions and safety information before attempting application General Precautions The diagrams in this manual may be indicated without covers or safety shields to show details Be sure to restore covers or shields before operating the Units and run the Units according to the instructions described in this manual Any illustrations photographs or examples used in this manual are provided as examples only and may not apply to all products to which this manual is applicable The products and specifications described in this manual or the content and presentation of the manual may be changed without notice to improve the product and or the manual When ordering a new copy of the manual due to damage or loss contact your Yaskawa represen tatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office and provide the manual
240. Ves Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 51 used 5 piso ane ee i ON Output frequency L4 01 or output fre Ves Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 51 RE Di as ae no faults ESSE eas l 7 During DC bus undervoltage UV detection Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 During baseblock ON during baseblock Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 9 Frequency reference selection ON Frequency reference from Operator Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A Run Command selection status ON Run Command from Operator Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes B Cao ST detection 1 NO NO contact Overtorque undertorque Ves Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 54 Loss of frequency reference Effective when is set for L4 05 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 71 D Braking resistor fault ON Resistor overheat or braking transistor fault Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 74 E um d Pic eem communications error or fault other than CPF00 and Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes F Not used Set when the terminals are not used 10 Minor fault ON Alarm displayed Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 11 Fault reset command active Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 12 Timer function output Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 105 13 Frequency agree 2 L4 04 used Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 51 14 Desired frequency agree 2 ON Output frequency L4 03 L4 04 used and dur Ves Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 51 ing frequency agree 15 Frequency detection 3 ON Output frequency lt L4 03 L4 04 used Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 51
241. Vif with PG Open Loop Vec tor 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vec tor 2 V f pattern selection V F Selec tion 0 to E Select from the 15 preset patterns F Custom user set patterns Applicable for settings E1 04 to E1 10 Max output frequency Max Frequency Max voltage Max Voltage Base frequency Base Frequency Mid output frequency Mid Frequency A Mid output frequency voltage Mid Voltage A Min output frequency Min Frequency Min output frequency voltage Min Voltage Output voltage V MIN FB FA FMAX E1 09 E1 07 E1 06 E1 04 Frequency Hz To set V f characteristics in a straight line set the same values for E1 07 and E1 09 In this case the setting for E1 08 will be disre garded Always ensure that the four fre quencies are set in the following manner E1 04 FMAX 2 E1 06 FA gt El 07 FB 2 E1 09 FMIN 5 33 Name Control Methods Setting Factory Open Open Description Vif Loop Flux Loop Display p Range Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Mid output frequency 2 0 0 to RTA El 11 Mid Dn 5 No AJA A A A 30AH 6 121 Frequency 5 B Mid output frequency Set only to fine adjust V f for the l 2 output range Normally this setting 0 036 0 0 V E1 12 Voltage
242. Wiring Example Run Command NM Performing Operations Using a 3 wire Sequence When any constant from H1 01 to H1 10 multi function contact input terminals S3 to S12 is set to 0 termi nals S1 and S2 are used for a 3 wire sequence and the multi function input terminal that has been set func tions as a Forward Reverse Run Command terminal When the Inverter 1s initialized for 3 wire sequence control with A1 03 multi function input 3 becomes the input terminal for the Forward Reverse Run Command Stop switch Operation switch NC contact NO contact LL Run Command operates when ON Stop Command stoppad when ON orward Reverse Command multi function input v1 Sequence input common Fig 6 11 3 wire Sequence Wiring Example 50 ms min Run Command Can be either ON or OFF OFF Stop Command stopped Forward Reverse OFF forward ON reverse Command gt Motor speed Reverse Stop Forward Fig 6 12 Three wire Sequence Time Chart Run Command self holding in the Inverter 2 When the 3 wire sequence is set do not make the wiring for the control circuit unless the multi function input terminal constant is set Failure to observe this warning may result in injury Q 1 Use a sequence that turns ON terminal S1 for 50 ms or longer for the Run Command This will make the INFO 6 11 Stopping Methods This section explains methods of stopping the Inverter S
243. You can set and refer to constants necessary to the Inverter only using the A2 constants user set constants and A1 01 Constants Access Level Set the number of the constant to which you want to refer in A2 01 to A2 32 and then set A1 01 to 1 You can set and refer to constants set in A1 01 to A1 03 and A2 01 to A2 32 only using advanced programming mode iRelated Constants Name Con stant Number Display User setting constants A2 01 to A2 32 User Param 1 to 32 Description Used to set the constant numbers that can be set read Maximum 32 Effective when the Constant Access Level A1 01 is set to User Program 1 Constants set in constants A2 01 to A2 32 can be set read in programming mode Change during Opera tion with Control Methods Vit Open Loop Vector 1 Flux Vec PG tor Open Loop Vector 2 Options This section explains the Inverter option functions Performing Speed Control with PG This section explains functions with V f control with PG iRelated Constants Con stant Number Name Display PG constant PG Pulses Rev Description Sets the number of PG pulse gen erator or encoder pulses Sets the number of pulses per motor revolution Factory Setting Control Methods Vif with PG Open Loop Vector Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vector Operation selection at PG open circuit
244. a Phase Advancing Capacitor or Noise Filter Never connect a phase advancing capacitor or LC RC noise filter to an output circuit The high frequency components of the Inverter output may result in overheating or damage to these part or may result in damage to the Inverter or cause other parts to burn Do Not Use a Magnetic Contactor Never connect a magnetic contactor between the Inverter and motor and turn it ON or OFF during operation If the magnetic contactor is turned ON while the Inverter is operating a large inrush current will be created and the overcurrent protection in the Inverter will operate When using a magnetic contactor to switch to a commercial power supply stop the Inverter and motor before operating the magnetic contactor Use the speed search function if the magnetic contactor is operated during Wiring Main Circuit Terminals eee operation If measures for momentary power interrupts are required use a delayed release the magnetic con tactor Installing a Thermal Overload Relay This Inverter has an electronic thermal protection function to protect the motor from overheating If however more than one motor is operated with one Inverter or a multi polar motor is used always install a thermal relay THR between the Inverter and the motor and set L1 01 to 0 no motor protection The sequence should be designed so that the contacts of the thermal overload relay turn OFF the magnetic contactor on the main circuit in
245. a the Digital Operator LOCAL and REMOTE LOCAL REMOTE Key control circuit terminal operation REMOTE This Key can be enabled or disabled by setting user constant 02 01 MENU MENU Key Selects menu items modes ESC Key Returns to the status before the DATA ENTER Key was pressed on SC JOG JOG Key Enables jog operation when the Inverter is being operated from the Digital Operator Digital Operator NM Table 3 1 Key Functions Continued FWD REV Key Function Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Inverter is being operated from the Digital Operator Shift RESET Key Sets the number of digits for user constant settings Also acts as the Reset Key when a fault has occurred Increment Key Selects menu items sets user constant numbers and increments set values Used to move to the next item or data Decrement Key Selects menu items sets user constant numbers and decrements set values Used to move to the previous item or data DATA ENTER Key Pressed to enter menu items user constants and set values Also used to switch from one display to another Constants cannot be changed when Undervoltage UV is detected RUN Key Starts the Inverter operation when the Inverter is being controlled by the Digital Operator STOP Key Stops Inverter operation 3 This Key can be enabled or disabled when operating from the control circuit termi
246. age is applied to output terminal U V or W Check wring for any mistakes before supplying power Check all wiring and sequences carefully Magnetic Contactor Installation Do not start and stop operation frequently with a magnetic contactor installed on the power supply line Doing so can cause the Inverter to malfunction Do not turn the Inverter ON and OFF with a magnetic contactor more than one time every 30 minutes ilSetting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper 400 V Class Inverters of 55 kW or Higher If the jumper is inserted into a power tap that does not match the actual power supply voltage the lifetime of the transformer for the power supply or the wind capacity of the cooling fan may be reduced If the jumper is inserted and the voltage setting is too low for the actual power supply a power surge may occur on the transformer for the power supply and reduce the lifetime of the transformer If the jumper is inserted and the voltage setting is too high for the actual power supply the wind capacity of the cooling fan is reduced Insert the jumper into the power tap with the voltage setting nearest to the voltage of the actual power supply Refer to Chapter 4 Trial Operation for the procedure iMMaintenance and Inspections After turn OFF the main circuit power supply always confirm that the CHARGE indicator is not lit before performing maintenance or inspections The voltage remaining in the capacitor may cause electric shock
247. aintenance and Inspection M 8200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 18 5 kW or More A cooling fan is attached to the top panel inside the Inverter The cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel 200 V Class Inverters of 18 5 kW Removing the Cooling Fan 1 Remove the terminal cover Inverter cover Digital Operator and front cover from the front of the Inverter 2 Remove the control board bracket to which the boards are mounted Remove all cables connected to the controller The cables connected to the control circuit terminals can be removed at the same time by removing them together with the control circuit terminal board Refer to page 8 21 3 Remove the cooling fan power cable connector CN26 and CN27 from the gate drive board positioned at the back of the control board 4 Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter 5 Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one Mounting the Cooling Fan After attaching a new cooling fan reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket be sure that the airflow faces the top of the Inverter JI Airflow direction 4 Fan cover Control board bracket ES gt Control board Fig 8 2 Cooling Fan Replacement 200 V Class Inverters of 18 5 kW 200 V Class Inverters of
248. aking stop Stops faster than 0to3 0 No Q Q Q Q Q 182H coast to stop without regenerative 10 Stopping operation Method 3 Coast to stop with timer Run Commands are disregarded during deceleration time Accelera tion time Set the acceleration time in seconds C1 01 for the output frequency to climb from Yes Q Q Q Q Q 200H Accel 0 to 100 Time 1 0 0 to 6000 0 10 0s Decelera tion time 1 Set the deceleration time in seconds C1 02 for the output frequency to fall from Yes Q Q Q Q Q 201H Decel 100 to 0 Time 1 Carrier fre quency Select carrier wave fixed pattern E C6 02 Selection Select F to enable detailed settings d b No QIQ Q Q 2 224H Carrier using constants C6 03 to C6 07 Freq Sel Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels W Name Control Methods Setti Fact Open Open Description Sng ij Taciory V f Joop Flux Loop p Range Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Display Carrier fre quency for Select carrier frequency when open open loop loop vector 2 control is used vector 2 1 2kHz control 2 4kHz 3 6kHz Carrier 4 8kHz Freq Sel Frequency Set the frequency reference in the unit reference 1 specified in 01 03 Frequency Units for Reference Setting And Monitor Reference 1 default Hz Frequency reference 2 Frequency reference when multi step speed reference 1 is ON fo
249. al AM Outputs actual motor speed 10 to 10 V Terminal AC is the multi function analog output common We recommend monitoring both the output frequency and the motor speed to monitor the response delay or deviations from the reference value as shown in the following diagram Individual Functions m Adjusting ASR Proportional Gain 1 C5 01 This gain setting adjusts the responsiveness of the speed control ASR The responsiveness is increased when this setting is increased Usually this setting is higher for larger loads Oscillation will occur if this setting is increased too much The following diagram shows the type of changes that can occur in the response when the ASR proportional gain is changed Motor speed The proportional gain is high Oscillation occurs when the gain is too high The proportional gain is low Time Fig 6 72 Responsiveness for Proportional Gain Adjusting ASR Integral Time 1 C5 02 This constant sets the speed control ASR integral time Lengthening the integral time lowers the responsiveness and weakens the resistance to external influences Oscillation will occur if this setting is too short The following diagram shows the type of changes that can occur in the response when the ASR integral time is changed 6 Motor speed Short integral time Long integral time Time Fig 6 73 Responsiveness for Integral Time _ Different Gain Settings for
250. all prevention level during run you can change the stall level during operation by setting H3 10 Gain Terminal A2 and H3 11 Bias Terminal A2 or H3 06 Gain Terminal A3 and H3 07 Bias Terminal A3 The stall prevention level during operation enabled is the multi function analog input terminal A2 or A3 input level or the set value in constant L3 06 whichever is the smaller Stall prevention level during operation 100 30 Multi function analog input terminal A2 A3 input level 0 3V 10 V 4 mA 8 8 mA 20 mA Fig 6 39 Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input If the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity or the motor stalls when operating at the factory set S tings lower the stall prevention level during operation INFO Using Frequency Detection L4 01 to L4 05 Set these constants when outputting one of the frequency agree or frequency detection signals from a multi function output When using flux vector control the motor speed is detected iRelated Constants T Name Grane ELE Methods EHE m Setting Factory during VIF pen ei pen BUS stant i Description i Loo ux Loo i Number Display Range Setting pe Vif Sector o ioe D 1 or 2 Speed agree Set the speed that you want to detection level detect in Hz The set speed is an absolute value Spd Agree so the speed is detected in forward Level or reverse Speed agree detecti
251. alling an option board into slot C or D The option board can not be installed completely and may not function properly if it is installed with the option clip attached 4CN A option board connector 2CN C option board connector A option board mounting spacer Provided with A Option Board C option board mounting spacer C option board Option Clip To prevent raising of C and D option boards D option board 3CN D option board connector p option board mounting spacer Front Cover Fig 2 22 Cutting the Front Cover Cut out the slits on the front cover with nippers Be careful to avoid injury 2 32 Installing and Wiring Option Boards E PG Speed Control Board Terminals and Specifications The terminal specifications for the PG Speed Control Boards are given in the following tables BPG A2 The terminal specifications for the PG A2 are given in the following table Terminal Table 2 15 PG A2 Terminal Specifications Contents Power supply for pulse generator Specifications 12 VDC 5 200 mA max 0 VDC GND for power supply 12 V open collector switching ter minal Terminal for switching between12 V voltage input and open collector input For open collector input short across 3 and 4 Pulse input terminal H 4 to 12 V L 1 V max Maximum response fre 2 quency 30 kH
252. als of 0 01 Speed 2 N4 11 Is the speed response to be increased for low speed operation or high speed Increase the setting for the high speed proportional gain of speed estimator N4 10 Typically increase in intervals of 5 Speed N4 11 Reduce the setting for the integral time of speed estimator N4 07 Typically reduce in intervals of 0 005 Do not change the Torque Compensation Gain C4 01 from its default setting of 1 00 when using open loop vector 1 control If speeds are inaccurate during regeneration in open loop vector 1 control enable Slip Compensation Dur ing Regeneration C3 04 1 Use slip compensation to improve speed control during V f control A1 02 0 Set the Motor Rated Current E2 01 Motor Rated Slip E2 02 and Motor No load Current E2 03 and then adjust the Slip Compensation Gain C3 01 to between 0 5 and 1 5 The default setting for V f control is C3 01 0 0 slip compensation disabled To improve speed response and stability in V f control with a PG A1 02 1 set the ASR constants C5 01 to C5 05 to between 0 5 and 1 5 times the default It is not normally necessary to adjust this setting ASR for V f control with a PG will only control the output frequency a high gain such as is possible for open loop vector 2 control or flux vector control cannot be set The following user constants will also indirectly affect the control system
253. an ground cable Enlarged view 2 ff da mae Fan airflow direction Colling fan Fan cover mounting screws Cooling fan mounting screws _ Finger guard Fig 8 11 Cooling Fan Replacement 400 V Class Inverters of 185 kW and 220 kW Maintenance and Inspection eee 400 V Class Inverters of 300 kW Removing the Cooling Fan 1 Remove the terminal cover Inverter cover Digital Operator and front cover from the front of the Inverter 2 Remove any cables that are connected to the cooling fan power relay board The cable that is connected to the terminal board can be removed together with the terminal board 3 Remove the fan unit screws and pull out the fan units from the Inverter 4 Replace the fan units with new ones And remove the screws for the fan power relay board and attach this board to the new unit Mounting the Cooling Fan After attaching a new cooling fan unit reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components Front cover mounting screws Fan power relay board Fan cover Fan cover et ve ERE en Eyl o o o Top front cover Bottom front cover Terminal cover mounting screws Fan cover mounting screws Fan cover mounting screws Fan units Fan airflow derection Fig 8 12 Cooling Fan Replacement 400 V Class Inverters of 300 kW 8 15 _
254. and Space sseesssseseeeeeeeeeee 1 10 Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover eessseeeeeees 1 11 Removing the Terminal Cover nete 1 11 Attaching the Terminal Cover 3 eco ec dec tee ee Eee he 1 12 Removing Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover 1 13 inverters of 15 KW or Less rca cori o ottico aset nae 1 13 9 inverters of 18 5 KW or More eei eie 1 16 Removing and Attaching the Protection Cover eeeeeeeesess 1 17 Removing the Protection Cover cccccccccscscssssssessesessssessssecsssecssessesessetessssescenescene 1 17 Attaching the Protection Cover 1 18 ULL Ls Ree M 2 1 Connections to Peripheral Devices cccceceecccecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 2 2 CONNECTION DIAGRAM vai ios Let poa nasus AA Go ta anes Faniagetc B atu tute feoda 2 3 Terminal Block Configuration ssssseeeeeee 2 5 Wiring Main Circuit Terrriinals iiir retro en ere aedes 2 6 Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed loop Connectors sssssseeee 2 6 Main Circuit Terminal Functions cccccccccscseceetecestecestecesseseeseseesesseesessesesceneeceeseese 2 13 Main Circuit CoBBOUrationg xs esiti au e mtt cope tete eases 2 14 4 Standard Connection Dia greats 52 ete petere cede parte vtae reso 2 15 Wiring ihe Main Circuits erra tttm ata e o tate Re Roe tec 2 16 Wiring Control Circuit
255. and the cooling fan power relay board are mounted Remove any cables that are connected to the control board the gate drive board and the cooling fan power relay board The cable that is connected to the control circuit terminals can be removed together with the control circuit terminal board Refer to page 8 21 3 Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter 4 Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one Mounting the Cooling Fan After attaching a new cooling fan reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket be sure that the airflow faces the top of the Inverter Front cover mounting screws Front cover Terminal cover g 9 A N Terminal cover mounting screws Circulation fan Cooling fan power relay board Fan cover mounting screws Airflow direction Circulation fan mounting screws Circulation fan Circulation fan power connector Cooling fan mounting screws Fig 8 9 Cooling Fan Replacement 400 V Class Inverters of 90 kW and 110 kW Maintenance and Inspection BE MM 200 V Class Inverters of 90 kW and 110 kW 400 V Class Inverters of 132 kW and 160 kW Removing the Cooling Fan 1 Remove the terminal cover Inverter cover Digital Operator and front cover from the front of the Inverter 2 Remove the panel
256. ar CE markings indicating conformance to the Low Voltage Directive and the EMC Directive Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC 93 68 EEC EMC Directive 89 336 EEC 92 31 EEC 93 68 EEC Machinery and installations that incorporate the Inverter are also subject to CE markings It is ultimately the responsibility of customers making products incorporating the Inverter to attach CE markings to the finished products The customer must confirm that the finished products machines or installations conform to the European Standards Requirements for Conformance to CE Markings HLow Voltage Directive Varispeed G7 Series Inverters satisfy testing for conformance to the Low Voltage Directive under the condi tions described in European Standard EN50178 Requirements for Conformance to the Low Voltage Directive Varispeed G7 Series Inverters must satisfy the following conditions in order to conform to the Low Voltage Directive t must be used under conditions corresponding to overvoltage category 3 or less and pollution degree 2 or less as specified in IEC664 nput fuses For details on selecting fuses refer to Table 10 4 Selection Requirements for Input Fuses with Examples With Inverters CIMR G7A2018 to 2110 and CIMR G7A4018 to 4300 an enclosure preventing foreign matter from entering from the top or front sides is required IP4X or higher panel installation Wiring Example This example shows wiring for conforming to u
257. art Dwell Ref Start i Run command ON Dwell time mE Output frequency F at start Dwell Time Start Dwell fre quency at stop Dwell Ref The dwell function is used to Stop output frequency temporarily when driving a motor with a heavy Dwell time load at stop Dwell Time Stop 6 22 Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics w Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration Stall Prevention During Acceleration Function The Stall Prevention During Acceleration function prevents the motor from stalling if a heavy load is placed on the motor or sudden rapid acceleration is performed If you set L3 01 to 1 enabled and the Inverter output current exceeds the 15 level of the set value in L3 02 the acceleration rate will begin to slow down When L3 02 is exceeded acceleration will stop If you set L3 01 to 2 optimum adjustment the motor current accelerates to the value set in L3 02 With this setting the acceleration time setting is ignored Related Parameters Name Control Methods Con stant Number Display Stall preven tion selection during accel StallP Accel Sel Description 0 Disabled Acceleration as set With a heavy load the motor may stall Enabled Acceleration stopped when L3 02 level is exceeded Acceleration starts again when the current is returned Intelligent
258. ary Frequencies iSetting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Signals When b1 01 is set to 4 the pulse train input to control circuit terminal RP is used as the frequency reference Set H6 01 Pulse Train Input Function Selection to 0 frequency reference and then set the 100 reference pulse frequency to H6 02 Pulse Train Input Scaling Inverter Pulse Input Specifications Low level voltage 0 0 to 0 8 V High level voltage 3 5 to 13 2 V 7 dist 30 to 70 32 kHz max eavy Cuty ON 3 5 to 13 2 V SUE RP Pulse train input termi Pulse frequency 0 to 32 kHz Pulse input O nal AC Analog common Fig 6 5 Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Input Frequency Reference Using Multi Step Speed Operation With Varispeed G7 series Inverters you can change the speed to a maximum of 17 steps using 16 frequency references and one jog frequency reference The following example of a multi function input terminal function shows a 9 step operation using multi step references to 3 and jog frequency selection functions Related Constants To switch frequency references set multi step speed references to 3 and the jog reference selection in the multi function contact inputs Setting examples are shown below Multi function Contact Inputs H1 01 to H1 10 Terminal Constant Set Value Details Number Factory Setting Multi step speed reference 1 Also used for master speed auxiliary spee
259. as been completed For constants in which no error is detected the settings are reset to the values determined by autotuning Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function The errors that can occur when using the copy function from the Digital Operator are given in the following table An error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator If a Digital Operator key is pressed when an error code is being displayed the display will be cleared and 03 01 will be displayed The error contact output and alarm output will not function Table 7 6 Errors during Copy Function Display Meaning Probable causes Corrective Actions FRE Digital Operator QN Ne E to Deo NEUSS Constant Set 03 02 to 1 to enable writing con READ ritepiotected when the Digital Operator was write tatis with the Distal Operator IMPOSSIBLE protecte protected 03 02 0 MOM ean daca IFE The read data length does not agree Repeat the read READ DATA Illegal read data Check the Digital Operator cable 7 ERROR The write data is incorrect Replace the Digital Operator A low Inverter voltage has been detected Repeat the read Replace the Digital Operator RDE DATA ERROR An attempted write of a constant to EEPROM on the Digital Writer failed Illegal write status 7 23 Display Table 7 6 Errors during Copy Function Meaning Probable causes Corrective Actions CPE ID not matched The I
260. as been completed a The output is turned ON after the zero servo command is input and the difference between the zero servo operation starting position and the current position is within the zero servo completion width b9 02 6 87 Monitor Constants This section explains the analog monitor and pulse monitor constants Using the Analog Monitor Constants This section explains the analog monitor constants Related Constants ae Name Change a Methods MEHG m Setting Factory during VIF pen ei pen BUS stant Description 4 Loo UX Loo i Number Display Range Setting reu VIf with RA vem ud pid 1 or 2 Monitor selec Sets the number of the monitor tion terminal item to be output U1 O00 from FM terminal FM 4 10 to 14 25 28 34 39 40 can Terminal FM not be set 29 to 31 and 41 are not Sel used Gain terminal Sets the multi function analog FM output 1 voltage level gain Sets whether the monitor item output will be output in multiples Terminal FM of 10 V Gain The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V A meter calibra tion function is available Bias terminal Sets the multi function analog FM output voltage level bias Sets output characteristic up down parallel movement as a per Terminal FM centage of 10 V The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V A meter calibra tion function is available Bias Monitor selec Sets the number o
261. as listed in the following table according to the control method selec tion Control Method Carrier Frequency V f control with or without a PG 2 0 kHz 5 0 kHz 8 0 kHz 10 0 kHz 12 5 kHz 15 0 kHz Any setting Detailed settings are available in C6 03 C6 04 and C6 05 Open loop vector 1 control or Flux vector control 2 0 kHz 5 0 kHz 8 0 kHz 10 0 kHz 12 5 kHz 15 0 kHz Any setting The upper limit of the carrier frequency is determined by C6 03 Open loop vector 2 control 1 2 0 kHz 2 4 0 kHz 3 6 0 kHz 4 8 0 kHz The upper limit of the carrier frequency depends on the Inverter capacity ilCarrier Frequency Setting Precautions When selecting the carrier frequency observe the following precautions Adjust the carrier frequency according to the cases shown below Ifthe wiring distance between Inverter and motor is long Set the carrier frequency low Use the following values as guidelines Wiring Length 100 m or less Over 100 m C6 02 carrier frequency aceasta 1 to 4 10 kHz 1 to 2 5 kHz selection setting If speed and torque are inconsistent at low speeds Set the carrier frequency low If leakage current from the Inverter is large Set the carrier frequency low If metallic noise from the motor is large Set the carrier frequency high When using V f control or V f control with PG you can vary the carrier frequency according to the o
262. ase the setting if over tion control voltage OV failures occur at AFR time the completion of accelera constant 2 tion or when the load changes radically AFR Time 2 BHigh slip Braking N3 User constants for high slip braking are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Sak NS Open Open i Description etting Factory Vif Loop Flux Loop Display P Range Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 High slip braking Sets the frequency width for deceleration deceleration during high slip N3 01 frequency braking as a percent taking 1to20 5 No A A No No No 588H width the Maximum Frequency HSB Down _ E1 04 as 100 Freq High slip Sets the current limit for braking cur deceleration during high slip rent limit braking as a percent taking 100 t N3 02 the motor rated current as 20 hi 150 No A A No No No 589H 100 The resulting limit HSB Current must be 150 of the Inverter rated current or less User Constant Tables EM Name Control Methods Setti Fact Open Open Description SPH j Factory v f Loop Flux Loop Range Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor Display High slip Set in seconds the dwell time braking stop for the output frequency for dwell time FMIN 1 5 Hz during V f control HSB Dwell Effective only during deceler Time ation
263. ass Accel decel change reduction coefficient Set acceleration and deceleration times C1 01 to C1 08 DC injection braking current Inverter rated output current Overtorque undertorque detection level Motor rated torque for vector control Inverter rated output current for V f control Stall prevention level during run Inverter rated output current Frequency reference lower limit level Maximum output frequency Jump frequency Maximum output frequency PID feedback Maximum output frequency PID target value Maximum output frequency Frequency bias 2 Maximum output frequency Motor temperature input 10 V 100 Positive torque limit Motor s rated torque Negative torque limit Motor s rated torque Regenerative torque limit Motor s rated torque Torque reference torque limit at speed control Motor s rated torque Torque compensation Motor s rated torque Positive negative torque limit Motor s rated torque Analog input not used 16to 1E Not used 5 53 Multi function Analog Outputs H4 User constants for multi function analog outputs are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Con d esa Open Open stant Description ening S8ctory V f Loop Flux Loop Number Display P Range Setting pia Nee vec Vec or or or 1 2 Monitor Sets the n
264. ast Inverter only as seen from the PLC S S S1 LZ Terminating OFF GY ON or RS 485 Fda pe Terminating resistance 1 2 W 110 Ohms Fig 6 59 Communications Connection Terminal S La 1 Separate the communication cables from the main circuit cables and other wiring and power cables P 2 Use shielded cables for the communication cables connect the shield cover to the Inverter earth terminal e and arrange the terminals so that the other end is not connected to prevent operating errors due to noise IMPORTANTE 3 When using RS 485 communications connect S to R and S to R on the Inverter exterior iProcedure for Communicating with the PLC Use the following procedure to perform communications with the PLC 1 Turn OFF the power supply turned and connect the communication cable between the PLC and the Inverter Turn ON the power supply Set the required communications constants H5 01 to H5 07 using the Digital Operator Turn OFF the power supply and check that the Digital Operator display has completely disappeared Turn ON the power supply once again 9x Uwe de ey Perform communications with the PLC not respond to the master within the set time the same command message will be sent from the master Q Set the timer on the master to monitor response time from the slave Set the master so that if the slave does again INFO 6 93 6 94 Related Constants Name Con stant Number Displ
265. ate with an Inverter from a host computer using CC Link communications to start stop Inverter opera tion read set parameters and read set monitor constants out put frequencies output currents etc LONWORKS Communica tions Inter face Board SI J Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer using LONWORKS communications to start stop Inverter operation read set parameters and read set monitor constants output frequencies output currents etc LONWORKS Communica tions Inter face Board SI W1 Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer using LONWORKS communications to start stop Inverter operation read set parameters and read set monitor constants output frequencies output currents etc With Display Data Channel DDC function MECHA TROLINK Communi cations Inter face Board SI T 2 1 Under development 2 Applicable for G7 Series Inverters wit 100 017 994 Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host computer using MECHATROLINK communications to start stop Inverter operation read set parameters and read set monitor constants output frequencies output currents etc software versions PRG S1038 or later 10 Appendix This chapter provides precautions for the Inverter motor and peripheral devices and also pro vides lists of constants Varispeed G7 Control Methods
266. ated cur Brake ON OFF Sequence iBrake ON OFF Sequence For the holding brake s ON OFF sequence use the following Inverter output signals according to the set con trol method Control Method V f A1 02 0 V f with PG A1 02 1 Open loop vector 1 A1 02 2 factory setting Brake ON OFF Signal Signal Name Frequency detec tion 2 Constant 1 H2 01 05 5 Frequency detec tion 5 4 H2 01 365 Brake ON OFF Level Adjustment Signal Name Speed agree detection level Speed agree detection width Constant L4 01 7 1 0 to 3 0Hz L4 02 0 1 to 0 5 Hz Flux vector A1 02 3 IMPORTANT During run 2 H2 01 37 Do not set Open loop vector 2 for use in elevating machines Zero speed level OFF timing only This example shows multi function output terminals M1 M2 used for the holding brake ON OFF signal Do not set H2 01 to 0 During run b2 01 0 1 to 0 5 Hz 2 This is the standard setting range for open loop vector control For V f control set to approximately the motor rated slip frequency 0 5 Hz If the set value is too low the motor torque is insufficient and the load may slip when the brake is applied Be sure to set L4 01 to a value larger than that of E1 09 Min output frequency and larger than that of L4 02 shown in Figure 6 84 If the set value is too large the motor may not run smoothly when it starts running 3 T
267. ately after station ary autotuning1 use the following procedure under the recommended conditions 1 Check the values of E2 02 and E2 03 in verify mode or advanced programming mode 2 Run the motor once in drive mode under the following conditions The Inverter and the motor are connected The motor shaft is not locked with a mechanical brake or other stopping mechanism or function A motor load ratio of 30 or less is maintained A speed of 30 or more of the base frequency set at E1 06 default highest frequency is maintained at a constant speed for one second or more Trial Operation Procedures E M 3 After stopping the motor check the values of E2 02 and E2 03 again in verify mode or advanced program ming mode If the values of E2 02 and E2 03 differ from the ones before the first operation was carried out the settings have been successfully completed Next check if the values are suitable or not If the values of E2 02 and E2 03 differed greatly from the reference data of the motor in the test report or the instruction manual hunting motor vibrations insufficient motor torque or an overcurrent may occur because the motor is operated although the aforementioned conditions have not been fulfilled after stationary autotuningl For elevators failure to observe this caution may result in the cage falling or injury If so per form stationary autotuningl again and run the motor using the aforemention
268. ault Lh y Eee Frequency e P i id deed agree signal Multi function Fog I l open collector outputs MEMOBUS i t dg Re 21 n aut Open collector 3 48 VDC 50 mA EE 1 Kot Fe tting communications bd MT I KIT ca rrr enten RS 485 422 r4 Y l id ready S l i d PA Open collector 4 NE Wf c4 Fig 2 19 Control Circuit Terminal Connections Factory setting Minor fault Wiring Control Circuit Terminals NM M Control Circuit Wiring Precautions Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 B1 B2 U TI V T2 W T3 O G1 Q2 and 93 and other high power lines Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA MB MC M1 and M2 contact outputs from wiring to other control circuit terminals Use shielded twisted pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults Process cable ends as shown in Fig 2 20 Connect the shield wire to terminal E G Insulate the shield with tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment Use a class 2 power supply UL standard when connecting to the control terminals Shield sheath Armor Do not connect here Connect to shield sheath ter minal at Inverter terminal E G Insulate with tape Fig 2 20 Processing the Ends of Shielded Twisted pair Cables 2 29 Wiring Check Checks Check al
269. ay Reference selection Reference Source Description Set the frequency reference input method 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal analog input 2 MEMOBUS communications 3 Option board 4 Pulse train input Setting Range Factory Setting Change during Opera tion Control Methods Vif with PG Open Loop Vector 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vector 2 Operation method selec tion Run Source Set the Run Command input method 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal sequence input 2 MEMOBUS communications 3 Option board Slave address Serial Comm Adr Set the Inverter s slave address Communica tion speed selection Serial Baud Rate Set the baud rate for MEMO BUS communications of com munications connection terminals 0 1200 bps 1 2400 bps 2 4800 bps 3 9600 bps 4 19200 bps Communica tion parity selection Serial Com Sel Set the parity for MEMO BUS communications of com munications connection terminals 0 No parity 1 Even parity 2 Odd parity Stopping method after communication error Serial Fault Sel Set the stopping method for com munications errors 0 Deceleration to stop using deceleration time in C1 02 Coast to stop Emergency stop using deceleration time in C1 09 3 Continue operation Communica tion error detec tion selection Serial Flt Dtc
270. bee Te i NMC TRX 1 O MEEN O ae a o 1 1 2 TRX 4 MA bL us Bn 5 o Fault contact output ult contacts MB Forward Run Com O Forward Run Stop ag A 81 mand forward run MC E when ON Reverse Run Stope s2 Reverse Run Com zd d mand reverse run N Braking Wit when ON a External fault f po s3 meet qe ames los es Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3 04 to Resistor Unit The motor may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed Fig 10 12 10 Using a VS Operator This example shows wiring for using a VS Operator The VS Operator model number is JVOP 95 0 or JVOP 96 L1 CIMR G7A27P5 200 V Class Inverters of 7 5 kW Short circuit bar Standard 3 3 Cy 65 G MCCB 01 qa o Bi B2 ETN CR 4 Q RIL ATN 3 phase power g j c C S L2 Inverter 3 TIL JVOP 95 LI C 96 L1 VS Operator FWD RUN sToP REV RUN O j ei 3 1 a a 1 my i Ground to 100 Q max 1 Forward Run Command T forward run when closed u 2 i i zi aja as 1 4 82 Reverse Run Command i i reverse run when closed t RESET 1 3 MIR i y e s t S4 MASTER z AUX 5 S5 Multi function contact inputs ml 1 S6 1 i s7 i 1 l SC Sequence common 0 V D Shield terminal THE V Speed setting power 15 V 20 mA L Tp A1 Master speed 0 to 10 V 20 kQ A2 Master speed 4 to 20 mA 2
271. ber of PG gear teeth in F1 12 and F1 13 If there are gears between the motor and PG you can operate the motor by setting the number of gear teeth When the number of gear teeth has been set the speed of motor rotations within the Inverter is calculated using the following formula Speed of motor rotations min No of input pulses from PG x 60 F1 01 x F1 13 No of gear teeth on load side F1 12 No of gear teeth on motor side EMatching Motor Speed During Acceleration and Deceleration to Frequency Reference You can select whether to enable or disable integral operation during acceleration and deceleration when using V F with PG control To match the motor speed as closely as possible to the frequency reference even during acceleration and decel eration set F1 07 to 1 3 a4 If F1 01 is set to 1 overshoot or undershoot may occur easily immediately after acceleration and decelera P tion To minimize the possibility of overshoot or undershoot occurring set F1 01 to 0 e IMPORTANT li Setting PG Pulse Monitor Output Dividing Ratio This function is enabled only when using PG speed control board PG B2 Set the dividing ratio for the PG pulse monitor output The set value is expressed as n for the higher place digit and m for the lower place 2 digits The dividing ratio is calculated as follows Dividing ratio 1 n m Setting range n 0 or 1 m 1 to 32 Fl 06 0 00 7 m 6 The dividing ratio can be set within the f
272. ble Enable stopping the machine in a set time Braking Resistor ERF 150WJOO ROoWOoOD Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to reduce deceleration time use rate 3 ED Braking Resistor Unit LKEB U 75600 KOO100 Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to reduce deceleration time use rate 10 ED Braking Unit CDBR H 72600 REIEII0 Used with a Braking Resistor Unit to reduce the deceleration time of the motor Operates the Inverter externally VS Operator small plastic Operator JVOP 95 L 73041 0905X L1 Allows frequency reference settings and ON OFF operation control to be performed by analog references from a remote location 50 m max Frequency counter specifications 60 120 Hz 90 180Hz VS Operator Standard steel plate Operator JVOP 96 F1 73041 0906X E1 Allows frequency reference settings and ON OFF operation control to be performed by analog references from a remote location 50 m max Frequency counter specifications 75 Hz 150 Hz 220 Hz Digital Operator Connection Cable m cable 72606 WV001 3 m cable 72606 WV003 Extension cable to use a Digita Cable length m or 3 m Operator remotely Controls an Inverter system VS System Mod ule JGSM O A system controller that can be match to the automatic control system to produce an optimum system configuration Provides Inverter momen
273. built in EE reactor 1 4 When connecting a separately installed type Braking Unit model CDBR connect the B1 terminal of the P Inverter to the terminal of the Braking Unit and connect the terminal of the Inverter to the terminal of the e Braking Unit The B2 terminal is not used in this case IMPORTANT BCIMR G7A2030 to 2110 BCIMR G7A4055 to 4300 Braking Resistor Braking Resistor Unit optional Unit optional OO Braking Unit r9 Q Braking Unit LO 9 optional L optional Oe 9 Q O1 30 OsQ R L1 U T1 R L1 UT1 S L2 VH gt X S L2 v2 amp 3 Q W 9 239 BH mo BULH WIBO gt O S1 L21 gt O S1 L21 T1 L31 T1 L31 Q Q 34 r Q Alte 2200 2200 4400 12400 l Control power is supplied internally from the main circuit DC power supply for all Inverter models Fig 2 5 Main Circuit Terminal Connections i rd If a Braking Unit or a Braking Resistor Unit is connected to a wrong terminal the Inverter Braking Unit or P Braking Resistor Unit can be damaged e Refer to FOR VARISPEED 600 SERIES INVERTER BRAKING UNIT BRAKING RESISTOR UNIT IMPORTANTE INSTRUCTIONS TOBPC720600000 for connecting the Inverter with a Braking Unit or a Braking Resistor Unit 2 15 Wiring the Main Circuits This section describes wiring connections for the main circuit inputs and outputs BWiring Main Circuit Inp
274. cally lowered to prevent stalling L3 03 is the limit value to prevent the stall prevention level in the constant output range from being reduced more than necessary Set the constants as a percent taking the Inverter rated voltage to be 100 Stall prevention level during acceleration L3 02 Stall Prevention Level during Accelera tion L3 02 x L3 03 Stall Prevention Limit during Ac celeration Output frequency Base Frequency FA Fig 6 24 Stall Prevention Level and Limit During Acceleration Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics w Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration Stall Prevention During Deceleration Function The Stall Prevention During Deceleration function makes the rate of deceleration more gentle to suppress increases in DC bus voltage when the DC bus voltage exceeds the set value during motor deceleration This function automatically lengthens the deceleration time with respect to the bus voltage even if the decel eration time has been set to a considerably small value If L3 04 is set to 1 or 2 when the main circuit DC voltage approaches the stall prevention level during decel eration deceleration stops and when deceleration falls below the level is restarted Using this operation deceleration time is automatically lengthened If L3 04 is set to 1 deceleration time returns to the set value and if L3 04 is set to 2 deceleration is automatically adjusted to a faster de
275. cautions If selecting monitor constants other than U1 01 Frequency Reference U1 02 Output Frequency and U1 03 Output Current first select the monitor items to be displayed in 01 01 and then set 01 02 to 4 iBDisabling the STOP Key If b1 02 Operation Method Selection is set to 1 2 or 3 the Stop Command from the STOP Key on the Dig ital Operator is an emergency Stop Command Set 02 02 to 0 to disable emergency Stop Commands from the STOP Key on the Digital Operator iDisabling the LOCAL REMOTE Key Set 02 01 to 0 to disable the LOCAL REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator You cannot switch Inverter ref erence inputs set using reference inputs from the Digital Operator b1 01 Reference Selection or b1 02 Operation Method Selection Binitializing Changed Constant Values You can save the Inverter constant set values that you have changed as constant initial values Change the set values from the Inverter factory settings and then set 02 03 to 1 If however Out of Memory MAX Param Change is displayed on the Operator when changes in the settings of the constants are saved as initial values do not attempt to register any further changes as initial values Set A1 03 Initialize to 1110 to initialize the Inverter constants using the user set initial values in memory To clear the user set initial values in memory set 02 03 to 2 i Setting the Frequency Reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without Using the Enter Ke
276. ccecceeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeees 6 2 Run COMMANA cerier sax piana te vere neiddensionaseraneeeeveess 6 10 Stopping Methods cccccseeesseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 6 12 Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics 6 18 Adjusting Frequency References 6 28 Speed Limit Frequency Reference Limit Function 6 34 Improved Operating Efficiency 6 36 Machine PEIOIBBOHOFI us i cessere pee pepFoHE Raza Cats Ere KDOS 6 42 Continuing Operation ssessessseeseeeeeeee 6 63 Inverter Protection ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeseeeeess 6 74 Input Terminal Functions sess 6 76 Output Terminal Functions cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 86 Monitor Conslanls 2 racete eee ee reprenant nana penas 6 88 Individual Functions NES 6 92 Digital Operator Functions sssssse 6 148 Rai RN 6 158 Using Inverters for Elevating Machines 6 170 Current Alarm Function 2 sssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 181 Peak Hold Current Monitoring Function 6 182 Maintenance Timer Display Function 6 183 Frequency Reference This section explains how to input the frequency reference Selecting the Frequency Reference Source Set constant b1 01 to select the frequency reference source iRelated Constants
277. ccelerating in the opposite direction iTorque Reference Adjustment Consider the following information when adjusting the torque Torque Reference Delay Time d5 02 The time constant of the primary filter in the torque reference section can be adjusted This constant is used to eliminate noise in the torque reference signal and adjust the responsiveness to the host controller Increase the setting if oscillation occurs during torque control Setting the Torque Compensation Set multi function analog input A2 or A3 to torque compensation setting 14 When the amount of torque loss for mechanical loss or other factor at the load is input to one of these terminals it is added to the torque refer ence to compensate for the loss The direction of torque will be as follows Positive voltage current Torque compensation reference for forward motor rotation counterclockwise as viewed from the motor output axis Negative voltage Torque compensation reference for reverse motor rotation clockwise as viewed from the motor output axis Since the polarity of the voltage input determines the direction only forward torque compensation can be input when the 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA signal level has been selected If you want to input reverse torque com pensation be sure to select the 10 to 10 V signal level il Speed Torque Control Switching Function Itis possible to switch between speed control and torque control when one of t
278. ce is erence setting set on the Digital Operator fre method selec quency reference monitor sets tion whether the Enter Key is neces sary 02 05 0 Enter Key needed Oorl 0 No A A A A A 509H Operator 1 Enter Key not needed MOP When set to 1 the Inverter accepts the frequency reference without Enter Key operation Cumulative operation time Sets the cumulative operation i time in hour units 0 to 2 07 Setting cites Ohr N A A A A A 50BH 2 Operation time is calculated from 65535 5 2 6 Elapsed Time _ the set values Set Fan operation Set the initial value of the fan 02 10 time setting operation time using time units 0 to Ohr No A A A A A 50EH Fan ON Time The operation time accumulates 65535 Set from the set value i Changing Frequency Reference and Display Units Set the Digital Operator frequency reference and display units using constant 01 03 You can change the units for the following constants using o1 03 U1 01 Frequency Reference e U1 02 Output Frequency U1 05 Motor Speed U1 20 Output Frequency after Soft Start d1 01 to d1 17 Frequency references ilSwitching Monitors when the Power Supply Is ON Using constant 01 02 select the monitor item U1 LI1L1 status monitor to be displayed on the Digital Oper ator when the power supply is turned ON For monitors that can be displayed refer to U1 L1L1 in Chapter 5 User Constants Setting Pre
279. celeration time and deceleration time The load is locked Check the mechanical system The settings in F1 10 and F1 11 aren t appropriate Check the settings in F1 10 and F1 11 Brake is applied to the motor Check for open circuit when using brake motor CF Out of Control Control Fault The torque limit was reached continu ously for 3 seconds or longer during a deceleration stop during open loop vector 1 control Motor constant settings are not cor rect Check the motor constants Perform autotuning An error occurred in the speed estima tion calculation for open loop vector 2 control Refer to Corrective Actions for Control Faults CF on page 7 14 FBL Feedback Loss PID Feedback Reference Lost A PID feedback reference loss was detected b5 12 2 and the PID feed back input was less than b5 13 PID feedback loss detection level for longer than the time set in b5 14 PID feedback loss detection time The settings in b5 13 and b5 14 aren t appropriate Check the settings in b5 13 and b5 14 The wiring of the PID feedback circuit is incorrect Fix the wiring Protective and Diagnostic Functions NM Display Table 7 1 Fault Displays and Processing Continued Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions EFO Check the Communications External Fault Input from Com
280. celeration time within the range of the stall prevention level during deceleration Related Constants Name Control Methods Co ik Open Open stant i Description vit ES Flux LS Display with 700P vec 09P Number Vector Vector PG tor 1 2 Stall preven 0 Disabled Deceleration as set tion selection If deceleration time is too during decel short a main circuit overvoltage may result Enabled Deceleration is stopped when the main circuit voltage exceeds the overvoltage level Deceleration restarts when voltage is returned 2 Intelligent deceleration mode L3 04 Deceleration rate is 0 to 3 1 No Q Q Q Q Q 492H automatically adjusted so that StallP Decel Sel the Inverter can decelerate in the shortest possible time Set deceleration time is disregarded 3 Enabled with Braking Resistor Unit When a braking option Braking Resistor Braking Resistor Unit Braking Unit is used always set to 0 or 3 The setting range for flux vector and open loop vector 2 controls is 0 to 2 6 25 E gee ESetting Example An example of stall prevention during deceleration when L3 04 is set to 1 as shown below Deceleration time controlled to ge prevent overvoltage Output frequency Time Deceleration time set value Fig 6 25 Stall Prevention During Deceleration Operation llSetting Precautions The stall prevention level during decelerat
281. ching Analog Monitor Signal Levels Monitor items corresponding to 10 to 10 V output 0 to 10 V signals when the monitor value is positive and 0 to 10 V signals when the monitor value is negative For monitor items corresponding to 10 to 10 V refer to Chapter 5 User Constants Q You can select the signal levels separately for multi function analog output terminals and analog output option terminals INFO Using Pulse Train Monitor Contents This section explains pulse monitor constants iRelated Constants Name Control Methods Change Factory during vir Open Setting Opera with LOOP tion PG ras Con stant Description Number Display Pulse train Select the pulse train monitor out monitor selec put items value of the OO part tion of U1 OD There are two types of monitor Pulse Output items Speed related items and Sel PID related items Monitor Constants NM Name Control Methods Con Open Open stant Description Factory vit EOD Flux 18 Displa Setting with 99P Vec OOP Number y Vector Vector PG tor 1 2 Pulse train Set the number of pulses output monitor scaling when speed is 100 in hertz Set H6 06 to 2 and H6 07 to 0 to 0 to 1440 Bo make the pulse train monitor out 32000 Hz Xes s i 2 s is 82H PO Scaling put synchronously to the output frequency i Selecting Pulse Monitor Items Out
282. ck is performed using the PG attached to the motor to compensate for speed fluctuations caused by slipping A phase pulse single pulse input voltage complemen tary open collector input Maximum input frequency 32767 Hz Pulse monitor output 12 V 20 mA PG power supply output 12 V 200 mA max TOE C736 40 1 PG B2 73600 A013X Used for V f control with PG and flux vector control A B phase input complimentary input Maximum input frequency 32767 Hz Pulse monitor output Open collector PG power supply output 12 V 200 mA max TOE C736 40 2 PG D2 73600 A014X Differential input A phase pulse differential pulse input for V f control Maximum input frequency 300 kHz Input Conforms to RS 422 Pulse monitor output RS 422 PG power supply output 5 or 12 V 200 mA max TOE C736 40 3 PG X2 73600 A015X A B Z phase pulse differential pulse input Maximum input frequency 300 kHz Input Conforms to RS 422 Pulse monitor output RS 422 PG power supply output 5 or 12 V 200 mA max TOE C736 40 4 Built in con nected to con nector Com muni cations Option Boards DeviceNet Communica tions Inter face Board SI N Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices 5 eee Table 9 5 Option Boards Continued Code Num ber Function Used to communicate with an Inverter from a host
283. ck value ack value E N U1 24 when PID control is used 10 V Max frequency 0 01 Ala A A A 57H PID Feed The input for the max fre 10 to 10 V possible back quency corresponds to 100 DI 16H2 Monitors the reference value input status from a DI 16H2 Digital Refer U1 25 shoe Board Cannot be output A A A A A 58H DI 16 Ref The value will be displayed in binary or BCD depending on erence user constant F3 01 Output volt age refer Monitors the Inverter internal 10 V 200 VAC 400 VAC 0 1 T ence Vq U1 26 voltage reference for motor 10 to 10 V possible V Voltage Ref secondary current control Vg Output volt age refer Monitors the Inverter internal U1 27 ence Vd voltage reference for motor 10N 20 VEINS ot No No A A A 5AH Bt 10 to 10 V possible V Voltage Ref excitation current control Vd Software U1 28 No CPU all s CPU software cannot be output lalalalala 5BH CPU ID 5 Output Monitors the Inverter s output aui di power The display is split into ower 4 dig dn UE wi lae upper digits and lower digits in S 5 ala A N A 5CH the following way P O00000 000 0 kwH esu les Cannot be output Output Example If the output power power is 12345678 9 kWh the dis upper 5 dig play will be as follows U1 30 its U1 29 678 9 KWH MWH A A A A A 5DH kWh Upper U1 30 12345 MWH 5 dig Range 0 0
284. control this set ASR Delay ting is enabled only for speeds greater Usually setting is not necessary When the control method is changed the factory settings will change The flux vector factory settings are given 2 The setting range for flux vector and open loop vector 2 controls is 1 00 to 300 00 Multi function Contact Input Functions H1 01 to H1 10 Control Methods Function Speed control disable setting for V f control with PG D OFF Use speed control V f control with PG No Yes No No No ON Do not use speed control for V f control with PG Speed control integral reset Enables switching between PI and P control for the speed control loop Speed control ASR proportional gain switch switching between C5 01 and C5 03 TI OFF Use proportional gain in C5 01 No No No Yes Yes ON Use proportional gain in C5 03 lilSpeed Control ASR Gain Adjustment for Vector Control Use the following procedure to adjust C5 01 and C5 03 with the mechanical system and actual load con nected At zero speed increase C5 01 ASR P Gain 1 until there is no oscillation EE At zero speed decrease C5 02 ASR I Time 1 until there is no oscillation Does oscillation develop when the motor operates at the maximum normal operating YES Decrease C5 01 ASR P Gain 1 speed NO Y Adju
285. crease the setting if motor magnetic noise is Carrier frequency Controlling hunting gia ni 0 to high selection C6 02 and vibration at low capac default Reduce the setting if hunt Open loop speeds 10 Hz or y ing or vibration occurs at vector 1 less low speeds control Middle output fre S A1 02 2 quency voltage Improving torque at Depends ET set Default to torque or speed response is E1 08 low speeds on capac Default 1 Jow Minimum output fre Controlling shock at ity and wick or2 V Reduce the setting if shock quency voltage startup voltage SB MS larde E1 10 p18 arge ASR proportional gain Torque and speed dia MUR Ed torque or speed response is 1 C5 01 and response 10 00 to i 7 20 00 slow ASR proportional gain Controlling hunting 50 00 TR SO Reduce the setting if hunt 2 C5 03 and vibration ae ing or vibration occurs ASR integral time 1 Reduce the setting if Torque and speed high speed C5 02 torque or speed response is response 0 300 to and Controlling huntin 93005 1 000 s slow ASR integral time 2 and T 8 ncrease the setting if hunt low speed C5 04 ing or vibration occurs Set the output frequency at Switching the ASR which to change the ASR Flux vector ASR switching fre proportional gain and 0 0 to max proportional gain and inte control uency C5 07 integral time accord 0 0 Hz output fre gral time when the same val A1
286. ction limit operation selection Drctn SpdLmt Sel 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Usually use a setting of 1 enabled Be sure to enable this setting when rotating the motor in the same direction as the speed limit winding opera tion The factory setting will change when the control method is changed The flux vector factory setting is given iField Weakening d6 User constants for the field weakening command are shown in the following table Con stant Number Name Display Field weak ening level Description Set the Inverter output volt age when the field weakening Field Weak Lvl command is input Itis enabled when the field weakening command is set for a multi function input Set the level as a percentage taking the voltage set in the V f pattern as 100 Setting Range Factory Setting Change during Opera tion Control Methods Vit with PG Open Loop Vec tor 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vec tor 2 Field frequency Set the lower limit in hertz of the frequency range where Field Weak Freq field control is valid The field weakening com mand is valid only at frequen cies above this setting and only when the speed is in agreement with the current speed reference 5 31 Name Control Methods Setti Fact Open Open Description eng Factory V f Loop Flux Lo
287. ction for zero speed PID offset adjustment Zero speed level DC injection braking starting frequency PID first order lag time constant DC injection braking current PID output characteristics selec tion DC injection braking time at start PID output gain DC injection braking time at stop PID reverse output selection Magnetic flux compensation vol ume Selection of PID feedback com mand loss detection Speed search selection PID feedback command loss detec tion level Speed search operating current PID feedback command loss detec tion time Speed search deceleration time PID sleep function operation level 10 30 Table 10 7 User Constants Continued PID sleep operation delay time Fac tory Setting Accel decel time setting unit Fac tory Setting Accel decel time for PID reference Accel decel time switching fre quency Dwell frequency at start S curve characteristic time at acceleration start Dwell time at start S curve characteristic time at acceleration end Dwell frequency at stop S curve characteristic time at deceleration start Dwell time at stop S curve characteristic time at deceleration end Droop control gain Slip compensation gain Droop control delay time Slip compensation primary delay time Energy saving mode selection Slip compensation limit Energy saving gain
288. ctor Sizes JIS C2805 200 V Class and 400 V Class Wire Thickness mm Terminal Screws 1 25 to 3 5 1 25 to 4 1 25 to 3 5 1 25 to 4 1 25 to 3 5 1 25 to 4 2 to 3 5 2 to 4 2to5 2 to 6 2 to 8 5 5 to 4 5 5 to 5 5 5 to 6 5 5 to 8 8 to 5 8 to 6 8 to 8 14 to 6 14 to 8 22 to 6 22to8 38 to 8 60 to 8 60 to 10 80 to 10 100 to 10 100 to 12 150 to 12 200 to 12 325 to 12 325 to 16 Y d Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 296 of the rated voltage Line P voltage drop is calculated as follows IMPORTANTM Line voltage drop V A3 x wire resistance W km x wire length m x current A x 10 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals Main Circuit Terminal Functions Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in Table 2 4 Wire the terminals correctly for the desired purposes Table 2 4 Main Circuit Terminal Functions 200 V Class and 400 V Class Model CIMR G7ALI P Terminal Symbol ness db Doo adn 200 V Class 400 V Class R LI S L2 T L3 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300 Main circuit power input RI L11 SI L21 T1 L31 2018 to 2110 4018 to 4300 Inverter outputs U T1 V T2 W T3 20P4 to 2110 40P4 to 4300 DC power input 1 0 20P4 to
289. ctor between the Inverter and the motor If a magnetic contactor must be installed because of local electrical codes or regulations or to operate motors with an Inverter excluding emer gencies open or close the magnetic contactor only when the holding brake is fully closed and the Inverter 1s in baseblock status with the baseblock signal ON If the magnetic contactor is opened or closed while the Inverter is controlling the motor or DC injection brak ing Zero speed control surge voltage or a current from the motor by full voltage starting may cause an Inverter fault When a magnetic contactor is installed between the Inverter and the motor set L8 07 Output open phase pro tection selection to 1 or 2 Enabled g DBHB UUUUSSE EBAAEI Control related Adjustments The Varispeed G7 is designed to provide sufficient performance for elevating machines However 1f problems related to controllability should occur such as vibration or slipping adjust the following constants in accor dance with the control method Only constants that frequently require adjustment are listed in this table Control Method Open loop vector 1 con trol A1 02 2 Speed feed back detec tion control AFR gain Performance Increasing torque and speed response Controlling hunting and vibration in mid dle range speeds 10 to 40 Hz Factory Setting Table 6 4 Control related Adjustments Recom mended Setting 0 50
290. ctory setting Fault reset when ON Factory setting Multi speed reference 1 effective when ON Multi function input 4 Factory setting Multi speed reference 2 effective when ON Multi function input 5 l Factory setting Jog frequency selected when ON Multi function input 6 Factory setting External baseblock when ON Multi function input Factory setting Multi speed reference 3 effective when ON Multi function input 8 Factory setting Multi speed reference 4 effective when ON Multi function input 9 Factory setting Acceleration deceleration time selected when ON Multi function input 10 Factory setting Emergency stop NO con tact when ON Sequence input common Signal Level 24 VDC 8 mA Photocoupler isolation Analog input signals 2 24 15 V power output 15 V power supply for analog references 15 V Max current 20 mA 15 V power output 15 V power supply for analog references 15 V Max current 20 mA Master speed frequency ref erence 10 to 10 V 100 to 100 0 to 10 V 100 10 to 10 V 0 to 10 V Input impedance 20 kQ Multi function analog input 4 to 20 mA 100 10 to 10 V 100 to 100 0 to 10 V 100 Factory setting Added to terminal Al H3 09 0 4 to 20 mA Input imped ance 250 Q 10 to 10 V 0 to 10 V Input impedance 20 kQ Multi function analog input 10
291. current continues to exceed the setting in constant L3 06 for 100 ms or longer the motor speed is reduced Set whether to enable or disable deceleration time using constant L3 05 Set the deceleration time using C1 02 Acceleration time 1 or C1 04 Acceleration Time 2 If the Inverter output current reaches the set value in L3 06 2 Inverter Rated Output Current the motor will accelerate again at the frequency set or the acceleration time set Related Constants Name Control Methods Con m stant gt Description Number Display Factory vit OPen Elux Setting with Po Vec PG 1 tor Stall preven 0 Disabled Runs as set With a tion selection heavy load the motor may during running stall Deceleration time 1 the deceleration time for the stall prevention function is C1 02 StallP Run Sel Deceleration time 2 the deceleration time for the stall prevention function is C1 04 Stall preven Effective when L3 05 is 1 or 2 tion level dur Set as a percentage of the Inverter ing running rated current Usually setting is not necessary StallP Run The factory setting reduces the set Level values when the motor stalls 6 49 E gee Changing Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input If you set H3 09 Multi function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection or H3 05 Multi function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection to 8 st
292. current will increase as IMPORTANT the input power supply voltage is reduced Be sure to provide sufficient margin in the Inverter current BPrecautions After Using Rotational and Stationary Autotuning After completing autotuning set E1 04 Max output frequency to the base frequency from the motor s nameplate n stationary autotuning 1 when the motor is first operated in the drive mode after tuning the remaining motor constants E2 02 Motor rated slip and E2 03 Motor no load current are set automatically To per form an operation immediately after stationary autotuning 1 use the following procedure under the recom mended conditions 1 Check the values of E2 02 and E2 03 in verify mode or advanced programming mode 2 Run the motor once in drive mode under the following conditions The Inverter and the motor are connected The motor shaft is not locked with a mechanical brake or other stopping mechanism or function A motor load ratio of 30 or less is maintained A speed of 30 or more of the base frequency set at E1 06 default highest frequency is maintained at a constant speed for one second or more 3 After stopping the motor check the values of E2 02 and E2 03 again in verify mode or advanced program ming mode If the values of E2 02 and E2 03 differ from the ones before the first operation was carried out the settings have been successfully completed Next check if the values are suitable or not Trial
293. d frequency reference PID output D control of feedback value PID Mode Proportional Sets P control proportional gain P gain as a percentage P control is not performed when the setting is 0 00 PID Gain Integral I Sets I control integral time in time 1 second units I control is not performed when the setting is 0 0 PID I Time Integral I limit Sets the I control limit as a percentage of the maximum 100 0 PIDI Limit output frequency Derivative Sets D control derivative time D time in 1 second units D control is not performed when the setting is 0 00 PID D Time 5 15 Name Control Methods oh Open Open Description CHING TSetory Vif Loop Flux Loop Display P Range Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 PID upper Sets the upper limit after PID 60 b5 06 limit control as a percentage of the 100 o 100 0 Yes AA A A A IAAH 6 107 PID Limit maximum output frequency PID offset Sets the offset after PID con 100 0 b5 07 adjustment trol as a percentage of the to 0 0 Yes A A A A A LABH 6 107 PID Offset maximum output frequency 100 0 PID first order lag time Sets the time constant for low b5 08 constant pass filter for Eu Control 0 00t0 doos yes Lalala fla a ar eo outputs in 1 second units 10 00 PID Delay No
294. d 1 Forward run 0 Stop Bit 1 Reverse Run Stop Command 1 Reverse run 0 Stop Bit 2 External fault 1 Error EFO Bit 3 Fault reset 1 Reset command Bit 4 ComNet Bit 5 ComCtrl Bit 6 Multi function input command 3 Bit 7 Multi function input command 4 Bit 8 Multi function input command 5 Bit 9 Multi function input command 6 Bit A Multi function input command 7 Bit B Multi function input command 8 6 Bit C Multi function input command 9 Bit D Multi function input command 10 Bit E Multi function input command 11 Bit F Multi function input command 12 Frequency reference Set units using constant 01 03 Not used Not used Not used PID target value Analog output 1 setting 11 V 1540 to 11 V 1540 Analog output 2 setting 11 V 1540 to 11 V 1540 Multi function contact output setting Bit 0 Contact output Terminal M1 M2 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 1 PHC1 Contact P1 PC 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 2 PHC2 Contact P2 PC 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 3 PHC3 Contact P3 C3 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 4 PHC4 Contact P4 C4 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 5 Not used Bit 6 Set error contact terminal MA MC output using bit 7 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 7 Error contact terminal MA MC 1 ON 0 OFF Bits 8 to F Not used 000AH to 000EH Not used Register No Contents Refere
295. d Diagram Run Command This section explains input methods for the Run Command Selecting the Run Command Source Set constant b1 02 to select the source for the Run Command iRelated Constants Name Control Methods Con Facto Open stant Description ry Vif loop Flux Number Display Setting with Vec Vec PG tor tor 1 Operation Set the Run Command input method method 0 Digital Operator selection 1 Control circuit terminal sequence input 2 MEMOBUS communications 3 Option board Run Source iBPerforming Operations Using a Digital Operator When b1 02 is set to 0 you can perform Inverter operations using the Digital Operator keys RUN STOP JOG and FWD REV For details on the Digital Operator refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes iPerforming Operations Using Control Circuit Terminals When b1 02 is set to 1 you can perform Inverter operations using the control circuit terminals Performing Operations Using a 2 wire Sequence The factory setting is set to a 2 wire sequence When control circuit terminal S1 is set to ON forward opera tion will be performed and when S1 is turned OFF the Inverter will stop In the same way when control cir cuit terminal S2 is set to ON reverse operation will be performed and when S2 is turned OFF the Inverter will stop Invert Forward stop iuba SC Sequence common Fig 6 10 2 wire Sequence
296. d and Scope Warranty Period This product is warranted for twelve months after being delivered to Yaskawa s customer or if applicable eighteen months from the date of shipment from Yaskawa s factory whichever comes first Scope of Warranty Inspections Periodic inspections must be conducted by the customer However upon request Yaskawa or one of Yaskawa s Service Centers can inspect the product for a fee In this case if after confer ring with the customer a Yaskawa product is found to be defective due to Yaskawa workman ship or materials and the defect occurs during the warranty period then this fee will be waived and the problem remedied free of charge Repairs If a Yaskawa product is found to be defective due to Yaskawa workmanship or materials and the defect occurs during the warranty period Yaskawa will provide a replacement repair the defec tive product and provide shipping to and from the site free of charge However if the Yaskawa Authorized Service Center determines that the problem with a Yaskawa product is not due to defects in Yaskawa s workmanship or materials then the cus tomer will be responsible for the cost of any necessary repairs Some problems that are outside the scope of this warranty are Problems due to improper maintenance or handling carelessness or other reasons where the customer is determined to be responsible Problems due to additions or modifications made to a Yaskawa product without Yas
297. d factor 80 max Operating rate 12 hours max per day Procedure for Adjusting Constants after Replacement of Control Board Perform the following operations before adjusting the constants For 400 V class Inverters of 55 kW to 300 kW with SPEC E or later take safety measures such as the 8 installation of an emergency stop switch Failure to do so may result in injury caused by the motor acci mm dentally rotating during stationary autotuning performed by the Inverter when the constants are adjusted Before replacing the control board first use the COPY function of the Digital Operator to copy the settings of the constants of board from the Inverter to the Digital Operator When using the copy function of the Digital Operator check that the following settings are the same between the Inverter and the Digital Operator Note the setting of A1 02 Control method selection nverter product and type Software number nverter capacity and voltage Control method After replacing the board use the following procedure to adjust the constants Steps 4 and 5 are not required for 400 V class Inverters of 0 4 kW to 45 kW 400 V class Inverters of 55 kW to 300 kW with SPEC A to C and all models of 200 V class Inverters regardless of capacity If using a 400 V class Inverter of 55 kW to 300 kW with SPEC E or later use a control board version ETC618046 S1033 or later and then perform steps 4 and 5 Contact your Yaskawa
298. d from any other display Monitor display in the drive mode IMPORTANTE will appear when the power is turned ON Modes Drive Mode Drive mode is the mode in which the Inverter can be operated The following monitor displays are possible in drive mode The frequency reference output frequency output current and output voltage as well as fault information and the fault history When b1 01 Reference selection is set to 0 the frequency can be changed from the frequency setting display Use the Increment Decrement and Shift RESET Keys to change the frequency The user constant will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting iExample Operations Key operations in drive mode are shown in the following figure Display at Startup Mode Selection Display DRIVE Main Menu Operation QUICK Main Menu Quick Setting ADV Main Menu Programming VERIFY Main Menu Modified Consts A TUNE Main Menu Auto Tuning Monitor Display Frequency Setting Display Monitor R i 01 60 00Hz U1 02 60 00Hz U1 03 10 05A U3 03 60 00Hz U3 04 60 00HZ PAN Elapsed time U1 Ef 10H U1 01 60 00Hz U1 02 60 00Hz PR quency Ref U1 01 60 00Hz 0 00 lt gt 60 00 0 905 00 00Hz ESC
299. d fusing It specifications within the ranges shown in the table below Voltage Class Table 10 4 Selection Requirements for Input Fuses with Examples Inverter Model Number CIMR G7A Selection Requirements Voltage V Current A Fusing It A sec 12 to 25 Input Fuse Examples Model Number A60Q12 2 Manufacturer Ratings 23 to 55 CR2LS 20 U 34 to 98 CR2LS 30 U 82 to 220 CR2LS 50 U 220 to 610 290 to 1300 CR2LS 75 U CR2LS 75 U 450 to 5000 CR2LS 100 UL 1200 to 7200 1800 to 7200 CR2L 125 U CR2L 150 U 870 to 16200 CR2L 150 U 1500 to 23000 CR2L 200 U 2100 to 19000 CR2L 260 U 2700 to 55000 CR2L 300 U 4000 to 55000 CR2L 300 U 7100 to 64000 CR2L 400 U 11000 to 64000 CR2L 500 U 13000 to 83000 CR2L 600 U 13000 to 83000 A50P700 4 Voltage Class Table 10 4 Selection Requirements for Input Fuses with Examples Continued Inverter Model Number CIMR G7A Voltage V Selection Requirements Current A Fusing t A sec 16 to 660 Input Fuse Examples Model Number CR6L 20 U Manufacturer Ratings 19 to 660 CR6L 20 U 46 to 660 CR6L 30 U 78 to 660 CR6L 50 U 317 110 to 660 CR6L 50 U 317 220 to 660 CR6L 50 U 317 240 to 900 CR6L 50 U 317 320 to 900 CR6L 75
300. d in the following table Speed Limit Input Method Voltage input 10 to 10 V Location of Refer ence Set in d5 04 Constant Set tings Remarks Between Al and AC Set H3 01 to 0 if the speed limit is always to be positive Between A2 and AC b1 01 0 H3 08 1 H3 09 1 The value will be added to the value input on A1 to determine the speed limit Set H3 03 to 0 if the speed limit input on A2 is always to be positive Turn OFF V side pin 2 of DIP switch S1 on the terminal board Current input 4 to 20 mA Between A2 and AC The value will be added to the value input on A1 to determine the speed limit Turn ON I side pin 2 of DIP switch S1 on the terminal board Option board AI 4B 10 to 10 V Between TC1 and TC4 If H3 09 is set to 0 the sum of the input between TC2 and TC4 will be added the input between TC1 and TC4 to determine the speed limit _ 1 P The direction in which speed is controlled is determined by the sign of the speed limit signal and the direction of the Run Command e Positive voltage applied The speed in the forward direction will be limited for forward operation IMPORTANT Negative voltage applied The speed in the reverse direction will be limited for reverse operation If the direction of motor rotation and the command direction are not the same speed will be limited to 0 as long as b5 05 is set to 0 liSetting Speed Limit Bia
301. d switching when multi function analog input H3 05 is set to 2 auxiliary frequency reference 1 Multi step speed reference 2 Also used for auxiliary frequency reference 2 when multi function analog input H3 09 is set to 3 auxiliary frequency reference 2 Multi step speed reference 3 Jog frequency selection given priority over multi step speed reference Combination of Multi Function References and Multi Function Contact Inputs You can change the selected frequency reference by combining the ON OFF status of S5 to S9 multi function contact input terminals to set multi step speed references 1 to 3 and the jog frequency selection The follow ing table shows the possible combinations 6 TerminalS5 TerminalS6 TerminalS9 TerminalS7 Multi step Multi step Multi step Jog Fre Selected Frequency Speed Refer Speed Refer Speed Refer quency Selec ence 1 ence2 ence 3 tion Frequency reference 1 d1 01 master speed frequency Frequency reference 2 d1 02 auxiliary frequency 1 Frequency reference 3 d1 03 auxiliary frequency 2 Frequency reference 4 d1 04 Frequency reference 5 d1 05 Frequency reference 6 d1 06 Frequency reference 7 d1 07 Frequency reference 8 d1 08 Jog frequency d1 17 Terminal S7 s jog frequency selection is given priority over multi step speed references re Setting Precautions Refer to the following to set step 1 to s
302. d to minimize the likelihood of any accident Registered Trademarks The following registered trademarks are used in this manual DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendors Association Inc nterBus is a registered trademark of Phoenix Contact Co e ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International Ltd LONWORKS is a registered trademark of the Echelon Before Reading This Manual There are places in this manual where the constants and explanations depend on the software version Explanations for both old and new versions are provided Parts that are shaded and parts where PRG 102L1 only appears apply to G7 series Inverters with software version PRG 1020 and later Parts where PRG 1030 only appears apply only to G7 series Inverters with software version PRG 1030 Be sure to confirm the PRG number on the Inverter s nameplate An example is given below Inverter model MODEL CIMR G7A20PA SPEC 20P41 vete Input specifications NPUT AC3PH 200 240V 50 60Hz 3 8A SPERM colons Output specifications OUTPUT ACSPH O 230V 0 400Hz 3 2A 1 2kVA amp Lot number O N MASS 3 Okg L4 Mass Serial number S N PRG 1020 Version of software UL file number FILE NO E131457 IP20 YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN Contents Safety Informatio Nisses that cad ege ta
303. decelerating time Stall prevention selection during accel L3 01 and Stall prevention selection during running L3 05 should be IMPORTANTIM set to their initial values 1 Enabled to enable these functions 1 P If Stall prevention selection during decel L3 04 is set to the initial value 1 Enabled the motor may not stop e Autotuning Always perform autotuning with the motor before operating using vector control Be sure to disconnect the motor from the load before conducting autotuning Conducting autotuning while the motor is connected to an elevating machine system is dangerous because it automatically runs the motor for approximately one minute 1 P 1 When the motor cannot be disconnected from the load perform stationary autotuning T1 01 1 or 4 For G7 Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 or later perform stationary autotuning 2 T1 01 4 e Stationary autotuning will apply current to the motor in its stopped condition and automatically measure the IMPORTANT motor data In the initial running period after autotuning T1 01 21 20 speed min fixed speed for 1 s min the motor data measured by autotuning will automatically be corrected 2 To improve low speed torque characteristics using V f control conduct stationary autotuning for line to line resistance only T1 01 2 3 When conducting autotuning on wound motor or other special types of motors obtain a test report for the motor in advance and co
304. ds Time Pulse train Select the pulse train monitor monitor output items value of the OO selection part of U1 00 There are two types of monitor Pulse Out items Speed related items and put Sel PID related items Pulse train Set the number of pulses output monitor when speed is 100 in hertz scaling Set H6 06 to 2 and H6 07 to 0 to make the pulse train monitor PO Scaling output synchronously to the output frequency 5 5 L Protection Function Constants The following settings are made with the protection function constants L constants Motor selection func tion power loss ridethrough function stall prevention function frequency detection torque limits and hard ware protection iMotor Overload L1 User constants for motor overloads are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Setti Fact Open Open Description euing Kactory V f Loop Flux Loop p Range Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Display Motor pro Sets whether the motor over tection load function is enabled or dis selection abled at electric thermal overload relay 0 Disabled 1 General purpose motor protection 2 Inverter motor protection 3 Vector motor protection In some applications when the Inverter power supply is MOL Fault turned off the thermal value is Select reset so even if this constant is set to 1 protecti
305. ds Continued V f Control Line to line resis tance Normally not required V f Control with PG Line to line resis tance Normally not required Open loop Vec tor 1 Control Rotational autotuning sta tionary autotuning stationary autotuning for line to line resis tance only Flux Vector Con trol Rotational autotuning sta tionary autotuning stationary autotuning for line to line resis tance only Open loop Vec tor 2 Control Rotational autotuning sta tionary autotuning stationary autotuning for line to line resis tance only Torque Limit ing Yes except dur ing acceleration deceleration below minimum frequency or dur ing reverse rota tion Yes except below minimum fre quency and dur ing reverse rotation Torque Con 6 trol Yes except below minimum fre quency and dur ing reverse rotation Droop Con trol 7 Yes except for 0 min and dur ing reverse rota tion Yes Except below minimum fre quency and dur ing reverse rotation Zero servo Control Yes No Speed Estima tion Detec tion Instantaneous Speed Search Yes speed and rotation direction estimation Yes speed detec tion and rotation direction estima tion Yes speed and rotation direction estimation Yes speed and rotation direction detection Yes speed and rotation direction estimation Automatic Energy
306. e IMPORTANT 1 When using open loop vector 1 control and V f control set b6 01 Dwell frequency at start higher than fre quency detection 2 frequency when brakes open 2 If the motor tends to have insufficient torque when started use the DC injection braking function to allow sufficient motor current torque before starting b2 03 DC injection braking time at start 0 2 to 0 5 s b2 02 DC injection braking current 50 to 80 open loop vector 1 control V f control only i Stopping with DC Injection Braking and Zero speed Control Output frequency HIGH b2 04 DC injection braking time at stop zero speed control time at stop 0 3 to 0 5 s LOW Frequency t b2 01 Zero speed level DC injection braking detection 2 or starting frequency 0 1 to 3 0 Hz During run 2 ON OFF b2 02 DC injection braking current 50 to 80 open loop vector control V f control only Holding brake operation OPEN CLOSE When the holding brake s mechanical operation is slow use DC injection braking zero speed control for flux vector control until the brakes are fully closed to prevent the brakes from slipping when stopping Y A P e IMPORTANT PN 1 When the load cannot be maintained sufficiently using DC injection braking with open loop vector 1 control and V f control use the dwell functions at stop b6 03 Dwell frequency at stop Min output frequency to 3 0 Hz The value must be less than the f
307. e and The carrier frequency is set low if the motor cable control is 50 m or longer or to reduce radio noise or leak method age current o ie TT Depends CEG ese 1to4 onkVA 526 for open loop Acton vector 2 control 8 d1 01 to d1 01 to Frequency refer d1 04 dl 04and 885 1to4and Setthe required speed references for multi step 0 to 400 00 Hz 0 00 Hz 5 27 jog frequency ref speed operation or jogging d1 17 m d1 17 cred 6 00 Hz H4 02 Set the voltage level gain for the multi function H4 02 and H4 FM and AM ter analog output 1 H4 02 and 2 H4 05 0 00 to 2 50 1 00 5 54 05 minal output gain Set the number of multiples of 10 V to be output as H4 05 the 100 output for the monitor item 0 50 0 Disabled Deceleration as set If deceleration time is too short a main circuit overvoltage may result 1 Enabled Deceleration is stopped when the main circuit voltage exceeds the overvoltage level Deceleration restarts when voltage is Stall prevention returned 5 61 L3 04 selection during 2 Intelligent deceleration mode Deceleration 0 to3 1 625 deceleration rate is automatically adjusted so that the Inverter can decelerate in the shortest possible time Set deceleration time is disregarded 3 Enabled with Braking Resistor Unit When a braking option Braking Resistor Braking Resistor Unit Braking Unit is used always set to 0 or 3 Trial Operation Procedures E Settings for the C
308. e torque control accuracy may be lost even if the output voltage limit operation is enabled Compensating for Insufficient Torque at Startup and Low speed Opera tion Torque Compensation The torque compensation function detects that the motor load has increased and increases the output torque V f control calculates and adjusts the motor primary loss voltage according to the output voltage V and compensates for insufficient torque at startup and during low speed operation Calculate the compensation voltage as follows Motor primary voltage loss x constant C4 01 Vector control separates the motor excitation current and the torque current by calculating the motor primary current and controlling each of the two separately Calculate the torque current as follows Calculated torque reference x C4 01 6 38 Improved Operating Efficiency mI iRelated Constants Name Control Methods Change oar j ing we Open Open stant Description Setting Factory during v f p Flux p i Range Setting Opera Loop Loop Number Display 9 i ded p Vector VES Vector Con 1 tor 2 Torque com Sets torque compensation gain as pensation gain a ratio Usually setting is not necessary Adjust in the following circum stances When the cable is long increase the set value When the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capac ity Max applicable motor capacity increase the set
309. e 2 8 L8 01 Protect selection for internal DB resistor 0 Disables overheat protection 0 Disables stall prevention function L3 04 Stall prevention selection during deceleration Select either one of them 3 Enables stall prevention function with braking resistor L8 01 is used when a braking resistor without thermal overload relay trip contacts ERF type mounted to Inverter is connected The Braking Resistor Unit cannot be used and the deceleration time cannot be shortened by the Inverter if L3 04 is set to 1 1 e if stall prevention is enabled for deceleration 2 21 iring Control Circuit Terminals Wire Sizes and Closed loop Connectors For remote operation using analog signals keep the control line length between the Digital Operator or opera tion signals and the Inverter to 50 m or less and separate the lines from high power lines main circuits or relay sequence circuits to reduce induction from peripheral devices When setting frequencies from an external frequency setter and not from a Digital Operator use shielded twisted pair wires and ground the shield to terminal E G as shown in the following diagram gt 2kQ 2kQ RP Shield terminal E G AC Analog common Fig 2 14 Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in Zable 2 9 2 V Speed setting power supply 15 V 20 mA Master speed ref
310. e 55 to 300 kW V f pattern The characteristics diagrams for each are shown in the following pages 0 4 to 1 5 kW V f Pattern Individual Functions a M The diagrams show characteristics for a 200 V class motor For a 400 V class motor multiply all voltages by 2 Constant Torque Characteristics Set Value 0 to 3 Set Value 0 8 013 25 50 Hz Set Value 1 Initial value of set value F V Set Value 5 200 j d 50 feits i 013 25 50 Hz High startup torque Set value 8 to B Set Value 8 0 1 3 2 5 50 Hz Fixed Output Operation Set Value C 6090 2 Set Value 9 0 13 2 5 50 Hz Set Value C to E Set Value D 60120 Hz Set Value 2 Set Value 6 200 35 01 5 30 Set Value A 5060 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60180 Hz Set Value 3 Set Value 7 Set Value B 6072 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 2 2 to 45 kW V f Pattern The diagrams show characteristics for a 200 V class motor For a 400 V class motor multiply all voltages by 2 Constant Torque Characteristics Set Value 0 to 3 Set Value 0 Set Value 1 Set Value 2 Set Value 3 200 14 0 1 3 2 5 50 Hz Decrement Torque Characteristics Set Value 4 to 7 Set Value 8 0 1325 50 Hz Fixed Output Operation Set Value C Initial value of set value F 200 14 0153 60 Hz
311. e 7 30 if Motor Deceleration is Slow oe nt cette eet lette exit 7 30 If the Motor Overheats ssssssssseetetetetn retten tentent 7 31 if There is Noise When the Inverter is Started or From an AM Radio 7 32 if the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Inverter is Run 7 32 If There is Mechanical Oscillation cccccccsessestssessesesesessssesceseseescseeseseeesesecseecereaene 7 32 if the Torque Generated for the Motor is Insufficient Insufficient Power 7 34 If the Torque Reference U1 09 at Low Speeds in Open loop Vector 2 Control is Large Compared to That at Medium and High Speeds e cccceeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeneeeeees 7 34 if Shock Occurs Near the Speed Estimator Switching Frequency in Open loop Vector 2 Control PRG 1020 only see 7 34 i Torque Ripple Occurs at Very Low Speeds in Open loop Vector 2 Control PRG 102EVODly 5o ito eoe e D a Ec eene Oe tui foetu tie dtes 7 35 if the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped ssssss 7 35 if OV is Detected When the Fan is Started or Fan Stalls 7 35 if Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference ssssssssss 7 35 Acoustic Noise From the Motor ccccccscsesscesecesessececceesceceececeeecectevstecceseecscateseeeevateceees 7 36 8 Maintenance and I
312. e constants U1 61 and U1 63 iMulti function Contact Outputs H2 01 to H2 03 The maintenance time period for the cooling fan or electrolytic capacitor can be output from the multi func tion contact terminal by setting H2 LILI to 2F Minor faults will not be output Control Methods Function Maintenance Time ON The operation time of either the electrolytic capacitors or the cooling fan has reached the specified maintenance time Applicable for G7 Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 or later Refer to Multi function Contact Outputs H2 in Chapter 5 User Constants for information on multi function contact outputs 6 iRelated Status Monitoring Constants Control Methods Factory Vif ack Flux ee Setting with P Vec p Vector Vector PG 1 tor 2 Name Display Description Cooling fan operating time FAN Elapsed Time Monitors the total operating time of the cooling fan The time can be set in 02 10 Electrolytic capacitor main tenance C Maintenance Fan For maintenance purposes this timer shows the amount of time the electrolytic capacitors have been operating Capacitors should be replaced when the monitor reaches 100 Cooling fan maintenance Maintenance Applicable for G7 Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 or later This monitor displays the amount of time the cooling fan has been operating Replace the cooling fan whe
313. e current for terminals V and V is 20 mA or less Inverter overload occurred when run ning at a low speed of 6 Hz or less Reduce the load Increase the frame size of the Inverter Lower the carrier frequency 7 OL3 Overtorque Det 1 Overtorque Detected 1 There has been a current greater than the setting in L6 02 for longer than the setting in L6 03 Make sure that the settings in L6 02 and L6 03 are appropri ate Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque OLA Overtorque Det 2 Overtorque Detected 2 There has been a current greater than the setting in L6 05 for longer than the setting in L6 06 Make sure that the current set ting in L6 05 and time setting in L6 06 are appropriate Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque High slip Braking OL The output frequency did not change for longer than the time set in N3 04 The inertia returned to the load is too large Make sure the load is an inertial load Set the system so that the decel eration time that does not pro duce overvoltages is 120 s or less Display UL3 Undertorq Det 1 Table 7 1 Fault Displays and Processing Continued Meaning Undertorque Detected 1 There has been a current less than the setting in L6 02 for longer than the setting in L6 03 Probable Causes Corrective Actions Make sure that the settings in L6 02 and L6 03 are app
314. e if wanting to copy the settings with a different software version 7 21 Errors During Autotuning The errors that can occur during autotuning are given in the following table If an error is detected the motor will coast to a stop and an error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator The error contact output and alarm output will not function Display Data Invalid Meaning Motor data error Table 7 5 Errors During Autotuning Probable causes There is an error in the data input for autotuning There is an error in the relationship between the motor output and the motor rated current The is an error between the no load cur rent setting and the input motor rated current when autotuning for only line to line resistance is performed for vector control Corrective Actions Check the input data Check the capacity of the Inverter and motor Check the motor rated current and no load current Minor Fault Alarm A minor fault occurred during autotuning xxx STOP key STOP key input The STOP Key was pressed to cancel autotuning Check the input data Check wiring and the machine Check the load Resistance Line to line resis tance error No Load Current No load current error Rated Slip Rated slip error Autotuning was not completed in the specified time The results of autotuning has exceeded the setting range for a user constan
315. e memory when a fault occurs Name Control Methods Output Signal Con Open Open stant Description Level During V f Loop Flux Loop Number Display Multi Function with Vec Vec Vec Analog Output PG Fi tor tor Peak hold current at fault Displays the peak hold current when the last fault occurred Cannot be output Current PeakHold Peak hold output frequency at fault Displays the frequency value at the moment the current reached Cannot be output its peak value when the last fault Freq I occurred PeakHold 1 Applicable for G7 Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 or later 2 The minimum unit differs depending on the Inverter capacity 0 01 A for Inverter of 0 4 kW to 7 5 kW and 0 1 A for Inverter of 11 kW or more Maintenance Timer Display Function Maintenance Timer Display Function This function indicates that the estimated performance life of the cooling fan and electrolytic capacitor have been reached gU P e IMPORTANT The maintenance time periods displayed in the monitors as a percentage to the total life are only an estimate not an exact prediction of actual performance life Use them as guidelines for replacement Settings Required to Use Maintenance Timer Display Function Set H2 LILI to 2F to use a multi function contact output for this function and display an alarm on the Digital Operator th
316. e number of rotations per pulse in F1 01 PG Constant If there 1s a reduction gear between the motor and PG set the reduction ratio in F1 12 and F1 13 in advanced programming mode Trial Operation Procedures Perform stationary autotuning for the line to line resistance only if the motor cable is 50 m or longer for the actual installation or the load is heavy enough to produce stalling Refer to the following section on Autotuning for details on stationary autotuning Open loop Vector 1 Control A1 02 2 Perform autotuning If the motor can be operated perform rotational autotuning If the motor cannot be oper ated perform stationary autotuning 1 or 2 Refer to the following section on Autotuning for details on autotun ing Flux Vector Control A1 02 3 Perform autotuning If the motor can be operated perform rotational autotuning If the motor cannot be oper ated perform stationary autotuning 1 or 2 Refer to the following section on Autotuning for details on autotun ing Open loop Vector 2 Control A1 02 4 Perform autotuning If the motor can be operated perform rotational autotuning If the motor cannot be oper ated perform stationary autotuning 1 or 2 Refer to the following section on Autotuning for details on autotun ing Autotuning l l 4 Use the following procedure to perform autotuning to automatically set motor constants when using the vector control method when the cab
317. e reg ister address order The following table shows an example of a message when forward operation has been set at a frequency refer ence of 60 0 Hz in the slave Inverter by the PLC Command Message Response Message Response Message 6 98 During Normal Operation During Error Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Function Code 10H Function Code 10H Function Code 90H Higher dop Higher ggg Error code 02H Start place Start place Address Lower 01H Address Lower 01H Higher CDH place place place CRC 16 Higher 00H Higher 00H Lower CIH place place place Quantity Quantity Lower 02H Lower 02H place place No of data 04H Higher jog place CRC 16 Higher 00H Lower 08H I l Lead data se Eee ower 01H place MET Next data ower 58H place Higher 63H place CRC 16 7 ower 39H place Individual Functions a response messages in the same way Q Set the number of data specified using command messages as quantity of specified messages x 2 Handle INFO iData Tables The data tables are shown below The types of data are as follows Reference data monitor data and broadcast data Reference Data The reference data table is shown below You can both read and write reference data Contents Register No Not used Frequency reference Bit 0 Forward Run Stop Comman
318. e speed limiter is used to maintain the motor speed between 0 and the speed limit When the sum of the torque reference and the torque compensation out put by the speed limiter is the same as the actual load the motor will stop accelerating and run at a constant speed Line direction Configuration Winding Operation N gt O Line direction Rewinding Operation Line direction Line direction Normal Rotation Direction Reverse Reverse Torque Reference Polarity TREF Speed Limit Polarity SLIM OQ Torque Torque limit Torque ron Torque limit d5 05 SLIM Generated Torque AN TREF C5 01 Torque Torque limit limit TREF AN esos 2 Torque limit Torque d5 05 j Speed i AN a i f Torque limit The lower value of AN TREF 05 9 esor 9r d5 05 Torque Torque limit N TREF SLIM p 6 45 05 Torque limit The lower value of AN TREF 05 C501 or d5 05 iRotation Direction Limit Operation Selection Valid Only for PRG 1020 in Open loop Vector 2 Control In applications where the machine is not rotated in the opposite direction to the sign of the speed limit i e in winding operation use with d5 07 set to 1 If the sign of the calculated speed is the opposite to that of the speed limit a torque will be output to prevent the motor from a
319. e to at least the minimum output frequency There is a multi function analog input setting error If multi function analog input H3 09 is set to 1 frequency gain and if no voltage current is input then the frequency reference will be zero Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are correct BThe motor does not operate when an external operation signal is input The following causes are possible The Inverter is not in drive mode If the Inverter is not in drive mode and the DRIVE indicator on the Digital Operator JVOP 161 does not light up the Inverter will remain in ready status and will not start Press the MENU Key to make the DRIVE indicator flash and enter the drive mode by pressing the DATA ENTER Key Rdy will be displayed when drive mode is entered Troubleshooting The operation method selection is wrong If constant b1 02 reference selection is set to 0 Digital Operator the motor will not operate when an exter nal operation signal is input Set b1 02 to 1 control circuit terminal and try again Similarly the motor will also not operate if the LOCAL REMOTE Key has been pressed to switch to Digital Operator operation In that case press the LOCAL REMOTE Key again to return to the original setting S INFO A 3 wire sequence is in effect The LOCAL REMOTE Key is enabled by setting 02 01 to 1 and disabled by setting 02 01 to 2 It is enabled when the dri
320. east 30 mA per Inverter Using a ground fault interrupter without a countermeasure against high frequency may result in a malfunction caused by high frequency leakage current If a ground fault interrupter without a countermeasure malfunc tions replace it with a ground fault interrupter with a countermeasure against high frequency or reduce the carrier frequency of the Inverter Alternatively use one or several ground fault interrupters with a total cumu lative sensitivity amperage of at least 200 mA per Inverter Wiring Main Circuit Terminals NM MM Installing a Magnetic Contactor If the power supply for the main circuit is to be shut off during a sequence a magnetic contactor can be used When a magnetic contactor is installed on the primary side of the main circuit to forcibly stop the Inverter however the regenerative braking does not work and the Inverter will coast to a stop The Inverter can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor however may cause the Inverter to break down Start and stop the Inverter at most once every 30 minutes When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator automatic operation cannot be performed after recovery from a power interruption fthe Braking Resistor Unit is used program the sequence so that the magnetic contactor is turned OFF by the contact of the Unit s
321. ect one of the following three output modes according to the setting in F5 09 F5 09 Set to 0 Terminal Number TDS5 TD11 Set Value Output Details Overcurrent SC OC GF TD6 TD11 Overvoltage OV TD7 TD11 Inverter overload OL2 TD8 TD11 Fuse blown PUF 0 8 separate outputs TD9 TD11 Overspeed OS TD10 TD11 Inverter overheated OH1 or motor overload OL1 TD1 TD2 Zero speed detected TD3 TD4 Speed agreement F5 09 Set to 1 Set Value 1 Binary code output Terminal Number TDS TD11 bit 0 Output Details TD6 TD11 bit 1 Encoded output TD7 TD11 bit 2 Refer to table below TD8 TD11 bit 3 TD9 TD11 Zero speed detected TD10 TD11 Speed agreement TD1 TD2 Operating TD3 TD4 Minor fault The following table shows the code outputs Bits 3 2 1 and 0 Output Details No error Bits 3 2 1 and 0 Output Details External fault EFxx Overcurrent SC OC GF Controller error CPFxx Overvoltage OV Motor overload OL1 Inverter overload OL2 Not used Inverter overheated OH OH1 Power loss UV1 UV2 or UV3 Overspeed OS Speed deviation DEV Fuse blown PUF PG open circuit PGO F5 09 Set to 2 Dynamic braking resistor RH Injection brake transistor error RR Output depends on the settings in F5 01 to F5 08
322. ect whether to enable or dis mode selection b8 01 NER comet Oorl 0 No A A A A A ICCH Energy Save ease Sel 1 Enable Energy saving gain Set the energy saving gain with 0 0 to 07 b8 02 the open loop vector control A Yes No No A A A 1CDH Energy Save method ne Gain Energy saving filter time con Set the energy saving filter time 0 00to 0 50 b8 03 Stant constant with the open loop vec 1 0 0 A 5 Yes No No A A A ICEH Energy Save tor control method i F T Energy saving Set the maximum motor effi coefficient ciency value b8 04 Set the motor rated capacity in 0 0to 288 20 No A A No No No ICFH Energy Save E2 11 and adjust the value by 5 655 00 3 4 COEF at a time until output power reaches a minimum value 6 Power detection filter time con Set the time constant for output 0 to b8 05 stant power detection 2000 20 ms No A A No No No 1D0H kW Filter Time Search opera Set the limit value of the voltage tion voltage control range during search opera limiter tion Perform search operation to opti 0 to b8 06 mize operations using minute 100 0 No A A No No No IDIH ___ variations in voltage using Search V Limit energy saving control Set to 0 to disable the search operation 100 is the motor base voltage Motor rated slip Sets the motor rated slip in Hz units These set values will become the 0 00to 2 90 E2 02 Motor Rated reference values for slip compen 20 00 Hz No A A A A A 30FH Slip
323. ection brake will be applied using the DC current set in b2 02 only for the time set in b2 04 For deceleration time settings refer to page 6 18 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times Run command ON Output frequency Decelerates to stop at deceleration time DC injection brake Fig 6 13 Deceleration to Stop 9 R DC injection brake time when stopping b2 04 e 13 The operation after stopping depends on the setting of b1 05 when flux vector control is selected A1 02 3 Run Command OFF ON OFF Frequency reference via analog input Run Command turns OFF and zero speed control start when motor speed drops to b2 01 Zero speed control lt ib2 04 Frequency reference drops to less than E1 09 and zero speed control Zero e starts when motor speed drops to control b2 01 b1 05 0 frequency reference injection brake time at start Baseblock b2 03 Baseblock b1 05 1 i Injection brake Coast i time at start E Baseblock i Baseblock i BE i Run Command turns OFF b1 05 2 and zero speed control start Run on E1 09 Injection brake when motor speed drops to b2 01 time at start Zero speed control Baseblock i b2 04 Run Command turns OFF and zero speed control start when motor speed drops to b2 01 i Zero speed
324. ed procedure under the recom mended conditions or perform stationary autotuning 2 or rotational autotuning Usually the standard setting for E2 02 is 1 Hz to 3 Hz and that for E2 03 is 30 to 65 of the rated current for a general purpose motor Generally the larger the motor capacity is the smaller the rated slip and the ratio of the no load current to the rated current become Use the data given in Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity 02 04 of Chapter 5 User Constants as a reference i a 1 Power will be supplied to the motor when stationary autotuning 1 is performed even though the motor 3 will not turn Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed e 2 When performing stationary autotuning 1 connected to a conveyor or other machine ensure that the IMPORTANT holding brake is not activated during autotuning Stationary Autotuning for Line to Line Resistance Only T1 01 2 Stationary autotuning for line to line resistance only can be used in any control method This is the only auto tuning possible for V f control and V f control with PG modes Autotuning can be used to prevent control errors when the motor cable is long 50 m or longer or the cable length has changed since installation or when the motor and Inverter have different capacities Set T1 01 to 2 and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operator The Inverter will supply power to the sta tionary motor for approximately 20 seconds and the
325. ed speed searches is shown below Search at Startup b3 01 1 The time chart when speed search at startup or external speed search command of multi function inputs has been selected is shown below ON Set frequency reference Run Command Start using speed detected Output frequency Output current 1 0s gt lt gt Lower limit set using Speed Search Wait Time b3 05 Minimum baseblock time L2 03 x 0 7 Note If the stopping method is set to coast to stop and the Run Command turns ON in a short time the operation may be the same as the search in case 2 Fig 6 44 Speed Search at Startup Estimated Speed 6 68 Continuing Operation Speed Search after Short Baseblock during Power Loss Recovery etc b3 01 0 The time chart when the Inverter operation is restarted after power has been restored is shown below Loss Time Shorter Than the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 AC power supply ON OFF Set frequenc Start using ference speed detected x Output frequency Output current X ay i 10 ms 1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency Minimum baseblock time L2 03 x 0 75 1 2 immediately before the baseblock 2 After AC power supply recovery motor waits for the minimum Speed Search Wait Time b3 05 Fig 6 45 Speed Search after Baseblock When Estimated Speed Loss Time Is
326. eed deviation Speed deviation is the difference between actual motor speed and the reference command speed Number of PG gear teeth 1 PG Gear Teeth1 Sets the number of teeth on the gears if there are gears between the PG and the motor Input pulses from PGX60 _ F1 13 Number of PG gear teeth 2 PG Gear Teeth2 x FI 01 F1 12 A gear ratio of 1 will be used if either of these constants is set to 0 When the control method is changed the factory setting will change The flux vector factory setting is given PG open cir cuit detection time PGO Detect Time Used to set the PG disconnection detection time PGO will be detected if the detection time con tinues beyond the set time BUsing PG Speed Control Board There are four types of PG Speed Control Board that can be used in V f control with PG PG A2 A phase single pulse input compatible with open collector or complimentary outputs PG B2 A B phase pulse input compatible with complimentary outputs PG D2 A phase single pulse input compatible with line drivers PG X2 A B Z phase pulse input compatible with line drivers There are two types of PG Speed Control Boards that can be used for flux vector control PG B2 A B phase pulse inputs complementary outputs PG X2 A B Z phase pulse inputs line driver outputs For the connection diagram refer to page 2 35 to 2
327. eees 10 2 Control Methods and Features tenete 10 2 Control Methods and Applications ssessssseeeenee 10 4 Inverter Application Precautions cccsecseccceeeceeaeecaeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 10 6 A E E E Me E CD EA ER DNI 10 6 Tistallation dose tie ete A a taie ties osea 10 7 STS cocer pep Te tunes km aces ede Rea ies Ruessa dS 10 7 Handing narina Oe et cat aR Te RI EE Meis MIC Me E LET CIVI 10 8 Motor Application Precautions ssssesssessssssessseeeeeeeeeerner enne 10 9 Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor 10 9 Using the Inverter for Special Motors ccccscssssesssstsssscescsseseesesseteeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 10 10 Power Transmission Mechanism Speed Reducers Belts and Chains 10 10 Conformance to UL Stardard ste tti rites eei aut ieee 10 11 Conformance to CE Markings ssssssse HH 10 13 9 CE Matkihis aute ot e eru ei Me An ie A MALA es M ME 10 13 Requirements for Conformance to CE Markings sssssseees 10 13 Wiring Example Sero cute ie t te b ta bte Reste b Aa EuR taaa 10 20 sing Braking Resistor DD tot tee leet tes deceased assetto els 10 20 Using a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit 0 0ccccsccscsessestesestesestesesteseeteseeees 10 21 Using Braking Units in Parallel sete eee tee 10 22 Using a Braking Unit and Three Braking Resistor Units in Parallel 1
328. eference from terminal A1 and the frequency reference lower limit set in either constant d2 02 or d2 03 the larger lower limit will become the frequency reference lower limit If inputting the Run Command when using UP DOWN commands the output frequency accelerates to the frequency reference lower limit When using UP DOWN commands multi step operations are disabled When d4 01 Frequency Reference Hold Function Selection is set to 1 the frequency reference held using the UP DOWN functions is stored even after the power supply is turned OFF When the power supply is turned ON and the Run Command is input the motor accelerates to the frequency reference that has been stored To reset i e to 0 Hz the stored frequency reference turn ON the UP or DOWN command while the Run Command is OFF m Connection Example and Time Chart The time chart and settings example when the UP command is allocated to the multi function contact input terminal S3 and the DOWN command is allocated to terminal S4 are shown below SetValue Multi function input terminal S3 Multi function input terminal S4 Inverter Forward operation Stop Reverse operation Stop Up command Down command sc Sequence 0 to 10 V analog common signal M Frequency reference lower limit ES i Fig 6 52 Connection Example when UP DOWN Commands Are Allocated 6 80 Input Terminal Functions Em Output frequency Upper lim
329. electing the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Sent There are four methods of stopping the Inverter when a Stop Command is sent Deceleration to stop Coast to stop DC braking stop Coast to stop with timer Set constant b1 03 to select the Inverter stopping method A DC braking stop and coasting to a stop with a timer cannot be set for flux vector control iRelated Constants Con stant Number Name Display Stopping method selection Stopping Method Description Select stopping method when Stop Command is sent 0 Deceleration to stop 1 Coast to stop 2 DC injection braking stop Stops faster than coast to stop no regenerative operation 3 Coast to stop with timer Run Commands are disregarded during deceleration Factory Setting Control Methods Vit with PG Open loop Vec tor 1 Flux Vec tor Operation selection for setting E1 09 or less Zero Speed Oper Used to set the method of operation when the frequency reference input is less than the minimum output fre quency E1 09 0 Run at frequency reference E1 09 not effective STOP Frequencies below E1 09 in the coast to stop state Run at min frequency E1 09 Run at zero speed Frequencies below E1 09 are zero Zero speed level DC injection braking starting fre quency DCInj Start Freq Used to set the frequency which starts DC injection braking in units of Hz
330. en Loop Vec tor 2 Motor tem perature input filter time con stant MOL Filter Time Set H3 09 to E and set the pri mary delay time constant for motor temperature thermistor inputs in seconds BPower Loss Ridethrough L2 User constants for power loss ridethroughs are shown in the following table Con stant Number Name Display Momentary power loss detection PwrL Selection Description 0 Disabled main circuit undervoltage UV1 detection Enabled Restarted when the power returns within the time for L2 02 When L2 02 is exceeded main circuit undervoltage UV1 is detected Enabled while CPU is operating Restarts when power returns during control operations Does not detect main circuit undervoltage UV1 Factory Setting Change during Opera tion Control Methods Vit with PG Open Loop Vec tor 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vec tor 2 Momentary power loss ridethru time PwrL Ride thru t Ridethrough time when Momentary Power Loss Selec tion L2 01 is set to 1 in units of seconds 5 59 Name Control Methods oh Open Open Description CHING Teetory Vif Loop Flux Loop Display P Range Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Min base Sets the I
331. en the zero servo command has been input and the frequency reference drop below excita Zero Servo tion level b2 01 a position Gain control loop is created and the motor stops Increasing the zero servo gain in turn increases the strength of the lock Increasing it by too much will cause oscillation Zero servo Sets the output width of the completion P lock completion signal width Enabled when the zero servo completion end is set for a multi function input The zero servo completion signal is ON when the current posi tion is within the range the zero servo position zero servo completion width Set the allowable position dis placement from the zero servo position to 4 times the pulse rate of the PG pulse generator encoder in use Zero Servo Count 5 20 User Constant Tables w C Autotuning Constants The following settings are made with the autotuning constants C constants Acceleration deceleration times s curve characteristics slip compensation torque compensation speed control and carrier frequency func tions Acceleration Deceleration C1 User constants for acceleration and deceleration times are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Con Setting Fact dun me poe roe Biss i ipti etung Factory during Vif Loop Flux
332. en the H4 02 or H4 03 setting is displayed in Quick Advanced or Verify mode while the motor is stopped The CH2 output can be adjusted when the H4 05 or H4 06 setting is displayed in quick Advance or Verify mode while the motor is stopped For analog output the value equivalent to 10096 of output value of monitored item is multiplied by the gain setting and the set bias is added 5 8 User Constant Tables A Setup Settings The following settings are made with the environment constants A constants Language displayed on the Digital Operator access level control method initialization of constants B Initialize Mode A1 User constants for the environment modes are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Con Open Open inti Setting Factory stant Description V f Loop Flux Loop Number Display Range Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Language Used to select the language selection for displayed on the Digital Digital Operator LCD Operator 0 English display 1 Japanese 2 German 3 French 4 Italian 5 6 Select Lan guage Spanish Portuguese This constant is not initialized by the initialize operation Constant Used to set the constant access level access level set read 0 Monitoring only Monitoring drive mode and setting A1 01 and Al 04 Used to select user constant Only constants set in A2 01 to A2 32 can be
333. en the multi func tion input is ON This input has higher priority than the ASR switching frequency set in C5 07 ON ASR Gain Switch signal a multi function input OFF Proportional gain determined by motor speed Proportional gain P i C5 03 gain setting lt _ gt lt gt C5 02 c5 02 The gain is changed linearly in integral time 1 C5 02 Fig 6 75 ASR Proportional Gain Switch Individual Functions m e EPrecautions for Open loop Vector 2 Control PRG 1020 only The ASR primary delay time setting for open loop vector 2 control is divided between constants C5 06 and C5 10 The constant that is used depends on the size of the operating frequency If the operating fre quency is between 0 and 35 Hz adjust the setting using C5 06 and if the operating frequency is greater than 35 Hz adjust the setting using C5 10 To increase the speed response adjust the gain with reference to the explanations on page 4 19 in Chapter 4 Trial Operation ilGain Adjustment for Speed Control during V f Control with PG When using V f control with PG set the proportional gain P and the integral time I at E1 09 minimum out put frequency and E1 04 maximum output frequency Speed Control Gain Integral Time Adjustment for V f Control with PG shows how the proportional gain and integral time change in linear fashion based on the speed P and setting P C5 01 I C5 02 P C5 03
334. ence Board set b1 01 Reference selection to 3 Option board 6 The DI 16H2 can be used to set a frequency using a 16 bit digital reference The DI 08 can be used to set a frequency using a 8 bit digital reference iRelated Constants Name Control Methods Con ET Open Open stant Description Vit Loop Flux ped Number Display with Vector VES vector PG 1 tor 2 Digital input Sets the Digital Reference Board option input method 0 BCD 1 unit BCD 0 1 unit BCD 0 01 unit BCD 1 Hz unit BCD 0 1 Hz unit BCD 0 01 Hz unit BCD special setting 5 digit DI Input input 7 Binary input 6 is only effective when the DI 16H2 is used When 01 03 is set to 2 or higher the input will be BCD and the units will change to the 01 03 set ting Name Control Methods Factory vir OPen Flux Open Setting with OOP Vec oop PG ad tor icu Con stant Description Number Display Frequency units Sets the units that will be set and of reference set displayed for the frequency refer ting and moni ence and frequency monitor tor 0 0 01 Hz units 1 0 01 units Maximum output frequency is 100 2 to 39 min units Sets the motor poles 40 to 39999 User desired display Set the desired values for setting and display for the max output frequency Display Scaling 9 4 digit number excluding
335. ency FOUT detec tion 4 is set for a multi func Spd Agree tion output Lvl Frequency that should be detected is set in Hz units Speedagree Effective when Frequency detection speed agree 2 Desired fre width quency speed agree 2 Fre quency FOUT detection 3 or Frequency detection 4 is set Spd Agree for a multi function output Width Frequency detection width is set in Hz units Operation 0 Stop Operation follows the when fre frequency reference 5 quency ref 1 Operation at 80 speed erence is continues At 80 of speed missing before the frequency reference was lost Ref Loss Frequency reference is lost Sel Frequency reference dropped over 90 in 400 ms Fault Restart L5 User constants for restarting faults are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Con Open Open stant Description Factory Vif Loop Flux Loop Number Display Setting with bod Vee Vec or or or 1 2 Number of Sets the number of auto restart attempts Automatically restarts after a fault and conducts a speed search from the run frequency auto restart attempts Num of Restarts Auto restart Sets whether a fault contact operation output is activated during fault selection restart 0 Not output Fault contact is not activated Restart Sel 1 Output Fault contact is activated
336. ended f the momentary power loss operation selection is set to 0 Disabled when the momentary power loss exceeds 15 ms during operation alarm UV1 main circuit undervoltage will be detected Speed Search The speed search function finds the actual speed of the motor that is rotating using inertia and then starts smoothly from that speed When restoring power after a temporary power loss the speed search function switches connection from the commercial power supply and then restarts the fan that is rotating using inertia 1 P Speed search will be performed in the following cases e When Momentary power loss detection L2 01 is set to 1 or 2 Enabled and power is restored after a momentary power loss IMPORTANT When Number of auto restart attempts L5 01 is set from 1 to 10 and the auto restart is performed after a fault Multi function contact inputs H1 LIL1 are set to External search command 61 62 or 64 and the command is sent Multi function contact inputs H1 LILI are set to External baseblock 8 or 9 and the release com mand is sent The selected speed search type in b3 01 speed calculation or current detection will be performed Related Constants Name Con stant Number Display Speed search selection cur rent detection or speed calcu lation SpdSrch at Start Description Enables disables the speed search function for the Run Command and sets the speed search method
337. endently They must be used together The up down commands 10 and 11 and Accel Decel Ramp Hold A were selected at the same time Speed Search 1 61 maximum output frequency and Speed Search 2 62 set fre quency were selected at the same time The up down commands 10 and 11 were selected while PID Control Method Selection b5 01 was enabled Positive and negative speed commands have not been set at the same time The emergency Stop Command NO and NC have been set at the same time OPEO05 Sequence Select Option Board Selection Error The option board was selected as the frequency reference source by setting b1 01 to 3 but an option board isn t connected C option OPE06 PG Opt Miss ing Control Method Selec tion Error V f control with PG feedback was selected by setting A1 02 to 1 but a PG Speed Control Board isn t connected OPE07 Analog Selection Multi function Analog Input Selection Error The same setting has been selected for the analog input selection and the PID func tion selection H3 09 B and H6 01 1 H3 09 C and H6 01 2 b1 01 Reference Selection is set to 4 pulse input and H6 01 Pulse Train Input Function Selection is set to a value other than 0 frequency reference Constant Selection Error A setting has been made that is not required in the current control method Ex A function used only with open loop vector control was selected for V f control Press t
338. er Hunting prevention gain N1 02 Table 4 4 Adjusted User Constants Performance Controlling hunting and vibration in mid dle range speeds 10 to 40 Hz Factory Setting Recom mended Setting 0 50 to 2 00 Adjustment Method Reduce the setting if torque is insufficient for heavy loads Increase the setting if hunt ing or vibration occurs for light loads Carrier frequency selection C6 02 Reducing motor magnetic noise Controlling hunting and vibration at low speeds Depends on capac ity 0 to default Increase the setting if motor magnetic noise is high Reduce the setting if hunt ing or vibration occurs at low to middle range speeds Torque compensation primary delay time constant C4 02 Increasing torque and speed response Controlling hunting and vibration Depends on capac ity 200 to 1000 ms Reduce the setting if torque or speed response is slow Increase the setting if hunt ing or vibration occurs Torque compensation gain C4 01 Improving torque at low speeds 10 Hz or lower Controlling hunting and vibration 0 50 to 1 50 Increase the setting if torque is insufficient at low speeds Reduce the setting if hunt ing or vibration occurs for light loads Middle output fre quency voltage E1 08 Minimum output fre quency voltage E1 10 Improving torque at low speeds Controlling shock at startup Depends on capac
339. er replacing 2 the electrolytic capacitors Replace the cooling fan 2 and set con stant 02 10 to OH 1 Refer to MECHATROLINK COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE CARD INSTRUCTIONS TOBPC73060008 for details 2 For details on replacement refer to Chapter 8 Maintenance and Inspection 7 19 Operation Errors An operation error will occur if there is an invalid setting or a contradiction between two constant settings It won t be possible to start the Inverter until the constants have been set correctly The alarm output and fault contact outputs will not operate either When an operation error has occurred refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the errors Display OPEOI kVA Selec tion Table 7 4 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings Meaning Incorrect Inverter Capacity Setting Incorrect settings The Inverter capacity setting doesn t match the Unit Contact your Yaskawa repre sentative OPE02 Limit Constant Setting Range Error The constant setting is outside of the valid setting range Press the ENTER Key on the Digital Operator to display OPE fault constant U1 34 OPEO03 Terminal Multi function Input Selection Error One of the following errors has been made in the multi function input H1 01 to H1 10 settings The same setting has been selected for two or more multi function inputs An up or down command was selected indep
340. er Frequency Selection C6 02 to lower the carrier frequency In addition remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened If There is Mechanical Oscillation Use the following information when there 1s mechanical oscillation BThe machinery is making unusual sounds The following causes are possible There may be resonance between the mechanical system s characteristic frequency and the carrier frequency If the motor is running with no problems and the machinery is oscillating with a high pitched whine it may indicate that this 1s occurring To prevent this type of resonance adjust the carrier frequency with constants C6 02 to C6 05 There may be resonance between a machine s characteristic frequency and the output fre quency of the Inverter To prevent this from occurring either use the jump frequency functions in constants d3 01 to d3 04 or install rubber padding on the motor base to reduce oscillation BOscillation and hunting are occurring with open loop vector 1 control The gain adjustment may be insufficient Reset the gain to a more effective level by adjusting constants C4 02 torque compensation time constant C2 01 S curve Characteristic Time at Acceleration Start and C3 02 Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time in order Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time setting Troubleshooting H ccm Vector control will not perform if autotuning has not been performed
341. er to Chapter 5 User Constants and set the values for the OO part of U1 OO status monitor Alternatively you can output monitor items U1 O0 status monitor from analog output option terminal channels 1 and 2 on analog monitor boards AO 08 and AO 12 Refer to the table of constants and set the val ues 6 89 _ Adjusting the Analog Monitor Items Adjust the output voltage for multi function analog output terminals FM AC and AM AC using the gain and bias in H4 02 H4 03 H4 05 and H4 06 Also adjust the output voltage for output channels 1 and 2 of Ana log Output option boards AO 08 and AO 12 using the gain and bias in F4 02 F4 04 F4 05 and F4 06 Adjusting the Meter The output voltage for terminals FM AC and AM AC and output channels 1 and 2 of the AO option board can be adjusted while the Inverter is stopped For example just pressing the Enter Key and displaying the data set ting display for H4 02 or H4 03 will cause the following voltage to be output by the FM AC terminals 10 V 100 monitor output x output gain H4 02 output bias H4 03 Just pressing the Enter Key and displaying the data setting display for F4 02 or F4 05 will cause the following voltage to be output to channel 1 of the AO option board 10 V 100 monitor output x output gain H4 02 output bias H4 05 Output voltage Gain x 10 V 1E y Bias x 10 100 V oy Monitor item U IDO Fig 6 57 Monitor Output Adjustment iSwit
342. erate to a stop when the Run Command turns OFF e When A1 02 control method selection is set to 3 flux vector control the speed torque change command a setting of 71 can be set for a multi function input H1 01 to H1 10 to switch between speed and torque control during operation An example is shown below Terminal No User Constant No Factory Setting Function Speed torque control change Frequency reference selection terminals A1 A2 Speed limit terminals A1 A2 Torque reference torque limit A timing chart for switching between speed and torque control is shown in the following figure 6 CLOSED CLOSED OPEN OPEN Speed torque change signal terminal S8 input Run Command Stop l l l l l l I I j l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l Control mode Speed P Torque X Speed X Torque Speed decel to stop l l l j l l l Speed limit Speed limit Speed Speed reference reference Terminal A1 input Torque limit l limit f Terminal A3 input Hiis LEN orque imt l Torque Torque reference reference l l l i m e a el l l Fig 6 70 Speed Torque Control Switching Time Chart _ Speed Control ASR Structure Frequency reference Detected speed Estimated speed Number Frequency Torque limits Speed control
343. eration Control Methods MEMOBUS Register Page The number of the user constant The name of the user constant Details on the function or settings of the user constant The setting range for the user constant The factory setting each control method has its own factory setting Therefore the factory setting changes when the control method is changed Refer to page 5 87 for factory settings by control method Indicates whether or not the constant can be changed while the Inverter is in operation Yes Changes possible during operation No Changes not possible during operation Indicates the control methods in which the user constant can be moni tored or set Q Items which can be monitored and set in either quick program ming mode or advanced programming mode A Items which can be monitored and set only in advanced pro gramming mode No Items which cannot be monitored or set for the control method The register number used for MEMOBUS communications Reference page for more detailed information on the constant Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels w Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels The following figure shows the Digital Operator display hierarchy for the Inverter
344. eration perform adjustments so that the Inverter output current is limited to 150 of the rated current checking the constants U1 83 and U1 84 of this function Y AE The values of peak current and output frequency during peak hold will be cleared when the Inverter stops and then starts P or when the power is turned OFF and then ON They will be retained while being baseblocked stopped e IMPORTANT E Related Status Monitoring Constants Name Control Methods Output Signal Level Open jOpen Description During Multi Function Vif Loop Flux Loop with Vec Vec Vec Analog Output PG tor tor tor 1 2 Display Peak hold current Displays the peak value ofthe 10V Inverter rated output current during run Peak current Current Hold refers to the moment 10 to 10V absolute value PeakHold that the peak value is saved output Output frequency during Displays the frequency value peak hold When the output current reached its peak value 10V Max frequency 10V to 10V Freq I PeakHold 1 Applicable for G7 Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 or later 2 The minimum unit differs depending on the Inverter capacity 0 01 A for Inverter of 0 4 kW to 7 5 kW and 0 1 A for Inverter of 11 kW or more 3 The setting unit can be selected in 01 03 iRelated Fault Tracing Constants The peak hold values are saved in the fault trac
345. erence 0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V Master speed reference 4 to 20 mA 0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V Auxiliary reference 0 to 10 V 10 to 10 V Pulse train input 32 kHz max V Speed setting power supply 15 V 20 mA Table 2 9 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes Same for all Models Terminals FM AC AM P1 P2 PC SC Al A2 A3 V V S1 S2 S3 84 5 S6 S7 S8 MA MB MC MI M2 Termi nal Screws Tightening Torque Nem 0 8 to 1 0 Possible Wire Sizes mm AWG 0 5 to 2 20 to 14 Recom mended Wire Size mm AWG P3 C3 P4 C4 MP RP R R S9 10 S11 12 S S IG Phoenix type 0 5 to 0 6 Single wire 0 14 to 2 5 Stranded wire 0 14 to 1 5 26 to 14 E G Use shielded twisted pair cab 0 8 to 1 0 0 5 to 2 20 to 14 les to input an external frequency reference Wire Type Shielded twisted pair wire Shielded polyethylene cov ered vinyl sheath cable KPEV S by Hitachi Electri cal Wire or equivalent 2 Refer to Zable 2 3 Closed loop Connector Sizes JIS C2805 200 V Class and 400 V Class for suitable closed loop crimp terminal sizes for the wires 3 We recommend using straight 2 22 solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability Wiring Control Circuit Terminals NM B Straight Solderless Terminals for Signal Lines Models and sizes of straight solderless terminal a
346. ers with software versions PRG 1039 or later 3 The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0 4 kW is given Continuing Operation Multi function Contact Inputs H1 01 to H1 10 Control Methods Function 61 External search command 1 ON Speed search from maximum output frequency Yes No Yes No Yes 62 External search command 2 ON Speed search from set frequency Yes No Yes No Yes i Setting Precautions BAp When both external search commands 1 and 2 are set for the multi function contact terminals an OPEO3 invalid multi function input selection operation error may occur Set either external search command 1 or external search command 2 If speed search during startup is selected when using V f control with PG the Unit will start from the fre quency detected by PG If performing speed search using external search commands add an external sequence so that the period when the Run Command and external search command are both ON is at the very least the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 If the Inverter output is equipped with a contact set the contact operation delay time in the Speed Search Wait Time b3 05 The factory setting is 0 2 s When not using the contact you can reduce the search time by making the setting 0 0 s After waiting for the speed search wait time the Inverter starts the speed search Co
347. es Current Alarm Function Current Alarm Function This function displays a current alarm HCA on the Digital Operator and outputs a minor fault contact signal when the Inverter output current exceeds 150 effective value of the rated output current Use this function to check the current during trial operation for machines that increase Inverter output current such as elevating machines To output a minor failure contact signal from a multi function contact terminal set H2 L1L to 10 Minor failure If a current alarm occurs frequently reduce the Inverter load Use the peak hold current monitoring function U1 83 and U1 84 when performing retuning to reduce the Inverter output current to 150 of the rated output current Refer to Chapter 4 Trial Operation for details Y m For applications where a high current flows because of frequent start and stop operations such as cranes set L8 41 to 1 P P Enabled If a current alarm occurs frequently take measures such as IMPORTANT Reducing the frequency of operation and loading Adjusting open close timing of holding brake Increasing acceleration deceleration time Taking enough time to produce motor magnetic flux As described below Related Constants Name Control Methods L Change LLL m 4 ots Vit ae Flux ie era j ie ion with Vector dn Vector PG 1 tor 2 Con stant Description
348. es output power kWh Moni monitor Returns to 0 tor Init Capacitor Allows the user to set the maintenance maintenance time for the 2 18 setting electrolytic capacitors U1 Ot 9 3 61 The user can reset the io 0 No A A A A A 51DH 6 184 C Mainte accumulated operation time back to zero or to some other desired value nanceSet The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0 4 kW is given 2 Applicable for G7 Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 or later B Copy Function o3 User constants for the copy function are shown in the following table Setting Fact open y Description SINI aay v f Loop Display p Range Setting with Vec PG tor 1 Copy func 0 Normal operation tion selection READ Inverter to Operator COPY Operator to Inverter Verify compare Copy Func tion Sel Name Control Methods Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vec tor 2 Read permit ted selection Read prohibited Read permitted Copy Allow able User Constant Tables w T Motor Autotuning The following settings are made with the motor autotuning constants T constants Settings for autotuning Con stant Number Name Display Motor 1 2 selection Select Motor Description Set the location where the auto
349. essary to set When restarting is not possible SpdSrch with the factory settings Current reduce the value Speed search Sets the output frequency decelera deceleration time during speed tion time search in 1 second units current Set the time for deceleration detection from the maximum output fre quency to the minimum output SpdSrch frequency Dec Time Speed search wait time cur rent detec Sets the magnetic contactor operating delay time when there is a magnetic contactor on the output side of the Inverter When a speed search is performed after recovering from a momentary power loss the search operation is delayed by the time set here tion or speed calcu lation Search Delay 5 13 Name Control Methods Con Nery ee eel Setting Factory during Vif L FI stant Description oop Flux Number Display p Range Setting Opsta Vit MR Vec Speed search retrial cur rent level Sets the current level to retry a speed search as a percentage taking the Inverter rated cur SrchRestart Tent as 100 Lvl Speed search retrial detec Sets the time for detection in a tion time speed search retrial in units of seconds SrchRestart Time Number of speed search retrials Sets the number of times that a speed search can be retried Num of SrchRestr 1 The factory
350. et 1 rent is set as 100 Lvl Overtorque Under torque i Sets the overtorque under detection torque detection time in 1 sec time 1 ond units Torq Det 1 Time 5 64 User Constant Tables D Name Control Methods Fact Open Open Description actory v f Loop Flux Loop d Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Display Overtorque Under torque detection selection 2 Torq Det 2 Sel Multi function output for over torque detection 1 is output to multi function contact output when overtorque detection 1 NO or overtorque detection 1 NC is selected Multi function output for overtorque detection Torq Det 2 2 is output to multi function Lvl contact output when overtorque detection 2 NO or overtorque Overtorque detection 2 NC is selected Under torque detection Overtorque Under torque detection level 2 time 2 Torq Det 2 Time i Torque Limits L7 User constants for torque limits are shown in the following table 5 Control Methods Open Open Description v f Loop Flux Loop with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Forward drive torque limit Torq Limit Fwd Reverse drive torque limit Sets the torque limit value as a per centage of the motor rated torque Four individual regions can be set Torq Limit Output torq
351. etection only with speed matching operation continues after OL3 flashes OLA flashes overtorque warning 2 Overtorque detected continuously during operation operation continues OL3 flashes OLA flashes after overtorque warning 3 Overtorque detection only with speed matching output stopped upon detec OL3 lit OLA lit tion protected operation 4 Overtorque detected continuously during operation output stopped upon OL3 lit OLA lit detection protected operation 5 Undertorque detection only with speed matching operation continues after UL3 flashes ULA flashes overtorque warning 6 Undertorque detected continuously during operation operation continues UL3 flashes ULA flashes after overtorque warning 7 Undertorque detection only with speed matching output stopped upon UL3 lit ULA lit detection protected operation 8 Undertorque detected continuously during operation output stopped upon UL3 lit ULA lit detection protected operation li Setting Example The following diagram shows the time chart for overtorque and undertorque detection 6 Overtorque Detection Motor current output torque L6 02 or L6 05 I l Overtorque detection 1 NO L6 03 or I L6 03 or or overtorque detection 2 NO L6 06 L6 06 Overtorque detection disabled band is approximately 10 of the Inverter rated output current or motor rated torque 6 55 Undertorque Detection Motor current output torq
352. ets the motor no load cur rent in 1 A units This constant is automatically set during autotuning Motor 2 num ber of poles number of poles Number of Poles Sets the number of motor poles This constant is automatically set during autotuning Motor 2 line to line resis tance Term Resis tance Sets the motor phase to phase resistance in Q units This constant is automatically set during autotuning Motor 2 leak inductance Leak Induc tance Sets the voltage drop due to motor leakage inductance as a percentage of the motor rated voltage This constant is automatically set during autotuning Motor 2 rated capacity Mtr Rated Power Set the rated output of the motor in units of 0 01 kW This constant is automatically set during autotuning of 0 4 kW is given The upper limit depends on the setting of E4 01 The same capacity as that of the Inverter will be set if the constants are initialized pend upon The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0 4 kW is given The setting range is from 1096 to 20096 of the Inverter rated output current The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW is given Ifa multi function input is set for motor 2 H1 LILI 16 the setting range will de he Inverter ca pacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter User Constant Tables w
353. etting Factory during vig OPen gy Open Range Setting Opera with LOOP Vec Loop tion PG m tor Vector Con m stant Description Number Display Timer function Sets the timer function output ON delay time ON delay time dead band for the timer function input in 1 sec Delay ON ond units Enabled when a timer function is set in H1 O00 or H2 LILI Timer Timer function Sets the timer function output OFF delay time OFF delay time dead band for the timer function input in 1 sec Delay OFF ond units Timer Enabled when a timer function is set in HI LILI or H2 LILI i Setting Example When the timer function input ON time is longer than the value set in b4 01 the timer output function is turned ON When the timer function input OFF time is longer than the value set in b4 02 the timer output function is turned OFF An example of timer function operation 1s given in the following diagram Timer function input 0 2 Ow E Timer function output Fig 6 62 Timer Function Operation Example _ Using PID Control PID control is a method of making the feedback value detection value match the set target value By combin ing proportional control P integral control T and derivative control D you can even control targets machinery with play time The characteristics of the PID control operations are given below P
354. evel gain for multi minal AM function analog output 2 Set the number of multiples of 10 V to be output as the 100 output for the monitor items Voltage output from the Terminal AM Gain terminals however have a 10 V max A meter calibration function is avail able Motor pro Set to enable or disable the motor tection overload protection function using the selection electronic thermal relay 0 Disabled 1 General purpose motor protection 2 Inverter motor protection 3 Vector motor protection In some applications when the Inverter power supply is turned off MOL Fault the thermal value is reset so even if Select this constant is set to 1 protection may not be effective When several motors are connected to one Inverter set to 0 and ensure that each motor is installed with a protec tion device Stall pre 0 Disabled Deceleration as set If vention deceleration time is too short a selection main circuit overvoltage may during result decelera Enabled Deceleration is stopped il tion when the main circuit voltage exceeds the overvoltage level Deceleration restarts when voltage is returned Intelligent deceleration mode Deceleration rate is automatically adjusted so that the Inverter can StallP decelerate in the shortest possible Decel Sel time Set deceleration time is disregarded Enabled with Braking Resistor Unit When a braking option Braking Resistor Braking
355. ex 2 Revision History The revision dates and numbers of the revised manuals are given on the bottom of the back cover MANUAL NO TOE S616 60 1B Published in Japan March 2003 01 05 Revision number Date of Date of original publication publication March 2003 o Addition Constants for the Inverters with software version PRG 102LI description of replacing cooling fan and circulation fan etc April 2003 Revision Address July 2003 s Chapter 4 Revision Stationary Autotuning T1 01 1 Addition Precautions After Using Rotational and Stationary Autotuning January 2004 Chapter 2 Addition Note 12 to connection diagram Note after main circuit configuration diagrams for CIMR G7A2030 to 2110 Explanation of I O circuit configuration diagram for PG B2 Chapter 5 Addition Values for 400 V Class Inverters of 300 kW under Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity Note 5 for carrier frequency C6 03 to C6 05 Chapter 6 Revision Multi function contact input terminals S7 S8 for multi step operation to S9 S7 Addition Output Terminal Function Explanation of restrictions on maximum output frequency depending on carrier fre quency under Reducing Noise and Leakage Current Using Inverters for Elevating Machines Chapter 7 Revision Main circuit capacitor neutral point potential error causes and corrective action under Fault Detection Addition Operator errors in table under Fault Detection Reset during Run Command input error under
356. ey The READ function will start ADV READ READ COMPLETE If the READ function ends normally End is displayed on the Digital Operator ADV Copy Funtion Sel 03 FO o COPY SELECT The display returns to 03 01 when a key is pressed An error may occur while saving to memory If an error is displayed press any key to cancel the error display and return to the 03 01 display Error displays and their meanings are shown below Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when Using the Digital Oper ator Copy Function Error Display PRE READ IMPOSSIBLE You are attempting to set 03 01 to 1 while 03 02 is set to 0 Digital Operator Functions E Error Display IFE EAD DATA ERROR Meaning Read data length mismatch or read data error RDE Tried to write constants to EEPROM on the Digital Operator but unable to perform write DATA ERROR operation Select READ Permitted Prevent overwriting the data stored in EEPROM in the Digital Operator by mistake With 03 02 set to 0 if you set 03 01 to 1 and perform the write operation PrE will be displayed on the Digital Operator and the write operation will be stopped EWriting Constant Set Values Stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter COPY To write constant set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter make the settings using the follow ing method Step No Digital Operator Display ADV Mai
357. f approximately 5 Hz f shock occurs during deceleration ncrease the deceleration time within the allowable range Alternatively reduce the torque limit Reduce the setting for N4 28 to a value less than the factory setting Reduce the setting in intervals of approximately 5 Hz The factory settings for N4 11 speed estimator switching frequency and N4 28 speed estimator switching frequency 2 are 70 Hz and 50 Hz respectively If the problem still occurs after making the above adjustments use open loop vector 1 control A1 02 2 If Torque Ripple Occurs at Very Low Speeds in Open loop Vector 2 Con trol PRG 1020 only Either increase the operating frequency or use open loop vector 1 control A1 02 2 If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped If the motor rotates even when the Inverter output is stopped the DC injection braking is insufficient If the motor continues operating at low speed without completely stopping and after a deceleration stop has been executed it means that the DC injection braking 1s not decelerating enough Adjust the DC injection braking as follows ncrease the constant b2 02 DC Injection Braking Current setting ncrease the constant b2 04 DC Injection Braking initial excitation Time at Stop setting If OV is Detected When the Fan is Started or Fan Stalls 7 Generation of OV main circuit voltage and stalling can occur if the fan is turnin
358. f the maximum output frequency Torque b7 01 Speed 0 Speed reference Fig 6 80 Droop Control Gain Individual Functions w Zero servo Function The zero servo function holds the motor when the motor is stopped in what is call a zero servo status This function can be used to stop the motor even with an external force acts on the motor or the analog reference input is offset The zero servo function is enabled when one of the multi function inputs H1 01 to H1 10 is set to 72 zero servo command If the zero servo command is ON when the frequency speed reference falls below the zero speed level a zero servo status 1s implemented Related Constants Name Con stant Number Display Zero speed level DC injec tion braking starting fre quency DCInj Start Freq Description Used to set the frequency which starts DC injection braking in units of Hz when deceleration to stop is selected When b2 01 is less than E1 09 E1 09 becomes the DC injection braking starting frequency For flux vector control zero speed control from B2 01 Setting Range Factory Setting Change during Opera tion Control Methods Vif with PG Open Loop Vector 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vector 2 Zero servo gain Gain Adjust the strength of the zero servo lock Enabled when the zero servo command is set for a multi func tion inpu
359. f the monitor tion terminal item to be output U1 LILI from AM terminal AM 4 10 to 14 25 28 34 39 40 can Terminal AM not be set 29 to 31 and 41 are not Sel used Gain terminal Set the voltage level gain for AM multi function analog output 2 Set the number of multiples of 10 V to be output as the 10096 output Terminal AM for the monitor items The maxi mum output from the terminal is 10 V A meter calibration function Gain is available Bias terminal Sets the multi function analog AM output 2 voltage level bias Sets output characteristic up down parallel movement as a per Terminal AM _ centage of 10 V The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V A meter calibra Bias tion function is available 6 88 Monitor Constants E Name Control Methods Factory vir Open Flux Open Setting with OOP Vec oop Con stant Description Number Display Vector Vector PG 1 tor 2 Analog output 1 Sets the signal output level for signal level multi function output 1 terminal H4 07 Selection FM Oorl 0 No A A A A A 423H AO Level 0 0 to 10 V output Selectl 1 10 to 10 V output Channel 1 mon Effective when the Analog Moni 1 to 45 F4 0 _ itor selection tor Board is used 2 No A A A A A 391H Monitor selection AO Chi Select Set the number of the monitor oe Channel gain item to be output U1
360. fault Torque Refer ence The reference torque when the previous fault occurred The motor rated torque corresponds to 100 Output Signal Level During Multi Function Analog Output Cannot be output Control Methods Vit with PG Open Loop Vec tor 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vec tor 2 Name Display Input termi nal status at fault Description The input terminal status when the previous fault occurred ee The format is the same as for U1 Input Term 10 Sts Output termi nalstatusat The output terminal status when U2 12 fault the previous fault occurred The Output Term format is the same as for U1 11 Sts Operation status at fault The operating status when the U2 13 previous fault occurred The for Inverter Sta mat is the same as for U1 12 tus Cumulative operation The operating time when the pre U2 14 time at fault vious fault occurred Elapsed time Peak hold current at U2 21 fault Displays the peak hold current 2 when the last fault occurred Current Pea kHold Peak hold output Displays the frequency value at U2 22 frequency at the moment the current reached 2 fault its peak value when the last fault Note 1 The following errors are not included in the error trace CPF00 01 02 03 UV1 and UV2 Freq I PeakHold occurred Output
361. fied time Check motor wiring PG Open PG Disconnection Detected PG pulses were input when the Inverter was outputting a frequency Fix the broken disconnected wiring V f Over Setting V f settings exces sive The torque reference exceeded 100 and the no load torque exceeded 70 during autotuning Check and correct the settings Disconnect the load from the motor Protective and Diagnostic Functions w Table 7 5 Errors During Autotuning Continued Display Meaning Motor core satura tion error detected Saturation Probable causes The results of autotuning has exceeded the setting range for a user constant so a Corrective Actions Check the input data Check motor wiring If the motor is connected to the only for rotational temporary setting was made for the motor core saturation coefficient machine disconnect it r autotuning Check the input data particularly the motor output current and motor rated current Rated current settin Rated FLA Alm E The rated current is set high alarm Check the input data As a result of stationary autotuning 1 the slip value has fallen to 0 2 Hz or below Adjusted Slip Value Adjusted slip value AA If rotational autotuning is possible per fell below lower limit form it If impossible perform stationary autotuning 2 Displayed after autotuning h
362. fol lows With the vector control method the upper limit of the carrier frequency is Carrier fixed in C6 03 Carrier Freq Max frequency lower limit Carrier Freq Min Carrier frequency Carrier fre quency propor i Output tional gain fia frequency Max output frequency Output frequency x C6 05 x K K is a coefficient that depends on the Carrier setting of C6 03 Freq Gain C6 03 2 10 0 kHz K 3 10 0 kHz gt C6 03 2 5 0 kHz K 2 5 0 kHz gt C6 03 K 1 Carrier fre quency selection Select the carrier frequency when open for open loop vector 2 control is used loop vec 1 2 kHz tor2con 2 4kHz trol 3 6 kHz 4 8 kHz Carrier Freq Sel The factory settings depend on the capacity of the Inverter The values for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW are given The setting ranges depend on the capacity of the Inverter The values for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW are given This constant can be monitored or set only when F is set for C6 02 Displayed in Quick Programming Mode when motor 2 is set for a multi function input AB WN The maximum output frequency depends on the setting for the carrier frequency refer to page 6 43 5 26 User Constant Tables w d Reference Constants The following settings are made with the reference constants d constants Frequency references
363. following PID control feedback input methods Input Method Setting Conditions Multi function analog input Set H3 09 Multi function Analog Input Terminal A2 Selection or H3 05 Multi func E mp tion Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection to B PID feedback Pulse train input Set H6 01 to 1 PID feedback Analog input Adjust using the analog input terminal gain and bias Q Adjust PID target value and PID feedback value using the following items e Pulse train input Adjust using pulse train scaling pulse train input gain and pulse train input bias INFO EPID Adjustment Methods Use the following procedure to adjust PID while performing PID control and measuring the response wave form Set b5 01 PID Control Method Selection to 1 or 2 PID control enabled Increase b5 02 Proportional Gain P to within a range that does not vibrate Reduce b5 03 Integral T time to within a range that does not vibrate B oU I Increase b5 05 Derivative D time to within a range that does not vibrate Individual Functions Es BPID Fine Adjustment Methods This section explains the fine adjustment of PID after setting the PID control constants Suppressing Overshoot If overshoot occurs reduce derivative time D and increase integral time I Response Before adjustment Time Set a Rapidly Stabilizing Control Condition To rapidly stabilize the control even if overshoot occur
364. for high slip braking High slip Set the OL time when the out braking OL put frequency does not time change for some reason dur HSB OL ing deceleration for high slip braking Time ESpeed Estimation N4 User constants for speed estimation are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Con sallei Open Open stant f Description Eng ACOLY V f Loop Flux Loop Number Display p Range Setting with Eos ve eg or or or 2 Integral time of speed esti mator Set the integral time of the speed estimator for PI con sPDESTI _ trol 5 Time Proportional gain of speed Set the proportional gain of estimator the speed estimator for PI SPD EST P control GAIN High speed proportional gain of speed Set the high speed propor estimator tional gain of the speed esti mator for PI control OBS Gain H SPD Speed estima tor switching Set the switching frequency frequency of high speed low speed operation for the speed esti Speed mator Change F Low speed Increase this setting if a regeneration higher power for low speed stability coef regeneration is required If ficient 1 the setting is too large the torque reference monitor and LowSpd Rgn the actual torque accuracy Coefl may deteriorate Torque adjustment gain Set the torque adjustment gain for low speed power TRQ adjust gain
365. for power factor improvement Ground Output noise filter Zero phase reactor 1 Use a ground fault interrupter with a current sensitivity of 200 mA minimum and an operating time of 0 1 s minimum to prevent operating errors The interrupter Built in con nect to con nector Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices w The following option boards are available Speed Fre quency Refer ence Option Boards Analog Ref erence Board AI 14U Code Num ber Table 9 5 Option Boards Function Enables high precision high resolution setting of analog speed references Input signal ranges 0 to 10 V 20 kQ 1 channel 4 to 20 mA 250 Q 1 channel Input resolution 14 bit 1 16384 Document Number TOE C736 30 13 Analog Ref erence Board AI 14B Enables high precision high resolution setting of analog speed references Input signal ranges 10 to 10 V 20 kQ 4 to 20 mA 500 Q 3 channels Input resolution 13 bit sign 1 8192 TOE C736 30 14 Digital Refer ence Board DI 08 Enables 8 bit digital setting of speed references Input signal 8 bit binary 2 digit BCD sign signal set signal 24 V isolated 8 mA Input voltage Input current TOE C736 30 15 Digital Refer ence Board DI 16H2 Enables 16 bit digital setting of speed references Input signal 16 bit binary 4 digit BCD sign signal set signal
366. g 1 3 Inverter Specifications Inverter is mounted in a control panel TERMS B Enclosed Wall mounted Type IEC IP20 NEMA 1 Type 1 The Inverter is structured so that the Inverter is shielded from the exterior and can thus be mounted to the interior wall of a standard building not necessarily enclosed in a control panel The protective structure con forms to the standards of NEMA 1 Type 1 in the USA The protective covers see Fig 1 4 are required for an IEC IP20 or NEMA 1 Type 1 protective structure Open Chassis Type IEC IPOO Protected so that parts of the human body cannot reach electrically charged parts from the front when the Confirmations upon Delivery Component Names The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 4 The Inverter with the ter minal cover removed is shown in Fig 1 5 Top protective cover Mounting hole Inverter cover m Cooling Front Mounting hole Front cover an cover Digital Diecast case Digit al Operator 2 Operator J y 1 Nameplate Terminal a Nameplate cover La is _ Terminal cover Bottom protective cover 15 kW or Less 18 5 kW or More Fig 1 4 Inverter Appearance Charge indicator me el fa
367. g Protection by thermistor Stall prevention Stall prevention during acceleration deceleration or running Grounding protection Protection by electronic circuits Overcurrent level Charge indicator Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approx 50 V or more Ambient operating tem 10 C to 40 C Enclosed wall mounted type perature 10 C to 45 C Open chassis type Ambient operating humid ity Storage temperature 20 C to 60 C short term temperature during transportation 95 max with no condensation Application site Indoor no corrosive gas dust etc Altitude 1000 m max 200 V Class Inverters of 0 4 to 37 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 0 4 to 45 kW 10 to 20 Hz 9 8 m s 20 to 55 Hz 5 9 m s 200 V Class Inverters of 45 to 110 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 55 to 300 kW 10 to 20 Hz 9 8 m s 20 to 55 Hz 2 0 m s Environment Vibration Rotational autotuning must be performed to ensure obtaining the specifications given for flux or open loop vector 1 2 control Standard Inverter Specifications w 2 When connecting a Braking Resistor or Braking Resistor Unit set L3 04 Stall prevention selection during deceleration to 0 disabled Stopping may not be pos sible in the specified deceleration time if this function is not disabled The maximum output frequency for open loop vector 2 control is 66 Hz for PRG 1030 132 Hz The speed contro
368. g is reduced stalling can occur under heavy loads Feed forward control N5 01 to N5 03 Used to increase response for acceleration deceleration or to reduce over shooting when there is low machine rigidity and the gain of the speed controller ASR cannot be increased The inertia ratio between the load and motor and the acceleration time of the motor running alone must be set 4 22 User Constants This chapter describes all user constants that can be set in the Inverter User Constant Descriptions sseseseeeeeeeeeeees 5 2 Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels 5 3 User Constant Tables seen 5 8 5 2 User Constant Descriptions This section describes the contents of the user constant tables Description of User Constant Tables User constant tables are structured as shown below Here b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection is used as an example Name Description Display Reference Set the frequency reference selection input method 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal analog input MEMOBUS communi cations Option board Pulse train input Reference Source Setting Range Factory Setting Control Methods Vif with PG Open loop Vec tor 1 Flux Vec tor Constant Number Name Description Setting Range Factory Setting Change during Op
369. g replacement Removing the Circulation Fan Remove the terminal cover the Inverter cover the Digital Operator and the control board cover 8 17 2 Pull out the cables connected to the control circuit terminal board the gate drive board and the cooling fan power relay board 3 Remove the control board mounting panel 4 Replace the circulation fan installed behind the control board mounting panel Mounting the Circulation Fan Reverse the above procedure to mount the fan Be sure to mount the fan so that the air flows in the direction indicated by the arrow in the corresponding dia gram Confirm that there are no cables in contact with the fan s rotating parts Refer to Fig 8 8 Cooling Fan Replacement 200 V Class Inverters of 75 kW for details Maintenance and Inspection eee 400 V Class Inverters of 185 kW and 220 kW Two circulation fans are installed as described in the following sections Removing the Circulation Fan 1 Remove the terminal cover and top and bottom front covers Unscrew the frame fixing screws and take off the frame Remove the relay connector connected to the fan Remove the fan cover mounting screws and pull the fan cover out pog ops m Remove the fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one Mounting the Circulation Fan Reverse the above procedure to mount the fan Be sure to mount the fan so that the air flows in the direction indicated by the
370. g time time at fault When the 1st previous fault Cannot be output occurred Elapsed Time 1 Accumulated time of sec The total operating time ond fault when the 2nd previous fault occurred Elapsed Time 2 Accumulated time of third The total operating time fault when the 3rd previous fault occurred Elapsed Time 3 Accumulated time of fourth oldest The total operating time fault when the 4th previous fault occurred Elapsed Time 4 Note The following errors are not recorded in the error log CPF00 01 02 03 UV 1 and UV2 5 86 User Constant Tables w Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method A1 02 The factory settings of the following user constants will change if the control method A1 02 is changed Con stant Number Name Display Speed search selection SpdSrch at Start Setting Range Vif Control Factory Setting V f with PG Open loop Vector 1 Flux Vector Open Loop Vector 2 Speed search operating current SpdSrch Current 0 to 200 Energy saving gain Energy Save Gain 0 0 to 10 0 Energy saving filter time constant Energy Save F T 0 0 to 10 00 Slip compensation gain Slip Comp Gain 0 0 to 2 5 Slip compensation primary delay time Slip Comp Time 0 to 10000 Torque compensa
371. g user constants will change if the Inverter capacity 02 04 is changed 8200 V Class Inverters Con stant Name Factory Setting Number Inverter Capacity E2 11 Motor Rated Capacity 2nd Motor Rated Capacity 02 04 kVA selection Energy saving filter time constant E4 07 0 50 Open loop vector control Energy saving coefficient 169 40 156 80 12290 94 75 Carrier frequency selec tion Carrier frequency selection for open loop vector 2 con trol Carrier frequency selection upper limit E2 01 E4 01 Motor rated current E2 02 E4 02 Motor rated slip E2 03 E4 03 Motor no load current E2 05 Motor line to line resis E4 05 tance E2 06 E4 06 Motor leak inductance Motor iron loss for torque E2 10 i compensation Momentary power loss ride L2 02 thru time L2 03 Min baseblock BB time L2 04 Voltage recovery time L8 02 Overheat pre alarm level L8 39 Reduced carrier frequency Hunting prevention time constant N1 03 N5 02 Motor acceleration time 5 90 User Constant Tables w Con stant Number Name Factory Setting Inverter Capacity E2 11 Motor Rated Capacity E4 07 2nd Motor Rated Capacity 02 04 kVA selection Energy saving filter time constant
372. g when it is started The DC injection braking is insufficient when starting This can be prevented by slowing fan rotation by DC injection braking before starting the fan Increase the constant b2 03 DC injection braking time initial excitation at start setting If Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference Use the following information if the output frequency does not rise to the frequency reference BThe frequency reference is within the jump frequency range When the jump frequency function is used the output frequency does not change within the jump frequency range Check to be sure that the Jump Frequency constants d3 01 to d3 03 and Jump Frequency Width con stant d3 04 settings are suitable 7 35 lt lt lt lt lt BThe frequency reference upper limit has been reached The output frequency upper limit is determined by the following formula Maximum Output Frequency E1 04 x Frequency Reference Upper Limit d2 01 100 Check to be sure that the constant E1 04 and d2 01 settings are suitable Acoustic Noise From the Motor The carrier frequency is automatically reduced if a current exceeding 110 of the Inverter rated current flows while the Inverter output frequency is low When the carrier frequency is reduced acoustic noise form the motor will change If acoustic noise from the motor causes a problem change L8 38 Carrier frequency reduction selection
373. g will change when the control method is changed The open loop vector 1 factory settings are given 5 24 lilSpeed Control ASR C5 User constants for speed control are shown in the following table Name Display ASR pro portional P gain 1 ASRP Gain 1 Description Sets the proportional gain of the speed loop ASR Fac tory Setting User Constant Tables Control Methods Vif with PG Open Loop Vec tor Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vec tor 2 ASR inte gral I time 1 ASRI Time 1 Sets the integral time of the speed loop ASR in 1 second units ASR pro portional P gain 2 ASR P Gain 2 ASR inte gral I time 2 ASRI Time 2 Usually setting is not necessary Set to change the rotational speed gain P C5 01 1 C5 02 P C5 03 12C5 04 gt Motor speed Hz ASR limit ASR Limit Sets the upper limit for the compensa tion frequency for the speed control loop ASR to a percentage of the maximum output frequency ASR pri mary delay time ASR Delay Time Sets the filter time constant for output ting torque references from the speed control loop ASR It is set in 1 sec ond units With open loop vector 2 control this setting is enabled only for speeds in the range 0 to 35 Hz Usually setting is not necessary ASR switching frequency ASR Gain SW Freq Set
374. ge Setting Motor base speed Set the base speed of the motor R e E 0 to 24000 in min Rated Speed Number of PG pulses when turn ing Set the number of pulses for the PG pulse generator or encoder Set the number of 0 to 60000 pulses per motor revolution PG Pulses without a multiplication factor Rev Motor no Set the current value recorded load cur in the motor s test results for a rent motor without a load 0 00 to 1 89 Displayed only when Stationary 10 4 No Load autotuning 2 is selected T1 01 Current 4 HEN Not normally displayed Displayed only when a motor switch command is set for a multi function digital input one of H1 01 to H1 10 set to 16 The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity Values are given for a 200 V Class 0 4 kW Inverter The setting range is from 10 to 200 of the Inverter rated output current The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for a 0 4 kW is given Set T1 02 and T1 04 when 2 is set for T1 01 Only set value 2 2 or 3 for Control Boards ETC618046 S1033 and later is possible for V f control or V f control with PG For fixed output motors set the base speed value Aor ee tA 6 For Inverter motors or for specialized vector motors the voltage or frequency may be lower than for general purpose motors Always confirm the infor mation on the nameplate or in test reports If the no load values are
375. ges When using the DI 16H2 the following ranges can be set depending on the settings of the constants Switch S1 12 bits Reference Input Mode 3 digit BCD with sign 196 Reference Setting Range 110 to 110 16 bits 4 digit BCD with sign 196 110 to 110 12 bits 3 digit BCD with sign 0 196 110 0 to 110 0 16 bits 4 digit BCD with sign 0 1 110 0 to 110 0 12 bits 3 digit BCD with sign 0 01 15 99 to 15 99 16 bits 4 digit BCD with sign 0 01 110 0 to 110 0 12 bits 3 digit BCD with sign 1 Hz 400 to 400 Hz 16 bits 4 digit BCD with sign 1 Hz 400 to 400 Hz 12 bits 3 digit BCD with sign 0 1 Hz 159 9 to 159 9 Hz 16 bits 4 digit BCD with sign 0 1 Hz 400 0 to 400 0 Hz 12 bits 3 digit BCD with sign 0 01 Hz 15 99 to 15 99 Hz 16 bits 4 digit BCD with sign 0 01 Hz 159 99 to 159 99 Hz 16 bits 5 digit BCD without sign 0 01 Hz 000 00 to 399 98 Hz 12 bits 12 bit binary with sign 100 4095 4095 to 4095 16 bits 16 bit binary with sign 100 30000 33000 to 33000 U1 01 Monitor Unit Switch S1 12 bits Reference Input Mode 3 digit BCD with sign 1 rpm Reference Setting Range 1599 to 1599 rpm Options 53 U1 01 Monitor Unit 16 bits 4 digit BCD with sign 1 rpm 15999 to 15999 rpm ee digit setting of 01 03 3 digit BCD
376. h the slip compensation function compensation cannot be carried out beyond the slip compensa tion limit set in constant C3 03 Check to be sure that the set value is suitable If There is Low Speed Control Accuracy at High speed Rotation in Open loop Vector Control Method The motor s rated voltage is high The Inverter s maximum output voltage is determined by its input voltage For example 1f 200 VAC is input then the maximum output voltage will be 200 VAC If as a result of vector control the output voltage refer ence value exceeds the Inverter output voltage maximum value the speed control accuracy will decrease Use a motor with a low rated voltage i e a special motor for use with vector control or change to flux vector control If Motor Deceleration is Slow Use the following information when the motor deceleration is slow BThe deceleration time is long even when braking resistor is connected The following causes are possible Stall prevention during deceleration enabled is set When braking resistor is connected set constant L3 04 Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration to 0 disabled or 3 with braking resistor When this constant is set to 1 enabled the factory setting braking resistor does not fully function The deceleration time setting is too long Check the deceleration time setting constants C1 02 C1 04 C1 06 and C1 08 Motor torque is insufficient If the consta
377. hanism Speed Reducers Belts and Chains If an oil lubricated gearbox or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism oil lubrication will be affected when the motor operates only in the low speed range The power transmission mechanism will make noise and experience problems with service life and durability 1f the motor is operated at a speed higher than the rated speed Conformance to UL Standard Conformance to UL Standard To comply with UL standard follow the appropriate installation instructions Binstallation Site Install the Inverter in a pollution degree 2 environment or equivalent lil Specification of Closed Loop Connector The closed loop connectors must be installed on conductors before installing to terminal blocks Use UL Listed closed loop connectors shown below Table 10 2 JST Closed Loop Connector Model Inverter JST Kit P N Model CIMR G7A Input 14 5 Output 14 5 38 8 38 8 60 8 38 8 60 8 60 8 80 10 80 10 100 10 100 10 60 10 2perPh 60 10 2perPh 80 12 2perPh 80 10 2perPh 150 12 2perPh 100 12 2perPh 150 12 2perPh 150 12 2perPh 200 12 2perPh 150 12 2perPh 8 5 8 5 Control Circuit Terminal A UL Listed Class 2 power supply must be used for the control circuits See below table Table 10 3 Power Supply for Control Circuits I
378. hannel 2 Board is used only outputs of ain 0 to 10 V are possible 8 A meter calibration function AO Ch Gain is available Channel 1 output moni Sets the channel item bias tor bias to 100 10 V when the Ana log Monitor Board is used AO Chl Bias 5 Channel 2 ai output moni tor bias AO Ch Bias Sets the channel 2 item bias to 100 10 V when the Ana log Monitor Board is used Analog out put signal level for channel 1 AO Opt Level Sel 0to 10V 10 to 10 V Analog out put signal level for channel 2 AO Opt Level Sel 0to10 V 10 to 10 V 5 43 Digital Output Boards DO 02C and DO 08 F5 User constants for the Digital Output Board are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Con Bites lea J Open Open stant Description SHIN L5 8ctory V f Loop Flux Loop Number Display p Range Setting pia Nee ise Vec or or or 1 2 Channel 1 Effective when a Digital Out output selec put Board DO 02C or DO tion 08 is used DO Chl Set the number of the multi Select function output to be output Channel 2 Effective when a Digital Out output selec put Board DO 02C or DO tion 08 is used DO Ch2 Set the number of the multi Select function output to be output Channel 3 output selec Effective when a DO 08 Dig tion ital Output Board is used Set the number of
379. he ENTER Key on the Digital Operator to display OPE fault constant U1 34 PID Control Selection Error The following settings have been made at the same time b5 01 PID Control Method Selection has been set to a value other than 0 b5 15 PID Sleep Function Operation Level has been set to a value other than 0 b1 03 Stopping Method Selection has been set to 2 or 3 OPE10 V f Ptrn Set ting V f Data Setting Error Constants E1 04 E1 06 E1 07 and E1 09 do not satisfy the following conditions E1 04 FMAX 2 E1 06 FA E1 07 FB 2 E1 09 FMIN E3 02 FMAX 2 E3 04 FA gt E3 05 FB 2 E3 07 FMIN Protective and Diagnostic Functions Display OPE11 Carr Freq On Delay Table 7 4 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings Continued Meaning Constant Setting Error Incorrect settings One of the following constant setting errors exists C6 05 Carrier Frequency Gain gt 6 the Carrier Frequency Lower Limit C6 04 gt the Carrier Frequency Gain C6 05 Upper lower limit error in C6 03 to 05 C6 02 is 7 to E ERR EEPROM R W Err EEPROM Write Error A verification error occurred when writing EEPROM Try turning the power supply off and on again Try setting the constants again Note Ifthe settings for the constants of an Inverter with a different version of software are copied an OPE error can occur Contact your Yaskawa representativ
380. he connection to the Digi Oper Dis A connect B broken during operation for a Run tal Operator Command from the Digital Operator Display CE Memobus Com Err Table 7 1 Fault Displays and Processing Continued Meaning MEMOBUS Communications Error A normal reception was not possible for 2 s or longer after control data was received once Probable Causes Corrective Actions Check the communications devices and communications sig nals BUS Option Com Err Option Communications Error A communications error was detected during a Run Command or while set ting a frequency reference from a Communications Option Board Check the communications devices and communications sig nals SI T Watchdog Error Consistency error of received control data Synchronization error between master controller and Inverter for control data Check the communications tim ing such as communications cycle Refer to MECHATROLINK COM MUNICATIONS INTERFACE CARD INSTRUCTIONS TOBPC73060008 for details E 15 SI F G Com Err SI F G Communications Error Detected A communications error was detected when a Run Command or frequency reference was set from an option board and continuous operation was set for the E 15 operation selection Check the communications sig nals E 10 SI F G CPU down SI F G Option Board CPU Failure SI F G Option Board operation failed Digital Operator connecti
381. he hysteresis in frequency detection 2 can be adjusted from 0 1 to 0 5 Hz by L4 02 speed agree detection width Change the setting to approxi mately 0 1 Hz if there are drops while stopping 4 Applicable for G7 Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1038 or later 5 When using frequency detection 2 set L4 01 before H2 01 If H2 01 is set before L4 01 the holding brake will engage while stopping For Inverters with software versions PRG 1038 or later use frequency detection 5 in which a holding brake signal is OFF when the Inverter is baseblocked Output frequency Frequency detection 2 Fig 6 84 OFF gt Time Using Inverters for Elevating Machines B i Sequence Circuit Configuration The brake ON OFF sequence circuit configuration is shown below Inverter Varispeed G7 UP 84 mO 0 9 Forward run DOWN 2 Q 9 Reverse run HIGH LOW S6 5 0 O Multi step speed reference 2 MA ro 0 9 MB Safety NE f BR mci Sicut i DOWN e BR Energizes the brake when ON 250 VAC 1 A or less 30 VDC o o ai M2 1 Aor less Holding brake auxiliary relay coil Frequency i detection 2 5 or During run 2 Note Design the sequence so that the holding brake contact is open when the sequence operation conditions are satisfied and the contact between M1 and M2 is closed ON Make sure that the holding brake con
382. he multi function inputs H1 01 to H1 10 is set to 71 Speed Torque Control Change Speed control is performed when the input is OFF and torque control is performed when the input is ON Set d5 01 to switch speed torque control Individual Functions m e li Setting the Speed Torque Control Switching Timer The delay between a change in the speed control switching function input ON to OFF or OFF to ON and the corresponding change in the control method can be set in d5 06 During the timer delay the value of the 3 ana log inputs will retain the values they had when the ON OFF status of speed torque control switching signal was changed Use this delay to complete any changes required in external signals Application Precautions The frequency reference during speed control is set in b1 01 The speed limit during torque control is set in d5 03 fthe torque reference has been assigned to a multi function analog input terminal A2 or terminal A3 the input function changes when the control method is switched between torque control and speed control During speed control The multi function analog input terminal 1s used as the torque limit input During torque control The multi function analog input terminal is used as the torque reference input When the Run Command turns OFF the control method when stopped will be for speed control Even from the torque control method the system will automatically change to speed control and decel
383. he settings of the L8 32 if a cooling fan fault occurred Multi function Con Fault Digital Operator Motor Operation tact Output Cooling Fin Overheating OHI lit Coast to a stop Fault Inverter s Cooling Fan Fault FAN blink Continue operation Minor fault Cooling Fin Overheating OH lit Coast to a stop Fault 6 Inverter s Cooling Fan Fault OHI lit Coast to a stop Fault E If L8 32 is set to 0 the motor will continue running even if a cooling fan fault occurred However the Inverter rated output current and the overload capacity will be reduced The rated output current will be reduced to 80 if the normal rated output current is 100 and the overload capacity will be reduced to the values as follows When CT is selected 100 per every 3 minutes 150 per every 15 seconds When VT is selected 100 per every 30 seconds 120 per every 10 seconds 1 m If L8 32 is set to 0 be sure to set H2 01 to H2 03 multi function contact outputs to 10 minor fault or to 3D T7 Inverter s cooling fan fault If a cooling fan fault occurs stop the Inverter immediately and replace the cool e ing fan If the Inverter continues to run while a cooling fan fault occurs the Inverter s cooling ability will be IMPORTANT affected and the Inverter s internal temperature will increase and shorten the Inverter s life During a cooling fan fault the cooling fan stops for about 3 seconds every minute interval operation
384. he wiring or remove connectors or the Digital Operator during operation Doing so can result in personal injury B Other SN WARNING Do not attempt to modify or alter the Inverter Doing so can result in electrical shock or injury AN CAUTION Do not subject the Inverter to halogen gases such as fluorine chlorine bromine and iodine at any time even during transportation or installation Otherwise the Inverter can be damaged or interior parts burnt Warning Information and Position There is warning information on the Inverter in the position shown in the following illustration Always heed the warnings Warning information position Warning information position Illustration shows the CIMR G7A20P4 Illustration shows the CIMR G7A2018 Warning Information WARNING Ay Risk of electric shock eRead manual before installing eWait 5 minutes for capacitor discharge after disconnecting power supply NAVERTISSEMENT A Risque de d charge lectrique eLire le manuel avant l installation eAttendre 5 minutes apr s la coupure de l allmentation Pour permettre la d charge des condensateurs fg Ay Th REOKTHAMHY ET HEAT BRO RIL d RAS e BRAT EL HEPRUSREMRDUAILIOUE DAN EREBUCR EL MI Warranty Information B Free Warranty Perio
385. hermistor temperature to the resistance value Class H Resistance ohms pod 180 C 1330 Tr Temperature threshold value 550 Temperature Fig 6 42 PTC Thermistor Temperature Resistance Value Characteristics BOperation during Motor Overheating Set the operation if the motor overheats in constants L1 03 and L1 04 Set the motor temperature input filter time constant in L1 05 If the motor overheats the OH3 and OH4 error codes will be displayed on the Digital Operator Error Codes If the Motor Overheats Inverter stops or continues to operate according to the setting in L1 03 Inverter stops according to the setting in L1 04 By setting H3 09 Multi function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection or H3 05 Multi function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection to E Motor temperature input you can detect alarm OH3 or mum OHA using the PTC temperature resistance characteristics and protect the motor The terminal connections are shown in the following diagram Set H3 08 Signal level selection terminal A2 H3 04 when A3 is used to 0 0 to 10 V Inverter n Multi function pm o o o V Multi function contact input yo contact output 3 6 4d MA ad 15V 20mA MB Fault contact output C Branch resistance i 18 KQ A2 A3 0 10 V Multi function PTC thermistor PHC output AC When using terminal A2 set DIP switch S1 2 to OFF 0 to 10 V Fig 6
386. herwise ventilation will be reduced causing the Inverter to overheat Installation Orientation and Space Install the Inverter vertically so as not to reduce the cooling effect When installing the Inverter always provide the following installation space to allow normal heat dissipation Amm min 120 mm min Horizontal Space Vertical Space 200 V Class Inverters of 110 kW or 400 V Class Inverters of 160 to 220 kW A 120 B 120 400 V Class Inverters of 300 kW A 300 B 300 All other Inverters A 50 B 120 If however there is a fan in the top of the control panel with sufficient exhaust capacity the following dimensions may be used A 50 B 120 Fig 1 8 Inverter Installation Orientation and Space a de 1 The same space is required horizontally and vertically for both Open Chassis IP00 and Enclosed Wall SY mounted IP20 NEMA 1 Type 1 Inverters LJ 2 Always remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of IMPORTANT 15 kW or less in a panel Refer to Page 1 17 on how to remove the protection covers Always provide enough space for suspension eye bolts and the main circuit lines when installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18 5 KW or more in a panel 1 10 Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover NM Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover Remove the terminal cover to wire cables to the control circuit and main circuit
387. ignal using the switch on the control panel Multi function analog input terminal A2 H3 09 function selec Select multi function analog input Oto IF 0 No A n d A N 418H tion Terminal A2 Sel function for terminal A2 Individual Functions Bi Name Control Methods Con mamas Factory vit OPen Flux Open stant Description 1 Loo Loo Number Display Sering 2e Vector Vec Veir tor 1 2 Gain terminal sets the input gain level when A2 10 V 20 mA is input Terminal A2 Set according to the 100 value for the function set for H3 09 Gain Bias terminal Sets the input gain level when 0 A2 V 4 mA is input Terminal A2 Set according to the 100 value for the function set for H3 09 Bias The factory setting will change when the control method is changed The flux vector factory setting is given Multi function Contact Input Functions H1 01 to H1 10 Control Methods Function Speed torque control change ON Torque control Polarity Reverse Command for external torque reference Multi function Contact Output Functions H2 01 to H2 05 Function Speed control circuit operating for torque control except when stopped 6 The external torque reference will be limited if torque control is selected mmm Output when the motor is rotating at the speed limit
388. ill be set if the constants are initialized 5 35 B Motor 2 V f Pattern E3 User constants for motor 2 V f characteristics are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Open Open Description Setting Factory Vit Loop Flux Loop Display Range Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Motor 2 control 0 V f control method 1 V f control with PG E3 01 selection 2 Open loop vector control 0to4 2 No A A A A A 319H 3 Flux vector control Control 4 Open loop vector 2 control Method 5 36 User Constant Tables w Name Control Methods Setti Fact Open Open Description ening actory V f Loop Flux Loop p Range Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Display Motor 2 max out put fre quency FMAX Max Fre quency Motor 2 max volt age VMAX Max Volt age Motor 2 max volt age fre quency FA put voltage V Base Fre quency Motor 2 mid out put fre quency 1 FMIN FB FA FMAX FB E3 07 E3 05 E3 04 E3 02 Mid Fre Frequency Hz quency To set V f characteristics in a Motor 2 straight line set the same values for mid out E3 05 and E3 07 put fre In this case the setting for E3 06 quency will be disregarded voltage 1 Always ensure that the four frequen VC cies are set in the following
389. inals The safety precautions must always be taken before starting the Inverter with the motor connected to the machine be provided to start Inverter operation Q Both a Run Command forward or reverse and a frequency reference or multi step speed reference must Input these commands and reference regardless of the operation method i e LOCAL of REMOTE INFO Loaded Operation Connect the machine to the motor and then start operation as described for no load operation i e from the Digital Operator or by using control circuit terminal signals ilConnecting the Load After confirming that the motor has stopped completely connect the mechanical system Be sure to tighten all the screws when securing the motor shaft to the mechanical system Trial Operation Procedures E B Operation using the Digital Operator Use the Digital Operator to start operation in LOCAL mode in the same way as in no load operation f fault occurs during operation make sure the STOP Key on the Digital Operator is easily accessible At first set the frequency reference to a low speed of one tenth the normal operating speed B Checking Operating Status Having checked that the operating direction is correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at slow speed increase the frequency reference After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction check that there is no oscillation or abnor mal so
390. ing Resistor Unit C i ius THRX wien iota NC ar TE Tien i MC TRX 0 Ore w T Y sa po TRX ac 8 TTE QM MA Fault contacts FT Fault contact output Forward Run Stop wee 7 Bai o O0 aa N A EAN 4 O 4 MC when ON r s2 Reverse Run Com i it mand reverse run EL pod when ON ils ce B i External fault ie uu i aaaea id 0 SB Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3 04 to Resistor Unit The motor may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed Fig 10 11 Wiring Examples Using a Braking Unit and Three Braking Resistor Units in Parallel This example shows wiring for using three Braking Resistor Units in parallel Thermal Thermal Thermal protector protector protector 1 2 Braking 4 i Braking is le Braking Resistor ii Resistor EC Resistor A sequence is required to turn OFF the p P a i Ca Unit power supply for the thermal overload relay t BE trip contacts of the Braking Resistor Unit MCCB e3 9 l N Motor R C E R L1 UTi 3 phase power un Inverter amp 38010480 V S S L2 VIT2 t IM 90 80 He TIL3 wits Cooling fan r SEHE Voliage vig if s setting THRX OFF _ON MC Vere eei Paoa ie TveT ul 480 460 440 o L rss 415 400 880V 97 Overload relay trip ntact gt L es Ground to 10 Q max 1 of Braking Resistor Unit THRX i ce 1 H Ogee ON I 1D
391. ing before starting operation When V f control has been selected stationary autotuning for only line to line resistance can be selected When the motor cannot be disconnected from the load perform stationary autotuning Contact your Yaskawa representatives to set motor constants by calculation The Inverter s autotuning function automatically determines the motor constants while a servo system s auto tuning function determines the size of a load so these autotuning functions are fundamentally different The default setting of the Inverter 1s for open loop vector 1 control iExample of Operation Set the motor output power in kW rated voltage rated current rated frequency rated speed and number of poles specified on the nameplate on the motor and then press the RUN Key The motor is automatically run and the motor constants measured based on these settings and autotuning will be set Always set the above items Autotuning cannot be started otherwise e g it cannot be started from the motor rated voltage display Constants can be changed from the setting displays Use the Increment Decrement and Shift RESET Keys to change the frequency The user constant will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting The following example shows autotuning for open loop vector control while operating the motor without switching to motor 2 Modes Mode Selection Dis
392. ing is performed for a motor connected to a load the motor constants will not be found accurately and the motor may exhibit abnormal operation Never perform rotational autotuning for a motor connected to a load _ If the wiring between the Inverter and motor changes by 50 m or more between autotuning and motor installation perform stationary autotuning for line to line resistance only If the motor cable is long 50 m or longer perform stationary autotuning for line to line resistance only even when using V f control The status of the multi function inputs and multi function outputs will be as shown in the following table during autotuning When performing autotuning with the motor connected to a load be sure that the hold ing brake is not applied during autotuning especially for conveyor systems or similar equipment Tuning Mode Multi function Inputs Multi function Outputs Same as during normal Rotational autotuning Do not function operation Maintain same status as Stationary autotuning 1 Do not function Su when autotuning is started Stationary autotuning for line Maintain same status as gt Do not function ur to line resistance only when autotuning is started Maintain same status as Stationary autotuning 2 Do not function yos when autotuning is started To cancel autotuning always use the STOP Key on the Digital Operator Power will be supplied to the motor when sta
393. ing rotational autotuning Motor iron sat uration coeffi cient 2 Saturation Comp2 Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 75 of magnetic flux This constant is automatically set during rotational autotuning Control Methods Factory Vit wens Flux Setting with TERE Vec PG tor Name Con stant Number Open Loop Vector Description Display Motor iron loss for torque com pensation Sets motor iron loss in W units Tcomp Iron Loss Motor iron sat uration coeffi cient 3 Sets the motor iron saturation coefficient at 130 of magnetic flux This constant is automatically set during rotational autotuning Saturation Comp3 The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0 4 kW is given 1 2 The setting range is from 10 to 200 of the Inverter rated output current The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW is given For the motor no load current set E2 03 to a value less than that of E2 01 3 The setting range depends on the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0 4 kW is given The upper limit depends on the setting of E2 01 EManual Motor Constant Setting Methods The motor constants settings methods are given below Make enter settings referring to the motor test report Motor Rated Voltage Setting Set E2 01 to the ra
394. ing to the following flowchart START Installation Wiring Set power supply voltage 1 Turn ON power Confirm status Select B m operating asic settings method L cui programming mode Ln Vector A1 02 2 3 or 4 5 Vif YES Vif with PG Default A1 02 0 A1 02 1 egi y Y Set E1 03 Set E1 03 E2 04 and F1 017 V f default 200V 60Hz 400V 60Hz V f default 200V 60Hz 400V 60Hz Settings according le to control mode Load is connected to motor when operating motor first time after autotuning OK to operate 3 NO YES motor during autotuning YES YES Y Stationary autotuning for 4 Rotational Stationary Stationary line to line resistance only autotuning autotuning 1 8 autotuning 2 6 J Motor cable over 50 m or heavy load possibly causing motor to stall or overload NO a Application settings Advanced programming mode 4 Set for 400 V Class Inverter for 55 kW or more No load operation 2 If there is a reduction gear between the motor and PG set 7 the reduction ratio in F1 12 and F1 13 in advanced Loaded operation programming mode Optimum adjustments and constant settings 3 Use rotational autotuning to increase autotuning accuracy whenever it is okay for the motor to be operated
395. ink Communications Board SI C CC Link communications support LONWORKS SI J Communications Board SI W1 LONWORKS communications support MECHATROLINK Commu SENS SET MECHATROLINK communications support nication Board AO 08 8 bit analog outputs 2 channels Analog Monitor Board AO 12 12 bit analog outputs 2 channels DO 08 Six photocoupler outputs and 2 relay outputs Digital Output Board DO 02C 2 relay outputs 2 31 _ Installation Before mounting an option board remove the terminal cover and be sure that the charge indicator inside the Inverter is not lit After confirming that the charge indicator is not lit remove the Digital Operator and front cover and then mount the option board The side of the front cover of the Inverter for 200 400 V Class 0 4 to 3 7 kW can be cut out as described in Fig 2 22 to make wiring of the option board easy If the side of the front cover is cut out the protective structure will be open chassis IEC IP00 Refer to documentation provided with the option board for actual mounting instructions for option slots A C and D B Preventing C and D Option Board Connectors from Rising After installing an option board into slot C or D insert an option clip to prevent the side with the connector from rising The option clip can be easily removed by holding onto the protruding portion of the clip and pull ing it out Remove the option clip before inst
396. inking Ext Fault S11 External Fault Input Terminal S11 EF12 blinking Ext Fault 12 External Fault Input Terminal S12 An external fault was input from a multi function input terminal S3 to S7 Reset external fault inputs to the multi function inputs Remove the cause of the external fault FBL blinking Feed back Loss PID Feedback Reference Lost A PID feedback reference loss was detected b5 12 2 and the PID feed back input was less than b5 13 PID feedback loss detection level for longer than the time set in b5 14 PID feedback loss detection time The settings in b5 13 and b5 14 aren t appropriate Check the settings in b5 13 and b5 14 The wiring of the PID feedback cir cuit is incorrect Fix the wiring 7 17 Table 7 3 Alarm Displays and Processing Continued Meaning Probable causes Corrective Actions Display Dur MEMOBUS Communications Error MEMO Normal reception was not possible for Check the communications devices BUS 2 s or longer after received control and signals Com Err data Option Board Communications BUS Error blinking A communications error occurred in a x Check the communications devices Option mode where the Run Command or a and signals Com Err frequency reference is set from an Communications Option Board CALE Communications on Standby blinking Check the communications devices
397. iods of servo lock can be achieved by ensuring that the current during the ser Y P Do not lock the servo for extended periods of time at 100 when using the zero servo function Inverter e volock is 5096 or less or by increasing the Inverter capacity IMPORTANT Digital Operator Functions This section explains the Digital Operator functions Setting Digital Operator Functions You can set Digital Operator related constants such as selecting the Digital Operator display multi function selections and copy functions iRelated Constants Con stant Number Name Display Monitor selec tion after power up Power On Monitor Description Sets the monitor item to be dis played when the power is turned on 1 Frequency reference 2 Output frequency 3 Output current 4 The monitor item set for o1 01 Change during Opera tion Control Methods Vif with PG Open Loop Vector 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vector 2 Frequency units of reference set ting and moni tor Display Scaling Sets the units that will be set and displayed for the frequency refer ence and frequency monitor 0 0 01 Hz units 1 0 01 units Maximum output frequency is 100 2 to 39 min units Sets the motor poles 40 to 39999 User desired display Set the desired values for setting and display for the max output frequency t Set 4 digit nu
398. ion Avoiding Resonance Jump Frequency Function eee 6 31 Adjusting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Inputs sssse 6 33 Speed Limit Frequency Reference Limit Function 6 34 Limiting Maximum Output Frequency ssssssseseseetetentente ttes 6 34 Limiting Minimum Frequency ettet tette tentent teneret 6 34 Improved Operating Efficiency eeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen 6 36 Reducing Motor Speed Fluctuation Slip Compensation Function 6 36 Compensating for Insufficient Torque at Startup and Low speed Operation Torque Compensation is isisisi iiid iiec tonc ie edet deed eee eec 6 38 Hunting prevention FUNCHHON cccccccscsscssssescesessesesceseecesesessesesesesssesterestessstesestenesnens 6 40 Stabilizing Speed Speed Feedback Detection Function sess 6 41 Machine Protection i i e ta e EE RR oe el bt edad 6 42 Reducing Noise and Leakage Current 6 42 Limiting Motor Torque Torque Limit Function cscs se ssesestseeetstseseeseeeeteees 6 46 Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation 6 49 Changing Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input 6 50 Using Frequency Detection L4 01 to L4 05 ssssssssseeetnes 6 50 Detecting Motor TORQUE e orc RR CR E ee eee rnent 6 53 Changing
399. ion differs depending on the Inverter capacity Refer to the fol lowing table for details Inverter Capacity Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration V 400 V Class When using the braking option braking resistor Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units be sure to set constant L3 04 to 0 or 3 To decelerate at a shorter time than the deceleration time set when L3 04 is set to 0 with the braking option enabled set L3 04 to 3 The setting of L3 04 is ignored for flux vector control or open loop vector 2 control Preventing Overvoltage by Automatically Reducing the Regenerative Torque Limit Overvoltage Inhibit Function PRG 1020 only The overvoltage inhibit function is a function that by reducing the regenerative torque limit to a value less than its set value according to the main circuit voltage level suppresses voltage rises with regenerative torque Using this function means that if for example the main circuit voltage rises during deceleration the regener ative torque limit will be reduced and so the deceleration rate will be reduced automatically suppressing rises in the main circuit voltage This function is effective for suppressing overvoltages that occur during stabilization after an overshoot fol lowing sudden acceleration This function differs from the stall prevention during deceleration function in this respect This function is enabled during vector control 6 26 Acceleration and Dece
400. ion occurs during low speed regeneration increase the setting of N4 30 low speed regeneration stability coefficient 2 Increase the setting in intervals of approximately 0 2 The larger the setting the greater the ratio of the speed increase relative to the regenerative load will be Operating frequency between 6 and 10 Hz PRG 1020 only 7 Accelerate the motor gradually set N4 32 speed estimator gain fluctuation frequency 1 to the lowest mum speed at which oscillation occurs and set N4 33 speed estimator gain fluctuation frequency 2 to the high est Then reduce the setting of N4 34 speed estimator gain fluctuation rate until the oscillation stops Adjust N4 34 in intervals of approximately 5 in the range 50 to 100 BOscillation and hunting are occurring with flux vector control The gain adjustment is insufficient Adjust the various gains for speed control ASR If the oscillation points overlap with those of the machine and cannot be eliminated increase the primary delay time constant for speed control ASR in C5 06 and then readjust the gains If autotuning is not performed proper performance cannot be achieved for vector control Perform autotuning or set the motor constants according to calculations Oscillation and hunting are occurring with PID control If there is oscillation or hunting during PID control check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust P I and D constants Refer to page 6 110 7 33
401. ion selection during accel Communication error detection selection Stall prevention level during accel Send wait time Stall prevention limit during accel RTS control ON OFF Stall prevention selection during decel Unit Selection for MEMOBUS Register 0025H Stall prevention selection during running Pulse train input function selection Stall prevention level during run ning Pulse train input scaling Overvoltage inhibit selection Pulse train input gain Overvoltage inhibit voltage level Pulse train input bias Speed agreement detection level Pulse train input filter time Speed agreement detection width Pulse train monitor selection Speed agreement detection level Pulse train monitor scaling Speed agreement detection width 4 Motor protection selection Operation when frequency refer ence is missing Motor protection time constant Number of auto restart attempts Table 10 7 User Constants Continued Auto restart operation selection Fac tory Setting OHI detection of Inverter s cool ing fan User Constants NM eee Fac tory Setting Torque detection selection 1 Carrier frequency reduction selec tion Torque detection level 1 Reduced carrier frequency Torque detection time 1 Current alarm Torque detection selection 2 Hunting prevention function selec tion
402. ir cuit Fault During operation send processing did not complete within 500 ms continu ously at least 10 times OPERA TOR ERR RAM CHECK ERR Operator Error Internal RAM Fault During operation an error was detected when the display pattern for the character code 80 to 8F recorded in the internal RAM was checked OPERA TOR ERR WATCH DOG ERR Operator Error Watchdog Error During operation an error was detected in the program execution Replace the Operator Display No display Protective and Diagnostic Functions w Table 7 2 Causes and Corrective Actions When the Digital Operator Goes Dark Meaning There was a drop in control power voltage Probable Causes A short circuit between V V and AC terminals occurred Overload in the control circuit ter minal Corrective Actions Make sure that incorrect wiring has not been done Check the resistance and wir ing for the frequency setting potentiometer etc Check that the current for terminals V and V is 20 mA or less The short circuit bar between 1 and 2 terminals in the main circuit has been removed Attach the short circuit bar P terminal and N terminal of the Brak ing Unit are connected in reverse Check the wiring for the Brak ing Unit including cables con nected to the Braking Unit and relay terminals Replace the Inverter Control power circuit failure
403. is 0 00 Time Stop Dc injection braking at stop is not performed Magnetic flux compensa Sets the magnetic flux com tion volume pensation as a percentage of the no load current Field Comp User Constant Tables E il Speed Search b3 User constants for the speed search are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Con Setti Edd Open Open stant Description eung ractory V f Loop Flux Loop Number Display n Range Setting m a ae ed or or or 1 2 Speed Enables disables the speed search search function for the Run selection Command and sets the speed current search method detection or 0 Disabled speed calculation speed calcu 1 Enabled speed calculation lation 2 Disabled current detection 3 Enabled current detection Speed Calculation When the search is started the motor speed is calculated and acceleration deceleration is performed from the calculated speed to the specified SpdSrch at frequency motor direction is Start also searched Current Detection The speed search is started from the frequency when power was momentarily lost and the maximum frequency and the speed is detected at the search current level 5 Speed Sets the speed search operation search oper current as a percentage taking ating current the Inverter rated current as current 100 detection Not usually nec
404. is displayed in Quick Advanced or Verify mode while the motor is stopped ting and the set bias is added Open Loop Vec tor 2 Communi cation speed selec tion Serial Baud Rate Set the baud rate for MEMO BUS communications of com munications connection terminals 0 1200 bps 1 2400 bps 2 4800 bps 3 9600 bps 4 19200 bps Communi cation par ity selection Serial Com Sel Set the parity for MEMOBUS communications of communi cations connection terminals 0 No parity 1 Even parity 2 Odd parity Stopping method after com munication error Serial Fault Sel Set the stopping method for communications errors 0 Deceleration to stop using deceleration time in C1 02 1 Coast to stop 2 Emergency stop using deceleration time in C1 09 3 Continue operation Communi cation error detection selection Serial Fit Dtct Set whether or not a communi cations timeout is to be detected as a communications error 0 Do not detect 1 Detect Send wait time Transmit WaitTIM Set the time from the Inverter receiving data to when the Inverter starts to send 5 55 5 56 Name Display RTS con trol ON OFF RTS Con trol Sel Description Select to enable or disable RTS control 0 Disabled RTS is always ON 1 Enabled RTS turns ON only when sending Setting Range Facto
405. is to be per T1 00 formed This Ese S lor2 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Select ignored if motor 2 is not Motor selected 1 Motor 1 2 Motor 2 Autotun Set the autotuning mode ing mode 0 Rotational autotuning selection 1 Stationary autotuning 1 T1 01 2 Stationary autotuning for 0to4 2 Vif Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes nocte H 4 0 Vector line to line resistance only Tuning y g Mode Sel 3 Shipping adjustment 4 Stationary autotuning 27 Motor out t POEPONSE Set the output power of the 0 00 to 0 40 kw T1 02 on 5 47 tee Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes motor in kilowatts 650 00 kW 2 Mtr Rated Power Motor 0 0 to rated volt 255 0 V 200 0 V age 200 V 200 V Set the rated voltage of the Class Class T1 03 Y Y Yi motor in volts 5 6 0 0 to 400 0 V d M S Rated Volt 510 0V 400V age 400 V Class Class Motor rated cur rent Set the rated current of the 0 32 to T1 04 j 5 47 3 1 90 A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes motor in amps 6 40 A Rated Cur rent Motor base frequency Set the base frequency of the 0 0 to T1 05 5 6 60 0 Hz Yes Yes Yes Rated Fre motor in hertz 400 0 Hz quency Number of motor poles 2to 48 T1 06 Set the number of motor poles poles 4 poles Yes Yes Yes Number of Poles Trial Operation Procedures E Table 4 3 Constant Settings before Autotuning Continued Name Data Displays during Autotuning Disbl Setting Factory Display pay Ran
406. isabled Output frequency Acceleration deceleration time switching frequency C1 11 C1 07 rate C1 01 rate C1 02 rate C1 08 rate When output frequency 2 C1 11 acceleration and deceleration are performed using Acceleration deceleration Time 1 C1 01 C1 02 When output frequency lt C1 11 acceleration and deceleration are performed using Acceleration deceleration Time 4 C1 07 C1 08 Fig 6 20 Acceleration deceleration Time Switching Frequency BAdjusting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using an Analog Input If you set H3 09 Multi function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection or H3 05 Multi function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection to 5 acceleration deceleration time gain you can adjust the acceleration deceleration time using terminal A2 s input voltage The Inverter s acceleration time when the acceleration time has been set in C1 01 is as follows Acceleration time C1 01 set value x acceleration deceleration time gain Acceleration deceleration time gain set value 5 100 Acceleration deceleration gain from 1 to 50 10 V 10 V Input voltage V x 10 Fig 6 21 Acceleration Deceleration Time Gain Using an Analog Input Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics Entering S curve Characteristics in the Acceleration and Deceleration Time By performing acceleration and deceleration using an S curve pattern you can reduce shoc
407. it owe Accelerates to lower limit MEM i Same d4 01 1 i dd od frequenc Y ideo E 0 Lower limit Ex d bed D Sad Forward operation stop UP command Lo i i Re erence iON f i frequency reset DOWN command Frequency matching signal The frequency matching signal turns ON when the motor is not accelerating decelerating while the Run Command is ON Fig 6 53 UP DOWN Commands Time Chart 6 81 6 82 Accelerating and Decelerating Constant Frequencies in the Analog Refer ences Speed The speed function increments or decrements the frequency set in analog frequency reference d4 02 Speed Limit using two contact signal inputs To use this function set One of the constants H1 01 to H1 10 multi function contact terminal inputs S3 to 12 function selection to 1C Trim Control Increase command and 1D Trim Control Decrease command Be sure to allocate two terminals so that the Trim Control Increase command and Trim Control Decrease com mand can be used as a pair iRelated Constants ead Name Shange E Methods MER m Setting Factory during v f pen ei pen BUS stant Description l 4i Loo ux Log i Number Display Range Setting Opeta Vif wn pna Ver rd bou 1 or 2 Speed limits Set the frequency to be add to or subtracted from the analog fre quency reference as a percent taking the maximum output fre Trim
408. it 7 External fault EF EFO Bit 8 Hardware error CPF Motor overload OL1 overtorque 1 OL3 detected or overtorque 2 OL4 detected Bit A PG broken wire detected PGO Overspeed OS Speed deviation DEV Bit B Main circuit undervoltage UV detected Main circuit undervoltage UV1 control power supply error UV2 inrush preven tion circuit error UV3 power loss Bit D Main Circuit Voltage Fault PF Output Open phase LF Bit E MEMOBUS communications error CE Bit F Operator disconnected OPR Data link status Bit 0 Writing data Bit 1 Not used Bit 2 Not used Bit 3 Upper and lower limit errors Bit 9 Bit C Bit 4 Data integrity error Bits 5toF Not used Frequency reference U1 01 Output frequency U1 02 Output voltage reference U1 06 Output current U1 03 Unit 1 0 1A Output power U1 08 Individual Functions Bi Register No Contents Torque reference U1 09 Not used Not used Sequence input status Bit 0 1 Control circuit terminal S1 ON Bit 1 Control circuit terminal S2 ON Bit 2 Control circuit terminal S3 ON Bit 3 Control circuit terminal S4 ON Bit 4 Control circuit terminal S5 ON Bit 5 Control circuit terminal S6 ON Bit 6 Control circuit terminal S7 ON Bit 7 Control circuit termi
409. k Configuration E Terminal Block Configuration The terminal arrangement for 200 V Class Inverters are shown in Fig 2 3 and Fig 2 4 NM c I T EXCO FM ACT AM PI P2 PC L SC IMEEGIC3IPAICA C A3 V AC V RPR R S S _ MA MB MC s6 57158 Bossa Mi Me IECG H Si s2 133184 55 1 EE EE EE cessa ll Control circuit terminals MAAK ACH Bases CRS E o Main circuit terminals EVLTS L2IL3 61 82 81 1LB2 ITI Ay SE WARASE t CHA TRMLT CRED MEOW EU GATES BS 75 C AMOS ODE RB UC SU MAL 2 1 5N em rs 1 I4 mE cum s Ins ad o bd i J me Charge indicator Ground terminal ERES
410. k when starting and stopping the machine Using the Inverter you can set an S curve characteristic time for each of the following Acceleration start time deceleration start time acceleration end time and deceleration end time Acceleration time Selected acceleration time Acceleration start time S curve characteristic time Acceleration end time S curve characteristic time 2 Deceleration time Selected deceleration time Deceleration start time S curve characteristic time INFO i e Deceleration end time S curve characteristic time 2 Q Set the S curve characteristic time to lengthen acceleration deceleration time as follows Setting Example The S curve characteristic when switching operation forward reverse is shown in the following diagram Forward Reverse Se Output frequency l CX02 C209 Fig 6 22 S curve Characteristic during Operation Switching e 21 4 Accelerating and Decelerating Heavy Loads Dwell Function The dwell function stores the output frequency when starting or stopping heavy loads By temporarily storing the output frequency you can prevent the motor from stalling When using the dwell function you must select a deceleration stop Set b1 03 Stopping Method Selection to 0 iRRelated Parameters Name Control Methods Con 4 eis Open stant Description vit Lo p Flux Number Display with ac Vec PG 1 tor Dwell fre quency at st
411. kawa s understanding Problems due to the use of a Yaskawa product under conditions that do not meet the recom mended specifications Problems caused by natural disaster or fire Orother problems not due to defects in Yaskawa workmanship or materials Warranty service is only applicable within Japan However after sales service 1s available for customers outside of Japan for a reasonable fee Contact your local Yaskawa representative for more information B Exceptions Any inconvenience to the customer or damage to non Yaskawa products due to Yaskawa s defective products whether within or outside the warranty period are NOT covered by this war ranty B Restrictions The Varispeed G7 was not designed or manufactured for use in devices or systems that may directly affect or threaten human lives or health Customers who intend to use the product described in this manual for devices or systems relating to transportation health care space aviation atomic or electric power or underwater use must contact their Yaskawa representatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office before hand This product has been manufactured under strict quality control guidelines However if this product is to be installed in any location where failure of this product could involve or result in a life and death situation or loss of human life or in a facility where failure may cause a serious accident or physical injury safety devices must be installe
412. known input the no load voltage in T1 03 and the no load current in T1 05 to ensure accuracy 7 The settings that will ensure stable vector control are between 50 and 100 of the Inverter rating Applicable for Control Boards ETC618046 S1033 and later Refer to Chapter 8 Procedure for Adjusting Constants after Replacement of Control Board Page 8 3 for the details of setting 3 Shipping adjustment oo 9 Applicable for G7 Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 or later 10 The setting range depends on the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0 4 kW is given The upper limit depends on the setting of E2 01 Refer to page 3 15 for Digital Operator displays during autotuning B Precautions for Precision Settings Settings for autotuning are different when performing autotuning using motor test reports or design data Use the following table as reference Operator Display Simple Setting Precision Setting Voltage under no load con Mot t It Do otor tated voltage ditions at motor rated speed Frequency under no load conditions at rated speed Motor base frequency _ Application Settings User constants are set as required in advanced programming mode ADV will be displayed on the LCD screen All the constants that can be set in quick programming mode can also be displayed and set in advanced programming mode i Setting Examples The following are e
413. l Speed control range 1 200 Open loop vector 2 control 1 1000 Flux vector control Speed control accuracy 0 2 Open loop vector 2 control 25 C 10 C 0 02 Flux vector control 25 C 10 C Speed control response 10 Hz Open loop vector 2 control 30 Hz Flux vector control Torque limits Provided for vector control only 4 quadrant steps can be changed by constant settings Torque accuracy 5 Frequency control range 0 01 to 400 Hz Frequency accuracy tem Digital references 0 01 10 C to 40 C perature characteristics Analog references 0 1 25 C 10 C Frequency setting resolu tion Digital references 0 01 Hz Analog references 0 03 Hz 60 Hz 11 bit with no sign Output frequency resolu d 0 001 Hz tion Control characteristics Overload capacity and 5 8 2 150 of rated output current per minute maximum current Frequency setting signal 10 to 10 V 0 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA pulse train Acceleration Decelera tion time 0 01 to 6000 0 s 4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings Approximately 20 Approximately 125 with Braking Resistor option braking transformer built into 200 V and 400 V Class Braking t raking torque Inverters for 15 kW or less Restarting for momentary power loss speed searches overtorque detection torque limits 16 speed control maximum accelera tion
414. l A2 or A3 set value 10 Negative torque limit set value 11 l Regenerative torque limit set value 12 Reverse positive regenerative torque Forward negative regenerative torque Min Minimum value priority circuit Reverse Positive negative torque limit j drive set value 15 reverse ei TURIS torque Forward torque limit Forward torque limit L7 01 nico torque limit Reverse torque limit Constants lt Forward regenerative torque Forward regenerative limit L7 03 torque limit Reverse regenerative torque Min 2 Min H SFS Reverse regenerative limit L7 04 175 of Inverter rated current torque limit Fig 6 38 Torque Limit Using Constants and an Analog Input iSelecting the Control Method for Torque Limit during Acceleration and Deceleration PRG 1030 only L7 07 is used to select the control method for the torque limit during acceleration and deceleration The selec tions are proportional control and integral control For applications such as presses in which the torque limit will be reached during acceleration and deceleration torque control can be given priority by selecting integral control To increase the change in frequency for the torque limit when integral control is selected decrease the value set for L7 06 Integral Time Setting for Torque Limit i Setting Precautions When the torque limit function is operating control and com
415. l Sel mode Using the L3 02 level as a basis acceleration is automatically adjusted Set acceleration time is disregarded Stall pre Effective when L3 01 is set to 1 vention or 2 level dur Set as a percentage of Inverter ing accel rated current Usually setting is not necessary StallP The factory setting reduces the Accel Lv _ Set values when the motor stalls Stall pre Sets the lower limit for stall vention prevention during acceleration 5 limit dur as a percentage of the Inverter ing accel rated current when operation is WENN in the frequency range above StallP CHP E1 06 Lvl Usually setting is not necessary Stall pre 0 Disabled Deceleration as vention set If deceleration time is selection too short a main circuit during overvoltage may result decel Enabled Deceleration is stopped when the main circuit voltage exceeds the overvoltage level Deceleration restarts when voltage is returned Intelligent deceleration mode Deceleration rate is automatically adjusted so that the Inverter can StallP decelerate in the shortest Decel Sel possible time Set deceleration time is disregarded Enabled with Braking Resistor Unit When a braking option Brak ing Resistor Braking Resistor Unit Braking Unit is used always set to 0 or 3 5 61 5 62 Name Display Stall pre vention selection during run ning S
416. l accuracy depends on the installation conditions and type of motor used Contact your Yaskawa representative for details Derating is required for applications that use repetitive loads Refer to page 10 6 for details nn WwW The ground fault here is one which occurs in the motor wiring while the motor is running A ground fault may not be detected in the following cases A ground fault with low resistance which occurs in motor cables or terminals A ground fault occurs when the power is turned ON 7 Attach a Backup Capacitor Unit for Momentary Power Loss if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2 0 seconds is required for 200 V 400 V Class Inverters with outputs of 0 4 to 7 5 kW 8 If running at a speed of 6 Hz or less the overload protection function can operate even if running within 150 of rated output current per minute Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices The following options and peripheral devices can be used for the Inverter Select them according to the application Purpose Protect Inverter wiring MCCB or Ground Fault Interrupter Table 9 4 Options and Peripheral Devices Model Code Descriptions Always connect a breaker to the power supply line to protect Inverter wiring Use a ground fault interrupter suitable for high frequencies Prevents burning when a Braking Resistor is used Magnetic Contactor SC series Install to prevent the braking resistor fro
417. l wiring after wiring has been completed Do not perform a buzzer check on control circuits Perform the following checks on the wiring s all wiring correct Have any wire clippings screws or other foreign material been left Are all screws tight Are any wire ends contacting other terminals 2 30 Installing and Wiring Option Boards m Installing and Wiring Option Boards Option Board Models and Specifications Up to three option boards can be mounted in the Inverter You can mount up one Board into each of the three places on the control board A C and D shown in Fig 2 2 Table 2 14 lists the type of option boards and their specifications Table 2 14 Option Board Specifications Mounting Loca Specifications tion Serial open collector complimentary inputs Phase A B complimentary inputs PG Speed Control Boards Single line driver inputs Phase A B line driver inputs Input signal levels 0 to 10 V DC 20 KQ 1 channel 2 4 to 20 mA 250 Q 1 channel mmm Input resolution 14 bit Input signal levels Speed Reference Boards 0 to 10 V DC 20 KQ 4 to 20 mA 250 Q 3 channels Input resolution 13 bit with sign bit DI 08 8 bit digital speed reference setting DI 16H2 16 bit digital speed reference setting DeviceNet Communications Board SLNI DeviceNet communications support Profibus DP Communica tions Board SI P1 Profibus DP communications support CC L
418. larm Writing error during constants processing Attempting to write constants from the PLC while processing constants in the Inverter iaSlave Not Responding 6 In the following cases the slave will ignore the write function If the slave address specified in the command message is 0 all slaves execute the write function but do not return response messages to the master When a communications error overrun framing parity or CRC 16 is detected in the command message When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the Inverter do not agree When the data that configures the message and the data time length exceeds 24 bits When the command message data length is invalid Application Precautions Set a timer in the master to monitor response time from the slaves Make the setting so that if no response is sent to the master from the slave within the set time the same command message is sent again from the mas ter _ Self Diagnosis The Inverter has a built in function for self diagnosing the operations of serial communications interface cir cuits This function is called the self diagnosis function The self diagnosis function connects the communica tions parts of the send and receive terminals receives the data sent by the Inverter and checks if communications are being performed normally Perform the self diagnosis function using the following procedure 1 Turn ON the power su
419. ld commands is given below Power supply OFF Forward Stop oF ON S C ON Acceleration Deceleration off OFF ON Ramp Hold EUN Frequency reference Output frequency M eo Hold Hold Fig 6 51 Acceleration Deceleration Ramp Hold Input Terminal Functions w cm BApplication Precautions When d4 01 is set to 1 the output frequency on hold is stored even after the power supply is turned OFF If performing operations using this frequency after the Inverter has also been turned OFF input the Run Command with the Acceleration Deceleration Ramp Hold turned ON When d4 01 1s set to 0 and a Run Command is input while the Acceleration Deceleration Ramp Hold is turned ON the output frequency will be set to zero f you input an Acceleration Deceleration Ramp Hold command by error when decelerating during posi tioning deceleration may be canceled Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Contact Signals UP DOWN The UP and DOWN commands raise and lower Inverter frequency references by turning ON and OFF a multi function contact input terminal S3 to S7 To use this function set one of the constants H1 01 to H1 10 multi function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection to 10 UP command and 11 DOWN command Be sure to allocate two terminals so that the UP and DOWN commands can be used as a pair The output frequency depends on the acceleration and deceleration time Be sure to
420. le length is long etc If the control method was changed after autotuning be sure to perform autotuning again One of the following four autotuning modes can be set Rotational autotuning Stationary autotuning 1 Stationary autotuning for line to line resistance only Stationary autotuning 2 B Precautions Before Using Autotuning Read the following precautions before using autotuning Autotuning the Inverter is fundamentally different from autotuning the servo system Inverter autotuning automatically adjusts parameters according to detected motor constants whereas servo system autotuning adjusts parameters according to the detected size of the load e When speed or torque precision is required at high speeds i e 90 of the rated speed or higher use a motor with a rated voltage that is 20 V less than the input power supply voltage of the Inverter for 200V class Inverters and 40 V less for 400V class Inverters If the rated voltage of the motor is the same as the input power supply voltage the voltage output from the Inverter will be unstable at high speeds and suffi cient performance will not be possible Use stationary autotuning 1 or 2 whenever performing autotuning for a motor that is connected to a load Use rotational autotuning whenever performing autotuning for a motor that has fixed output characteris tics when high precision is required or for a motor that is not connected to a load f rotational autotun
421. lection Fac tory Setting Terminal S5 function selection User Constants BE g g O UUWOODOCDBB BBBBBBBBIIGSEa Fac tory Setting Channel 2 gain Terminal S6 function selection Channel 1 output monitor bias Terminal S7 function selection Channel 2 output monitor bias Terminal S8 function selection Analog output signal level for channel 1 Terminal S9 function selection Analog output signal level for channel 2 Terminal S10 function selection Channel 1 output selection Terminal S11 function selection Channel 2 output selection Terminal S12 function selection Channel 3 output selection Terminal M1 M2 function selec tion contact Channel 4 output selection Terminal P1 function selection open collector Channel 5 output selection Terminal P2 function selection open collector Channel 6 output selection Terminal P3 function selection open collector Channel 7 output selection Terminal P4 function selection open collector Channel 8 output selection Signal level selection terminal Al DO 08 output mode selection Gain terminal A1 Operation selection after commu nications error Bias terminal A1 Input level of external fault from Communications Option Board Signal level selection terminal A3 Stopping method for external fault from Communications Option Board Multi function analog input
422. led The integral function isn t used while accelerating or decelerating it is used at constant speeds Enabled The integral function is used at all times Overspeed detection level PG Overspd Level Overspeed detection delay time PG Overspd Time Sets the overspeed detection method Frequencies above that set for F1 08 set as a percentage of the maximum output fre quency that continue to exceed this frequency for the time set in F1 09 are detected as overspeed faults Excessive speed devia tion detec tion level PG Deviate Level Excessive speed devia tion detec tion delay time PG Deviate Time Sets the speed deviation detection method Any speed deviation above the F1 10 set level set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency that contin ues for the time set in F1 11 is detected as a speed deviation Speed deviation is the differ ence between actual motor speed and the reference com mand speed User Constant Tables Name Control Methods Fact Open Open Description actory Vif Loop Flux Loop Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Display Number of PG gear teeth Sets the number of teeth on 1 the gears if there are gears between the PG and the PG Gear motor Teeth1 Input pulses from PG X 60 FI 13 Number of FI 01 H2 PG gea
423. leration Characteristics w Related Constants Name Change inti Setting Factory during VIf Description Display p Range Setting Opera vit with tion PG These values are for a 200 V Class Inverter For a 400 V Class Inverter double the values i Setting Precautions When this function is enabled if the main circuit voltage rises the regenerative torque limit will decrease to a value less than its set value and so the motor will not rotate at the speed specified by the speed reference Therefore in applications where it is necessary to rotate the motor at the speed specified by the speed refer ence disable this function and use a converter a dynamic braking resistor or a power regenerative unit to sup pe press rises in the main circuit voltage 6 2 6 28 Adjusting Frequency References This section explains methods of adjusting frequency references Adjusting Analog Frequency References Gain and bias are among the constants used to adjust analog inputs iRelated Constants Con stant Number Name Display Signal level selection ter minal A1 Term A1 Signal Description 0 0to 10V 1 10to 10 V 11 bit polarity positive negative input Change during Opera tion Control Methods Vif with PG Open Loop Vector 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vector 2 Gain terminal Al Terminal Al Gain Sets the frequency when 10 V is inpu
424. limit value when the analog input signal generates forward torque This torque limit setting is enabled even when the analog input signal generates forward torque while the motor is operating regeneration i Setting the Torque Limit in Constants Using L7 01 to L7 04 you can set individually four torque limits in the following directions Forward drive reverse drive forward regeneration and reverse regeneration ESet the Torque Limit Value Using an Analog Input You can change the analog input level torque limit value by setting the torque limit in multi function analog input terminals A2 and A3 The analog input terminal signal level is factory set as follows Multi function analog input terminal A2 4 to 20 mA Multi function analog input terminal A3 0 to 10 The following diagram shows the relationship between the torque limits Output torque Positive 2 s n Positive negative torque limits Forward torque limit Regenerative torque limit Noof motor rotations Reverse operation Forward operation Regenerative torque limit Negative torque limit Positive negative torque limits Negative Fig 6 37 Torque Limit by Analog Input 6 47 i Setting Torque Limits Using Constants and an Analog Input The following block diagram shows the relationship between torque limit using constants and torque limit using an analog input Multi function analog input Positive forward drive Forward torque limit 1 rave 4 Termina
425. ll other S curve characteristic times is 0 20 second Make appropriate settings for the e accel decel times and S curve characteristic times at each point S curve characteristic time Approxi IMPORTANT mately 0 2 to 1 0 second 2 The accel decel rate can be automatically switched during acceleration and deceleration by using C1 11 Accel decel time switching frequency Factory setting Disabled Output frequency 2 set frequency C1 01 C1 02 accel decel times Output frequency set frequency C1 07 C1 08 accel decel times 3 If the output frequency during the S curve characteristic time for deceleration falls below the value set for E1 09 Min output frequency the S curve characteristic will be cancelled and the DC injection braking Zero speed control will be applied 4 Do not use the S curve characteristic for applications where a short run time is desired such as in cranes and hoists S curve characteristic time Approximately 0 0 to 0 2 second Dwell Function at Start b6 02 Dwell time at start Output frequency 9 1 to oe High speed b6 01 Dwell frequency at start 0 1 to 3 0 Hz Frequency detection gt t 2 or During run 2 OFF ON Holding brake TOSE operation CLOS OPEN Using Inverters for Elevating Machines E e If the mechanical operation of the holding brake is slow use the dwell function at start to prevent brake wear and accelerate after the brake is completely open x i P
426. load is greater than approximately 80 of the maximum motor capacity Output open 0 Disabled phase protec 1 Enabled tion selection 2 Enabled Output open phase is detected at less than 5 of Inverter L8 07 eee _ Oto2 0 No A A A A 4B3H When applied motor capacity Ph Loss Out is small for Inverter capacity Sel output open phase may be detected inadvertently or open phase may not be detected In this case set to 0 Ground pro tection selec L8 09 tion ee Oori 1 No A A A A 4B5H 1 Enabled Ground Fault Sel Cooling fan Set the ON OFF control for control selec the cooling fan L8 10 tion 0 me only when Inverter is ert 0 No N A A A 4B6H FAN Control ON whenever power is Sel ON Cooling fan control delay Set the time in seconds to 5 time delay turning OFF the cooling Oto pet fan after the cooling fan OFF 300 ros No a is fred ABIE FAN OFF command is received TIM Ambient tem Set the ambient temperature L8 12 perature If set to 60 C the Inverter 45 to 45 C No X A A A 4B8H overload protection function 60 temp OL2 will start 20 earlier OL2 charac teristics selection at 0 OL2 characteristics at low L8 15 10w speeds speeds disabled Oorl 1 No A A A A 4BBH 1 OL2 characteristics at OL2 low speeds enabled Chara L Spd Soft CLA L8 18 Selection 0 Disable gain 0 Oorl No A A A A 4BEH 1 Enable Soft CLA Sel 5 67
427. ltage Change this setting only when making advanced adjustments for V f in the fixed outputs area Normally there is no need to make these settings Motor rated cur rent Motor Rated FLA Set the motor rated current in amps This set value becomes the base value for motor protection torque limit and torque control It is set automatically when using autotuning Number of motor poles Number of Poles Set the number of motor poles The value is set automatically during auto tuning Motor rated output Mtr Rated Power Set the output of the motor in units of 0 01kW This constant is automatically set during autotuning PG con stant PG Pulses Rev Set the number of pulses per rotation for the PG pulse generator or encoder being used Do not set as a multiple Gain ter minal FM Terminal FM Gain Set the voltage level gain for multi function analog output 1 Set the number of multiples of 10 V to be output as the 100 output for the monitor items Voltage output from the terminals however have a 10 V max meter calibration function Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels W Name Control Methods Setti Fact Open Open Description euing TaciOTy V f Joop Flux Loop d Range Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Display Gain ter Set the voltage l
428. lti step speed refer ence 4 is ON for a multi func Reference 9 tion input Frequency The frequency reference reference 10 when multi step speed refer ences and 4 are ON for Reference 10 multi function inputs Frequency The frequency reference reference 11 when multi step speed refer ences 2 and 4 are ON for a Reference 11 multi function inputs 5 21 Name Control Methods oh Open Open Description CHING Teetory Vif Loop Flux Loop Display P Range Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Frequency The frequency reference dl 12 reference 12 when multi step speed refer 0 00 Hz Yes ATA A A A 28DH ences 1 2 and 4 are ON for Reference 12 multi function inputs Frequency The frequency reference d1 13 reference 13 when multi step speed refer 0 00Hz Yes P eS A A A 28EH ences 3 and 4 are ON for Reference 13 multi function inputs Frequency The frequency reference reference 14 when multi step speed refer dl 14 0 00Hz Yes A A A A A 28FH ences 1 3 and 4 are ON for Reference 14 multi function inputs 0 to Frequency The frequency reference 400 00 reference 15 when multi step speed refer e dl 15 enc s 2 5 and Fare ON for 0 00 Hz Yes A A A A A 290H Reference 15 multi function inputs Frequency The frequency
429. lting in an increase in slip If C3 01 is set the amount of slip is adjusted as the temperature rises Set C3 01 if the amount of torque varies with the temperature when using torque control or a torque limit The larger the value of C3 01 the larger the compen sation BAdjusting Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant 6 Set the slip compensation primary delay time constant in ms You can switch the factory settings as follows by changing the control method V f control 2000 ms Open loop vector control 200 ms Normally there is no need to make these settings When the slip compensation response is low lower the set value When the speed is unstable increase the set value BAdjusting Slip Compensation Limit In C3 03 set the upper limit for the slip compensation amount as a percent taking the motor rated slip amount as 100 If the speed is lower than the target value but does not change even when you adjust the slip compensation gain the motor may have reached the slip compensation limit Increase the limit and check the speed again Make the settings however to make sure that the value of the slip compensation limit and reference frequency does not exceed the tolerance of the machine The following diagram shows the slip compensation limit for the constant torque range and fixed output range 6 37 Slip compensation limit C3 03 Output frequency E1 06 E1 04 E1 06 Base frequency E1 04 Maximum outp
430. m burning out when one is used Always attach a surge absorber to the coil Contains switching surge Surge Absorber Absorbs surge from the magnetic contactor and control relays Connect surge absorbers to all magnetic contactors and relays near the Inverter Isolates I O signals Isolator Isolates the I O signals of the Inverter and is effective against inductive noise Improve the input power factor of the Inverter DC Reactor AC Reactor Used to improve the input power factor of the Inverter All Inverters of 18 5 kW or higher contain built in DC reactors These are optional for Inverters of 15 kW or less Install DC and AC reactors for applications with a large power supply capacity 600 kVA or higher Reduce the affects of radio and control device noise Input Noise Filter LNFD O FN O Reduces noise coming into the Inverter from the power supply line and to reduce noise flowing from the Inverter into the power supply line Connect as close to the Inverter as possible Finemet zero phase reactor to reduce radio EE noise 2 F6045GB FIL001098 F11080GB FIL001097 F200160BP 300 001 041 Reduces noise from the line that sneaks into the Inverter input power system Insert as close to the Inverter as possible Can be use on both the input side and output side Output Noise Fil ter LF O Reduces noise generated by the Inverter Connect as close to the Inverter as possi
431. m response frequency 300 kHz 6 Common terminal 7 Pulse monitor output terminal Line driver output RS 422 level output 8 Pulse monitor output terminal TA2 E Shield connection terminal 5 VDC and 12 VDC cannot be used at the same time BPG X2 The terminal specifications for the PG X2 are given in the following table Table 2 18 PG X2 Terminal Specifications Terminal No Contents Power supply for pulse generator Specifications 12 VDC 5 200 mA max 0 VDC GND for power supply 5 VDC 5 200 mA max A phase input terminal A phase input terminal B phase input terminal B phase input terminal Z phase input terminal SIojl u nyt ny AJ N Z phase input terminal Line driver input RS 422 level input Maximum response frequency 300 kHz o Common terminal 0 VDC GND for power supply A phase output terminal A phase output terminal B phase output terminal B phase output terminal Z phase output terminal Z phase output terminal Line driver output RS 422 level output Control circuit common Control circuit GND Shield connection terminal 5 VDC and 12 VDC cannot be used at the same time 2 34 Installing and Wiring Option Boards mi Wiring Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the optio
432. mber excluding the decimal point Set the number of digits below the decimal point to display Example When the max output frequency value is 200 0 set 12000 Setting unit for frequency con stants related to V f characteris tics V f Display Unit Set the setting unit for frequency reference related constants 0 Hz l min LOCAL REMOTE key enable disable Local Remote Key Sets the Digital Operator Local Remote Key 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Switches between the Digital Operator and the constant settings Digital Operator Functions w _ Name Control Methods Con Open Open stant idol Description Sum vif ites Flux GOD Number Spay with Vector YES vector PG tor 1 2 STOP key dur Sets the Stop Key in the run ing control cir mode cuit terminal 0 Disabled When the Run 02 02 operation Command is issued from and oer 1 No A A A A N 506H external terminal the Stop Oper STOP Key is disabled Key 1 Enabled Effective even during run User constant Clears or stores user initial values initial value 0 Stores not set 1 Begins storing Records the set constants as user initial values PE 2 All clear Clears all recorded i s Ne is i i A s 3028 User Defaults user initial values When the set constants are recorded as user initial values 1110 will be set in A1 03 Frequency ref When the frequency referen
433. me con stant MOL Time Const Sets the electric thermal detection time in seconds units Usually setting is not necessary The factory setting is 15096 over load for one minute When the motor s overload resis tance is known also set the over load resistance protection time for when the motor is hot started 0 1 to 5 0 1 0 min The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0 4 kW is given 2 The setting range is from 10 to 200 of the Inverter rated output current The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW is given For the motor no load current set E2 03 to a value less than that of E2 01 3 The setting range is from 10 to 200 of the Inverter rated output current The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW is given 481H e 5 Multi Function Outputs H2 01 to H2 05 level Function Motor overload OL1 including OH3 pre alarm ON 90 or more of the detection i Setting Motor Rated Current Set the rated current value on the motor nameplate in constants E2 01 for motor 1 and E4 01 for motor 2 This set value is the electronic thermal base current iSetting Motor Overload Protection Characteristics Set the overload protection function in L1 01 according to the applicable motor Control Methods PG 1 The induction motor s cooling abilities differ according to the speed control
434. ming Mode NE m o o Modes i Setting User Constants Here the procedure is shown to change C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 from 10 s to 20 s Table 3 4 Setting User Constants in Advanced Programming Mode Digital Operator Display Description DRIVE Rdy Frequency Ref U1 8 60 00Hz U1 02 60 00Hz U1 03 10 05A Power supply turned ON DRIVE Main Menu 2 MENU Key pressed to enter drive mode QUICK Main Menu 3 MENU Key pressed to enter quick programming mode ADV Main Menu 4 MENU Key pressed to enter advanced programming mode 3 ADV Initialization 2 E 5 DATA ENTER pressed to access monitor display e1 00 10 0Sec i 3 ion Ti 6 A 0e 6000 0 Increment or Decrement Key pressed to display C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 10 0Sec 7 E o DATA ENTER Key pressed to access setting display The setting of C1 01 0 0 lt 36000 0 10 00 is displayed 10 0Sec 8 C1 01 O jfto 0Sec Shift RESET Key pressed to move the flashing digit to the right 0 0 6000 0 10 0Sec 9 C1 01 00El0 0Sec Increment Key pressed to change set value to 20 00 s 0 0 6000 0 10 0Sec 10 C1 01 00E0 0Sec DATA ENTER Key pressed to enter the set data 0 0 6000 0 10 0Sec ADV Entry Accepted is displayed for 1 0 s after the data setting has been con H Entry Accepted firmed with the DATA ENTER Key
435. mote Key key enable 0 Disabled 02 01 disable 1 Enabled Switches Oorl 1 No A A A A 505H 6 148 between the Digital Local Operator and the constant Remote Key settings STOP key Sets the Stop Key in the run during con mode trol circuit 0 Disabled When the Run 92 07 terminal Command i Issued Fom RS MT No A A A A 506H 6 149 operation and external terminal the Stop Key is disabled Oper STOP 1 Enabled Effective even Key during run User con Clears or stores user initial stant initial values value 0 Stores not set 1 Begins storing Records the set constants as user initial values 02 03 2 All clear Clears all 0 to2 0 No A A A A 507H 6 149 recorded user initial User Defaults values When the set constants are recorded as user initial val 5 ues 1110 will be set in Al 03 m kVA selection 02 04 inverter Do not set OtoFF o No A A A A 508H Model Frequency When the frequency reference reference set is set on the Digital Operator ting method frequency reference monitor selection sets whether the Enter Key is necessary 02 05 0 Enter Key needed Oorl 0 No A A A A 509H 6 149 1 Enter Key not needed Operator When set to 1 the Inverter M O P accepts the frequency refer ence without Enter Key oper ation Operation Sets the operation when the selection Digital Operator is discon when digital nected operator is 0 Disabled Operation disconnected continues even if the 02
436. motor though the motor is not rotating After autotuning has been completed use the copy function of the Operator to copy the settings ofthe constants of the control board from the Operator to the Inverter before replacing the board If the copy function is not available change the setting of the constants manu ally DRIVE Frequency Ref U1 01 0 00Hz U1 02 0 00Hz U1 03 0 0A If the mode is switched to the DRIVE the frequency setting display appears and the operation becomes enabled iProcedure for Changing Constants through Communications For 400 V class Inverters of 55 kW to 300 kW with SPEC E or later take safety measures such as the instal lation of an emergency stop switch before adjusting constants Failure to do so may result in injury caused by the motor accidentally rotating during stationary autotuning performed by the Inverter when the constants are adjusted After replacing the control board write in all of the constants to the new board with MEMOBUS communica tions or a Communications Option Board Next be sure to perform autotuning to make adjustments after shipping Step No Digital Operator Display A TUNE T1 01 3 Shipping Ajust 2 Description Set T1 01 Autotuning mode selection to 3 Shipping adjustment DRIVE Mtr Rated Power T1 02 55 00kW 3 00 650 00 55 00kW Press the Increment Key to view the motor rated power display Set T1 02
437. mpensation Primary Delay Time Constant Set the torque compensation function primary delay in ms You can switch the factory settings as follows by changing the control method settings V f control 200 ms V f control with PG 200 ms Open loop vector control 20 ms 6 39 Normally there is no need to make this setting Adjust the constant as shown below Ifthe motor is vibrating increase the set value If the motor response is low decrease the set value Hunting prevention Function The hunting prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load This func tion can be used in V f and V f with PG iRelated Constants Con stant Number Name Display Hunting pre vention func tion selection Hunt Prev Select Description 0 Hunting prevention function disabled 1 Hunting prevention function enabled The hunting prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load This function is enabled in V f control method only If high response is to be given pri ority over vibration suppression disable the hunting prevention function Factory Setting Control Methods Vit with PG Open Loop Vector 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vector 2 Hunting pre vention gain Hunt Prev Gain Set the hunting prevention gain multiplication factor Normally there is no need to make this setting Make
438. mples 2 f 04 PG Rating PG Output Frequency for Maximum Fre Motor s Maximum Speed min p rev quency Output Hz Ex Note 1 The motor speed at maximum frequency output is expressed as the sync rotation speed 2 The PG power supply is 12 V 3 A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than 200 mA If momentary power loss must be handled use a backup capacitor or other method Capacitor for momentary power loss TAI Signals Fig 2 30 PG B2 Connection Example 2 39 _ BPG D2 PG X2 There are 5 V and 12 V PG power supplies Check the PG power supply specifications before connecting The maximum response frequency is 300 kHz Use the following equation to computer the output frequency of the PG fpo Motor speed at maximum frequency output min x PG rating p rev 60 g p rev fpg Hz A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than 200 mA If momentary power loss must be handled use a backup capacitor or other method PG X2 y PG power supply AC oy 12V P12 10 B 2D Capacitor for if P5 30 momentary A 40 power loss A 50 B 60 n B 7o 1 Z 80 an Z 9o G foo Fig 2 31 PG X2 Connection Example for 12 V PG power supply Digital Operator and Modes This chapte
439. mu B Opt Exter _ Option Board and communica nications Option Board nal Flt tions signals EF3 Ext Fault External Fault Input Terminal 3 S3 EF4 Ext Fault External Fault Input Terminal 4 S4 EF5 Ext Fault External Fault Input Terminal 5 S5 EF6 Ext Fault External Fault Input Terminal 6 S6 EF7 Ext Fault External Fault Input Terminal 7 Reset external fault inputs to the S7 An external fault was input from a multi function inputs EF8 multi function input terminal Remove the cause of the exter Ext Fault External Fault Input Terminal 8 nal fault S8 EF9 Ext Fault External Fault Input Terminal 9 S9 EF10 Ext Fault External Fault Input Terminal 10 S10 EFII Ext Fault External Fault Input Terminal 11 S11 EF12 Ext Fault External Fault Input Terminal 12 12 The torque limit is too small Increase the limit SVE Zero servo Fault Zero Servo The rotation position moved during The load torque is too large Reduce the load torque Fault Zero servo operation Check for signal noise Exceeded Allowable Number of SER Speed Search Retrials Search The speed search has been retried The settings in b3 17 and b3 18 aren t Make sure that the settings in b3 Retrials more than the number of times set in appropriate 17 and b3 18 are appropriate Fault b3 19 Number of speed search retri als OPR Digital Operator Connection Fault The connection to the Digital Operator Check t
440. mum number of times you can write to EEPROM using the Inverter is 100 thousand Do not fre Individual Functions w BError Codes The following table shows MEMOBUS communications error codes Error Code Contents Function code error A function code other than 03H 08H or 10H has been set by the PLC Invalid register number error The register address you are attempting to access is not recorded anywhere With broadcast sending a start address other than 0000H 0001H or 0002H has been set Invalid quantity error The number of data packets being read or written is outside the range 1 to 16 n write mode the number of data packets in the message is not No of packets x 2 Data setting error A simple upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing con stants When writing constants the constant setting is invalid Write mode error Attempting to write constants from the PLC during operation Attempting to write via ENTER commands from the PLC during operation Attempting to write constants other than A 1 00 to A1 05 E1 03 or 02 04 when warning alarm CPF03 defective EEPROM has occurred Attempting to write read only data Writing during main circuit undervoltage UV error Writing constants from the PLC during UV main circuit undervoltage alarm Writing via ENTER commands from the PLC during UV main circuit undervoltage a
441. n In a winding operation the line speed and torque generated by the motor are in the same direction For the winding operation both the speed limit and the torque reference input are positive The motor will accelerate when the torque reference input is larger than the load and will decelerate when it is smaller than the load If the motor turns faster than the speed limit a negative compensation value is output from the speed limiter cir cuit When the speed then drops below the speed limit a positive compensation value is output The torque compensation is proportional to the ASR proportional gain When the sum of the torque reference and the torque compensation output by the speed limiter is the same as the actual load the motor will stop accelerating and run at a constant speed Rewinding Operation Individual Functions m In a rewinding operation the line speed and torque generated by the motor are in the opposite directions In this example we ll assume that the line speed is positive and the torque reference input is negative For the rewinding operation the speed limit is positive and the torque reference input is negative If the motor turns faster than the speed limit a negative compensation value is output from the speed limiter circuit If the motor is rotating in reverse a negative compensation value is output If the speed is 0 or is below the speed limit a 0 compensation value is output In this way the output from th
442. n 24 V 12 common sourcing mode with a 24 V 1 external power supply CNS EXT setting 24 V 8 m External pes ve Isc E tea i Ld T j424V De eh ae rete pe J Fig 10 16 Using Contact and Open Collector Outputs This example shows wiring for contact outputs and open collector outputs The following example is for the CIMR G7A25P5 200 V Class Inverter for 5 5 kW po oB dio p e 9 e2 MCCB A R O OM RIL1 FUN 3 phase power S O oM S L2 T OQ OM TIL3 B1 B2 l umi Motor vitz2 m Inverter WIT3 e l Ground l _ 177g Ammeter scale adjustment resistor 5 AM tf W20kQ TE d Multi function analog output 2 1 10 to 10 V 2 mA l 1 l bd bod E ris Ouput current 0 to 10 V Multi function analog output 1 10 to 10 V 2 mA 1 1 AC Eie S sun ge 0 to 10 V Sequence external power zr i Sequence e oe nes A 1 i l 1 D Surge MAI i absorber OO q MB Error contact output 1 9 977 79 250 VAC 10 mA min 1Amax i 250 VAC max l 30 VDC 10 mA min 1 A max 1 MC H 1 Multi function contact output i 30 VDC max l 250 VAC 10 mA min 1 A max 1 i 30 VDC 10 mA min 1A max i Flywheel Default RUN i diode mi ry 1 9p TT 7 M2 i ot 48 VDC max Flywheel diode I t 1 A 48 VDC max
443. n 3 6 OVC o ET 3 7 Quick Programming Mode uctus hn eL Ae LAC te eel an 3 8 Advanced Programming Mode seet tette 3 10 dab SL Oo NRI T E NR ERE 3 13 Autotuning Mode tenente teet t ten 3 14 4 Trial Operation conr e Dee ihe paca apaina eM Reda ME epe i anait 4 1 Overview of Trial Operation Procedure cccccccccccecececeeeeeeceeeeeeeetetees 4 2 Trial Operation Procedures ssssssssssseeeeene eene 4 3 Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper 400 V Class Inverters of 55 kW or Higher 4 3 dis ON sah oS ert Pee lel ae OE Ath ah bide teeta 4 3 Checking the Display Status 4 4 Basic Sorting s ecu hie LLL Hur or MAR pd ed Dt Nd 4 5 Settings for the Control Methods c cccccccscssssssssssessesesseessesessesesteseetesesestaeseasseaneeeanees 4 7 Qus een eee nee en ir Race EE Crete ee Mee O LEED situe nen oR rena 4 9 Application Settings o Ep il coh AN tin BOE ened 4 16 xii MD Nodoad Operations uuu oh a e i a ale ER Di RE uo 4 16 Loaded Operation nennen 4 16 Check and Recording User Constant ssssssssseeeeeeneeteneens 4 17 Adjustment Suggestions 5 one poe roi eterna ae eee 4 18 User Const anlts eere Li Leno cse tenebo eren ioe tpi escnieee 5 1 User Constant Descriptions seeeesseessessssssesseeseeeeren nennen nenne 5 2 Description of User Constant Tables sse 5 2 Digital Operation Display Functions and
444. n Menu Programming Table 6 2 COPY Function Procedure Explanation Press the MENU Key and select advanced programming mode ADV Initialization EX 0071 Select Language Press the DATA ENTER Key and select the constants monitor display ADV COPY Function Display 03 01 Copy Function Selection using the Increment Key and Decrement Key Press the DATA ENTER Key and select the constants setting display OP INV WRITE Change the set value to 2 using the Increment Key OP gt INV COPYING Set the changed data using the DATA ENTER Key The COPY function will start ADV COPY COPY COMPLETE If the COPY function ends normally End is displayed on the Digital Operator ADV Copy Funtion Sel COPY SELECT Table 6 2 COPY Function Procedure The display returns to 03 01 when a key is pressed During the copy operation errors may occur If an error is displayed press any key to cancel the error display and return to the 03 01 display Error displays and their meanings are shown below Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Function Error Display CPE ID UNMATCH Meaning Inverter product code and Inverter software number are different VAE INV KVA UNMATC Inverter capacity with which you are trying to copy and the Inverter capacity stored in the Digital Operator are different CRE CON
445. n be applied to the following faults If a fault not listed below occurs the protec tion function will operate and the auto restart function will not OC Overcurrent RH Braking resistor overheated GF Ground fault RR Braking transistor error PUF Fuse blown OLI Motor overload OV Main circuit overvoltage OL2 Inverter overload e UVI Main Circuit Undervoltage Main Circuit Magnetic Contactor Operation OHI Motor overheat Failure PF Main circuit voltage fault OL3 Overtorque LF Output phase failure OLA Overtorque When L2 01 is set to 1 or 2 continue operation during momentary power loss BAUuto Restart External Outputs To output auto restart signals externally set H2 01 to H2 05 multi function contact output terminals M1 M2 P1 PC P2 PC P3 C3 and P4 C4 function selection to 1E restart enabled iRelated Constants Name Control Methods Con 1 Open stant Description Factory vit PPE Elux Number Display Setting with ual Vec PG 1 tor Number of auto Sets the number of auto restart restart attempts attempts Automatically restarts after a fault Num of and conducts a speed search from Restarts the run frequency Auto restart Sets whether a fault contact out operation selec put is activated during fault tion restart 0 Not output Fault contact is not activated Restart Sel 1 Output Fault contact is activated
446. n boards B Wiring the PG A2 Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG A2 Three phase 200 Inverter VAC 400 VAC 5 GM ORA Urt Q SJ Qus VIT2 u re O O TL3 W T3 12 V power supply z ty o 0 V power supply E o m o n o 12 V voltage input A B phase Pulse 0 V 4 o E 2 Or re Oo Pulse monitor output AE ASIE E Fig 2 23 Wiring a 12 V Voltage Input Three phase 200 VAC 400 VAC Inverter 12 V power supply 0 V power suppl Short circuit across terminals 3 4 or TA1 Pulse input Pulse input se monitor output Shielded twisted pair wires must be used for signal lines Do not use the pulse generator s power supply for anything other than the pulse generator encoder Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise The length of the pulse generator s wiring must not be more than 100 meters Fig 2 24 Wiring an Open collector Input TA1 1 PG power 12V supply H12V Pulse input Short for r open col lector input 1 bee Pulse monitor output Fig 2 25 I O Circuit Configuration of the PG A2 2 35 B Wiring the PG B2 Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG B2 Inverter Three phase 200 VAC 400 VAC Power supply 12 V Power supply 0 V
447. n due to imperfect contact 2 Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Inverter and press the lower part of the front cover onto the Inverter until the front cover snaps shut Mounting the Digital Operator After attaching the front cover mount the Digital Operator onto the Inverting using the following procedure 1 Hook the Digital Operator at A two locations on the front cover in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in the following illustration 2 Press the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B two locations 1 14 Removing Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover 1 Fig 1 13 Mounting the Digital Operator cele paneer 1 s F 1 Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator or mount or remove the front cover using methods other than at those described above otherwise the Inverter may break or malfunction due to imperfect contact e 2 Never attach the front cover to the Inverter with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover Imperfect IMPORTANT contact can result Always attach the front cover to the Inverter by itself first and then attach the Digital Operator to the front cover 1 15 _ Inverters of 18 5 kW or More For Inverter with an output of 18 5 kW or more remove the terminal cover and then use the following proce dures to remove the Digital Operator and front cover Removing the Digital Operator Use the
448. n input 421 C1 08 accel decel time 1 and No A A A A A 207H 6 18 Decel Time accel decel time 2 are set to 4 ON Emergency The deceleration time when stop time the multi function input Emergency fast stop is set 421 C1 09 to ON No A A A A A 208H 6 17 Fast Stop This function can be used as a Time stopping method when a fault has been detected 5 21 Name Control Methods Setting Fact Open Description CHUNG factory Vif Loop Flux E Range Setting with Vec Vec PG tor tor 1 Display Accel decel time setting unit 0 0 01 second units 1 0 1 second units Acc Dec Units Accel decel Sets the frequency for auto time switch matic acceleration decelera ing fre tion switching quency Below set frequency Accel decel time 4 Above set frequency Accel decel time 1 Acc Dec SW The multi function input Freq accel decel time 1 or accel decel time 2 take pri ority The setting range for acceleration deceleration times depends on the setting of C1 10 Acceleration deceleration Time Setting Unit If C1 10 is set to 0 the setting range is 0 00 to 600 00 s S curve Acceleration Deceleration C2 User constants for S curve characteristics are shown in the following table Name Control Methods EUER T Tos Open Setting tory Vif Loop Flux Loop Ranae son unes ue 1 2
449. n the display reads 100 iRelated Alarm Displays When setting a multi function contact output H2 LILI to 2F the alarm is displayed on the Digital Operator as shown below Display LT C blinking C Maintenance LT F blinking Fan Maintenance 10096 Timer 100 Meaning Electrolytic Capacitor Main tenance Timer Monitor U1 61 has reached Cooling Fan Maintenance Monitor U1 63 has reached Probable causes The electrolytic capacitors have reached their estimated maintenance time period The cooling fan has reached its esti mated maintenance time period Corrective Actions Reset constant 02 18 to 0 after replacing the electrolytic capacitors Replace the cooling fan and set con stant 02 10 to OH Settings Required After Replacement of Cooling Fan or Electrolytic Capacitor Set 02 10 to 0 after replacing the cooling fan Set 02 18 to 0 after replacing the electrolytic bus capacitor Refer to Chapter 8 Maintenance and Inspection for the replacement procedure Related Constants Con stant Number Name Display Fan opera tion time set ting Fan ON Time Set Description Set the initial value of the fan operation time using time units The operation time accumu lates from the set value Setting Range Factory Setting Control Methods Open Open V f Loop Flux Loop with Vec Vec Vec
450. nal S8 ON Bit 8 Control circuit terminal S9 ON Bit 9 Control circuit terminal S10 ON Bit A Control circuit terminal S11 ON Bit B Control circuit terminal S12 ON Bits C to F Not used Inverter status Bit 0 Operation Operating Bit 1 Zero speed Zero speed Bit 2 Frequency matching Matched Bit 3 User defined speed matching Matched Bit 4 Frequency detection 1 Output frequency lt L4 01 Bit 5 Frequency detection 2 Output frequency 2 L4 01 Bit 6 Inverter startup completed Startup completed Bit 7 Low voltage detection Detected Bit 8 Baseblock Inverter output baseblock Bit9 Frequency reference mode Not communications 0 Communications Bit A Run Command mode Not communications 0 Communications Bit B Overtorque detection Detected 6 Bit C Frequency reference lost 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Lost Bit D Retrying error 1 Retrying Bit E Error including MEMOBUS communications time out 1 Error occurred Bit F MEMOBUS communications time out 1 Timed out Multi function c ontact output status Bit 0 Multi function contact output terminal M1 M2 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 1 Multi function PHC output 1 terminal P1 PC 1 ON 0 OFF Bit2 Multi function PHC output 2 terminal P2 PC
451. nal by setting user constant 02 02 is Note Except in diagrams Keys are referred to using the Key names listed in the above table There are indicators on the upper left of the RUN and STOP Keys on the Digital Operator These indicators will light and flash to indicate operating status The RUN Key indicator will flash and the STOP Key indicator will light during initial excitation of the dynamic brake The relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP Keys and the Inverter status is shown in the Fig 3 2 Inverter output frequency N RUN STOP STOP Frequency setting RUN e xx e xx STOP x e Ee i S Lit Blinking Not lit Fig 3 2 RUN and STOP Indicators 3 4 _ The following table shows the relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP Keys and the Inverter conditions The indicators are lit unlit or blinking reflecting the order of priority Table 3 2 Relation of Inverter to RUN and STOP Indicators RUN STOP Priority Indicator Indicator Inverter Status Stopped Conditions Power supply is shut down Stopped Emergency stop Stop Command is sent from the Digital Operator when the control cir cuit terminals were used to operate the Inverter Emergency Stop Command is sent from the control circuit terminal Switched from LOCAL operation using the Digital Operator to RE
452. nce selection settings Bit 0 Not used Bit 1 Use MEMOBUS 0006H PID target value 1 Enabled 0 Disabled Bits 2 to B Not used Broadcast data terminal S5 input 1 Enabled 0 Disabled Broadcast data terminal S6 input 1 Enabled 0 Disabled Broadcast data terminal S7 input 1 Enabled 0 Disabled Broadcast data terminal S8 input 1 Enabled 0 Disabled Note Write 0 to all unused bits Also do not write data to reserved registers Monitor Data The following table shows the monitor data Monitor data can only be read Register No Contents Inverter status Bit 0 Operation 1 Operating 0 Stopped Bit 1 Reverse operation 1 Reverse operation 0 Forward operation Bit2 Inverter startup complete 1 Completed 2 Not completed Bit 3 Error 1 Error Bit4 Data setting error 1 Error Bit 5 Multi function contact output terminal M1 M2 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 6 Multi function PHC output 1 terminal P1 PC 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 7 Multi function PHC output 2 terminal P2 PC 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 8 Multi function PHC output 3 terminal P3 C3 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 9 Multi function PHC output 4 terminal P4 C4 1 ON 0 OFF Bits Aand B Not used Error details Bit 0 Overcurrent OC Ground fault GF Bit 1 Main circuit overvoltage OV Bit 2 Inverter overload OL2 Bit 3 Inverter overheat OH1 OH2 Bit 4 Injection brake transistor resistance overheat rr rH Bit 5 Fuse blown PUF Bit 6 PID feedback reference lost FbL B
453. ndervoltage reference Thermal switch _ Thermal relay Thermal relay trip contact fan for Braking Unit External fault IB Shielded twisted pair I contact trip contact Braking Unit PsP Pa ee i i i optional e P I ja E o kietector eccl Motor Braking Resistor Unit p optional O e3 i Fuse 1MCCB i Me Inverter 3 phase power R ae 20010240V s 47d ON CIMR G7A2018 5 z N TH WH 7 n i Vm i l AEE E 111 ESA ne S i Exp a l 2MccB THRX oFF ON me i i i re mc TS Forward Run Stop 81 Hs PG B2 TA1 i i i Thermal relay trip contact oo T a optional d i t for Braking Resistor Unit x f I Ix THRX Reverse Run Stop S2 Hs sel Lrsaul Trnermai switch contact 22 TE l i i H T ur Le Fault reset i EA oo 494 L 2o I Multi step speed reference 1 Fi n Boss i Main speed switching En l E i 291 reference 2 1 AS5 i i i i i i i i i i i i i i i wires Pulse monitor output Pulse A 30 mA max b distance
454. ned by the set value in b2 04 and the output frequency when the Stop Command is input Run Command DC injection brake time ON OFF b2 04 x 10 Output frequency Inverter output voltage interrupted DC injection brake ere Minimum baseblock DC injection brake time time L2 03 b2 04 Output frequency at 1 Stop Command input 10 100 maximum output frequency Fig 6 16 DC Injection Braking DB Stop Q Lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 when an overcurrent OC occurs during stopping INFO Coast to Stop with Timer If the Stop Command is input 1 e the Run Command is turned OFF when b1 03 is set to 3 the Inverter out put is interrupted to coast the motor to a stop After the Stop Command is input Run Commands are ignored until the time T has elapsed The time T depends upon the output frequency when the Stop Command is input and the deceleration time Run Command ON Operation wait time T Output Deceleration time frequency e g C1 02 Inverter output voltage interrupted Minimum baseblock time L2 03 Operation wait time T Output frequency at Stop Command input Minimum output frequency 100 Maximum output frequency Fig 6 17 Coast to Stop with Timer e 15 _ Using the DC Injection Brake Set constant b2 03 to apply the DC injection braking current to the motor while it is coasting to a stop to stop the moto
455. nfirm that the E2 motor constants after autotuning do not vary greatly from those of the test report Braking Resistor Overheating Protection When using a braking resistor other than the Braking Resistor Unit provide a sequence with a thermal over load relay or similar means to turn off the power input to the Inverter when it detects resistor overheating See the Connection Diagram on page 2 3 for this sequence circuit Momentary Power Loss Restart Do not use the momentary power loss restart and fault restart functions in applications for elevating machines Make sure that L2 01 0 and L5 01 0 If these functions are used the motor coasts to a stop with the brake contact open when a momentary power loss or fault occurs during operation possibly resulting in serious acci dents Torque Limit The torque limit values L7 01 to L7 04 are the motor s rated torque When there is a possibility of insuffi cient torque at start up or other time increase the Inverter capacity and set the torque limit value to between 200 and 300 factory setting is 200 Using Inverters for Elevating Machines NM I O Open phase Protection and Overtorque Detection To prevent the machine from falling when the motor is open phase or a similar situation enable L8 05 and L8 07 Input and output open phase protection selection and L6 01 to L6 06 Overtorque detection factory set ting is Disabled Falling detec
456. ng H1 01 Bit 5 Fault reset 1 Reset command set using H1 02 Bits 6toB Not used Bit C Multi function contact input terminal S5 input Bit D Multi function contact input terminal S6 input Bit E Multi function contact input terminal S7 input Bit F Multi function contact input terminal S8 input Frequency ref erence 30000 100 Note Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use local node data signals continuously HENTER Command When writing constants to the Inverter from the PLC using MEMOBUS communications the constants are temporarily stored in the constant data area in the Inverter To enable these constants in the constant data area use the ENTER command There are two types of ENTER commands ENTER commands that enable constant data in RAM and ENTER commands that write data to EEPROM non volatile memory in the Inverter at the same time as enabling data in RAM The following table shows the ENTER command data ENTER command data can only be written The ENTER command is enabled by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0901H Register No Write constant data to EEPROM Constant data is not written to EEPROM but refreshed in RAM only quently execute ENTER commands 0900H written to EEPROM The ENTER command registers are write only Consequently if reading these registers the register address INFO will become invalid Error code 02H Q The maxi
457. ng range for flux vector and open loop vector 2 controls is 0 to 2 2 These values are for a 200 V Class Inverter For a 400 V Class Inverter double the values m Reference Detection L4 User constants for the reference detection function are shown in the following table Con stant Number Name Display Speed agree detection level Spd Agree Level Description Effective when Desired fre quency ref setting agree 1 Frequency detection 1 or Frequency detection 2 is set for a multi function output Frequencies to be detected are set in Hz units Setting Range Factory Setting Control Methods Vit with PG Open Loop Vec tor 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vec tor 2 User Constant Tables w Name Control Methods Fact Open Open Description actory V f Loop Flux Loop F Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Display Speedagree Effective when Frequency detection speed agree 1 Desired fre width quency speed agree 1 or Frequency FOUT detection 1 Frequency FOUT detec Spd Agree tion 2 is set for a multi function Width output Sets the frequency detection width in Hz units Speedagree Effective when Desired fre detection quency speed agree 2 Fre level quency FOUT detection 3 or Frequ
458. nic thermal overload relay iRelated Constants E2 01 Name Display Motor rated current Motor Rated FLA Description Sets the motor rated current in 1 A units These set values will become the reference values for motor protec tion torque limits and torque con trol This constant is automatically set during autotuning 0 32to 6 40 2 Factory Setting 1 90A Control Methods Vif with PG Open Loop Vector 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vector 2 30EH E4 01 Motor 2 rated current Motor Rated FLA Sets the motor rated current in 1 A units These set values will become the reference values for motor protec tion torque limits and torque con trol This constant is automatically set during autotuning 0 32 6 40 T3 1 90A 321H L1 01 Motor protec tion selection MOL Fault Select Sets whether the motor overload function is enabled or disabled at electric thermal overload relay 0 Disabled 1 General purpose motor protection 2 Inverter motor protection 3 Vector motor protection In some applications when the Inverter power supply is turned off the thermal value is reset so even if this constant is set to 1 protection may not be effective When several motors are con nected to one Inverter set to 0 and ensure that each motor is installed with a protection device 0 to3 480H L1 02 Motor protec tion ti
459. not been performed Perform autotuning or set the motor constants through calculations Alternatively change the Control Method Selection A1 02 to V f control 0 or 1 7 31 _ _ _ _ w If There is Noise When the Inverter is Started or From an AM Radio If noise is generated by Inverter switching implement the following countermeasures Change the Inverter s Carrier Frequency Selection C6 02 to lower the carrier frequency This will help to some extent by reducing the amount of internal switching Install an Input Noise Filter at the Inverter s power supply input area Install an Output Noise Filter at the Inverter s power supply output area Use metal tubing Electric waves can be shielded by metal so encase the Inverter with metal steel Ground the Inverter and motor Separate main circuit wiring from control wiring If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Inverter is Run The Inverter performs internal switching so there is a certain amount of leakage current This may cause the ground fault interrupter to operate and cut off the power supply Change to a ground fault interrupter with a high leakage detection level i e a sensitivity current of 200 mA or greater per Unit with an operating time of 0 1 s or more or one that incorporates high frequency countermeasures 1 e one designed for use with Invert ers It will also help to some extent to change the Inverter s Carri
460. nput Output Terminal Power Supply Open Collec P1 P2 P3 P4 tor Outputs PC C3 C4 Class 2 power supply S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 12 SC LVLC power supply when using internal power supply Class 2 power supply when using exter Digital Inputs RP V V Al nal power supply A2 A3 AC Analog Inputs Binterrupting Rating Varispeed F7 is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 000 RMS symmetrical amperes 240 VAC maximum 200 V Class and 480 VAC maximum 400 V Class Use a circuit breaker or fuses having an interrupting rating not less than 100 000 RMS symmetrical amperes 600 VAC maximum iMotor Overheat Protection To protect the motor from overheating set the E2 01 constant in the Inverter to the same value as the level of the motor rated current Conformance to CE Markings Conformance to CE Markings Points regarding conformance to CE markings are given below CE Markings CE markings indicate conformance to safety and environmental standards that apply to business transactions including production imports and sales in Europe There are unified European standards for mechanical products Machine Directive electrical products Low Voltage Directive and electrical noise EMC Direc tive CE markings are required for business transactions in Europe including production imports and sales The Varispeed G7 Series Inverters be
461. ns m Name Control Methods eas Open Open em actory Vif Loop Flux Loo Display Description Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 2 ASR propor tional P gain 2 Usually setting is not necessary Set to change the rotational speed gain ASR P Gain 2 P C5 01 12C5 02 ASR inte P C5 03 gral I time I C5 04 2 gt Motor speed Hz ASR I Time 2 ASR limit Sets the upper limit for the compensation frequency for the speed control loop ASR Limit ASR to a percentage of the maximum output frequency ASR pri Sets the filter time constant for outputting mary delay torque references from the speed control time loop ASR It is set in 1 second units With open loop vector 2 control this set ASR Delay ting is enabled only for speeds in the range 0 to 35 Hz Usually setting is not necessary Time ASR switch Set the frequency for switching between ing fre Proportion Gain 1 2 and Integral Time 1 quency 2 in Hz units Speed control ASR proportional gain ASR Gain switching for a multi function input takes SW Freq priority ASR inte Set the upper limit of the speed control gral T limit loop integral as a percentage of the value ASR I Limit at the rated load ASR pri Sets the filter time constant for outputting mary delay torque references from the speed control time 2 loop ASR It is set in 1 second units With open loop vector 2
462. nspection 8 1 Maintenance and Inspection ssssssssssss HH 8 2 49 Outline of Walton st stets osttuce tenes fits e dere eM Rm oH e LEO 8 2 S Daily Inspections marania aa i hs ctp it sontes utet 8 2 Periodie Inspections oou Oo Se ol sel ll Dela Pe 8 2 Periodic Maintenance of Parts cccccscsssssssssessssssssssssecessesessssesseseseesstssesnsssacsneaceneaeees 8 3 Procedure for Adjusting Constants after Replacement of Control Board 8 3 Types and Number of Cooling Fans Used in the Drive c cccccccccsccesescescsestesestesesteseens 8 5 Cooling Fan Replacement Outline essent tnter tennntentnnnns 8 6 Circulation Fan Replacement Outline cccccccscsssscsscssssesssseseesesseccsceccseeeseseeeeeeeeseees 8 16 Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Board sssssss 8 21 9 Specificato NS oec P 9 1 Standard Inverter Specifications essesssesssssssseesseeeeeeee 9 2 Specifications by Modal i niente eden dete ses teens etn tote sess esten educated 9 2 Common Specifications sssssseeeteetettet tenente 9 4 Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices ssssssussse 9 6 10 e ADDOHCDCnu inchoat Ramen RSE AST DA Tact aman corda beruE Qum 10 1 Varispeed G7 Control Methods ccccccccccecceeaeeeaeeaeecaeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeee
463. nstant b3 02 is a current detection speed search current detection level for search completion When the current falls below the detection level the speed search is viewed as completed and the motor acceler ates or decelerates to the set frequency If a motor overload OL1 or an Inverter overload OL2 occurs and the motor cannot restart lower the set value If an overcurrent OC is detected when using speed search after recovery following a power loss lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 If a main circuit over voltage OV is detected when using a current detection speed search after a momen tary power loss lengthen the Speed search detection time b3 03 plication Precautions for Speed Searches Using Estimated Speed When using V f control with or without a PG always perform stationary autotuning for only line to line resistance before using speed searches based on estimated speeds When using vector control always perform rotational or stationary autotuning not stationary autotuning for line to line resistance only before using speed searches based on estimated speeds If the cable length between the motor and Inverter is changed after autotuning has been performed per form stationary autotuning for line to line resistance only again 1 i a The motor will not operate when stationary autotuning or stationary autotuning for line to line P resistance only is performed IMPORTANT 6 67 _ Speed Sea
464. nt fault Low speed regeneration fault Zero speed fault Rotation direction limit fault Protective and Diagnostic Functions E Alarm Detection Alarms are detected as a type of Inverter protection function that do not operate the fault contact output The system will automatically returned to its original status once the cause of the alarm has been removed The Digital Operator display blinks and an alarm is sent from the multi function outputs H2 01 to H2 05 if selected When an alarm occurs take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below Display EF blinking External Fault Table 7 3 Alarm Displays and Processing Meaning Forward Reverse Run Commands Input Together Both the forward and Reverse Run Commands have been ON for more than 0 5 s Probable causes Corrective Actions Check the sequence of the forward and Reverse Run Commands Since the rotational direction is unknown the motor will be deceler ated to a stop when this minor fault occurs UV blinking DC Bus Under volt Main Circuit Undervoltage The following conditions occurred when there was no Run signal The main circuit DC voltage was below the Undervoltage Detection Level Setting L2 05 The surge current limiting mag netic contactor opened The control power supply voltage See causes for UV1 UV2 and UV3 faults in the previous table See correc
465. nt motor torque or an overcurrent may occur because the motor is operated although the aforementioned conditions have not been fulfilled after stationary autotuning 1 For eleva tors failure to observe this caution may result in the cage falling or injury If so perform stationary autotuning 1 again and run the motor using the aforementioned procedure under the recommended conditions or perform stationary autotuning 2 or rotational autotuning Usually the standard setting for E2 02 is 1 Hz to 3 Hz and that for E2 03 is 3096 to 6596 of the rated current for a general purpose motor Generally the larger the motor capacity is the smaller the rated slip and the ratio of the no load current to the rated current become Use the data given in Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity 02 04 of Chap ter 5 User Constants as a reference B Trial Operation 5 WARNING Check to be sure that the front cover is attached before turning ON the power supply An electric shock may occur Do not come close to the machine when the fault reset function is used If the alarmed is cleared the machine may start moving suddenly Also design the machine so that human safety is ensured even when it is restarted Injury may occur Provide a separate emergency stop switch the Digital Operator STOP Key is valid only when its function is set Injury may occur 5 WARNING Reset alarms only after confirming that the RUN signal
466. nts are correct and there is no overvoltage fault then the motor s power is limited Consider increasing the motor capacity Troubleshooting H e The torque limit has been reached When a torque limit has been set in constants L7 01 to L7 04 no torque will be output beyond that limit This can cause the deceleration time to be too long Check to be sure that the value set for the torque limit is suit able If H3 09 Multi function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection or H3 05 Multi function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection is set to 10 11 12 or 15 positive and negative torque limit check to be sure that the analog input value is suitable mif the Vertical axis Load Drops When Brake is Applied The sequence is incorrect The Inverter goes into DC injection braking status for 0 5 seconds after deceleration is completed This is the factory set default To ensure that the brake holds set frequency detection 2 H2 01 5 for the multi function contact output ter minals M1 and Mw so that the contacts will turn OFF when the output frequency is greater than L4 01 3 0 to 5 0 Hz The contacts will turn ON below L4 01 There is hysteresis in frequency detection 2 i e a frequency detection width L4 02 2 0 Hz Change the setting to approximately 0 5 Hz if there are drops during stop Do not use the multi function contact output run signal H2 01 0 for the brake ON OFF signal If the Motor Ove
467. number shown on the front cover If nameplates become warn or damaged order new ones from your Yaskawa representatives or the nearest Yaskawa sales office Safety Information i 4 e IMPORTANT The following conventions are used to indicate precautions in this manual Failure to heed pre cautions provided in this manual can result in serious or possibly even fatal injury or damage to the products or to related equipment and systems Indicates precautions that if not heeded could possibly result in loss of life or serious injury Indicates precautions that if not heeded could result in relatively serious or minor injury damage to the product or faulty operation Failure to heed a precaution classified as a caution can result in serious consequences depending on the situation Indicates important information that should be memorized Safety Precautions B Confirmations upon Delivery AN CAUTION Never install an Inverter that is damaged or missing components Doing so can result in injury E Installation A CAUTION Always hold the case when carrying the Inverter If the Inverter is held by the front cover the main body of the Inverter may fall possibly resulting in injury Attach the Inverter to a metal or other noncombustible material Fire can result if the Inverter is attached to a combustible material Install a cooling fan or other cooling device when installing more
468. nverter must be connected 1 1 The motor capacity for which stable control is possible is 50 to 100 of the capac ity of the Inverter V f Control A1 02 0 Set either one of the fixed patterns 0 to E in E1 03 V f Pattern Selection or set F in E1 03 to specify a user set pattern as required for the motor and load characteristics in E1 04 to E1 13 in advanced program ming mode Simple operation of a general purpose motor at 50 Hz E1 03 0 Simple operation of a general purpose motor at 60 Hz E1 03 F default or 1 If E1 03 F the default setting in the user setting from E1 04 to E1 13 are for 60 Hz Perform stationary autotuning for the line to line resistance only if the motor cable is 50 m or longer for the actual installation or the load is heavy enough to produce stalling Refer to the following section on Autotuning for details on stationary autotuning V f Control with PG A1 02 1 Set either one of the fixed patterns 0 to E in E1 03 V f Pattern Selection or set F in E1 03 to specify a user set pattern as required for the motor and load characteristics in E1 04 to E1 13 in advanced program ming mode Simple operation of a general purpose motor at 50 Hz E1 03 0 Simple operation of a general purpose motor at 60 Hz E1 03 F default or 1 If E1 03 F the default setting in the user setting from E1 04 to E1 13 are for 60 Hz Set the number of motor poles in E2 04 Number of Motor Poles Set th
469. nverter product code or software Use the copy function for the same ID UNMATCH A SN number is different product code and software number YAP Inverter capacity que capacity Ofe lnyerter bemig Use the copy function for the same INV KVA matched copied and the capacity in the Digital ene indek UNMATCH I Operator are different Crier Capacity CRE The control method of the Inverter CONTROL MO ER being copied and the control method kenia oe 4 a SOPORE UNMATCH in the Digital Operator are different REA QA Copy The constant written to the Inverter CYE Verify error was compared with the constant in the Retry th COPY ERROR SY erro Digital Operator and they were differ SURE se ent The checksum in the Inverter constant area was compared with the checksum Beute CSE in the Digital Operator constant area ji PY SUM CHECK Checksum error and they were different ERROR The Inverter product code or software Use the copy function for the same number is different product code and software number VYE A VERIFY Verify error ai DigitalOp rator and Ifiverter sgt Retry the copy and verify again ERROR tings do not agree Verify CPE ID not matched The Inverter product code or software Use the copy function for the same ID UNMATCH number is different product code and software number Troubleshooting H Troubleshooting Due to constant setting errors faulty wiring and so on the Inverter and motor may not operate as expected
470. nverter s minimum block time baseblock time in units of one second when the Inverter is restarted after power loss ride through 2 03 Sets the time to approximately 0 1 to 12 s No AA A A A 487H 6 63 PwrL Base 9 7 times the motor secondary 5 0 1 6 66 block t circuit time constant When an overcurrent or over voltage occurs when starting a speed search or DC injection braking increase the set values Voltage Sets the time required to return recovery the Inverter output voltage to time normal voltage at the comple 12 04 tion of a speed search in units 0 0 to 0 3s No AA A A A 488H 6 63 of one second 5 0 6 66 PwrL V F Sets the time required to Rampt recover from 0 V to the maxi mum voltage Undervolt Sets the main circuit undervolt age detec age UV detection level main tion level circuit DC voltage in V units Usually setting is not necessary E D 190 V L2 05 210 No A A A A A 489H 6 64 Insert an AC reactor in the 5 2 PUV Det Inverter input side to lower the Level main circuit undervoltage detection level KEB decel Sets in seconds the time eration time required to decelerate from the speed where the deceleration at 0 0 to L2 06 0 0s No A A A A A 48AH KEB Fre momentary power loss com 200 0 quency mand KEB is input to zero speed Momentary recovery Set in seconds the time to time 12 07 accelerate to the set speed after 0 0 to 0s No A A A A 6 ASBH i UV recovery from a momentary 25 5
471. nverter side 2 There is no fan ground cable for the capacities without a finger guard Fig 8 10 Cooling Fan Replacement 200 V Class Inverters of 90 kW and 110 kW 8 13 _ 400 V Class Inverters of 185 kW and 220 kW Removing the Cooling Fan 1 Remove the terminal cover and top and bottom front covers from the front of the Inverter 2 Remove any cables that are connected to the cooling fan power relay board 3 Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan covers from the Inverter 4 Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one Mounting the Cooling Fan After attaching a new cooling fan reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components When attaching the cooling fan to the fan cover be sure that the airflow faces the top of the Inverter Make sure that the fan cable and the fan ground cable are not tangled or pinched Fan power relay board Front cover mounting screws Fan cover Fan cover a o o o T d SEED a D Tm Top front TIU i Dpr a IAT e n Terminal 1 Bottom cover fe f e e front i q b cover GH Is m EJ a e hhe aaoo jp g Dp d oj jo Oo Ojo o jo oj jooj j j oloLo o oko ojlo ojjojjo o 40 ojdio o o d 9 ojojo peg jellemnos SSE a ojoo ceneo A EDCpEMUE A o Terminal cover mounting screws Fan cable Fan cover mounting screws F
472. o 50 60 Hz Machine Protection 1 100 Motor Type Vector motor Short time 60 s Continuous Tolerance Load Characteristics Rated rotation speed 100 speed Frame ni ber 1200 LJ min Wi i i H Frame number Max speed Cooling Ability This motor yields a cooling effect even when operating at extremely low speeds approx 0 6 Hz Electronic Thermal Operation at 100 Motor Load Operates continuously at 0 6 to 60 Hz iof 160 MJ to 180 LJ i Frame number Max iw speed of 132 MJ inu Te x6 60 Hat Rotation speed Setting Motor Protection Operation Time Set the motor protection operation time in L1 02 If after operating the motor continuously at the rated current a 150 overload is experienced set the hot start electronic thermal protection operation time The factory setting is resistance to 150 for 60 seconds The following diagram shows an example of the characteristics of the electronic thermal protection operation time L1 02 1 0 min operation at 60 Hz general purpose motor characteristics when L1 01 is set to 1 Operating time min 10 Ucet 6 NENNT T M Oe Cold start d eertenseeeeceseas eoe dpa ee NB ocean becigecte 2 E MEM MEC S Hot start EL Motor current 0 100 150 200 E2 01 is set to 100 Fig 6 41 Motor Protection Operation Time i Setting Precautions f multi
473. o V f control with PG ON Speed feedback control disabled normal V f con trol Speed control integral reset ON Integral control disabled Not used Set when a terminal is not used Up command Always set with the down command Down command Always set with the up command FJOG command ON Forward run at jog frequency d1 17 RJOG command ON Reverse run at jog frequency d1 17 Fault reset Reset when turned ON Emergency stop Normally open condition Deceleration to stop in deceleration time set in C1 09 when ON 5 47 Control Methods Open Function Vif Loop Flux with Vec Vec PG tor tor Motor switch command Motor 2 selection Emergency stop Normally closed condition Deceleration to stop in deceleration time set in C1 09 when OFF Timer function input Functions are set in b4 01 and b4 02 and the timer function outputs are set in H1 LIL and H2 LILI PID control disable ON PID control disabled Accel Decel time 2 Constants write enable ON All constants can be written in OFF All constants other than frequency monitor are write protected Trim control increase ON d4 02 frequency is added to analog frequency refer ence Trim control decrease ON d4 02 frequency is subtracted from analog frequency reference Analog frequency reference sample hold External fault Desired settings possible Input
474. o cece hee ccanves Debt dn I tems 6 120 Torque CoHtOlz ose coke cicuta one ete net este M plc tue LOI EO Dee pu d 6 127 Speed Control ASR Structure 2 cccccccsecccsescssesecseseceseesssessesessssescesescenescenesceneseeees 6 136 Increasing the Speed Reference Response Feed Forward Control 6 142 9 Droop Control Function 6 e eot do etude a eo Ae ee ad 6 143 4 Zero servo FUDClom e uetus E c LIA ALD B nde n 6 145 Digital Operator FUlGUQrs i ccce die mdeta cr hec uaiobde Lea deua duda tubus 6 148 Setting Digital Operator Functions ssse s 6 148 Copying Constants caecitate me ttes eccesso e tout AE 6 151 Prohibiting Writing Constants from the Digital Operator 6 156 9 Setting a Password ere ote te a SO ML eU 6 156 Displaying User set Constants Only sse 6 157 OPTIONS 4 2 oed seas naan EA A erts ees en teret utei NUR dee eer ean 6 158 Performing Speed Control with PG 0 ccceccccessccessecsssessssesescesescesescesesceneseeteseeesees 6 158 Using Digital Output Boards sssssettn ttt tenens 6 162 Using an Analog Reference Board ccscccssccsssessssesessesecsesecseseceeseceeseceseceesecseses 6 164 Using a Digital Reference Board c cccccccssessssessesescssescesesessesecseseseesessesecessecseses 6 165 Using Inverters for Elevating Machines eeeeeeeeeee 6 170 Brake ON OFF Sequefice
475. oad is too large Reduce the load The acceleration time and decelera tion time are too short Lengthen the acceleration time and deceleration time The load is locked Check the mechanical system The settings in F1 10 and F1 11 aren t appropriate Check the settings in F1 10 and F1 11 Brake is applied to the motor Check for open circuit when using brake motor Protective and Diagnostic Functions w Display EFO blinking Opt External Fit Table 7 3 Alarm Displays and Processing Continued Meaning External Fault Detected for Com munications Board Other Than SI K2 Continuing operation was specified for EFO F6 03 3 and an external fault was input from the option board Probable causes Corrective Actions Remove the cause of the external fault EF3 blinking Ext Fault S3 External Fault Input Terminal S3 EF4 blinking Ext Fault S4 External Fault Input Terminal S4 EF5 blinking Ext Fault S5 External Fault Input Terminal S5 EF6 blinking Ext Fault S6 External Fault Input Terminal S6 EF7 blinking Ext Fault S7 External Fault Input Terminal S7 EF8 blinking Ext Fault S8 External Fault Input Terminal S8 EF9 blinking Ext Fault S9 External Fault Input Terminal S9 EF10 blinking Ext Fault S10 External Fault Input Terminal S10 EFII bl
476. of the PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient built into the windings of each motor phase iRelated Constants Name Con stant Number Display Alarm opera tion selection during motor overheating Description Set H3 09 to E and select the operation when the input motor temperature thermistor input exceeds the alarm detection level 1 17 V 0 Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1 02 Coast to stop Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 Continue operation H3 on the Operator flashes Setting Range Factory Setting Change during Opera tion VIf Control Methods Vif with PG Open Loop Vector 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vector MEMO BUS Regis ter Motor over heating opera tion selection MOL Filter Time Set H3 09 to E and select the operation when the motor temper ature thermistor input exceeds the operation detection level 2 34 V 0 Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1 02 1 Coast to stop 2 Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 Motor tempera ture input filter time constant MOL Filter Time Set H3 09 to E and set the pri mary delay time constant for motor temperature thermistor inputs in seconds Machine Protection E BPTC Thermistor Characteristics The following diagram shows the characteristics of the PTC t
477. of the following points When changing control method constants E1 07 to E1 10 will change to the factory settings for that control method Be sure to set the four frequencies as follows E1 04 FMAX 2 E1 06 FA gt E1 07 FB 2 E1 09 FMIN Individual Functions _ Torque Control With flux vector control or open loop vector 2 control the motor s output torque can be controlled by a torque reference from an analog input To control torque set d5 01 to 1 or set multi function contact inputs H1 O0 to 71 Speed Torque control and turn ON the contact Related Constants Con stant Number Name Display Description Setting Range Factory Setting Change during Opera tion Vif Control Methods Open Loop Vector 1 Vif with PG Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vector MEMO BUS Regis ter d5 01 Torque control selection Torq Control Sel 0 Speed control C5 01 to C5 07 1 Torque control This function is only available in flux vector control method To use the function for switching between speed and torque control set to 0 and set the multi function input to speed torque control change Oor1 No No No No A 29AH d5 02 Torque reference delay time Torq Ref Filter Set the torque reference filter pri mary delay time in ms units This function can be used to adjust the noise of the torque con trol signal or the responsiveness
478. ollowing range 1 32 lt F1 06 lt 1 For example if the dividing ratio is 1 2 set value 2 half of the number of pulses from the PG are monitor outputs iDetecting PG Open Circuit Select the stopping method when PG cable disconnected is detected and the PG open circuit PGO detection time When the Inverter is operating with the frequency reference set to 1 minimum except when operating on direct current if the speed feedback from PG is greater than the time setting in F1 14 PGO is detected iDetecting Motor Overspeed An error is detected when the number of motor rotations exceeds the regulated limit An overspeed OS is detected when a frequency that exceeds the set value in F1 08 continues for longer than the time set in F1 09 After detecting an overspeed OS the Inverter stops according to the setting in F1 03 iDetecting Speed Difference between the Motor and Speed Reference An error is detected when the speed deviation i e the difference between the designated speed and the actual motor speed is too great Speed deviation DEV is detected after a speed agreement is detected and when the speed reference and actual workpiece speed are within the setting of L4 02 if a speed deviation great than the set value in F1 10 continues for longer than the time set in F1 11 After a speed deviation is detected the Inverter stops according to the setting in F1 04 _ Using Digital Output Boards There are two type
479. ommand or RJOG Jog Reference command is ON Control Methods Vif with PG Open Loop Vector 1 Flux Vec tor Note The unit is set in 01 03 Frequency units of reference setting and monitor The default for 01 03 is 0 increments of 0 01 Hz The setting range for open loop vector 2 control is 0 to 66 0 0 to 132 0 for PRG 1030 Multi Function Contact Inputs H1 01 to H1 10 Function 12 FJOG command ON Forward run at jog frequency d1 17 Open Loop Vector 2 Control Methods 13 RJOG command ON Reverse run at jog frequency d1 17 BApplication Precautions Jog frequencies using FJOG and RJOG commands are given priority over other frequency references When both FJOG command and RJOG commands are ON for 500 ms or longer at the same time the Inverter stops according to the setting in b1 03 stopping method selection 6 84 Input Terminal Functions w Stopping the Inverter by Notifying Programming Device Errors to the Inverter External Fault Function The external fault function performs the error contact output and stops the Inverter operation if the Inverter peripheral devices break down or an error occurs The digital operator will display EFx External fault input terminal Sx The x in EFx shows the terminal number of the terminal that input the external fault signal For example if an external fault
480. on pensation gain as a ratio gain Usually setting is not neces sary Adjust in the following cir cumstances When the cable is long increase the set value When the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity Max applicable motor capacity increase the set values When the motor is oscillat Torq Comp ing decrease the set val Gain ues Adjust the output current range at minimum speed rota tion so that it does not exceed the Inverter rated output cur rent Do not alter the torque com pensation gain from its default 1 00 when using the open loop vector 1 control method Torque com The torque compensation pensation delay time is set in ms units primary Usually setting is not neces delay time sary constant Adjust in the following cir cumstances When the motor is oscillat ing increase the set values When the responsiveness of the motor is low decrease the set values Torq Comp Time Forward starting torque Sets the forward starting torque as a percentage of the F motor rated torque TorqCmp start Reverse starting torque Sets the reverse starting torque as a percentage of the R motor rated torque TorqCmp start Starting torque time Sets the delay time in ms for constant starting torque The filter is disabled if the time is set to 0 TorqCmp to 4 ms DelayT The factory settin
481. on is faulty Disconnect and then reconnect the Digital Operator Inverter control circuit is faulty Replace the Inverter CPF00 COM ERR Digital Operator Communications Error 1 Communications with the Digital Operator were not established within 5 seconds after the power was turned on The Digital Operator s connector isn t connected properly Disconnect the Digital Operator and then connect it again The Inverter s control circuits are faulty Replace the Inverter CPU External RAM Fault Try turning the power supply off and on again The control circuits were destroyed Replace the Inverter CPFO1 COM ERR OP amp INV Digital Operator Communications Error 2 After communications were estab lished there was a communications error with the Digital Operator for more than 2 seconds The Digital Operator isn t connected properly Disconnect the Digital Operator and then connect it again The Inverter s control circuits are faulty Replace the Inverter CPF02 BB Circuit Err Baseblock Circuit Error Try turning the power supply off and on again The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter CPF03 EEPROM Error EEPROM Error Try turning the power supply off and on again The Inverter power supply was shut off while writing data to the Inverter constants Initialize the constant settings A1 03 The control circ
482. on may not be effective When several motors are con nected to one Inverter set to 0 and ensure that each motor is installed with a protection device Motor pro Sets the electric thermal detec tection time tion time in seconds units constant Usually setting is not necessary The factory setting is 150 overload for one minute When the motor s overload MOL Time resistance is known also set the Const overload resistance protection time for when the motor is hot started Alarm oper Set H3 09 to E and select the ation selec operation when the input motor tion during temperature thermistor input motor over exceeds the alarm detection heating level 1 17 V 0 Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1 02 Coast to stop Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 Continue operation H3 on the Operator flashes 5 58 Name Display Motor over heating operation selection MOL Filter Time Description Set H3 09 to E and select the operation when the motor tem perature thermistor input exceeds the operation detec tion level 2 34 V 0 Decelerate to stop using the deceleration time in C1 02 1 Coast to stop 2 Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 Factory Setting User Constant Tables _ Control Methods Vif with PG Open Loop Vec tor 1 Flux Vec tor Op
483. on width Set the speed detection range in Hz Spd Agree Width 6 50 Machine Protection w Name Control Methods Factory vig Open Setting with LOOP Con stant Description Number Display Open Flux Loop Vec PG i ir Verior Speed agree detection level Set the speed that you want to detect in Hz Set positive values for forward negative values for reverse Spd Agree Lvl Speed agree detection width Set the speed detection range in Hz Spd Agree Width 4 ilConstants and Output Signals User Constant Number Function Fref Set Agree 1 Frequency Detection 1 Frequency Detection 2 Frequency Detection 5 Speed agree detection level Fref Fout Agree 1 Fref Set Agree 1 Speed agree detection width Frequency Detection 1 Frequency Detection 2 Frequency Detection 5 Fref Set Agree 2 Speed agree detection level Frequency Detection 3 Frequency Detection 4 Fref Fout Agree 2 6 Fref Set Agree 2 NEN Frequency Detection 3 Frequency Detection 4 Speed agree detection width Set the corresponding setting in the multi function output H2 01 to H2 05 to output the desired Fref Fout Agree signal Fref Set Agree signal or Frequency Detection signal Function Setting Fref Fout Agree 1 Fref Set Agree 1 Frequency Detection 1 Frequency Detection 2 F
484. onfigured of many parts and these parts must be operating properly in order to make full use of the Inverter functions Among the electronic components there are some that require maintenance depending on their usage condi tions In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time it is necessary to perform period inspections and replace parts according to their service life Periodic inspection standards vary depending the Inverter s installation environment and usage conditions The Inverter s maintenance periods are noted below Keep them as reference Refer to Cooling Fan Replacement Outline Page 8 6 for replacing a cooling fan and Circulation Fan Replacement Outline Page 8 16 for replacing a circulation fan To replace other parts contact your Yaskawa representative or YASKAWA ELECTRIC ENGINEERING CORPORATION for details on preventive maintenance for Inverters Table 8 2 Part Replacement Guidelines Standard Replacement Period Replacement Method Cooling fan 2 to 3 years Replace with new part Soothing capacity dois Replace with new part Determine need by inspection Breaker relays Determine need by inspection Fuses 10 years Replace with new part Replace with new board Determine need by Aluminum capacitors on PCBs 5 years inspection Note The standard replacement period is based on the following usage conditions Ambient temperature Yearly average of 30 C Loa
485. ons can be set drive torque limit Torq Limit Rev Output torque Positive torque Forward L7 01 No of regenera SENN a motor ved R Regenerative tati everse Ive torque Estate rotations E 4 SSA s v limit Reseneraive Forward SSR Torq Lmt L7 03 Fwd Rgn Negative torque Reverse regenera tive torque limit Torq Lmt Rev Rgn Integral time set ting for torque limit Set the integral time for the torque limit When integral control is set for the torque limit reduce this setting to increase the change in frequency for the torque limit Normally handled with PRG 10301 Torq Limit Time Control method selection for torque limitduring accelera Select the control method for the torque limit during acceleration and decelera tion 0 Proportional control integral control during constant speed 1 Integral control Normally this constant does not need to be set Normally handled with PRG 10301 tion and decelera tion Torque Limit Sel Machine Protection eee Multi function Analog Input H3 05 H3 09 Control Methods Function Contents 100 Positive torque limit Motor s rated torque Negative torque limit Motor s rated torque Regenerative torque limit Motor s rated torque Positive negative torque limit Motor s rated torque Note The forward torque limit is the
486. onstant at the follow ing times When actual speed is low increase the set value When actual speed is high decrease the set value Used as the applicable control gain when using flux vector con trol Factory Setting Control Methods Vit with PG Open Loop Vector 1 Flux Vec tor Slip compensa tion primary delay time Slip Comp Time Slip compensation primary delay time is set in ms units Usually setting is not necessary Adjust this constant at the follow ing times Reduce the setting when slip compensation responsive is slow When speed is not stabilized increase the setting Slip compensa tion limit Slip Comp Limit Sets the slip compensation limit as a percentage of motor rated slip Slip compensa tion selection during regener ation Slip Comp Regen 0 Disabled 1 Enabled When the slip compensation dur ing regeneration function has been activated as regeneration capacity increases momentarily it may be necessary to use a braking option braking resistor Braking Resistor Unit or Braking Unit Output voltage limit operation selection Output V limit 0 Disabled 1 Enabled The motor flux will be lowered automatically when the output voltage become saturated The factory setting will change when the control method is changed The open loop vector 1 factory settings are given
487. ontrol Methods Autotuning methods depend on the control method set for the Inverter Make the settings required by the con trol method B Overview of Settings Make the required settings in quick programming mode and autotuning mode according to the following flow chart START NO Vector control A1 02 2 3 or 4 YES A1 02 0 or 1 Vif Control mode selection YES NO A1 02 1 Default A1 02 0 Set E1 03 Set E1 03 E2 04 and F1 01 2 4 Vif default 200V 60Hz 400V 60Hz V f default 200V 60Hz 400V 60Hz Motor cable over 50 m or heavy load possibly causing motor to stall or overload OK to operate motor during autotuning 1 connected to motor when YES YES oe motor first time NO Stationary autotuning for Rotational 4 Stationary 4 Stationary 4 line to line resistance only autotuning autotuning 1 autotuning 2 END Note If the motor cable changes to 50 m or longer for the actual installation perform stationary autotuning for the line to line resistance only on site Use rotational autotuning to increase autotuning accuracy whenever it is okay for the motor to be operated Always perform rotational autotuning when using open loop vector 2 control If there is a reduction gear between the motor and PG set the reduction ratio in F1 12 and F1 13 The default setting of the Inverter is for open loop vector 1 control A1 02 2 o X AUN If the maximum
488. ontrol board pulse output Division ratio 1 n m n 0 or PG Output Ratio 1 m 1 to 32 F1 06 0 n m This constant is only effective when a PG B2 is used The possible division ratio set tings are 1 32 lt F1 06 lt 1 Factory Setting Control Methods Vif with PG Open Loop Vector 1 Flux Vec tor Options E Open Loop Vector 2 Integral value during accel decel enable disable PG Ramp PI I Sel Sets integral control during accel eration deceleration to either enabled or disabled 0 Disabled The integral function isn t used while accelerating or decelerating it is used at constant speeds Enabled The integral function is used at all times Overspeed detection level PG Overspd Level Overspeed detection delay time PG Overspd Time Sets the overspeed detection method Frequencies above that set for F1 08 set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency that continue to exceed this frequency for the time set in F1 09 are detected as overspeed faults Excessive speed deviation detection level PG Deviate Level Excessive speed deviation detection delay time PG Deviate Time Sets the speed deviation detection method Any speed deviation above the F1 10 set level set as a percent age of the maximum output fre quency that continues for the time set in F1 11 is detected as a sp
489. oo UX Loo i Number Display Range Setting d VIf with TRA Vecer negis 1 or 2 Pulse train input function 0 Frequency reference selection 1 PID feedback value 2 PID target value Pulse Input Sel Pulse train input scaling Set the number of pulses in hertz taking the reference to be 100 PI Scaling Pulse train input gain Set the input gain level as a per cent when the pulse train set in Pulse Input H6 02 is input Gain Pulse train input bias Set the input bias when the pulse train is 0 Pulse Input Bias 6 Pulse train Set the pulse train input primary E input filter time delay filter time constant in sec PI Filter Time onds The following diagram shows the method for adjusting the frequency reference using pulse inputs Gain and bias Filter 0 Master speed RP l 1 frequency ALIL a i o i PID feedback Pulse 7 T00 ER NN PID target value Scaling using H6 02 Fig 6 31 Frequency Reference Adjustments Using Pulse Train Inputs 6 33 Speed Limit Frequency Reference Limit Func tion This section explains how to limit the motor speed Limiting Maximum Output Frequency If you do not want the motor to rotate above a given frequency use constant d2 01 Set the upper limit value of the Inverter output frequency as a percent taking E1 04 Maximum Output Fre quency to be 100 iRelated
490. op Range Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 2 Display Field forcing function Set the field forcing function selection 0 Disabled Field Force 1 Enabled Sel AOR time Set the factor to multiple constant times the secondary circuit time constant of the motor to achieve the AOR time constant AOR time constant Secondary circuit time A PHIR constant x d6 05 Filter AQR will not function when d6 05 is 0 If d6 05 is not 0 the lower limit of the value will be internally adjusted to 200 ms in the Inverter Field forcing Set the excitation current ref limit erence s upper limit for field forcing Set the limit as a per centage taking the motor s no load current as 10095 FieldForce Enabled for operation other Limit than DC excitation Usually there is no need to change this setting 5 32 User Constant Tables w E Motor Constant Constants The following settings are made with the motor constant constants E constants V f characteristics and motor constants B V f Pattern E1 User constants for V f characteristics are shown in the following table Name Display Input volt age setting Input Volt age Description Set the Inverter input voltage in 1 volt This setting is used as a reference value in protection functions Setting Range Factory Setting Control Methods
491. or Not used always 0 1 Parity error Overrun error Framing error 1 Timeout Not used always 0 4 Cannot be output Cooling fan operating time FAN Elapsed Time Monitors the total operating time of the cooling fan The time can be set in 02 10 Cannot be output Estimated motor flux Mot Flux EST Monitors the calculated value of the motor flux 100 is dis played for the rated motor flux 10 V Rated motor flux Motor flux current compensa tion Id Comp Value Monitors motor flux current compensation value 10096 is displayed for the rated second ary current of the motor 10 V Rated secondary cur rent of motor 10 V to 10 V ASR out put without filter ASR Out put w Fil Monitors the output from the speed control loop i e the primary filter input value 100 is displayed for rated secondary current of the motor 10 V Rated secondary cur rent of motor 10 V to 10 V Feed for ward con trol output FF Cout Output Monitors the output from feed forward control 100 is dis played for rated secondary current of the motor 10 V Rated secondary cur rent of motor 10 V to 10 V User Constant Tables w Ename ControlMethods Methods Con Output Signal Level stant Displ Description During Multi Function y a vit 7 Number Isplay Analog Output wt ec 1
492. or 1 0 to 10 V 100 frequency Analog F ri cs V eue AM Multi function analog moni Factory setting Current monitor e io ine puts tor nverter s rated current 2 5 V I d i AC Analog common 7 Factory setting Frequency reference input ad RP Multi function pulse input ionis 0 i a x p 0 to 32 kHz 3 KQ T O TER MP Multi function pulse monitor Pactory setting O tput trequericy 0 to 32 kHz 2 2 KQ H6 06 2 R MEMOBUS communica Differential input photo ti i t ler isolati RS R E For 2 wire RS 485 short R and S as well Pep E 4 R and S 485 S MEMOBUS communica Der Differential output pho 422 S tions output tocoupler isolation IG Communications shield wire x For a3 wire sequence the default settings are a 3 wire sequence for S5 multi step speed setting 1 for S6 and multi step speed setting 2 for S7 and jog frequency command for S8 2 When driving a reactive load such as a relay coil always insert a flywheel diode as shown in Fig 2 17 3 Pulse input specifications are given in the following table 4 Use the photocoupler outputs when the minimum permissible load is 5 VDC or less and 10 mA or less Low level voltage 0 0to 0 8 V High level voltage 3 5 to 13 2 V H duty 30 to 70 Pulse frequency 0 to 32 kHz 2 25 oe nee diode The rating of the flywheel diode I l Col 7 Y must be at least as high as the External power 48 V max
493. or 2 leak inductance Motor rated slip Motor 2 rated capacity Motor no load current PG constant Number of motor poles Operation selection at PG open cir cuit PGO Motor line to line resistance Operation selection at overspeed OS Motor leak inductance Operation selection at deviation Motor iron saturation coefficient 1 PG rotation Motor iron saturation coefficient 2 PG division rate PG pulse moni tor Motor mechanical loss Integral value during accel decel enable disable Motor iron loss for torque compen sation Overspeed detection level Motor rated output Overspeed detection delay time Motor iron saturation coefficient 3 Excessive speed deviation detec tion level Motor 2 control method selection Excessive speed deviation detec tion delay time Motor 2 max output frequency FMAX Number of PG gear teeth 1 Motor 2 max voltage VMAX Number of PG gear teeth 2 Motor 2 max voltage frequency FA PG open circuit detection time Motor 2 mid output frequency 1 FB Bi polar or uni polar input selec tion Motor 2 mid output frequency voltage 1 VC Digital input option Motor 2 min output frequency FMIN Channel 1 monitor selection Motor 2 min output frequency voltage VMIN Channel 1 gain Table 10 7 User Constants Continued Channel 2 monitor se
494. or s rated current 2 The voltage of the cooling fan for 200 V Class Inverters of 30 kW is three phase 200 208 or 220 V at 50 Hz or 200 208 220 or 230 V at 60 Hz 3 A 3 wire transformer is required on the power supply for 12 phase rectification 8400 V Class Model Number CIMR G7A O M ax applicable motor output kW Standard Inverter Specifications Table 9 2 400 V Class Inverters 22 3 7 Rated input current A 5 8 7 4 10 8 Output ratings Rated output capacity kVA 3 4 7 6 9 21 Rated output current A 4 8 6 2 9 15 21 27 Max output voltage V 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480 VAC Proportional to input voltage Max output frequency Hz Frequencies supported up to 400 Hz using constant setting Power supply characteristics Rated voltage V Rated frequency Hz 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480 VAC 50 60 Hz Allowable voltage fluctua tion 1095 1596 Allowable frequency fluc tuation 5 M easures for DC reactor Optional Built in power supply 12 phase rec harmonics tification Model Number CIMR G7A O M ax applicable motor output 37 Not possible 45 55 as 90 110 132 Possible 160 Rated input current A 88 107 141 182 215 264 297 332 Output ratings Rated output capacity kVA 61 74 98
495. osition Cooling fan mounting screws Fig 8 3 Cooling Fan Replacement 200 V Class Inverters of 45 kW and 55 kW 8 8 Maintenance and Inspection eee Attaching the Fan Cover 1 Tilt the fan cover toward the bottom of the Inverter as shown in Fig 8 4 and insert it to the mounting hole until it meets with A Fan cover Bottom Inverter lt Cooling fan 3 Top Inverter Fig 8 4 2 Push the fan cover toward the top of the Inverter Fig 8 5 3 Make sure that there is no gap between the fan cover and A Then screw it in place with the three screws 8 Make sure that there is no gap A Fig 8 6 _ 200 V Class Inverters of 30 kW and 37 kW Removing the Cooling Fan 1 Remove the terminal cover Inverter cover Digital Operator and front cover from the front of the Inverter 2 Remove the panel to which the control board the gate drive board and the cooling fan power relay board are mounted Remove any cables that are connected to the control board the gate drive board and the cooling fan power relay board The cable that is connected to the control circuit terminals can be removed together with the control circuit terminal board Refer to page 8 21 3 Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter 4 Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one Mounting the Cooling Fan After attaching a new cooling fan reve
496. ot operate if a Run command is not sent Corrective Actions If the indicator on the RUN Key is not lit the Run Command is not sent Input the Run Command The operation method selection is wrong b1 02 has to be set according to the Run Command input method to be used b1 02 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal factory setting 2 MEMOBUS communications 3 Option board 4 Pulse train input Set b1 02 according to the Run Command input method to be used The frequency reference is too low The frequency reference has to be set above the frequency set in E1 09 Minimum Out put Frequency If the indicator on the STOP Key is flash ing check the frequency reference moni tor U1 01 and set the frequency reference above the frequency set in E1 09 7 21 Table 7 7 Troubleshooting when Motor Does Not Operate Continued Probable Causes Descriptions Corrective Actions The frequency reference selection is wrong b1 01 has to be set according to the fre quency reference input method to be used b1 01 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal factory setting 2 MEMOBUS communications 3 Option board 4 Pulse train input Set b1 01 according to the frequency ref erence input method to be used The MENU Key was pressed The ESC Key was pressed twice If the MENU Key is pressed once or the ESC Key is pressed twice the Inverter will exit the
497. ote 3 about E2 03 and E4 03 Note 8 about T1 09 Chapter 6 Addition Inputting Master Speed Frequency Reference Only Current Input in Frequency Reference Following items in Continuing Operation IMPORTANT in Speed Search Additional description of master speed analog input in Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is Lost Varispeed F7 Function Block Frequency Detection 5 in Using Frequency Detection Setting the V f Pattern Description about the changes in the OV and BTR levels that depend on the input volt age in Setting the V f Pattern Torque Control Description of setting speed limit bias Comparing Inverter Constants and Digital Operator Constant Set Values VERIFY under Digital Operator Functions Description of error display CPE Using Inverters for Elevating Machines Description about frequency detection 5 which is an Inverter output signal to engage a holding brake IMPORTANT about precautions on trial operation IMPORTANT in Brake ON OFF Sequence Current Alarm Function Peak Hold Current Monitoring Function Maintenance Timer Display Function Date of Rev June 2006 Chapter 6 Revision Chapter 7 Addition Revision Restarting Operation After Transient Fault Auto Restart Function under Continuing Operation Description of OHI detection of Inverter s cooling fan fault Fig 6 50 Baseblock Commands Fig 6 64 PID Control Block Torque Control under Individual
498. output from the terminal is 10 V A meter cali Terminal AM Bias bration function is available Analog out put 1 signal Sets the signal output level for level selec Multi function output termi tion nal FM 0 10 to 10 V output AO Level 1 10 to 10 V output Select 5 54 The CHI output can be adjusted w The CH2 output can be adjusted w For analog output the value equivalent to 10096 of output value of monitored item is multiplied by the gain se Name Display Analog out put 2 signal level selec tion Description Sets the signal output level for multi function output 2 termi nal AM AO Level Select2 0 0 to 10 V output 1 0 to 10 V output BMEMOBUS Communications H5 User constants for MEMOBUS communications are shown in the following table Con stant Number Name Display Slave address Serial Comm Adr Description Set the Inverter s slave address Factory Setting Factory Setting Change during Opera tion User Constant Tables _ Control Methods Vif with PG Open Loop Vec tor 1 Flux Vec tor Control Methods Vit with PG Open Loop Vec tor 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vec tor 2 en the H4 02 or H4 03 setting is displayed in Quick Advanced or Verify mode while the motor is stopped en the H4 05 or H4 06 setting
499. ovided in the following illustrations for the PG D2 Inverter Three phase 200 VAC 400 VAC Power supply 12 V Power supply ov Power supply 5 V Pulse input A B Pulse input y Pulse monitor output Shielded twisted pair wires must be used for signal lines Do not use the pulse generator s power supply for anything other than the pulse generator encoder Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise The length of the pulse generator s wiring must not be more than 100 meters Fig 2 28 PG D2 Wiring BWiring the PG X2 Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG X2 Three phase Inverter 200 VAC 400 VAC H8 BM SRI f d z Ar B2 SA2 viT2 3 H ET wisi 1 Power supply 12 V Power supply O V T1 Power supply 5 V A phase pulse input A phase pulse input B phase pulse input um B phase pulse input ooo H A phase pulse monitor output B phase pulse monitor output eee H H I al Aj Z phase pulse monitor output a a le em Shielded twisted pair wires must be used for signal lines Do not use the pulse generator s power supply for anything other than the pulse generator encoder Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due to noise The length of the pulse generator s wiring must not be more than 100 meters The direction of rotation
500. ower Limit Using an Analog Input If you set constant H3 09 Multi function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection or H3 05 Multi function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection to 9 frequency reference lower limit level you can adjust the frequency lower level using the terminal A2 input level Output frequency lower level Max output frequency E1 04 Multi function analog input ov 10v terminal A2 or A3 input level 4 mA 20 mA Fig 6 32 Output Frequency Lower Level for Multi function Analog Input If constant d2 02 and terminal A2 output frequency lower level have been set at the same time the larger set S value will become the frequency lower limit INFO 6 35 Improved Operating Efficiency This section explains functions for improving motor operating efficiency Reducing Motor Speed Fluctuation Slip Compensation Function When the load is large the amount of motor slip also grows large and the motor speed decreases The slip compensation function controls the motor at a constant speed regardless of changes in load When the motor is operating at the rated load constant E2 02 Motor Rated Slip x the frequency in constant C3 01 is added to 6 36 the output frequency iRelated Constants Name Display Slip compensa tion gain Slip Comp Gain Description Used to improve speed accuracy when operating with a load Usually setting is not necessary Adjust this c
501. own Above Chapter 2 Addition Note in Table 2 4 Main Circuit Terminal Functions IMPORTANT 12 13 and 14 in Connection Diagram IMPORTANT in Standard Connection Diagrams Table 2 14 Option Board Specifications MECHATROLINK Communication Board Fig 2 22 Cutting the Front Cover Revision IMPORTANT 2 in Connection Diagram Factory setting for multi function photo coupler output 4 frequency detection 2 gt minor fault Table 2 2 400 V Class Wire Sizes Following recommended wire sizes G7A4185 G7A4220 G7A4300 Description of installing a ground fault interrupter in Wiring the Main Circuits Fig 2 24 Wiring an Open collector Input Chapter 4 Addition Precautions for precision settings Description of stationary autotuning 2 Revision Fig 4 1 Trial Operation Flowchart Fig 4 3 Settings According to the Control Method Checking Operating Status under Loaded Operation Chapter 5 Addition Following constants b3 17 b3 18 b3 19 F6 08 F6 09 H5 10 L8 32 L8 39 L8 41 U1 61 U1 63 U1 83 U1 84 U2 21 U2 22 02 18 T1 09 2 setting of b1 08 4 setting of T1 01 Note in the table of L2 constants Note 2 in the table of U2 constants 2F 36 and 3D settings of multi function output terminal Note 5 about C4 02 in the table in Factory Settings that Change with the Control Method A1 02 L8 39 in the table in Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity 02 04 Revision Note 2 about E2 01 N
502. pensation of the motor speed is disabled because torque control is given priority Therefore the acceleration and deceleration times may increase or the number of motor rotations may decrease When using the torque limit to raise and lower loads do not carelessly lower the torque limit value as this may result in the motor falling or slipping Torque limits using an analog input are the upper limit value during 10 V or 20 mA input of 10096 of the motor rated torque To make the torque limit value during 10 V or 20 mA input 150 of the rated torque set the input terminal gain to 150 0 96 Adjust the gain for multi function analog input terminal A2 using H3 10 and for multi function analog input terminal A3 using H3 06 The torque limit accuracy is 5 at the output frequency of 10 Hz or above When output frequency is less than 10 Hz accuracy is lowered When the torque is limited while L7 07 is set to 1 integral control the acceleration and deceleration times may increase or the motor speed may not agree with the speed reference value Machine Protection NM Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation Stall prevention during operation prevents the motor from stalling by automatically lowering the Inverter s output frequency when a transient overload occurs while the motor is operating at a constant speed Stall prevention during operation is enabled only during V f control If the Inverter output
503. placement of Control Board Rated input current in Table 9 1 200 V Class Inverters and Table 9 2 400 V Class Inverters Notes 7 and 8 in Table 9 3 Common Specifications MECHATROLINK Communications Interface Board SI T in Table 9 5 Option Boards Conformance to UL standard Conformance to CE markings Note 4 in Fig 10 9 November 2007 Revision Address March 2008 Revision Address June 2008 Revision Address Varispeed G7 INSTRUCTION MANUAL IRUMA BUSINESS CENTER SOLUTION CENTER 480 Kamifujisawa Iruma Saitama 358 8555 Japan hone 81 4 2962 5696 Fax 81 4 2962 6138 YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA INC 2121 Norman Drive South Waukegan IL 60085 U S A Phone 1 847 887 7000 Fax 1 847 887 7370 YASKAWA ELETRICO DO BRASIL LTDA Avenida Fagundes Filho 620 Sao Paulo SP CEP 04304 000 Brazil Phone 55 11 3585 1100 Fax 55 11 5581 8795 YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH Hauptstra e 185 65760 Eschborn Germany Phone 49 6196 569 300 Fax 49 6196 569 398 ASKAWA ELECTRIC UK LTD Hunt Hill Orchardton Woods Cumbernauld G68 9LF United Kingdom hone 44 1236 735000 Fax 44 1236 458182 ASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION F Doore Bldg 24 Yeoido dong Youngdungpo Ku Seoul 150 877 Korea hone 82 2 784 7844 Fax 82 2 784 8495 ASKAWA ELECTRIC SINGAPORE PTE LTD 51 Lorong Chuan 404 01 New Tech Park 556741 Singapore hone 65 6282 3003 Fax 65 6289 3003 ASKAWA ELECTRIC SHANGHAI CO LTD 0 18 Xizang Zhong Road Room 1702 1707
504. play Monitor Display Setting Display ENTER VERIFY Main Menu ATUNE Main Menu 11 05 60 0Hz 0 0 400 0 0 0Hz q T1 W 60 0Hz 0 0 400 0 Q 0Hz DRIVE Main Menu A TUNE 48 0Hz 10 5A START gt gt gt gt gt gt gt GOAL 0 0Hz 0 0A 48 0Hz 10 5A i Tuning Ready 2 START gt GOAL Tune Successful 3 Main Menu The display will automatically change depending on the status of STOP key autotuning TUNE A TUNE Tune Aborted lune Successful TUn10 will be displayed during rotational autotuning and TUn11 will be displayed during stationary autotuning The DRIVE indicator will light when autotuning starts Fig 3 9 Operation in Autotuning Mode 1 s P The setting displays in for autotuning depend on the control method V f V f with PG or open loop vector If P a fault occurs during autotuning refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting e IMPORTANT Trial Operation This chapter describes the procedures for trial operation of the Inverter and provides an example of trial operation Overview of Trial Operation Procedure 4 2 Trial Operation Procedures esses 4 3 Adjustment Suggestions seessssss 4 18 Overview of Trial Operation Procedure Perform trial operation accord
505. ple motors are connected to one Inverter set constant L1 01 to 0 disabled To protect the motor install a thermal relay in the motor power cable and perform overload protection on each motor With applications where the power supply is often turned ON and OFF there is a risk that the circuit cannot be pro tected even if this constant has been set to 1 enabled because the thermal value will be reset To detect overloads in good time set the set value in constant L1 02 to a low setting When using a general purpose motor standard motor the cooling ability will be lowered by t fre quency Consequently the frequency may cause motor overload protection OL1 to occur even below the rated current If operating using the rated current at a low frequency use a special motor e 59 i Setting the Motor Overload Pre Alarm If the motor overload protection function 1s enabled i e L1 01 is set to other than 0 and you set H2 01 to H2 05 multi function output terminals M1 M2 P1 PC P2 PC P3 C3 and P4 C4 function selection to 1F motor overload OL1 pre alarm the motor overload pre alarm will be enabled If the electronic thermal value reaches minimum 90 of the overload detection level the output terminal that has been set will be turned ON Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs Perform motor overheating protection using the thermistor temperature resistance characteristics
506. power supply off and on again The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter Watchdog Timer Fault Try turning the power supply off and on again The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter CPF09 CPU Err CPU ASIC Mutual Diagnosis Fault Try turning the power supply off and on again The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter CPF10 ASIC Err ASIC Version Fault The Inverter control circuit is faulty Replace the Inverter CPF20 Option A D error Communications Option Board A D Converter Error The option board is not connected properly Turn off the power and insert the board again The option board s A D converter is faulty Replace the Communications Option Board CPF21 Option CPU down Communications Option Board Self Diagnostic Error CPF22 Option Type Err Communications Option Board Model Code Error Communications Option Board fault Replace the option board 7 11 Display Table 7 1 Fault Displays and Processing Continued Meaning Communications Option Board DPRAM Error Probable Causes Communications Option Board fault Corrective Actions Replace the option board The copy function of the Digital Oper ator was used during communications Use the copy function off line Use the copy function with an option board removed The option board is not connected prope
507. power to the Inverter through the MCCB Doing so can result in electric shock After turning OFF the main circuit power supply wait until the CHARGE indicator light goes out before performing maintenance or inspections The capacitor will remain charged and is dangerous Maintenance inspection and replacement of parts must be performed only by authorized person nel Remove all metal objects such as watches and rings before starting work Always use grounded tools Failure to heed these warning can result in electric shock For 400 V class Inverters of 55 kW to 300 kW with SPEC E or later take safety measures such as the installation of an emergency stop switch before adjusting constants Failure to do so may result in injury caused by the motor accidentally rotating during stationary autotuning performed by the Inverter when the constants are adjusted Provide a separate holding brake if necessary Always make any adjustments other than those involving the operation of the Inverter with the holding brake released Failure to observe this caution may result in injury If using an Inverter with an elevator take safety measures on the elevator to prevent the elevator from dropping Failure to observe this caution can result in injury AN CAUTION ACMOS IC is used in the control board Handle the control board and CMOS IC carefully The CMOS IC can be destroyed by static electricity if touched directly Do not change t
508. pply r 9 9 9 Q Q j 91 G2 B B2 MCCB i l Y 3 phase power R oM O R L1 U T1 Motor FN s d oM OS V T2 IN T O T L3 Inverter WI T3 l T l Ground Forward Run Stop a Reverse Run Stop H l l f ia External fault TN Fault reset Multi function contact inputs 4 Multi step F T1 Factory d setting 1 settings Speed setting i l n i Emergency stop CN5 EXT setting 24 V 8 mA NO contact External I 24V I l T 24 V i Shield wire i connection terminal i 2 l Pulse t t tog 2 SESS MAMPU gt b RP Master speed pulse train l Frequency setting f adjustment Fg l 0 to 32 kHz 3 kQ i 2ko Fog i High level 3 5 to 13 2 V input i i Frequency ly i bav Frequency setting power i External setter 3 i 15 V 20 mA i Oto 410 V i frequency lt T 2ko aet Ld QA1 Master speed reference references 2 Y 0 to 10 V 20 kQ l 1 4to20mA P Pd d i Y A2 Master speed reference s 10 Py AC 4 to 20 mA 250 kQ I 9 l 0 to 10 V 20 kQ input i Em id OV i L ee ee ee es ee l Ml l Ml Note pue e Set EXT as shown at the right even for a PNP input signal transistor l sequence connectio
509. pply to the Inverter and set 67 communications test mode in constant H1 05 Ter minal S7 Function Selection Turn OFF the power supply to the Inverter Perform wiring according to the following diagram while the power supply is turned OFF Turn ON the terminating resistance Turn ON pin on DIP switch 1 me Re R 8e S EST Fig 6 61 Details of Communications Terminals Be S ue Turn ON the power supply to the Inverter again Pass will be displayed if self diagnosis is completed without an error occurring If an error occurs a CE MEMOBUS communications error alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator the error contact output will be turned ON and the Inverter operation ready signal will be turned OFF Individual Functions M Using the Timer Function Multi function contact input terminals S3 to S12 can be designated as timer function input terminals and multi function output terminals M1 M2 P1 PC P2 PC P3 C3 and P4 C4 can be designated as timer func tion output terminals By setting the delay time you can erase chattering from the sensors and switches Set one of the constants H1 01 to H1 10 multi function contact input terminal S3 to S12 to 18 timer function input Set H2 01 to H2 03 multi function output terminals M1 M2 P1 PC P2 PC P3 C3 and P4 C4 function selection to 12 timer function output Related Constants Name Control Methods Change L S
510. put digital operator monitor items U1 LIL1 status monitor from pulse monitor terminal MP AC Refer to Chapter 5 User Constants and set the OO part of U1 O0 Status monitor The possible monitor selec tions are limited as follows U1 01 02 05 20 24 36 BAdjusting the Pulse Monitor Items Adjust the pulse frequency output from pulse monitor terminal MP AC Set the pulse frequency output when 100 frequency is output to H6 07 Set H6 06 to 2 and H6 07 to 0 to output the frequency synchronous with the Inverter s U phase output BApplication Precautions When using a pulse monitor constant connect a peripheral device according to the following load conditions If the load conditions are different there is a risk of characteristic insufficiency or damage to the machinery Using a Sourcing Output Output Voltage Isolated Load Impedance kQ 6 VRL V Dm 1 5 kQ min 3 5 kQ min 10 kQ min A ee External power suppl Using a Sinking Input power supply External Power 12 VDC 10 Load impedance Supply V 15 VDC 10 MP Sk Cre ns shin cen AC 6 91 Individual Functions This section explains the individual functions used in special applications Using MEMOBUS Communications You can perform serial communications with MEMOCON series Programmable Controllers PLCs or simi lar devices using the MEMOBUS protocol BMEMOBUS Communications Configuration MEMOBUS communications
511. puts Installing a Noise Filter on Output Side Connect a noise filter to the output side of the Inverter to reduce radio noise and inductive noise Power supply MCCB Inverter Noise 5 OM filter IM OM m P N Radio noise AM radio 2 _nductive Signal line noise ja Controller Inductive Noise Electromagnetic induction generates noise on the signal line causing the controller to malfunction Radio Noise Electromagnetic waves from the Inverter and cables cause the broadcasting radio receiver to make noise Fig 2 9 Installing a Noise Filter on the Output Side Countermeasures Against Inductive Noise As described previously a noise filter can be used to prevent inductive noise from being generated on the out put side Alternatively cables can be routed through a grounded metal pipe to prevent inductive noise Keep ing the metal pipe at least 30 cm away from the signal line considerably reduces inductive noise Power MCCB Metal pipe supply 5 OM fos Som Inverter i M som y a 1 1 30 cm min Signal line Controller Fig 2 10 Countermeasures Against Inductive Noise 2 19 _ Countermeasures Against Radio Interference Radio noise is generated from the Inverter as well as from the input and output lines To reduce radio noise install noise filters on both input and output sides and also install the Inverter in a totally enclosed s
512. quency Ref Description Monitors sets the fre quency reference value Output Signal Level During Multi Function Analog Output 10 V Max frequency 10 to 10 V possible Control Methods Vit with PG Open Loop Vec tor 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vec tor 2 Output fre quency Output Freq Monitors the output fre quency 10 V Max frequency 10 to 10 V possible Output cur rent Output Cur rent Monitors the output cur rent 10 V Inverter rated output current 0 to 10 V absolute value output Control method Control Method Checks the current control method Cannot be output Motor speed Motor Speed Monitors the detected motor speed 10 V Max frequency 10 to 10 V possible Output volt age Output Volt age Monitors the output volt age reference value in the Inverter 10 V 200 VAC 400 VAC 0 to 10 V output DC bus volt age DC Bus Voltage Monitors the main DC voltage in the Inverter 10 V 400 VDC 800 VDC 0 to 10 V output Output power Output kWatts Monitors the output power internally detected value 10 V Inverter capacity max applicable motor capacity 10 to 10 V possible Torque refer ence Torque Ref erence Monitor in internal torque reference value for vector control 10 V Motor rated torque 10 to 10 V possible
513. quency 0 01 U1 36 Given as maximum fre 10 to 10 V possible A A A A A 58H PID Input quency 100 Individual Functions Bi Name Control Methods Output Signal Level Open Description During Multi Func ME Kap P tion Analog Output Beil e Ier 1 Display PID output PID control out put U1 37 volume Given as maximum fre I y Mar frequency Got A A A A A 59H 10 to 10 V possible PID Output quency 100 PID com PID command PID com mand mand bias 0 01 U1 38 10 V Max frequency A A A A A SAH Given as maximum fre PID Setpoint quency 100 Multi Function Contact Inputs H1 01 to H1 10 Control Methods Function PID control disable ON PID control disabled PID control integral reset reset when reset command is input or when stopped during PID control PID control integral hold ON Hold PID soft starter PID input characteristics switch Multi Function Analog Input H3 05 H3 09 Control Methods 6 Function Contents 100 PID feedback Maximum output frequency PID target value Maximum output frequency BPID Control Methods There are four PID control methods Select the method by setting constant b5 01 Set Value Control Method 1 PID output becomes the Inverter output frequency and D control is used in the difference between PID target value and feedback
514. quency gain using the analog input terminal A2 or A3 Frequency gain 100 i Multi function analog input i terminal A2 input level OV 4mA 10 V 20 mA Fig 6 27 Frequency Gain Adjustment Terminal A2 Input The frequency gain for terminal A1 is the product of H3 02 and terminal A2 gain For example when H3 02 is set to 100 and terminal A2 is set to 5 V the terminal Al frequency reference will be 50 Frequency reference 10096 77777 H3 02 H3 02 x 0 5 Terminal A1 input voltage BAdjusting Frequency Bias Using an Analog Input When constant H3 09 or H3 05 is set to 0 add to terminal A1 the frequency equivalent to the terminal A2 or A3 input voltage is added to A1 as a bias Frequency bias 100 X i Multi function analog input terminal A2 or A3 input level 0 V 4 mA 10 V 20 mA Fig 6 28 Frequency Bias Adjustment Terminal A2 or A3 Input For example if H3 02 is 100 H3 03 is 0 and terminal A2 is set to 1 V the frequency reference from terminal Al when 0 V is input to Al will be 10 6 30 Adjusting Frequency References Frequency reference a CHE uu METRE z H3 02 Terminal A1 input voltage 0v 10V When constant H3 09 or H3 05 is set to D frequency bias 2 the frequency equivalent to the terminal A2 or A3 input voltage is added to A1 as a bias Operation Avoiding Resonance Jump Frequency Function The jump frequency
515. quency loss Analog input using terminal Al Analog input using terminal A2 when H3 09 Multi function analog input terminal A2 function selection is set to 0 Add to terminal A1 iRRelated Constants Name Control Methods Con J To T Open Open stant Description Factory vir OPen Elux OP Number Display Setting with LOOP Vec Loop PG id tor i d Operation when 0 Stop Operation follows the frequency refer frequency reference ence is missing 1 Operation at 80 speed continues At 80 of speed before the frequency reference was lost Ref Loss Sel Frequency reference is lost Fre quency reference dropped over 90 in 400 ms e 7 1 Restarting Operation After Transient Fault Auto Restart Function If an Inverter fault occurs during operation the Inverter will perform self diagnosis If no fault is detected the Inverter will automatically restart using the speed search function b3 01 This is called the auto restart func tion Set the number of auto restarts in constant L5 01 A fault reset is attempted every 5 ms after a fault occurs and minimum baseblock time has passed The number of auto restarts is counted when the Inverter attempts a fault reset and restarts operation The protection function will operate if a fault continues to occur after auto restart ing the number of times set in L5 01 The auto restart function ca
516. r min l Motor Accel ta 90 Tioo N m s Time However 60 P kW _ x 103 N T100 2n Nr min l IN m Feed forward proportional gain Set the proportional gain for feed forward control Speed reference response will increase as the setting of N5 03 is increased Feedfoward Gain 1 When the control method is changed the factory setting will change The flux vector factory setting is given 2 The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0 4 kW is given Individual Functions a m Feed Forward Control Structure The following block diagram shows the speed controller ASR and the feed forward control structure N5 02 N5 03 U1 45 Feed Secondar Frequency forward Torque limit current d reference controller nia 7 reference l Primary c Speed controller ASR gt filter gt gt C5 06 L7 01 to L7 04 C5 10 U1 05 Detected speed Calculated speed Fig 6 78 Structure of Speed Controller ASR and Feed Forward Control i Setting Precautions When N5 02 Motor acceleration time is not properly set the acceleration time may not increase The fac tory setting of N5 02 depends on the Inverter capacity When the Inverter capacity is different from the motor capacity calculate an appropriate acceleration
517. r a multi Reference function input unit Set in 01 03 2 Frequency reference 3 Frequency reference when multi step speed reference 2 is ON for a multi Reference function input unit Set in 01 03 3 Frequency Frequency reference when multi step reference 4 speed reference 1 and 2 are ON for a Reference Inulti function input unit Set in o1 4 03 Jo S Frequency reference when Jog Fre reference quency Selection FJOG command or RJOG command is ON for a multi Jog function input unit Set in 01 03 Reference Input volt age setting Set the Inverter input voltage in 1 volt This set value will be the basis for the Input Volt protection functions age V f pattern selection 0 to E Select from 15 preset patterns F Custom user set patterns Applica V F Selec ble for setting E1 04 to E1 10 tion Name Display Max output frequency FMAX Max Frequency Max voltage VMAX Max Voltage Base fre quency FA Base Fre quency Min out put fre quency FMIN Min Fre quency Description E1 05 VBASE E1 13 Frequency Hz FMAX E1 06 E1 04 Setting Range Factory Setting Control Methods Vif with PG Open loop Vec tor 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vec tor 2 Base voltage VBASE Base Vo
518. r adjustment cc dec time t M ib d 4 T Ei ve P a b gt 7 1 Multi function analog output 2 bd 512 H1 T 10 to 10V2mA Emergency stop NO J Ez oi g7 4 Default Output current I 90 1 T F oot AM nemo J B CNS NPN setting 24V 8mA EM pog 1 Ammeter adjustment IT pin FM kd s i 1 PEM LL E Pee e LE C 1 l i Multi function analog output 1 bog I AC itt EN 10 to 10 V 2 mA bog Lg j pepe Default Output frequency uu Oto 10V T 24V Shield wire EG 7 A connection terminal pulke trairingut 7 Masi m Error contact output ulse train inpu I gt RP Bese o oMAs 4 ia 250 VAC 10 mA min Fi tting i 0 to 32 kHz 3 kQ MB 1 A max Min load 2kQ adjustment bi High level 3 5 to 13 2 V input p 5e rs 30 VAC 10 mA min s VDC 10 ma Frequency Y i oeo 1 A max setter O V Frequency setting power 0to 10 V E 15 V 20 mA External 2kQ 2 i T 9 A1 Master speed reference roM Multi function contact oputput frequency 1 4to20mA P 0 to 10 V 20 kQ M2 i 250 VAC 10 mA min 1 A max Min load references nini cime dd i b A2 Master speed reference 4 30 VAC 10 mA min 1 A max 5 VDC 10 mA boa 4 to 20 mA 250 Q perui Running H 0 to 10 V 20 KQ input signal Oto 10V Pl is i A 1 o A3 Multi function anlog input 5d 0 to 10 V 20 kQ Pid Open collector 1 i i Py SAC Factory setting k ds tZ Li ae Auxiliary frequency t Seed Peto St command lt Spee
519. r and then restart it Set b2 03 to 0 to disable the DC injection brake at start Set the DC injection brake current using b2 02 DC injection braking is used at startup for flux vector control with the current set in E2 03 Motor no load current Related Constants m Name Change EL Methods ERG er Setting Factory during v f pen ei pen BUS stant Description i Loo ux Loo i Number Display Range Setting Opera vit with wean Vec ia Regis tion PG i tor E ter DC injection braking current Sets the DC injection braking cur rent as a percentage of the DCInj Current Inverter rated current DC injection Used to set the time to perform braking time at DC injection braking at start in start units of 1 second Used to stop coasting motor and DCInj restart it When the set value is 0 Time Start DC injection braking at start is not performed inputting the DC Injection Brake Command from Control Circuit Terminals If you set a multi function contact input terminal H1 O1D to 60 DC injection brake command you can apply the DC injection brake to the motor by turning ON the terminal for which the DC injection brake com mand has been set when the Inverter is being stopped DC injection braking is used at startup for flux vector control The time chart for the DC injection brake is shown below DC injection brake command FRUN Output frequency DC
520. r describes Digital Operator displays and functions and provides an overview of operating modes and switching between modes Digital Operator This section describes the displays and functions of the Digital Operator Digital Operator Display The key names and functions of the Digital Operator are described below Drive Mode Indicators LED E FWD Lit when there is a Forward Run Command input DEIUE Fr REV Lit when there is a Reverse Run Command input Frequency Ref SEQ Lit when the 2 Riu from the control circuit terminal is enabled LH e acg a AAH REF Lit when the frequency reference from control circuit terminals A1 and A2 is enabled Ul 82 68 GHz ALARM Lit when error activated Ui 2216 05A Blinks when alarm activated Data Display Displays monitor data constant numbers and settings EEIE SPP REIR WI Mode Display Displayed at upper left of data display 7 DRIVE Lit in Drive Mode QUICK Lit in Quick Programming Mode ADV Lit in Advanced Programming Mode VERIFY Lit in Verify Mode A TUNE Lit in Autotuning Mode m Keys Execute operations such as setting user constants monitoring jogging and autotuning Fig 3 1 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions Digital Operator Keys The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in Table 3 1 Table 3 1 Key Functions Function LOCAL Switches between operation vi
521. r has stopped Otherwise the overvoltage protective or over current protective mechanism will be actuated resulting in an error iSubmersible Motor The rated input current of submersible motors is higher than that of standard motors Therefore always select an Inverter by checking its rated output current When the distance between the motor and Inverter is long use a cable thick enough to connect the motor and Inverter to prevent motor torque reduction BExplosion proof Motor When an explosion proof motor is to be used it must be subject to an explosion proof test in conjunction with the Inverter This is also applicable when an existing explosion proof motor is to be operated with the Inverter Since the Inverter itself is however not explosion proof always install it in a safe place ilGearmotor The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor manufacturer In particular continuous operation of an oil lubricated motor in the low speed range may result in burning If the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than the rated speed consult with the manufacturer i Synchronous Motor A synchronous motor is not suitable for Inverter control If a group of synchronous motors is individually turned ON and OFF synchronism may be lost iSingle phase Motor Do not use an Inverter for a single phase motor The motor should be replaced with a 3 phase motor Power Transmission Mec
522. r teeth 2 A gear ratio of 1 will be used if either of these constants is PG Gear set to 0 Teeth2 Per Open C Used to set the PG disconnec cult detection tion detection time PGO will time be detected if the detection PGO Detect time continues beyond the set time Time When the control method is changed the factory setting will change The flux vector factory setting is given BAnalog Reference Board F2 User constants for the Analog Reference Board are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Con Fact Open Open stant Description actory Vif Loop Flux Loop Number Display Setting A Vec Vec vee 5 or or Or 1 2 Bi polar or Sets the functions for channel uni polar 1 to 3 which are effective input selec when the AI 14B Analog tion Reference Board is used 0 3 channel individual Channel 1 terminal A1 Channel 2 terminal A2 Channel 3 terminal A3 1 3 channel addition Addi AI 14 Input tion values are the fre Sel quency reference When set to 0 select 1 for b1 01 In this case the multi function input Option Inverter selection cannot be used 5 41 Digital Reference Board F3 User constants for the Digital Reference Board are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Con Open Open ut inti Setting Factory stant Descrip
523. racteristics T A Load torque Load torque TB Motor B s torque The difference between The difference between characteristics TA and Tg is getting larger TA and Tg is getting smaller Reference Speed Reference Speed speed speed Load balance when using a general purpose motor Load balance when using a high purpose motor Fig 6 79 Droop Control Function Related Constants Name Display Droop control gain Droop Quantity Control Methods Vit Open f Loop with Vector PG 1 Flux Vec tor Description Sets the slip as a percentage of maximum frequency when the maximum output frequency is specified and the rated torque occurs Droop control is not performed when the setting is 0 0 Droop control delay time Droop Delay Time Droop control responsiveness constant When hunting or oscillation occurs increase the value i Setting Precautions Droop control is disabled if b7 01 is set to 0 0 Set b7 01 to the amount of slip as the percentage of slip when the maximum output frequency is input and the rated torque is generated Constant b7 02 is used to adjust the responsiveness of droop control Increase this setting if oscillation or hunting occur Disable the feed forward control N5 01 0 when using the droop control function llSetting the Droop Control Gain Set the droop control gain as the speed reduction at a 10096 motor torque as a percentage o
524. range Consequently you must select the electronic thermal protection characteristics to match the applicable motor s tolerance load charac teristics The following table shows the motor type and tolerance load characteristics Motor Type General purpose motor standard motor Tolerance Load Characteristics Rated rotation speed 100 speed Short time 60 s Continuous Frame number Max V speed Frame number Max speed of 200 of 160 MJ to 160 LJ min LJ min _ Frame number Max i V speed of 132 MJ 167 200 33 100120 160 Hz Rotation speed 96 Cooling Ability Use this motor for operations using a commercial power supply This motor construction yields best cooling effect when operating at 50 60 Hz Electronic Thermal Operation at 100 Motor Load When operating continu ously at 50 60 Hz or less motor overload detection OL1 is detected The Inverter outputs the error contact and the motor coasts to a stop Inverter motor constant torque 1 10 6 58 Rated rotation speed Short time 60 100 speed i Continuous B i Frame nibet Max speed of 2004 J min i Frarhe number Max speed of B0 MJ to 180 LJ i i Frame number Max iL speed of 132 MJ 100120 167 20 60 4 Rotation speed This motor yields a cooling effect even when operating at low speeds approx 6 Hz Operates continuously at 6 t
525. ration Acceleration Deceleration Ramp Hold The acceleration deceleration ramp hold function stops acceleration and deceleration stores the output fre quency at that point in time and then continues operation Set one of the constants H1 01 to H1 10 multi function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection to A acceleration deceleration ramp hold to stop acceleration and deceleration when the terminal is turned ON and to store the output frequency at that point in time Acceleration and deceleration will restart when the terminal is turned OFF If d4 01 is set to 1 and the Acceleration Deceleration Ramp Hold command is input the output frequency is still stored even after the power supply is turned OFF Related Constants Name Control Methods Con stant Description Number Display vit OPen pj Open f Loop Loop with Vec PG Vector Vector 1 tor 2 Frequency ref Sets whether or not frequencies erence hold on hold will be recorded function selec 0 Disabled when operation is tion stopped or the power is turned on again starts at 0 Enabled when operation is stopped or the power is turned on again starts at the previous MOP Ref hold frequency Memory This function is available when the multi function inputs accel decel Ramp Hold or up down commands are set i Time Chart The time chart when using Acceleration Deceleration Ramp Ho
526. ration Acceleration Deceleration Ramp Hold 6 78 Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Contact Signals UP DOWN 6 79 Accelerating and Decelerating Constant Frequencies in the Analog References Speed use t Ae ies o etu ptese E ug Pepe oe cone dus 6 82 Hold Analog Frequency Using User set Timing 6 83 Switching Operations between a Communications Option Board and Control Circuit Terminals eet tt teet ped vil aa 6 83 Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands FJOG RJOG 6 84 Stopping the Inverter by Notifying Programming Device Errors to the Inverter External Fault Function eoi cte ede eed tene deeper nei 6 85 Output Terminal Functions ssssssse Hem 6 86 Monit r Consta MiS c naa et Alec ities EAE EE aa 6 88 Using the Analog Monitor Constants cccsssscsssessestsssstsssscsssstssseeeteseeeeeseeetseeeseeees 6 88 Using Pulse Train Monitor Contents 6 90 Individual Furctions iret erae i RR LER nse aeeeevseien 6 92 Using MEMOBUS Communications sccscsscscssescesessesseseseeseseeceseecaresearestateeeseseaees 6 92 9 Using the Timer Function xo o eee epe e e e ee HERE ENT 6 105 Usi PID Control cies outta teak ter etg E Ree phi ant ud 6 106 A EENEN A ore e repre cede e Ua Ee ar e o UM ae ETN 6 115 Setting Motor Constants cod eR oic eo e eot Or e ono 6 117 Setting the VIT Pattern o
527. rch Selection Set whether to enable or disable speed search at startup and set the type of speed search estimated speed or current detection using setting b3 01 To perform speed search when inputting the Run Command set b3 01 to 1 or 3 Search Name Estimated Speed b3 01 0 or 1 Current Detection b3 01 2 or 3 Estimates the motor speed when the search Starts speed search from the frequency when starts and accelerates and decelerates from the P q y the temporary power loss was detected or from Search Method estimated speed to the set frequency You can f ae the highest frequency and performs speed also search including direction of motor rota tion detection at the current level during the search External speed search command 1 External search command 1 and external Starts speed search from the maximum output External Speed Search search command 2 become the same operation frequency Command estimating the motor speed and starting the External speed search command 2 search from the estimated speed Starts speed search from the frequency refer ence set before the search command Cannot be used multi motor drives motors two or more frames smaller than the Inverter capac ity and high speed motors 130 Hz min In control method without PG the motor may accelerate suddenly with light loads Application Precau tions BEstimated Speed Search b3 01 0 or 1 The time chart for estimat
528. rd This constant is not usually displayed When the Pass ot adis A1 05 word A1 04 is displayed 9999 0 No A A A A A 105H 6 157 5 Select Pass hold down the RESET Key word and press the Menu Key and the password will be dis played BUser set Constants A2 The constants set by the user are listed in the following table Name Control Methods Fact Open Open Description ac ory v f Loop Flux Loop p Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Display Usersetting Used to set the constant num constants bers that can be set read Maximum 32 Effective when the Constant Access Level A1 01 is set to User Param 1 User Program 1 Constants to 32 set in constants A2 01 to A2 32 can be set read in pro gramming mode b Application Constants The following settings are made with the application constants B constants Operation method selection DC injection braking speed searching timer functions dwell functions droop control energy saving control and zero servo control BlOperation Mode Selections b1 User constants for operation mode selection are shown in the following table Name hands Control Methods ae Description Setting Factory dura Vit aad Flux eon MEUS P NOUS Display ps Range Setting Opera vit with Vec Vec Vec Regis 9
529. re shown in the following table Table 2 10 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes Wire Size mm AWG Manufacturer 0 25 24 AI 0 25 8YE 0 5 20 AI 0 5 8WH 0 75 18 AI 0 75 8GY t Phoenix Contact 1 25 16 AI 1 5 8BK 2 14 AI 2 5 8BU Tih 8 mm mM d2 Fig 2 15 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes EWiring Method Use the following procedure to connect wires to the terminal block 1 Loosen the terminal screws with a thin slot screwdriver 2 Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block 3 Tighten the terminal screws firmly Thin slot screwdriver Blade of screwdriver Control circuit terminal block t Solderless terminal or wire dL 3 5 mm max without soldering Strip the end for 7 mm if no sold erless terminal is used Blade thickness 0 6 mm max Fig 2 16 Connecting Wires to Terminal Block 2 23 Control Circuit Terminal Functions The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in Table 2 11 Use the appropriate terminals for the correct purposes Se quence input signals Table 2 11 Control Circuit Terminals Signal Name Forward Run Stop Command Function Forward run when ON stopped when OFF Reverse Run Stop Command Reverse run when ON stopped when OFF Multi function input 1 Factory setting External fault when ON Multi function input 2 Multi function input 3 T Fa
530. read and set Advanced Constants can be read and set in both quick programming mode and advanced programming A mode Control Used to select the control method method for the Inverter selection 0 V f control 1 V f with PG feedback 2 Open loop vector con trol Control Flux vector Method Open loop vector 2 con trol This constant is not initialized by the initialize operation User Constant Tables __ Name Control Methods Setti Fact Open Open Description ND PRBCOTY Vif Loop Flux Loop j Range Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Display Initialize Used to initialize the con stants using the specified method 0 No initializing 1110 Initializes using the User constants 0 to 6 11 Init Parame 2220 Initializes using a 3330 No RES 5 B A 103H hg 150 ters two wire sequence A1 03 Initializes to the factory setting 3330 Initializes using a three wire sequence Password Password input when a pass word has been set in A1 05 This function write protects some constants of the initial ize mode 0 to 4 17 If the password is changed 0 No A A A A A 104H 9999 6 157 A1 01 to A1 03 and A2 01 to A2 32 constants can no A1 04 Enter Pass word longer be changed Program ming mode constants can be changed Password Used to set a four digit num setting ber as the passwo
531. ref Fout Agree 2 Fref Set Agree 2 Frequency Detection 3 Frequency Detection 4 Frequency Detection 5 6 51 Timing Chart for Frequency Detection Operation Related constant L4 01 Speed Agree Level L4 02 Speed Agree Width L4 03 Speed Agree Level L4 04 Speed Agree Width Fref Fout Agree Fref Fout Agree 1 Fref Fout Agree 2 Frequency reference Output frequency or motor speed Fref Fout Agree 1 OFF ov Multi function output setting 2 Frequency reference Output frequency or motor speed Fref Fout Agree2 OFF Multi function output setting 13 Fref Set Agree Fref Set Agree 1 ON at the following conditions during frequency agree Fref Set Agree 2 ON at the following conditions during frequency agree put frequency aotor speed Set Agree 1 OFF on Multi function output setting 3 Output frequency or motor speed Fref Set Agree 2 OFF on Multi function output setting 14 Fre quency Detection 6 52 Frequency FOUT Detection 1 L4 01 gt Output frequency Frequency FOUT Detection 3 L4 03 gt Output frequency Output frequency or motor speed Freq Detection 1 ON OFF Multi function output setting 4 Output frequency or motor speed Freq Detection 3 ON OFF Multi function output setting 15
532. reference reference 16 when multi step speed refer d1 16 ences 1 2 3 and 4 are ON 0 00 Hz Yes A A A A A 291H Reference 16 for multi function inputs Jog frequency The frequency reference reference when the jog frequency refer 4 6 dl 17 ence selection FJOG com 6 00Hz Yes Q Q Q Q Q 292H 6 5 Jog mand or RJOG command is 6 84 Reference ON Note The unit is set in 01 03 Frequency units of reference setting and monitor The default for 01 03 is 0 increments of 0 01 Hz The setting range for open loop vector 2 control is 0 to 66 0 0 to 132 0 for PRG 1030 iReference Limits d2 User constants for frequency reference limits are shown in the following table Name Control Methods ERA Description Setting Factory vit sd Flux od Number Display Range Setting p ye ve ye or or or 1 2 Frequency reference Set the output frequency upper limit upper limit as a percent tak ing the max output frequency Ref Upper to be 100 Limit 100 0 Frequency reference Sets the output frequency lower limit lower limit as a percentage of the maximum output fre Ref Lower quency Limit Master speed reference Set the master speed refer lower limit ence lower limit as a percent taking the max output fre Refl Lower quency to be 100 Limit 5 28 User Constant Tables H iJump Frequencies d3 User constants for jump frequencie
533. rence i ascending i Jump 1 Pa frequency Jump width d3 04 frequency width d3 04 Jump frequency reference Jump Jump Jump frequency frequency frequency 3 d3 03 2 d3 02 1 d3 01 Fig 6 29 Jump Frequency liSetting Jump Frequency Reference Using an Analog Input When constant H3 09 Multi function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection or H3 05 Multi func tion Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection is set to A jump frequency you can change the jump fre quency using the terminal A2 input level Jump frequency Max output frequency E1 04 Multi function analog input ov 10v terminal A2 or A3 input level 4 mA 20 mA Fig 6 30 Jump Frequency Setting Using an Analog Input i Setting Precautions Set the jump frequency according to the following formula d3 01 d3 02 gt d3 03 gt Analog input When constants d3 01 to d3 03 are set to 0 Hz the jump frequency function is disabled 6 32 Adjusting Frequency References MM Adjusting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Inputs The frequency reference can be adjusted when b1 01 Reference Selection is set to 4 Pulse Train Input Set the pulse frequency in constant H6 02 to 100 reference and then adjust the gain and bias accordingly using H6 03 and H6 04 Related Constants a Name Change a Methods Tn Setting Factory during VIF pen ei pen BUS stant Description 1l L
534. representative 1f a motor cannot be connected the motor being used is two frames smaller than the Inverter or a control board with older version is used Step No Digital Operator Display ADV Inverter Model 02 04 2F 4055 o Description Set 02 04 kVA selection to the capacity of the Inverter that you use ADV Initialization A1 02 2 2 Open Loop Vector Set A1 02 to the control method to be used The value of the control method should be set to the same value as when the constants were copied from the Inverter to the Digital Operator ADV Init Parameters A1 03 2220 0 2 WIRE Initial o Set A 1 03 Initialize to 2220 2 wire initialization or 3330 3 wire initializa tion This example is a typical setting for initialization by a 2 wire sequence DRIVE Mtr Rated Power T1 02 55 00kW 2 00 650 00 55 00kW Ifthe mode is switched to the DRIVE after initialization has been completed the motor power setting display appears Set T1 02 Motor output power to the motor capacity of the connected motor This example is the setting for a 55 kW motor DRIVE OHz 0 0A Tuning Ready Press Run Ke Press the Increment Key to view the shipping adjustment display After con firming that the motor has been connected press the RUN Key to start auto tuning Note Do not touch the motor terminals Although the motor does not rotate voltage is being supplied to the
535. requency when frequency detection 2 is OFF L4 01 L4 02 b6 04 Dwell time at stop 0 3 to 0 5 s b2 04 DC injection braking at stop 0 0 s 6 2 If the Inverter and motor must be isolated while stopping using a magnetic contactor for example in an ele vator fully close the holding brakes and isolate the Inverter during baseblock during baseblock signal ON as stipulated by law in the EU During motor control or DC injection braking zero speed control an Inverter error may occur due to surge voltage When a magnetic contactor is used between the Inverter and motor set L8 07 Output open phase protection to 1 enabled Torque Compensation Flux Vector Control Only When flux vector control is used the torque compensation signals corresponding to the load can be input from the multi function analog input terminals in advance to reduce shock such as that caused by opening and clos ing holding brakes The load size and motoring regenerating status must be detected at the machine side in advance Check that polarity is correct Incorrect polarity will increase the shock _ Sequence Circuit Configuration The following diagram shows the sequence circuit configuration for torque compensation _UP O DOWN oe HIGH LOW O S6 Multi step speed reference 2 S1 Forward run PS2 Reverse run SC A3 Using elevator control circuit Torque compensation signal 10 to 1
536. rheats Take the following steps if the motor overheats The load is too big If the motor load is too heavy and the motor is used with the effective torque exceeding the motor s rated torque the motor will overheat Some motor rating are given for short period performance and are not contin uous ratings Reduce the load amount by either lightening the load or lengthening the acceleration decelera tion time Also consider increasing the motor capacity 7 BThe ambient temperature is too high The motor rating is determined within a particular ambient operating temperature range The motor will burn out if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment in which the maximum ambient operating temperature is exceeded Lower the motor s ambient temperature to within the acceptable ambient operating temperature range BThe withstand voltage between the motor phases is insufficient When the motor is connected to the Inverter output a surge is generated between the Inverter switching and the motor coil Normally the maximum surge voltage is three times the Inverter s input power supply voltage 1 e 1 200 V for 400 V Class Be sure to use a motor with a withstand voltage between the motor phases that is greater than the maximum surge voltage In particular when using a 400 V Class Inverter use a special motor for Inverters Autotuning has not been performed for vector control Vector control will not perform if autotuning has
537. rily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and Control Circuit Terminals You can switch the Inverter Run Command inputs and frequency reference inputs between local 1 e Digital Operator and remote input method using b1 01 and b1 02 You can switch between local and remote by turning ON and OFF the terminals if an output from H1 01 to H1 10 multi function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection has been set to 1 local remote selection To set the control circuit terminals to remote set b1 01 and b1 02 to 1 Control circuit terminals iRelated Constants Name Control Methods Con ae stant i Description Number Display Factory vit ur Flux Setting with V P Vec ector PG 1 tor Reference Set the frequency reference input selection method 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal analog input 2 MEMOBUS communications 3 Option board 4 Pulse train input Reference Source Operation Set the Run Command input method selec method tion 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal sequence input Run Source 2 MEMOBUS communications 3 Option board the local remote function has been set in the external terminals the LOCAL REMOTE Key function on the Q You can also perform local remote switching using the LOCAL REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator When Digital Operator will be disabled INFO Input Terminal Functions m aaa
538. rly Turn off the power and insert the board again VCF Vcn Fail ure Main Circuit Capacitor Neutral Point Potential Error An excessive imbalance occurred in the main circuit capacitor s neutral point potential A loss in capacity due to aging of the main circuit capacitor Replace the main circuit capacitor Consult your YASKAWA repre sentative The Inverter parts are faulty Replace the Inverter An open phase was detected for an output Refer to LF output open phase in this table Carrier frequency set value C6 03 C6 04 is unsuitable Check the set values for C6 03 and C6 04 The maximum output frequency that can be set for 400 V Class Inverters is restricted by the carrier frequency setting Refer to page 6 45 In V f or open loop vector control the motor consecutively loses synchro nism the output current exceeds 200 of the Inverter rated current Reduce the load Increase the acceleration time Check the settings for V f con trol Use larger capacity Inverter OPERA TOR ERR RAM CHECK ERR Operator Error Internal RAM Fault At power ON an error was detected from the results of the internal RAM Write Read check OPERA TOR ERR ROM CHECK ERR Operator Error CPU Internal ROM Fault At power ON and during operation an error was detected when the internal ROM was checked OPERA TOR ERR DATA SEND ERR Operator Error Transmission C
539. rm signal Inverter over heating alarm signal was input from a multi function input terminal S3 to S7 Clear the multi function input termi nal s overheating alarm input 7 15 Display OH3 blinking Motor Over heat 1 Table 7 3 Alarm Displays and Processing Continued Meaning Motor Overheating E was set for H3 09 and the motor temperature thermistor input exceeded the alarm detection level Probable causes The motor has overheated Corrective Actions Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration decelera tion and cycle times Check the V f characteristics Check the motor temperature input on terminals Al and A2 OL3 blinking Over torque Det 1 Overtorque 1 There has been a current greater than the setting in L6 02 for longer than the setting in L6 03 Make sure that the settings in L6 02 and L6 03 are appropriate Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque OLA blinking Over torque Det 2 Overtorque 2 There has been a current greater than the setting in L6 05 for longer than the setting in L6 06 Make sure that the current setting in L6 05 and time setting in L6 06 are appropriate Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque UL3 blinking Under torq Det 1 Undertorque 1 There has been a current less than the setting in L6 02 for longer than the setting in L6 03
540. rminal S10 Sel User Constant Tables w Name Control Methods Fact Open Open Description actory v f Loop Flux Loop P Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Display Terminal S11 function selec tion Multi function contact input 9 Terminal S11 Sel Terminal S12 function selec tion Multi function contact input 10 Terminal S12 Sel The factory settings in the parentheses are for 3 wire sequence Multi function Contact Input Functions Control Methods Open Function Vif Loop Flux with Vec Vec PG tor tor 3 wire sequence Forward Reverse Run Command Local Remote selection ON Local OFF Remote Option Inverter selection ON Option board Multi step speed reference 1 5 When H3 05 is set to 0 this function is combined with the master auxiliary speed switch Multi step speed reference 2 Multi step speed reference 3 Jog frequency command higher priority than multi step speed reference Accel decel time 1 External baseblock NO NO contact Baseblock at ON External baseblock NC NC contact Baseblock at OFF Acceleration deceleration ramp hold ON Acceleration deceleration stopped fre quency on hold OH alarm signal input ON OH2 will be displayed Multi function analog input selection ON Enable N
541. rol Methods Con f cPone ToOnen eJ o5en inti Factory Open Open stant Description vif Flux Number Display P Setting with LOOP vec LOOP Vector tor Vector 1 2 PG Accel decel Sets the frequency for automatic time switch acceleration deceleration switching ing frequency Below set frequency Accel decel time 4 Above set frequency Accel decel Acc Dec SW time 1 Freq The multi function input accel decel time 1 or accel decel time 2 take priority S curve char acteristic time at accelera tion start SCrv Acc Start S curve char All sections of the S curve charac acteristic time teristic time are set in seconds units at accelera When the S curve characteristic tion end time is set the accel decel times will increase by only half of the S curve characteristic times at start and end SCrv Acc End S curve char Run Command acteristic time Output atdecelera frequency tion start SCrv Dec Start S curve char acteristic time 6 at decelera mz tion end SCrv Dec End The setting range for acceleration deceleration times depends on the setting of C1 10 Acceleration deceleration Time Setting Unit If C1 10 is set to 0 the setting range is 0 00 to 600 00 s ll Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Units Set the acceleration deceleration time units using C1
542. ropri ate Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque UL4 Undertorq Det 2 Undertorque Detected 2 There has been a current less than the setting in L6 05 for longer than the setting in L6 06 Make sure that the current set ting in L6 05 and time setting in L6 06 are appropriate Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque OS Overspeed Det Overspeed The speed has been greater than the setting in F1 08 for longer than the setting in F1 09 Overshooting Undershooting are occurring Adjust the gain again The reference speed is too high Check the reference circuit and reference gain The settings in F1 08 and F1 09 aren t appropriate Check the settings in F1 08 and F1 09 PG Disconnection Detected PG pulses were input when the Inverter was outputting a frequency There is a break in the PG wiring Fix the broken disconnected wir ing The PG is wired incorrectly Fix the wiring Power isn t being supplied to the PG Supply power to the PG properly Brake is applied to the motor Check for open circuit when using brake motor DEV Speed Deviation Excessive Speed Deviation The speed deviation has been greater than the setting in F1 10 for longer than the setting in F1 11 The load is too heavy Reduce the load The acceleration time and deceleration time are too short Lengthen the ac
543. rse the above procedure to attach all of the components When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket be sure that the airflow faces the top of the Inverter Fan support mounting screws ae 7S p Fl _ Fan cover Panel mounting screws Cooling fan power relay board Front cover mounting screws Front cover Capacitor Terminal cover NY 96o99777 4 Terminal Pte 3 N unm board Terminal cover mounting screws Circulation fan mounting screws Pay attention to the protruding part Circulation fan of the fan cable Cooling fans Airflow direction Cooling fan mounting screws Fig 8 7 Cooling Fan Replacement 200 V Class Inverters of 30 kW and 37 kW Maintenance and Inspection BE MM 200 V Class Inverters of 75 kW Removing the Cooling Fan 1 Remove the terminal cover Inverter cover Digital Operator and front cover from the front of the Inverter 2 Remove the panel to which the control board the gate drive board and the cooling fan power relay board are mounted Remove any cables that are connected to the control board the gate drive board and the cooling fan power relay board The cable that is connected to the control circuit terminals can be removed together with the control circuit terminal board Refer to page 8 21 3 Remove the fan cover screws and p
544. rter uses a high carrier PWM to reduce motor vibration A constant can be set to select low carrier PWM modulation control as well When the motor is operated with the Inverter motor vibration is almost the same as when operated with a commercial power supply Motor vibration may however become greater in the following cases Resonance with the Natural Frequency of the Mechanical System 10 Take special care when a machine that has been operated at a constant speed is to be operated in variable speed Dm mode If resonance occurs install vibration proof rubber on the motor base or use the frequency jump function to skip any frequency resonating the machine Imbalanced Rotor Take special care when the motor is operated at a speed higher than the rated speed BNoise Noise varies with the carrier frequency At high carrier frequencies the noise is almost the same when the motor is operated with a commercial power supply Motor noise however becomes louder when the motor is operated at a speed higher than the rated speed 10 9 Using the Inverter for Special Motors Observe the following precautions when using a special motor BPole changing Motor The rated input current of pole changing motors differs from that of standard motors Select therefore an appropriate Inverter according to the maximum input current of the motor to be used Before changing the number of poles always make sure that the moto
545. ry Setting Control Methods Vit with PG Open Loop Vec tor 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vec tor 2 Unit Selec tion for MEMO BUS Regis ter 0025H MEMO BUS 25H UNIT Selects the units used for MEMOBUS registry 0025H monitors the output voltage reference 0 0 1 V units 1 1 V units Set H5 01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications 2 Applicable for G7 Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 or later User Constant Tables _ lt BPulse Train I O H6 User constants for pulse I O are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Con Open Open stant Description Factory Vif Loop Flux Loop Number Display Setting zm bed as Vet or or or 1 2 Pulse train input func tion selec 0 Frequency reference 1 PID feedback value 2 PID target value tion Pulse Input Sel Pulse train input scal Set the number of pulses in ing hertz taking the reference to be 100 1000 to 32000 PI Scaling Pulse train input gain Set the input gain level as a per cent when the pulse train set in 100 0 Pulse Input 96 02 is input Gain Pulse train input bias Set the input bias when the pulse train is 0 Pulse Input Bias Pulse train input filter Set the pulse train input pri 5 time mary delay filter time constant PI Filter in secon
546. s The same speed limit bias can be set for the forward and reverse side and is different from the speed limit Set d5 04 to 0 and set the speed limit bias d5 05 as a percentage of the maximum output frequency When setting both forward and reverse speed limit biases to 50 set the speed limit to 0 d5 03 2 d5 04 0 d5 05 50 The torque control range with these settings is between 50 to 50 of the speed When using the speed limit together with the speed limit bias the torque control range will be limited by the speed limit the speed limit biases on the forward and reverse sides of the speed limit range When the forward speed limit is set to 50 and the speed limit bias to 10 the torque control range will be as shown in the figure below unless the priority circuit is taken into consideration Forward torque AN 96 Reverse run Forward run Forward speed limit Speed limit bias d5 04 50 d5 05 10 AN will be set as follows Torque reference At motoring operation C5 01 Reverse torque At regenerative operation The smaller vaue Torque reference C5 04 or d5 05 Fig 6 69 Setting Speed Limit Bias iTorque Limit Operation Examples Operation examples will be described separately for winding operation in which the speed and motor torque are in the same directions and rewinding operation in which the speed and motor torque are in opposite direc tions Winding Operatio
547. s reduce integral time I and lengthen derivative time D Response f Before adjustment Time Suppressing Long cycle Vibration If vibration occurs with a longer cycle than the integral time I set value the integral operation is too strong Lengthen the integral time I to suppress the vibration Response Before adjustment 2 After adjustment Time Suppressing Short Cycle Vibration If vibration occurs when the vibration cycle is short and the cycle is almost identical to the derivative time D set value the differential operation is too strong Shorten the derivative time D to suppress the vibration If vibration continues even when the derivative time D is set to 0 00 D control disabled reduce the propor tional gain P or increase the PID primary delay time constant Response Before adjustment P Me After adjustment Time i Setting Precautions In PID control the b5 04 constant is used to prevent the calculated integral control value from exceeding a specified amount If the load changes rapidly the machine may be damaged or the motor may stall because of unpredictable response from the Inverter In this case reduce the set value The b5 06 constant 1s used to prevent the arithmetic operation following the PID control calculation from exceeding a specified amount Set taking the maximum output frequency to be 100 The b5 07 constant is used to adjust PID control offset
548. s reduce the power detection filter time constant b8 05 If b8 05 is set too small however motor rotations when the load is light may become unstable Motor efficiency varies due to temperature fluctuations and differences in motor characteristics Conse quently control motor efficiency online to optimize efficiency by causing minute variations in voltage using the search operation Constant b8 06 Search Operation Voltage Limiter controls the range that con trol the voltage using the search operation For 200 V Class Inverters set the range to 100 200 V and for 400 V Class Inverters set the range to 100 400 V Set to 0 to disable the search operation Vector Control In vector control method control the slip frequency so that motor efficiency is maximized Taking the motor rated slip for the base frequency as optimum slip calculate the optimum slip for motor efficiency for each frequency In vector control be sure to perform autotuning and set the motor rated slip If the motor performs hunting when using energy saving control in vector control reduce the set value in b8 02 Energy saving Gain or increase the set value in b8 03 Energy saving Filter Time Constant Individual Functions E Setting Motor Constants In vector control method the motor constants are set automatically using autotuning If autotuning does not complete normally set them manually iRRelated Constants Name
549. s are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Con Edd Open Open stant Description Sony V f Loop Flux Loop Number Display Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Jump fre Set the center values of the quency 1 jump frequencies in Hz This function is disabled by setting the jump frequency to Jump fre 0 Hz Always ensure that the quency 2 following applies d3 01 2 d3 02 d3 03 Jump Freq2 Operation in the jump fre quency range is prohibited but during acceleration and deceleration speed changes Jump Freq3 smoothly without jump Jump Freq 1 Jump fre quency 3 Jump fre Sets the jump frequency quency width bandwidth in Hz Jump Band The jump frequency will be width the jump frequency d3 04 iReference Frequency Hold d4 User constants for the reference frequency hold function are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Con Orn J Open 5 stant Description Factory v f Loop Flux Loop Number Display Setting with Vec Vec Vec z PG tor tor tor 1 2 Frequency Sets whether or not frequen reference cies on hold will be recorded hold function 0 Disabled when operation selection is stopped or the power is turned on again starts at 0 Enabled when operation is stopped or the power is turned on again starts at MOP Ref the previous hold frequency
550. s as are used in the programming modes Use the Increment Decrement and Shift RESET Keys to change the frequency The user constant will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the DATA ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting iExample Operations An example of key operations is given below for when the following settings have been changed from their default settings b1 01 Reference Selection C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 E1 01 Input Voltage Setting and E2 01 Motor Rated Current Setting Display Mode Selection Display Monitor Display DATA ENTER ADV Main Menu Programming gt VERIFY Main Menu VERIFY Reference Source VERIFY Reference Source b1 01 Pn Terminal DATA ENTER VERIFY Accel Time 1 10 0Sec Main Menu Operation QUICK Main Menu Quick Setting f Fig 3 8 Operations in Verify Mode C1 00 0Sec 0 0 6000 0 DATA EN votes _ e voten E1 01 200VAC gt E1 01 E00VAC 1957255 15577255 DRIVE 200VAC 200V 1 01 B00 0Sec OREM VERIFY Motor Rated FLA V 0 3 13 Autotuning Mode Autotuning automatically tunes and sets the required motor constants when operating in the vector control methods Always perform autotun
551. s input for regenerative loads The following diagram shows the time chart for lowering Using Inverters for Elevating Machines E aaaea DOWN Forward ON LOFF _ HIGH LOW EN ON OFE Ro Analog signals corresponding to load size Regenerative load Inputs positive polarity Torque compensation signal 0 Same as above Motor load Inputs negative polarity 0 t Output frequency Motor torque i i m Regenerative load Motor load During run 2 TEM ON OFF Holding brake operation OPEN F CLOSE Fig 6 90 Torque Compensation Time Chart Lowering 1 E 1 For either increasing or decreasing torque externally maintain the torque compensation signals during P operation to prevent them from fluctuating Fluctuation in compensation signals during operation may result e in vibration IMPORTANTI 2 If reverse run is used for lifting and forward run is used for lowering the torque compensation signal polar ity must be reversed BAnalog Input Filter Time Constant If noise enters the analog frequency reference during operation using analog frequency reference b1 01 1 6 and operation becomes rough implement noise countermeasures and also set H3 12 Analog input filter time mm constant to between 0 01 and 0 10 s Confirming Startup Current and Reducing Carrier Frequency When performing a trial operation set L
552. s input together 7 15 frequency reference 6 2 6 28 fuse blown 7 3 G ground fault 7 2 ground fault interrupter 2 16 ground wiring 2 20 H high slip braking OL 7 7 hunting prevention function 6 40 l incorrect inverter capacity setting 7 20 inductive noise 2 19 inrush prevention circuit fault 7 4 installation site 1 9 installed braking resistor overheating 7 5 internal braking transistor fault 7 5 inverter input voltage 6 121 inverter overload 7 7 J jump frequency function 6 31 L limiting motor rotation direction 6 62 loaded operation 4 16 M magnetic contactor 2 17 main circuit overvoltage 7 3 main circuit undervoltage 7 3 7 15 main circuit voltage fault 7 4 maintenance and inspection 8 1 MEMOBUS communications 6 92
553. s of Inverter digital output boards DO 02C Relay contact output DPDT contact DO 08 6 photocoupler output channels shared commons 2 independent relay contact output channels NC contact Inverter control panel 3CN Con stant Number v DO 02C Digital Output Card iRelated Constants Name Display Channel 1 out put selection DO Chl Select Fig 6 83 Description Effective when a Digital Output Board DO 02C or DO 08 is used Set the number of the multi func tion output to be output CH1 CH2 Relay contact Inverter control panel 3CN Digital Output Boards BCN Photocoupler TD5 CA CH3 E Eu D1Q cue ITD11 so TDi 6 o TD2 CH TD3 9 Tb4 cue DO 08 Digital Output Card Control Methods Vif with PG Open Loop Vector 1 Flux Vec tor Photocoupler COM 0 V common 7 Relay contact Open Loop Vector 2 Channel 2 out put selection DO Ch Select Effective when a Digital Output Board DO 02C or DO 08 is used Set the number of the multi func tion output to be output Channel 3 out put selection DO Ch3 Select Effective when a DO 08 Digital Output Board is used Set the number of the multi func tion output to be output Channel 4 out put selection DO Ch4 Select Effective when a DO 08 Digital Output Board is used Set the number of the mul
554. s too large the voltage will be too suppressed and the motor may stall Hunt Prev Gain Hunting pre vention time Set the hunting prevention primary delay time in units of ms constant Hunt Prev Time 1 Applicable for G7 Series Inverters with software version PRG 1034 and later 2 The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0 4 kW is given 5 69 ESpeed Feedback Protection Control Functions N2 User constants for speed feedback protection control functions are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Con i Open Open ut inti Setting Factory stant Description V f Loop Flux Loop Number Display Range Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Speed feed Set the internal speed feed back detec back detection control gain tion control using the multiplication func AFR gain tion Normally there is no need to make this setting Adjust this constant as fol lows If hunting occurs increase the set value Ifresponse is low decrease the set value Adjust the setting by 0 05 at a time while checking the response Speed feed back detec tion control AFR time constant Set the time constant to decide the rate of change in the speed feedback detection control AFR Time Speed feed back detec Incre
555. s used for loads with torque 50 Hz specifications X 2 decrement proportional to two or three times the rota tion speed such as fans and pumps 60 Hz specifications X 3 decrement Variable torque characteristic 60 Hz specifications X 2 decrement Select the high startup torque V f pattern 50 Hz specifications medium startup only in the following cases torque The wiring distance between Inverter and High Startup motor is large approx 150 m min 50 Hz specifications large startup torque A large torque is required at startup ele vator loads etc 60 Hz specifications medium startup An AC reactor is inserted in the Inverter torque input or output You are operating a motor that is less than optimum Torque See Note 60 Hz specifications large startup torque 90 Hz specifications voltage saturation at 60 Hz Fixed Output This pattern is used for frequencies of 60 120 Hz specifications voltage saturation at Operation Hz or higher A fixed voltage is applied 60 Hz 180 Hz specifications voltage saturation at 60 Hz The torque is protected by the fully automatic torque boost function so normally there is no need to use this pattern When you select these patterns the values of constants E1 04 to E1 10 are changed automatically There are three types of values for E1 04 to E1 10 depending on the Inverter capacity 0 4 to 1 5 kW V f pattern 22 to 45 kW V f pattern
556. same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18 5 kW or less Removing the Front Cover Lift up at the location label at the top of the control circuit terminal board in the direction of arrow 2 Fig 1 14 Removing the Front Cover Model CIMR G7A2018 Shown Above B Attaching the Front Cover After completing required work such as mounting an optional board or setting the control circuit terminal board attach the front cover by reversing the procedure to remove it 1 Confirm that the Digital Operator is not mounted on the front cover Contact faults can occur if the cover is attached while the Digital Operator is mounted to it 2 Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Inverter and press in on the cover until it clicks into place on the Inverter BAttaching the Digital Operator Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 15 kW or less 1 16 Removing and Attaching the Protection Cover NM Removing and Attaching the Protection Cover Inverters of 15 kW or less have protection covers on the top and bottom as shown in Fig 1 4 Always remove the protection covers before installing an Inverter of 15 kW or less in a panel Use the following procedure to remove and attach a protection cover Removing the Protection Cover ETop Protection Cover Insert the tip of the straightedge screwdriver in the slot Then lift the cover up in the direction shown by the arrow to remove it
557. sation 4 This constant is automatically set during autotuning Motor rated Set the rated output of the motor output j c 0 00t E2 11 in units of 0 01 kW 00to 0 40 No Q Q Q Q Q 318H Mtr Rated This constant is automatically set 650 00 4 Power during autotuning The factory setting is 1 0 when using flux vector control 2 The factory setting is 2 00 s when Inverter capacity is 55 kW min The factory setting will change when the control method is changed The open loop vector 1 factory setting is given 3 By setting E2 11 Motor rated output the appropriate value will be set 4 The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity The values for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0 4 kW are given Adjusting Energy saving Control The method of adjustment during energy saving control operations differs depending on the control method Refer to the following when making adjustments V f Control In V f control method the voltage for optimum motor efficiency is calculated and becomes the output voltage reference b8 04 Energy saving Coefficient is set at the factory for motor use applied to the Inverter If the motor capacity differs from the motor applied to the Inverter set the motor capacity in E2 11 Motor Rated Out put Also adjust the output voltage in steps of 5 until it reaches minimum The larger the energy saving coefficient the greater the output voltage To improve response when the load fluctuate
558. sav ing Control High slip Braking H Under develop ment Under develop ment Under develop ment Feed For ward Con trol 2 must be 25 C 10 C The speed response guidelines indicating the extent of No Yes The variable speed control range For continuous operation the motor s temperature rise must be considered The speed deviation in relation to the maximum speed with a rated load and when the load is stable For open loop vector 1 and 2 control the motor temperature Yes he motor s actual speed gain in proportion to the speed reference which changes in a sinusoidal wave form within a range where motor torque does not become saturated A guideline for the motor torque that can be generated when started at a low speed and its output frequency rotations at that time This function limits the maximum motor torque to protect the machine and the load This function directly controls the amount of torque being generated at the motor and its rotation direction e g to control force This function controls the amount of motor slip that occurs to prevent mechanical shock when replacing a torque motor etc This function performs simple positioning control servo lock without using an external positioning control device 9 This function instantaneously estimates or detects the speed and rotation direction of a coasting motor and quickly starts it wi
559. setting 6 Hunting or vibration occurs for light loads Increase the setting Carrier fre quency selection Reducing motor mag netic noise Controlling hunting and vibration at low and medium speeds Motor magnetic noise is high Increase the setting Hunting or vibration occurs at low to middle range speeds Reduce the setting Torque com pensation gain Improving torque at low speeds 10 Hz or lower Controlling hunting and vibration for light loads 0 50 to 1 50 Torque is insufficient at low speeds Increase the setting Hunting or vibration occurs for light loads Reduce the setting Mid output frequency voltage VC Min output frequency voltage VMIN Varies depending on capacity 2 The setting is given for 200 V Class Inverters Double the voltage for 400 V Class Inverters Improving torque at low speeds Controlling shock at startup Torque is insufficient at low speeds Increase the setting Shock at startup is large Reduce the setting Note 1 Do not change C4 01 Torque compensation gain from its factory setting of 1 00 when using open loop vector 1 control 2 If speeds are inaccurate during regeneration in open loop vector 1 control enable Slip compensation selection during regeneration C3 04 1 If speeds are inaccurate in the high speed range enable Output voltage limit operation selection C3 05 1 _ 3 Do not use Slip
560. signal is input to terminal S3 EF3 will be displayed To use the external fault function set one ofthe values 20 to 2F in one of the constants H1 01 to H1 10 multi function contact input terminal S3 to S12 function selection Select the value to be set in H1 01 to H1 10 from a combination of any of the following three conditions Signal input level from peripheral devices External fault detection method Operation during external fault detection The following table shows the relationship between the combinations of conditions and the set value in HI OO Input Level Error Detection Method See Note 1 See Note 2 Detection Deceler Coast to Emer Continue During ate to Stop Stop gency Stop Operation Operation Error Error Error Warning Operation During Error Detection Constant Detection Note 1 Set the input level to detect errors using either signal ON or signal OFF NO contact External fault when ON NC contact External fault when OFF 2 Set the detection method to detect errors using either constant detection or detection during operation Constant detection Detects while power is supplied to the Inverter Detection during operation Detects only during Inverter operation 6 85 Output Terminal Functions The output terminal function which sets the output methods by switching the functions of the multi func tion outpu
561. stall the Inverter on wood or other combustible materials Binstallation Direction Mount the Inverter vertically to a wall or other horizontal surface Settings Observe the following precautions when making settings for an Inverter BUpper Limits The Digital Operator can be used to set high speed operation up to a maximum of 400 Hz depends on the car rier frequency Incorrect settings can be dangerous Use the maximum frequency setting functions to set upper limits The maximum output frequency is factory set to 60 Hz BDC Injection Braking The motor can overheat if the DC injection braking voltage or braking time is set to a large value BAcceleration Deceleration Times The motor s acceleration and deceleration times are determined by the torque generated by the motor the load 10 torque and the load s inertial moment GD7 4 If the stall prevention functions are activated during accelera tion or deceleration increase the acceleration or deceleration time The stall prevention functions will increase the acceleration or deceleration time by the amount of time the stall prevention function is active To reduce the acceleration or deceleration times increase the capacity of the motor and Inverter 10 Handling Observe the following precautions when wiring or performing maintenance for an Inverter BWiring Check The Inverter will be internally damaged if the power supply volt
562. stment completed Increase C5 02 ASR I Time 1 When there is higher level position control adjust the position loop gain so that overshooting undershooting doesn t occur Fine Adjustments When you want even finer gain adjustment adjust the gain while observing the speed waveform Constant set tings like those shown in the following table will be necessary to monitor the speed waveform Constant No Setting Explanation Multi function analog output 1 terminal FM monitor selection Settings that allow multi func Multi function analog output 1 terminal FM output gain tion analog output 1 to be used to monitor the output frequency Multi function analog output 1 terminal FM bias Multi function analog output 2 terminal AM monitor selection Settings that allow multi func Multi function analog output 2 terminal AM output gain tion analog output 2 to be used to monitor the motor speed Multi function analog output 2 terminal AM bias selection Multi function analog output 1 terminal signal level selection Settings that allow a 10 to 10 V Multi function analog output 2 terminal signal level selection signal range to be monitored The multi function analog outputs have the following functions with these constant settings Multi function analog output 1 terminal FM Outputs Inverter s output frequency 10 to 10 V Multi function analog output 2 termin
563. t Check the input data Check motor wiring If the motor is connected to the machine disconnect it Accelerate Acceleration error detected only for rotational autotuning The motor did not accelerate in the spec ified time Increase C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 Increase L7 01 and L7 02 Reverse Torque Limits if they are low If the motor is connected to the machine disconnect it PG Direction Motor Direction Error There is a faulty connection between the Inverter and PC A or B phase or the Inverter and Motor U V or W Check the PG wiring Check the motor wiring Check the PG rotation direction and F1 05 PG rotation Motor Speed Motor speed error detected only for rotational autotuning The torque reference was too high 100 during acceleration for open loop vector control only If the motor is connected to the machine disconnect it Increase C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 Check the input data particularly the number of PG pulses and the number of motor poles I det Circuit Current detection error The current flow exceeded the motor rated current The detected current sign was the oppo site of what it should be There is a phase fault for U V or W Check the current detection circuit motor wiring current detector and installation methods Leak Inductance Leakage inductance error Autotuning was not completed in the speci
564. t Set whether or not a communica tions timeout is to be detected as a communications error 0 Do not detect 1 Detect Send wait time Transmit Wait TIM Set the time from the Inverter receiving data to when the Inverter starts to send RTS control ON OFF RTS Control Sel Select to enable or disable RTS control 0 Disabled RTS is always ON 1 Enabled RTS turns ON only when sending Individual Functions m Name Control Methods Factory Vit Open Flux Open Con stant Description f Loo Loo Number Display Setting with Vector Vec Vector PG 1 tor 2 Unit Selection for MEMOBUS Register 0025H Selects the units used for MEMO BUS registry 0025H monitors the output voltage reference 0 0 1 V units 1 1 V units MEMOBUS 25H UNIT 1 Set H5 01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to MEMOBUS communications 2 Applicable for G7 Series Inverters with software versions PRG 1039 or later MEMOBUS communications can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in b1 01 and b1 02 Monitoring operation status from the PLC Setting and reading constants Resetting errors nputting multi function commands An OR operation is performed between the multi function commands input from the PLC and commands input from multi function contact input terminals S3 to S12 iaMessage Format In MEMO
565. t When the zero servo command has been input and the tion control loop is created and the motor stops Increasing the Zero servo gain in turn increases the strength of the lock Increas ing it by too much will cause oscillation frequency reference drop below 6 Zero Servo excitation level b2 01 a posi Emm Zero servo completion width Zero Servo Count Sets the output width of the P lock completion signal Enabled when the zero servo completion end is set for a multi function input The zero servo completion signal is ON when the current position is within the range the zero servo position zero servo completion width Set the allowable position dis placement from the zero servo position to 4 times the pulse rate of the PG pulse generator encoder in use Multi function Contact Input Functions H1 01 to H1 10 Control Methods Methods Function leee Vif with Zero servo Zero servo command ON Zero servo 00000000 ON Zero servo Zero servo command ON Zero servo No No Noo Yes Multi function Contact Output Functions H2 01 to H2 05 Control Methods Function Zero servo end ON Current position is within zero servo start position the zero servo end width To output the zero servo status externally assign the Zero servo End signal setting 33 to one of the multi function outputs H2 01 to H2 05 Monitor Function
566. t as a percentage of the maxi mum output frequency Bias terminal Al Terminal Al Bias Sets the frequency when 0 V is input as a percentage of the maxi mum frequency Signal level selection ter minal A3 Term A3 Signal 0 0 to 10V 1 10 to 10 V 11 bit polarity positive negative input Multi function analog input terminal A3 function selec tion Terminal A3 Sel Select multi function analog input function for terminal A3 Gain terminal A3 Terminal A3 Gain Sets the input gain level when 10 V is input Set according to the 100 value selected from H3 05 Bias terminal A3 Terminal A3 Bias Sets the input gain level when 0 V is input Set according to the 100 value selected from H3 05 Signal level selection terminal A2 Term A2 Signal 0 0 to 10 V 1 10to 10 V 2 4 to 20 mA 9 bit input Switch current and voltage input using the switch on the control panel Adjusting Frequency References Bil Name Control Methods Con S Factoi Open Open stant E Description Seting Vit Loop FX Loop Number Isplay with Vector VES vector PG 1 tor 2 Multi function analog input terminal A2 function selec Select multi function analog input tion function for terminal A2 Terminal A2 Sel Gain terminal Sets the input gain level when A2
567. t Noise Filter Installation Power supply MCCB OM o T SOM Inverter m OM MCCB 6 OM purpose Other 5 o noise fite Controllers Power supply MCCB OM General ex T 6 om Purpose Inverter n 5 OM noise filtel MCCB e 6 OM Other 5 OM controllers Do not use general purpose noise filters No general purpose noise filter can effectively suppress noise generated from the Inverter Fig 2 8 Incorrect Power supply Noise Filter Installation BWiring the Output Side of Main Circuit Observe the following precautions when wiring the main output circuits Connecting the Inverter and Motor Connect output terminals U V and W to motor lead wires U V and W respectively Check that the motor rotates forward with the Forward Run Command Switch over any two of the output ter minals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the Forward Run Command Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals Never connect a power supply to output terminals U V and W If voltage is applied to the output terminals the internal circuits of the Inverter will be damaged Never Short or Ground Output Terminals Ifthe output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Inverter cas ing an electric shock or grounding will occur This is extremely hazardous Do not short the output wires Do Not Use
568. t Pha reater than approximately 80 of the power supply ate loose cause Loss ae PP aii The voltage fluctuations in the input maximum motor capacity esc PSOE SE This fault is detected when L8 05 is p Pply i The voltage balance between phases set to 1 is bad There is a broken wire in the output cable PR Output Open phase There is a broken wire in the motor Reset thie failt aftef correcurig its LF An open phase occurred at the winding Cause Output Pha Inverter output The output terminals are loose Loss This fault is detected when L8 07 is set to 1 or 2 The motor being used has a capacity Check the totor and nene less than 5 of the rated output cur capac ty rent The ambient temperature is too high Install a cooling unit Cooling Fin Overheating There is a heat source nearby Remove the heat source The temperature of the Inverter s cool ing fins exceeded the setting in L8 02 The Inverter s cooling fan has stopped Replace the cooling fan Contact or the overheat protection level our sales representative OH OH The temperature exceeded the Mak hati Bp OH1 setting in L8 02 Stopping method can h ii uL 7 incorect wring Heatsnk be changed by L8 03 A short circuit between V V and ug dM eatsn OHI Th d d Check the resistance and wir Overtem The temperature exceede AC terminals occurred P 100 C Stopping method Coast to Overload in the control circuit ter ing for the frequency setting
569. t current p i gt 1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency oe immediately before baseblock Minimum baseblock time L2 03 54 5 2 After AC power supply recovery motor waits for the minimum Speed Search Wait Time b2 03 I Fig 6 48 Speed Search After Baseblock Current Detection Loss Time L2 03 Loss Time Longer Than Minimum Baseblock Time eceleration speed set in b3 03 AC power supply ON OFF o tput frequency before power loss d ad ian et oe Set frequency reference Output frequency b3 02 Speed search operating time Output current lt gt Speed search wait time b3 05 Minimum baseblock time L2 03 Fig 6 49 Speed Search After Baseblock Current Detection Loss Time gt L2 03 Continuing Operation E Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is Lost The frequency reference loss detection function continues operation using 8096 speed of the frequency refer ence before loss when the frequency reference using a master speed analog input is reduced 90 or more in 400 ms When the error signal during frequency reference loss is output externally set H2 01 to H2 05 multi function contact output terminal M1 M2 P1 PC P2 PC P3 C3 and P4 C4 function selection to C frequency refer ence lost Frequency references using the following master speed analog inputs are used to detect a fre
570. t gain 2 Soft CLA selection Low speed regeneration stability coefficient 2 Table 10 7 User Constants Continued Speed estimator gain fluctuation frequency 1 Fac tory Setting Cumulative operation time selec tion Fac tory Setting Speed estimator gain fluctuation frequency 2 Fan operation time setting Speed estimator gain fluctuation rate Fault trace fault history clear func tion Feed forward control selection Output power monitor clear selec tion Motor acceleration time Capacitor maintenance setting Feed forward proportional gain Copy function selection Monitor selection Read permitted selection Monitor selection after power up Motor 1 2 selection Frequency units of reference set ting and monitor Autotuning mode selection Setting unit for frequency con stants related to V f characteristics Motor output power LCD brightness adjustment Motor rated voltage LOCAL REMOTE key enable dis able Motor rated current STOP key during control circuit terminal operation Motor base frequency User constant initial value Number of motor poles kVA selection Motor base speed Frequency reference setting method selection PG pulses per revolution for teach ing Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected Cumulative operation time setting
571. t if the Reverse Run Command is sent Check the setting of b1 04 Autotuning has just been completed The Inverter remains in the autotuning mode right after autotuning has been com pleted and cannot be operated even if the Run Command is sent Press the MENU Key to display the drive mode on the Digital Operator and press the DATA ENTER Key to enter the drive mode BThe motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected The load may be too heavy The Inverter has a stall prevention function and an automatic torque boost func tion but the motor responsiveness limit may be exceeded if acceleration is too rapid or if the load is too heavy Lengthen the acceleration time or reduce the load Also consider increasing the motor capacity iThe motor does not accelerate If the torque limit settings L7 01 to L7 04 or the torque reference input torque control are too small the motor may not be able to accelerate Check the settings and input values Also for operation with open loop vector 2 control refer to Corrective Actions for Control Faults CF on page 7 14 Troubleshooting H BThe motor only rotates in one direction Reverse run prohibited is selected If b1 04 Prohibition of Reverse Operation is set to 1 reverse run pro hibited the Inverter will not receive Reverse Run Commands To use both forward and reverse operation set b1 04 to 0 If the Direction of
572. t terminals M1 M2 P1 PC P2 PC P3 C3 and P4 C4 is described here During Run Setting 0 The Run Command is OFF and there is not output voltage The Run Command is ON or a voltage is being output During Run 2 Setting 37 The Inverter is not outputting a frequency Baseblock DC injection braking initial excitation or stopped The Inverter is outputting a frequency These outputs can be used to indicate the Inverter s operating status Run Command OFF ON l Baseblock command OFF Output frequency During run 1 output orr ON i OFF ae During run 2 output Fig 6 55 Timing Chart for During RUN Output Zero speed Setting 1 The output frequency is greater than the minimum output frequency E1 09 With flux vector control is greater than the zero speed level b2 01 The output frequency is less than the minimum output frequency E1 09 With flux vector control is less than the zero speed level b2 01 Minimum output frequency E1 09 Zero speed level 62 01 when flux vector control is Output frequency being used OFF ON Zero speed output Fig 6 56 Timing Chart for Zero speed 6 86 Output Terminal Functions 3 Motor Overload OL1 Pre alarm Setting 1F OFF The motor protection function s electronic thermal value is less than 90 of the detection level ON The motor protection function s
573. t the stopping method for communications errors 0 Deceleration stop using deceleration time in C1 02 Coast to stop Emergency stop using deceleration time in C1 09 Continue operation Factory Setting Control Methods Vif with PG Open Loop Vec tor 1 User Constant Tables 5 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vec tor 2 Input level of external fault from Com munications Option Board EFO Detec tion 0 Always detect Detect during operation Stopping method for external fault from Com munications Option Board EFO Fault Action Deceleration stop using deceleration time in C1 02 Coast to stop Emergency stop using deceleration time in C1 09 Continue operation Trace sam pling from Communica tions Option Board Trace Sam ple Tim Torque refer ence torque limit selec tion from optical option Torq Ref Lmt Sel Torque reference torque limit from transmission disabled Torque reference torque limit from transmission enabled Operation selection after SI T WDT error SI T WDTErr Sel Set the stopping method for SI T WDT errors E5 0 Deceleration stop using deceleration time in C1 02 1 Coast to stop 2 Emergency stop using deceleration time in C1 09 3 Continue operation Number of SI T BUS error detec tion SI T BUS DET Ctr Set the number which SI T detects BU
574. t the voltage of the main AC power supply satisfies the rated voltage of the Inverter Injury or fire can occur if the voltage is not correct Do not perform voltage withstand tests on the Inverter Otherwise semiconductor elements and other devices can be damaged Connect braking resistors Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units as shown in the I O wiring examples Otherwise a fire can occur and the Inverter braking resistors Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units can be damaged AN CAUTION Tighten all terminal screws to the specified tightening torque Otherwise a fire may occur Do not connect AC power to output terminals U V and W The interior parts of the Inverter will be damaged if voltage is applied to the output terminals Do not connect phase advancing capacitors or LC RC noise filters to the output circuits The Inverter can be damaged or interior parts burnt if these devices are connected Do not connect magnetic contactors to the output circuits If a load is connected while the Inverter is operating surge current will cause the overcurrent protection circuit inside the Inverter to operate B Setting User Constants AN CAUTION Disconnect the load machine device from the motor before performing rotational autotuning The motor may turn possibly resulting in injury or damage to equipment Also motor constants cannot be correctly set with the motor attached to a load Stay clear of the mo
575. t usually necessary to set Time PID output Select forward reverse for characteris PID output poo Lae selection 2 m MEN H iini or 1 0 No A A A A A IADH 6107 Output Level highlights the output Sel code PID output b5 10 gain Sets output gain ooto 1 0 No AJAJ A A A 1AEH 6 107 PIS 25 0 Output Gain PID reverse 0 0 limit when PID output is output selec negative b5 11 M99 lReverses when PID output gop 0 No A A A A A IAFH 6107 1s negative Output Rev 0 limit when reverse prohibit Sel is selected using b1 04 Selection of 0 No detection of loss of PID feed PID feedback back com 1 Detection of loss of PID mand loss feedback detection Operation continues during detection with the b5 12 malfunctioning contact 0to2 0 No A A A A A 1B0H 6 108 not operating 2 Detection of loss of PID Fb los Det Sel feedback Coasts to stop during detection and fault contact operates PID feed back com mand loss Sets the PID feedback loss ps 3 detection detection level as a percent 0 to 0 No Pale N A A 1BIH 6108 level units with the maximum out 100 put frequency at 100 Fb los Det Lvl PID feed back com mand loss b5 14 detection Sets the PID feedback loss 0 01 1o No a aA A A A J 1B2H 6 108 time detection level in s units 25 5 Fb los Det Time User Constant Tables w Name Control Methods Fact Open Open Descrip
576. t values 6 63 6 64 Name Control Methods Factory Vif Open Flux Open Con stant Description f Loo Loo Number Display Setting a ecu og Vir 1 or 2 Voltage recov Sets the time required to return ery time the Inverter output voltage to nor mal voltage at the completion of a speed search in units of one sec PwrL V F pu Ramp t Sets the time required to recover from 0 V to the maximum volt age Undervoltage Sets the main circuit undervoltage detection level UV detection level main circuit DC voltage in V units Usually setting is not necessary Insert an AC reactor in the PUV Det Level Inverter input side to lower the main circuit undervoltage detec tion level Note Attach a Backup Capacitor Unit for Momentary Power Loss if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2 0 seconds is required for 200 V 400 V Class Inverters with outputs of 0 4 to 7 5 kW 1 The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0 4 kW is given 2 These values are for a 200 V Class Inverter For a 400 V Class Inverter double the values iSetting Precautions Error output signals are not output during momentary power loss recovery To continue Inverter operation after power has been restored make settings so that Run Commands from the control main circuit terminal are stored even while power is susp
577. tact is closed when the emergency stop signal or Inverter fault contact output signal is ON Fig 6 85 Brake ON OFF Sequence Circuit Configuration i Time Chart The brake ON OFF sequence time charts are shown in Figs 6 86 and 6 87 OFF ON i if UP LS6e sc High speed OFF ON Low speed Output frequency 0 Q 5 O Holding brake Frequency detection 2 M1 M2 H2 01 05 oN operation CLOSE OPEN 6 d1 01 Enabled when b1 01 0 ENEN b4 01 gt Time DC injection braking OFF CLOSE Note For variable speed operation by an analog signal set to b1 01 1 Fig 6 86 Brake ON OFF Sequence Time Chart V f V f with PG open loop vector 1 ON ON d1 01 Enabled when b1 01 0 b2 01 Holding brake m S1 SC Up OFF 5 e se sc Highspeed OFF Low speed F Output frequency 5 0 Q 5 o During run 2 LM1 M2 H2 01 37 E gt Time _ DC injection braking Zero speed control ON operation CLOSE OPEN Note For variable speed operation by an analog signal set to b1 01 1 Fig 6 87 Brake ON OFF Sequence Time Chart Flux Vector OFF CLOSE Stall Prevention during Deceleration If connecting a braking resistor to discharge regenerative energy be sure to set Stall prevention selection dur ing decel L3 04 to 0 Disabled within the specified
578. tallP Run Sel Description 0 Disabled Runs as set With a heavy load the motor may stall 1 Deceleration time 1 the deceleration time for the stall prevention function is C1 02 2 Deceleration time 2 the deceleration time for the stall prevention function is C1 04 Setting Range Factory Setting Control Methods Vit with PG Open Loop Vec tor 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vec tor 2 Stall pre vention level dur ing running StallP Run Level Effective when L3 05 is 1 or 2 Set as a percentage of the Inverter rated current Usually setting is not necessary The factory setting reduces the set values when the motor stalls Overvolt age inhibit selection OV Inhibit Sel 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Used to enable or disable the function for inhibiting main cir cuit overvoltages by reducing the regenerative torque limit according to the main circuit overvoltage level If this function is enabled when the main circuit voltage rises operation will be per formed with the regenerative torque less than the set value Overvolt age inhibit voltage level OV Inhbt VoltLv1 Sets the main circuit voltage level for which the regenerative torque limit is restricted to 0 Usually there is no need to change this setting If main cir cuit overvoltages occur even with the overvoltage inhibit function enabled reduce this setting 1 The setti
579. tant access Used to set the constant access level level set read 0 Monitoring only Monitoring drive mode and setting A1 01 and A1 04 Used to select user constant Only constants set in A2 01 to A2 32 can be read and set Advanced Constants can be read and set in both quick programming mode and advanced programming A mode Access Level Name Con stant Number Display Password Enter Password Description Password input when a password has been set in A1 05 This function write protects some constants of the initialize mode Ifthe password is changed A1 01 to A1 03 and A2 01 to A2 32 constants can no longer be changed Programming mode constants can be changed Factory Setting Digital Operator Functions Bi Control Methods Vit Open Loop with Vector PG 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vector 2 _ Password set ting Select Pass word Used to set a four digit number as the password This constant is not usually dis played When the Password A1 04 is displayed hold down the RESET Key and press the Menu Key and the password will be dis played i Setting Precautions Constant A1 05 cannot be displayed using normal key operations To display A1 05 hold down the RESET Key and press the MENU Key while A1 04 is displayed Displaying User set Constants Only
580. tary power loss recovery time Momentary Power Loss Recovery Unit P0000 73600 P0000 Handles momentary power losses for the control power supply for models 7 5 kW or less maintains power for 2 s Set monitor frequen cies and voltages exter nally Frequency Meter DCF 6A Frequency Setter RV30YN20S 2 KQ Frequency Setter Knob CM 3S Devices to set or monitor frequencies externally Output Voltmeter SCF 12NH Measures the output voltage externally and designed for use with a PWM Inverter Correct frequency refer ence input frequency meter ammeter scales Variable Resistor Board for Fre quency Reference 2 KQ ETX003270 20 kQ ETX003120 Connected to the control circuit terminals to input a frequency reference Frequency Meter Scale Correction Resistor RH000850 must be suitable for high frequency operation Example NV series by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation manufactured in or after 1988 EG SG series by Fuji Electric Co Ltd manufactured in or after 1984 2 The finement zero phase reactor is manufactured by Hitachi Metals Calibrates the scale of frequency meters and ammeters Power supply Molded case circuit breaker or ground fault interrupter Magnetic con tactor MC AC reactor for power factor improvement Zero phase reactor Braking resistor Input noise filter DC reactor
581. tec Esc command loss tion level as a percent units with Oto detection level the maximum output frequency at 100 Fb los Det Lvl 100 0 No A A A A A 1B1H PID feedback command loss Sets the PID feedback loss detec 0 0 to b5 14 detection time tion level in s units 25 5 is No A 5 is a no Fb los Det Time PID sleep func tion operation b5 15 level Set the PID sleep function start 0 0 to 00Hz No PS A A n A 1B3H level as a frequency 400 0 PID Sleep Level PID sleep oper ation delay time Set the delay time until the PID 0 0 to pote sleep function starts in seconds 25 5 d No i a n 5 X IH PID Sleep Time Accel decel time for PID Set the accel decel time for PID 0 0 to b5 17 reference reference in seconds 25 5 MER No 2 2 A 5 A IBH PID SFS Time Pulse train input function 0 Frequency reference H6 01 selection 1 PID feedback value 0 to2 0 No A A A A A 42CH 2 PID target value Pulse Input Sel Monitor Functions Name Control Methods e Output Signal Level Open Description During Multi Func V f Loop Flux with Vec Vec tion Analog Output PG tor tor 1 Display PID feed Monitors the feedback value back value when PID control is used U1 24 The input for the max fre ues nee i x AE WEN WE PID Feed quency corresponds to P back 10095 PID input PID feedback volume F volume T i 10 V Max fre
582. tection disabled Overtorque detection only with speed agreement operation continues after overtorque warning Overtorque detected continuously during operation operation continues after overtorque warning Overtorque detection only with speed agreement output stopped upon detection 6 protected operation continuously during operation output stopped upon detection protected operation Torq Det 1 Sel Undertorque detection only with speed agreement operation continues after overtorque warning Undertorque detected continuously during operation operation continues after overtorque warning Undertorque detection only with speed agreement output stopped upon detection protected operation Undertorque detected continuously during operation output stopped upon detection protected operation Torque detec Open loop vector control Motor tion level 1 rated torque is set as 100 V f control Inverter rated current Torq Det 1 Lvl is set as 100 e 53 Overtorque detected 6 54 Con stant Number Name Display Torque detec tion time 1 Torq Det 1 Time Description Sets the overtorque undertorque detection time in 1 second units Factory Setting Control Methods Vif with PG Open Loop Vector 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vector 2 Torque detec tion selection 2 Torq Det 2 Sel
583. ted current on the motor nameplate Motor Rated Slip Setting Set E2 02 to the motor rated slip calculated from the number of rated rotations on the motor nameplate Amount of motor rated slip Motor rated frequency Hz No of rated rotations min x No of motor poles 120 Motor No Load Current Setting Set E2 03 to the motor no load current using the rated voltage and rated frequency The motor no load current is not normally written on the motor nameplate Consult the motor manufacturer Factory setting is the no load current value for a standard Yaskawa 4 pole motor Number of Motor Poles Setting Set the number of motor poles number of poles as written on the motor nameplate E2 04 is not displayed when V f control or open loop vector control is selected Motor Line to Line Resistance Setting E2 05 is set automatically when performing motor line to line resistance autotuning When you cannot per form tuning consult the motor manufacturer for the line to line resistance value Calculate the resistance from the line to line resistance value in the motor test report using the following formula and then make the setting accordingly E type isolation Line to line resistance Q at 75 C of test report x 0 92 Q B type isolation Line to line resistance Q at 75 C of test report x 0 92 Q F type isolation Line to line resistance Q at 115 C of test report x 0 87 Q Individual Functions w e Motor Leak
584. ted to a conveyor or other machine ensure that the IMPORTANT holding brake is not activated during autotuning 4 11 Precautions for Rotational and Stationary Autotuning Lower the base voltage based on Fig 4 4 to prevent saturation of the Inverter s output voltage when the rated voltage of the motor is higher than the voltage of the power supply to the Inverter Use the following proce dure to perform autotuning 1 Input the voltage of the input power supply to T1 03 Motor rated voltage 2 Input the results of the following formula to T1 05 Motor base frequency Base frequency from the motor s nameplate x setting of T1 03 Rated voltage from motor s nameplate 3 Perform autotuning After having completed autotuning set E1 04 Max output frequency to the base frequency shown on the motor nameplate Output voltage A Rated voltage from t lt lt lt lt lt ses s ns ere fetsesesessce motor nameplate T1 03 gt Output frequency Base frequency from motor nameplate 0 Base frequency from motor nameplate xT1 03 Rated voltage from motor nameplate Fig 4 4 Motor Base Frequency and Inverter Input Voltage Setting i a 1 When speed precision is required at high speeds i e 9096 of the rated speed or higher set T1 03 Motor P rated voltage to the input power supply voltage x 0 9 e 2 When operating at high speeds i e 9096 of the rated speed or higher the output
585. teel box The cable between the Inverter and the motor should be as short as possible Steel box Power i 1 Metal pipe supply MCCB OM C OM z Fig 2 11 Countermeasures Against Radio Interference Cable Length between Inverter and Motor If the cable between the Inverter and the motor is long the high frequency leakage current will increase caus ing the Inverter output current to increase as well This may affect peripheral devices To prevent this adjust the carrier frequency set in C6 02 as shown in Table 2 6 For details refer to Chapter 5 User Constants Table 2 6 Cable Length between Inverter and Motor Cable Tengi More than 1007 Carrier frequency 10 kHz max 5 kHz max iGround Wiring Observe the following precautions when wiring the ground line Always use the ground terminal of the 200 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100 Q and that of the 400 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10 Q Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as welding machines or power tools Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire Leakage current flows through the Inverter Therefore if the distance between the ground electrode and the ground terminal is too long potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become
586. tep 3 to analog inputs Step 1 When setting terminal Al s analog input to step 1 set b1 01 to 1 and when setting d1 01 Frequency Ref erence 1 to step 1 set b1 01 to 0 Step 2 When setting terminal A3 s analog input to step 2 set H3 05 to 2 auxiliary frequency reference 1 When setting d1 02 Frequency Reference 2 to step 2 set H3 05 to 1F Analog input not used Step 3 When setting terminal A2 s analog input to step 3 set H3 09 to 3 auxiliary frequency reference 2 When setting d1 03 Frequency Reference 3 to step 3 set H3 05 to 1F Analog input not used When inputting 0 to 10 V to terminal A2 s analog input set H3 08 to 0 and turn OFF pin 2 to DIP switch 1 on the control circuit terminal board Refer to page 2 26 ilConnection Example and Time Chart The following diagram shows a time chart and control circuit terminal connection example during a 9 step operation Inverter O Q 2O S1 Forard stop 4 O O 2O S2 Reverselstop O O 2O S3 External fault O QO 9O S4 Fault reset e O O O s5 Multi step speed reference 1 O O 9O S6 Multi step speed reference 2 O O 9 99 Multi step speed reference 3 4 O O O S7 Jog frequency c a Sequence common V Frequency setting power 15 V 0O A1 Master speed referennce 0 to 10 V Master speed frequency
587. terminals Removing the Terminal Cover B Inverters of 15 kW or Less Loosen the screws at the bottom of the terminal cover press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the direc tion indicated by arrow 1 and then lift the terminal cover up to an angle of about 30 degrees in the direction indicated by arrow 2 Remove the terminal cover in the direction indicated by arrow 3 Approx 30 Fig 1 9 Removing the Terminal Cover Model CIMR G7A23P7 Shown Above B Inverters of 18 5 kW or More Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover pull out the terminal cover in the direc tion of arrow 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2 Fig 1 10 Removing the Terminal Cover Model CIMR G7A2018 Shown Above 1 11 i DCCC Attaching the Terminal Cover When wiring the terminal block has been completed attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal proce dure For Inverters with an output of 15 kW or less insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the grove on the Inverter and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it clicks into place 1 12 Removing Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover m Removing Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover The methods of removing and attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover
588. than one Inverter in the same enclosure so that the temperature of the air entering the Inverters is below 45 C Overheating can result in fires or other accidents B Wiring 5S WARNING Always turn OFF the input power supply before wiring terminals Otherwise an electric shock or fire can occur Wiring must be performed by an authorized person qualified in electrical work Otherwise an electric shock or fire can occur Be sure to ground the ground terminal 200 V Class Ground to 100 or less 400 V Class Ground to 10 O or less Otherwise an electric shock or fire can occur Always check the operation of any emergency stop circuits after they are wired Otherwise there is the possibility of injury Wiring is the responsibility of the user Never touch the output terminals directly with your hands or allow the output lines to come into con tact with the Inverter case Never short the output circuits Otherwise an electric shock or ground short can occur If the power supply is turned ON during the FWD or REV Run Command is given the motor will start automatically Turn the power supply ON after verifying that the RUN signal is OFF Failure to observe this warning may result in injury When the 3 wire sequence is set do not make the wiring for the control circuit unless the multi function input terminal constant is set Failure to observe this warning may result in injury A CAUTION Check to be sure tha
589. the Motor Rotation is Reversed If the motor operates in the wrong direction the motor output wiring is faulty When the Inverter T1 U T2 V and T3 W are properly connected to the motor T1 U T2 V and T3 W the motor operates in a for ward direction when a Forward Run Command is executed The forward direction depends on the manufac turer and the motor type so be sure to check the specifications The direction of rotation can be reversed by switching two wires among T1 U T2 V and T3 W If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow Use the following information if the motor does not output torque or 1f acceleration is too slow BThe torque limit has been reached When a torque limit has been set in constants L7 01 to L7 04 no torque will be output beyond that limit This can cause the torque to be insufficient or the acceleration time to be too long Check to be sure that the value set for the torque limit 1s suitable If torque limits have been set for the multi function analog input H3 05 or H3 09 10 to 12 or 15 check to be sure that the analog input value is suitable BThe stall prevention level during acceleration is too low If the value set for L3 02 Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration is too low the acceleration time will be too long Check to be sure that the set value is suitable The stall prevention level during running is too low If the value set for L3 06
590. the frequency for switching between Proportion Gain 1 2 and Inte gral Time 1 2 in Hz units ASR inte gral I limit ASRI Limit Set to a small value to prevent any rad ical load change Set to 100 of the maximum output frequency ASR pri mary delay time 2 ASR Delay Time2 When the control method is changed the factory settings will change The flux vector factory settings are given Refer to Factory Settings that Change Sets the filter time constant for output ting torque references from the speed control loop ASR It is set in 1 sec ond units With open loop vector 2 control this setting is enabled only for speeds greater than 35 Hz Usually setting is not necessary with the Control Method 41 02 2 The setting range or flux vector and open loop vector 2 controls is 1 00 to 300 00 5 25 Carrier Frequency C6 User constants for the carrier frequency are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Fac Open Open Setting tory v f Loop Flux Loop Renee setting plea wea e 1 Display Description Carrier fre quency Select carrier wave fixed pattern selection Select F to enable detailed settings using constants C6 03 to C6 07 Carrier Freq Sel Carrier Set the carrier frequency upper limit and frequency lower limit in kHz units upper limit The carrier frequency gain is set as
591. the multi DO Ch3 function output to be output Select Channel 4 output selec Effective when a DO 08 Dig tion ital Output Board is used Set the number of the multi DO Ch4 function output to be output Select Channel 5 output selec Effective when a DO 08 Dig tion ital Output Board is used Set the number of the multi DO Ch5 function output to be output Select Channel 6 output selec Effective when a DO 08 Dig tion ital Output Board is used Set the number of the multi DO Ch6 function output to be output Select Channel 7 Effective when a DO 08 Dig output selec ita Output Board is used tion Set the number of the multi DO Ch7 function output to be output Select Channel 8 output selec Effective when a DO 08 Dig tion ital Output Board is used Set the number of the multi DO Ch8 function output to be output Select DO 08 out Effective when a DO 08 Dig put mode ital Output Board is used selection Set the output mode 0 8 channel individual out puts DO 08 Selec Binary code output tion 2 Output according to F5 01 to F5 08 settings Communications Option Boards F6 User constants for a Communications Option Board are shown in the following table Con stant Number Name Display Operation selection after communica tions error BUS Fault Sel Description Se
592. thout subjecting it to shock 10 This function automatically adjusts the voltage applied to the motor to optimize the motor s efficiency with light loads 11 This function improves the deceleration time without using a braking resistor by making the motor winding absorb regenerative power As a standard this func tion is effective with a motor running on 160 kW or less with a high inertia load 12 This function enables proportional gain in relation to changes in the speed reference even for low rigidity corresponds to the servo s model gain control 13 Set the maximum output frequency E1 04 for open loop vector 2 control to 60 Hz max 120 Hz max for PRG 1020 For torque control on the regenerative side use in the speed range 1 10 _ BApplication Function Precautions Observe the following precautions when using the application functions Perform rotational autotuning during trial operation whenever it is possible to separate the motor and machine To achieve the characteristics of vector control described in Table 10 1 the control must be adjusted within a range that the machine will not vibrate after rotational autotuning has been performed With vector control the motor and Inverter must be connected 1 1 Vector control is not possible when multiple motors are connected to a single Inverter Select an Inverter capacity so the rated motor current is 50 to 100 of the rated Inverter current For estimated speed searching the
593. ti func tion output to be output Channel 5 out put selection DO Ch5 Select Effective when a DO 08 Digital Output Board is used Set the number of the multi func tion output to be output Channel 6 out put selection DO Ch6 Select Effective when a DO 08 Digital Output Board is used Set the number of the multi func tion output to be output Con stant Number Name Display Channel 7 out put selection Description Effective when a DO 08 Digital Output Board is used Factory Setting Control Methods Vif with PG Open Loop Vector 1 Flux Vec tor Options Bil Open Loop Vector 2 Set the number of the multi func DO Ch7 Select tion output to be output Channel 8 out put selection Effective when a DO 08 Digital Output Board is used Set the number of the multi func tion output to be output DO Ch8 Select DO 08 output mode selection Effective when a DO 08 Digital Output Board is used Set the output mode 0 8 channel individual outputs DO 08 Selec 1 Binary code output tion 2 Output according to F5 01 to F5 08 settings i Setting Output Items for the DO 02C Digital Output Board If using DO 02C Digital Output Board set the output items using F5 01 and F5 02 i Setting Output Items for the DO 08 Digital Output Board If using DO 08 Digital Output Board sel
594. tic contactor on the output side of the Inverter When a speed search is performed after recover ing from a momentary power loss the search operation is delayed by the time set here Speed search detection com pensation gain speed calcula tion Srch Detect Comp Operation restarts at a speed obtained by multiplying the speed from the speed search by the com pensation gain Increase this setting if overvolt ages occur when speed search is performed after a long baseblock for example in searches at star tup 6 65 Con stant Number Name Display Description Factory Setting Control Methods Vif with PG Open Loop Vector 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vector 2 Proportional Sets the proportional gain PI con gain of the trol of the speed estimator during speed estimator speed search taking the setting of during speed N4 08 to be equivalent to a setting qoe oe p 010 1 0 No No Nol No No A 19DH Usually there is no need to 2 0 change this setting If however Srch Est P Gain the load inertia is large and over voltages occur during the search reduce this setting Rotation direc tion search 0 Disabled operates with speci b3 14 selection fied rotation direction orl 1 No aw A A No A I9EH 1 Enabled operates with rota Bidir Search tion direction found by search Sel Speed search
595. ticu larly for control of multiple motors with a single Inverter and for replacing existing Inverters Applications requiring high precision speed control using a PG on the machine side Variable speed control applica tions requiring high performance without a PG on the motor side and for replacing open loop vector control of the pre vious VS 616G5 Very high perfor mance control with a PG on the motor side sim ple servodrives high precision speed control torque control and torque limiting Very high perfor mance control without a PG on the motor side such as simple servodrives torque control and torque limiting and function appli cations between flux vector and open loop vector 1 control PG Speed Control Board Option Not required Required PG A2 or PG D2 Not required Required PG B2 or PG X2 Not required Speed Control Range 1 40 1 40 1 100 1 1000 1 200 1 10 on regenerative side Speed Control Accuracy 2 to 396 0 2 Speed Response 3 Approx 1 Hz Approx 1 Hz Maximum Output Fre quency 60 Hz 120 Hz Starting Torque 4 150 3 Hz 150 3 Hz 150 1 Hz 150 0 min 150 0 3 Hz oXo X Go X X X X ok O0 1 QV tA 4 Control Method Autotuning Varispeed G7 Control Methods B MM Table 10 1 Overview and Features of Control Metho
596. ting Master Speed Frequency Reference Only Voltage Input When inputting a voltage for the master speed frequency reference input the voltage to control circuit termi nal Al Inverter O V Power supply 15 V 20 mA lt C Master speed frequenc E Al referees 1 d voltage input A2 Master speed frequency reference current input A3 Auxiliary speed frequency reference 1 AC Analog common V Fig 6 2 Voltage Input for Master Speed Frequency Reference Inputting Master Speed Frequency Reference Only Current Input When inputting a current for the master speed frequency reference input the current to control circuit terminal A2 input 0 V to terminal Al set H3 08 Multi function analog input terminal A2 signal level selection to 2 current input and set H3 09 Multi function analog input terminal A2 function selection to 0 add to termi nal Al Inverter V Power supply 15 V 20 mA Master speed frequency Oal reference n voltage input 4 to 20 mA input OQ A2 reves Se aria quay reference current input A3 Auxiliary speed frequency reference 1 L AC Analog common M 1 DIP switch V F O8 Fig 6 3 Current Input for Master Speed Frequency Reference Turn OFF pin 2 of DIP switch S1 toward V the voltage current switch when inputting a voltage to terminal 1 P Turn ON pin 2 of DIP switch S1 toward I the voltage current switch
597. ting and undershooting cannot be eliminated by adjusting only the gain reduce the value of C5 05 speed control and reduce the limit of the frequency refer ence compensation value Use feed forward control to increase the responsiveness to speed references This function is effective for machines for which the ASR gain cannot be increased to a large value because doing so would result in vibra tions There is also the additional effect of making the system less prone to overshoot This function is valid only in flux vector and open loop vector 2 controls Overshooting when acceleration completed is being suppressed 1050 1050 900 900 F Overshooting Rotation Rotation speed speed min 799 min 1 75 o E o 0 05 1 0 05 Time s Time s Feed forward control Conventional speed control Overshooting control effect Fig 6 77 Overshooting Control Effect Related Constants Name Change during Vit Opera with tion PG Con stant Number Open Loop Vector 1 Display Description Feed forward control selec tion Select the feed forward control 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Feedfoward Sel Control Methods Flux Vec tor Increasing the Speed Reference Response Feed Forward Control Open Loop Vector 2 Motor accelera tion time Set the time required to acceler ate the motor at the rated torque T100 to the rated speed Nr J GD7 4 P Motor rated output 2a kgm2 N
598. tion Vif Loop Flux Loop Number Display Range Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Digital input Sets the Digital Reference option Board input method 0 BCD 1 unit BCD 0 1 unit BCD 0 01 unit BCD 1 Hz unit BCD 0 1 Hz unit BCD 0 01 Hz unit BCD special setting 5 DI Input digit input 7 Binary input 6 is only effective when the DI 16H2 is used When 01 03 is set to 2 or higher the input will be BCD and the units will change to the 01 03 setting User Constant Tables BAnalog Monitor Boards F4 User constants for the Analog Monitor Board are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Con Open Open stant Description Factory Vif Loop Flux Loop Number Display Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Channel 1 Effective when the Analog monitor Monitor Board is used selection Monitor selection Set the number of the monitor AO Chi item to be output U1 00 Select Gain Channel 1 Set the multiple of 10 V for gain outputting monitor items 14 10 to 14 25 28 34 39 40 AO Chi Gain cannot be set 29 to 31 and 41 Channel 2 are not used When the AO tionitor 12 Analog Monitor Board is selection used outputs of 10 V are possible To output 10 V set AO Ch2 F4 07 or F4 08 to 1 When Select the AO 08 Analog Monitor C
599. tion actory v f Loop Flux Loop p Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Display PID sleep function operation Set the PID sleep function level start level as a frequency PID Sleep Level PID sleep operation Set the delay time until the delay time PID sleep function starts in PID Sleep seconds Time Accel decel time for PID reference Set the accel decel time for PID reference in seconds PID SFS Time mDwell Functions b6 User constants for dwell functions are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Fac Change Open Open en Settin durin Description 9 to 9 Vif Loop Flux Loop p Range Setting Opera with Vec Vec Vec 5 Display fon PG tor tor tor 1 2 Dwell fre quency at start Dwell Ref Start Dwell time Runcommand ON at start OFE Dwell Output frequency Time i Start Dwell fre quency at stop i b6 01 b6 037 b6 02 b6 04 Dwell Ref The dwell function is used to output Stop frequency temporarily when driving a motor with a heavy load Dwell time at stop Dwell Time Stop 5 17 iDroop Control b7 User constants for droop functions are shown in the following table Name Control Methods Con Change Open Open stant Description Setting Factory during V f Loop Flux
600. tion leve s for braking transistors built in Inverters of 0 4 to 15 kW Refer to FOR VARISPEED 600 SERIES INVERTER BRAK ING UNIT BRAKING RESISTOR UNIT INSTRUCTIONS TOBPC720600000 for operation levels for separately installed type Braking Resistor Units If selecting a fixed V f pattern E1 03 0 to E in V f control the values of the max voltage E1 05 the mid Output frequency voltage E1 08 and the min output frequency voltage E1 10 will change if the value for the input voltage setting E1 01 is changed i Setting V f Pattern Set the V f pattern in E1 03 when using V f control with or without a PG There are two methods of setting the V f pattern Select one of the 15 pattern types set value 0 to E that have been set beforehand or set a user defined V f pattern set value F The factory setting for E1 03 is F The contents of E1 03 when factory set to F are the same as when E1 03 is set to 1 To select one of the existing patterns refer to the following table Characteristic Application Specifications 50 Hz specifications This pattern is used in general applications 60 Hz specifications Constant Torque Used when the load torque is fixed regard 60 Hz specifications voltage saturation at Characteristic less of rotation speed for linear transport 50 Hz systems 72 Hz specifications voltage saturation at 60 Hz 50 Hz specifications X 3 decrement This pattern i
601. tion or a similar safety measure should also be provided on the machine side External Baseblock Signal If the external baseblock command settings 8 and 9 of H1 01 to H1 10 1s input while the motor is running the motor will immediately coast to a stop Do not input the external baseblock command while the motor is running unless necessary Make sure that the holding brake operates when using the external base block command for an emergency stop or interlock to start the Inverter If the external baseblock command is input and immediately reset the Inverter does not output voltage during the value of L2 03 Min baseblock time which factory setting 1s 0 5 to 2 0 seconds depending on the Inverter capacity Do not use the external baseblock command in an application where the motor is frequently started and stopped Acceleration Deceleration Time If the delay time for the holding brake s mechanical operation is not taken into consideration and the accelera tion deceleration time on the Inverter side is set to a time that is too short and overcurrent or wear on the brakes may occur at staring or the load will slip at stopping because the holding brake does not operate on 6 time If so use the dwell function at start described on page 6 176 or the dwell function at stop described on F page 6 177 to tune the timing for the holding brake Magnetic Contactor on the Inverter s Output side Do not install a magnetic conta
602. tion primary delay time constant Torq Comp Time 0 to 10000 ASR proportional P gain 1 ASR P Gain 1 0 00 to 300 00 ASR integral I time ASR I Time 1 0 000 to 10 000 ASR proportional P gain 2 ASR P Gain 2 0 00 to 300 00 ASR integral I time 2 ASR I Time 2 0 000 to 10 000 ASR primary delay time ASR Delay Time 0 000 to 0 500 Torque reference delay time Torq Ref Filter 0 to 1000 Max output frequency FMAX Max Frequency 0 0 to 400 04 Max voltage VMAX Max Voltage 0 0 to 255 0 Base frequency FA Base Frequency 0 0 to 400 0 Mid output frequency FB Mid Frequency A 0 0 to 400 0 Mid output frequency voltage vc Mid Voltage A 0 0 to 255 0 0 0 to 510 0 5 87 Name Factory Setting s Open Open Setting Range VIf Vifwith loop Flux Loop Control PG Vector Vector Vector 1 2 Display Min output frequency FMIN 0 0 to 400 0 Min Frequency Min output frequency voltage VMIN 0 0 to 255 0 0 0 to 510 0 Min Voltage Overspeed detection delay time 0 0 to 2 0 PG Overspd Time Feedforward control selection Feedfoward Sel The settings will be 0 05 Flux vector 1 00 open loop vector for Inverters of 45kW or larger The settings shown are for 200 V Class Inverters The val
603. tionary autotuning is performed even though the motor will not turn Do not touch the motor until autotuning has been completed iSetting the Autotuning Mode Rotational Autotuning T1 01 0 Rotational autotuning is used for open loop vector control and flux vector control Set T1 01 to 0 input the data from the nameplate and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operator The Inverter will stop the motor for approximately 1 minute and then set the required motor constants automatically while operating the motor for approximately 1 minute Y aA 1 Always disconnect the motor from the machine and confirm that it is safe to operate the motor before P performing rotational autotuning e 2 If the motor cannot be operated by itself perform stationary autotuning but always use rotational IMPORTANT autotuning whenever it is possible to operate the motor by itself to increase performance Stationary Autotuning 1 T1 01 1 Stationary autotuningl is used for open loop vector control and flux vector control Set T1 01 to 1 input the data from the nameplate and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operator The Inverter will supply power to the stationary motor for approximately 1 minute and some of the motor constants will be set automatically The remaining motor constants E2 02 motor rated slip and E2 03 motor no load current will be set auto matically the first time operation is started in drive mode To perform an operation immedi
604. tive actions for UV1 UV2 and UV3 faults in the previous table when below the CUV level Main Circuit Overvoltage OV SM na The main circuit DC voltage exceeded Ud et ues blinking Decrease the voltage so it s within the overvoltage detection level The power supply voltage is too high DC Bus specifications Overvolt 200 V Class Approx 410 V 400 V Class Approx 820 V 7 The ambient temperature is too high Install a cooling unit END OH blinking Heat sink Over temp Cooling Fin Overheating The temperature of the Inverter s cool ing fins exceeded the setting in L8 02 There is a heat source nearby Remove the heat source The Inverter cooling fan has stopped Replace the cooling fan Contact your Yaskawa representative A short circuit between V V and AC terminals occurred Overload in the control circuit ter minal Make sure that incorrect wiring has not been done Check the resistance and wiring for the frequency setting potentiometer etc Check that the current for ter minals V and V is 20 mA or less FAN blink ing Cooling Fan Fault Inverter s Cooling Fan Fault An Inverter s cooling fan fault was detected This fault is detected when L8 32 is set to 0 The Inverter s cooling fan has stopped Replace the cooling fan Contact our sales representative OH2 blinking Over Heat 2 Inverter Overheating Pre alarm An OH2 ala
605. to 0 Disabled However for mechanical loads that require repetitive high torque such as with cranes leave L8 38 to 1 Enabled without changing Acoustic noise from the motor can be changed by changing the setting of L8 39 Reduced carrier frequency The minimum set value is 1 0 kHz for open loop vector control Maintenance and Inspection This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection for the Inverter Maintenance and Inspection ssssss 8 2 Maintenance and Inspection Outline of Warranty The warranty period of the Inverter is as follows Warranty Period This product is warranted for twelve months after being delivered to Yaskawa s customer or if applicable eighteen months from the date of shipment from Yaskawa s factory whichever comes first Daily Inspection Check the following items with the system in operation The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises There should be no abnormal heat generation The ambient temperature should not be too high The output current value shown on the monitor displays should not be higher than normal The cooling fan on the bottom of the Inverter should be operating normally Periodic Inspection Check the following items during periodic maintenance Always turn OFF the power supply before beginning inspection Confirm that the LCD and LED indicators on the front cover
606. to 2 00 Adjustment Method Torque or speed response is insufficient Reduce the setting Hunting or vibration occurs Increase the set ting Torque com pensation primary delay time constant Increasing torque and speed response Controlling hunting and vibration 20 to 100 ms Torque or speed response is insufficient Reduce the setting Hunting or vibration occurs Increase the set ting Slip compen sation pri mary delay time Increasing speed response Improving speed sta bility Speed response is slow Reduce the setting Speed is not stable Increase the setting Slip compen sation gain Improving speed accuracy 0 5 to 1 5 Speed is slow Increase the setting Speed is too fast Reduce the setting Carrier fre quency selection Reducing motor mag netic noise Controlling hunting and vibration at low speeds 10 Hz or lower Motor magnetic noise is high Increase the setting Hunting or vibration occurs at low speeds Reduce the setting Mid output frequency voltage VC Min output frequency voltage VMIN Improving torque and speed response at low speeds Controlling shock at startup Torque or speed response is insufficient Increase the setting Shock at startup is large Reduce the setting Control Method Flux vector control A1 02 3 Con stant Number Using Inverters for Elevating
607. to 32767999 9 ACR out put of q axis Monitors the current control TA U1 32 output value for the motor sec ae i ossible a No No A A A 5FH ACR q ondary current pues Output ACR out put of d axis Monitors the current control PAR U1 33 output value for the motor V mei ible Fs No No A A A 60H ACR d excitation current pM pos i Output OPE fault constant Shows the first constant num U1 34 ber where an OPE fault was A A A A A 61H OPE detected Detected Zero servo Cannot be output movement Shows the number of PG U1 35 Pulses pulses times 4 for the move 1 No No No n No 62H ment range when stopped at Zero Servo zero Pulse 5 81 5 02 Name Display PID input volume PID Input Description PID feedback volume Given as maximum frequency 100 Output Signal Level During Multi Function Analog Output 10 V Max frequency 10 to 10 V possible Control Methods Vit with PG Open Loop Vec tor 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vec tor 2 PID output volume PID Output PID control output Given as maximum frequency 100 10 V Max frequency 10 to 10 V possible PID target value PID Set point PID target value Given as maximum frequency 100 10 V Max frequency MEMOBUS communi cations error code Transmit Err Shows MEMOBUS errors U1 39 00000000 CRC error Data length err
608. to which the control board the gate drive board and the cooling fan power relay board are mounted Remove any cables that are connected to the control board the gate drive board and the cooling fan power relay board The cable that is connected to the control circuit terminals can be removed together with the control circuit terminal board Refer to page 8 21 3 Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter 4 Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one Mounting the Cooling Fan After attaching a new cooling fan reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket be sure that the airflow faces the top of the Inverter Front cover mounting screws Fan cover Fan cover mounting screws J looo Fan power hsh lt J99 relay board d O00 OO board I Gate drive 4 4j icy Front cover Fi ca ee ate Control board HH dt OO BOW OOO Terminal ER A cover X TOT pu Circulation fan Circulation fan mounting screws Se A 8 SW e Circulation fan Fan cover mounting screws I airflow direction a IN Fan cover DN Fan airflow ag WER direction lt Fan power relay board Fan mounting screws Finger guard Cooling fan Fan ground cable There is no finger guard mounted to the fan for some capacities There is a guard on the I
609. tor during rotational autotuning The motor repeats running and stopping until autotuning has been completed possibly resulting in injury In stationary autotuning 1 when the motor is first operated in the drive mode after tuning the remaining motor constants E2 02 Motor rated slip and E2 03 Motor no load current are set auto matically To perform an operation immediately after stationary autotuning 1 use the following pro cedure under the recommended conditions 1 Check the values of E2 02 and E2 03 in verify mode or advanced programming mode 2 Run the motor once in drive mode under the following conditions The Inverter and the motor are connected The motor shaft is not locked with a mechanical brake or other stopping mechanism or function A motor load ratio of 3096 or less is maintained A speed of 30 or more of the base frequency set at E1 06 default highest frequency is maintained at a constant speed for one second or more 3 After stopping the motor check the values of E2 02 and E2 03 again in verify mode or advanced program ming mode If the values of E2 02 and E2 03 differ from the ones before the first operation was carried out the settings have been successfully completed Next check if the values are suitable or not If the values of E2 02 and E2 03 differed greatly from the reference data of the motor in the test report or the instruction manual TOE S616 60 1 hunting motor vibrations insufficie
610. tor or machinery do not normally make this setting 0to3 382H 6 158 F1 04 Operation selection at deviation PG Devia tion Sel Sets the stopping method when a speed deviation DEV fault occurs 0 Ramp to stop Deceleration stop using Deceleration Time 1 C1 02 Coast to stop Fast stop Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 Continue operation DEV is displayed and operation continued 0to3 383H 6 158 5 39 Name Display PG rotation PG Rotation Sel Description 0 Phase A leads with Forward Run Command Phase B leads with Reverse Run Command Phase B leads with Forward Run Command Phase A leads with Reverse Run Command Setting Range Factory Setting Control Methods Vit with PG Open Loop Vec tor 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vec tor 2 PG division rate PG pulse moni tor PG Output Ratio Sets the division ratio for the PG speed control board pulse output Division ratio 1 n m n 0 or 1 m 1 to 32 F1 06 O ULI n m This constant is only effective when a PG B2 is used The possible division ratio settings are 1 32 lt F1 06 lt 1 Integral value during accel decel enable disable PG Ramp PI I Sel Sets integral control during acceleration deceleration to either enabled or disabled 0 Disab
611. ts the frequency when 10 V is input as a percentage of the 100 0 Terminal Al maximum output frequency Gain Bias termi nal A1 Sets the frequency when 0 V is input as a percentage of the Terminal Al maximum frequency Bias Signal level selection ter 0 0 to 10 V minal A3 1 10 V to 10 V 11 bit polarity posi Term A3 Sig tive negative input nal 5 51 Name Control Methods Shi C Open Open Description eung Factory V f Loop Flux Loop Display P Range Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Multi func tion analog input termi Select multi function analog nal A3 func 6 28 H3 05 input function for terminal 0 to IF 2 No A A A A A 414H 6 128 tion selection A5 Refer to the next page Terminal A3 Sel urs Sets the input gain level na x H3 06 waen TUE ro 0010 100 0 Yes Lalalalala asli Terminal A3_ Set according to the 100 1000 0 6 128 Gain value selected from H3 05 ral oe x H3 07 DE to 0 0 Yes A A A A A 416H Terminal A3 Set according to the 100 100 0 6 128 Bias value selected from H3 05 Signal level 0 0 to 10V selection 1 10V to 10V H3 08 terminal A2 2 4 to 20 mA 9 bit input 0to2 2 No H A A oe A AH 6 28 f Switch current and voltage 6 128 Term A2 Sig input using the switch on the nal control panel Multi func
612. tting BCPFO00 or CPF01 is displayed This is a Digital Operator communications error The connection between the Digital Operator and the Inverter may be faulty Remove the Digital Operator and then re install it 7 25 If the Motor Does Not Operate Use the following information if the motor does not operate BThe motor does not operate when the RUN Key on the Digital Operator is pressed The following causes are possible up the Inverter will remain in ready status and will not start Press the Menu Key to display the drive mode and enter the drive mode by pressing the DATA ENTER Key Rdy will be displayed when drive mode is IMPORTANT entered 1 P If the Inverter is not in drive mode and the DRIVE indicator on the Digital Operator JVOP 161 does not light e The operation method setting is wrong If constant b1 02 Operation Method Selection is set to 1 control circuit terminal the motor will not operate when the Run Key is pressed Either press the LOCAL REMOTE Key to switch to Digital Operator opera tion or set b1 02 to 0 Digital Operator The LOCAL REMOTE Key is enabled by setting 02 01 to 1 and disabled by setting 02 01 to 2 It is enabled S when the drive mode is entered INFO The frequency reference is too low If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency the Inverter will not operate Raise the frequency referenc
613. tto ce onto puso bete ee ta oa pu cR came ii Safely Precautions sssini ooa ette perti dec uds D edicti usua Cu iii Warning Information and Position eeeeee vii Warranty Informatio ient eerte riot iecit an Raetia eua tubas viii Registered Trademarks onec o oem nts b Itb dtm ue ehiste ix Before Reading This Manual ssccesseccceeeeeeeeeseeneceeeeeeeeeesesecenseeeeneeeees ix Handling Inverters eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeene n 1 1 Varispeed G7 Introduction sssssssssseeR eee 1 2 L vanspeed G Modglss iu eio bte tbe atte tbe ee ved lotte qs 1 2 Confirmations upon Delivery ccccccceeeeeesecceceeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 1 3 O Checks n a ARE RRV R 1 3 Nameplate Information css coercet itane et telnet tad tse tdei dente trema 1 3 Component Names sse tenent teet 1 5 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions eeeeeee 1 6 Open Chassis Inverters IPOO eise sesta tee tette tette tette tetas etes 1 6 Enclosed Wall mounted Inverters NEMA1 Type 1 sss 1 7 Checking and Controlling the Installation Site ssssessss 1 9 9 Anctallaliof Site ode qoo eo oa dece ie SAMMELN EL EE 1 9 Controlling the Ambient Temperature essssssssseetetennneenennes 1 9 Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter ssssssssssseeteteeenes 1 9 Installation Orientation
614. tuned motor constants are to be stored 1 Motor 1 2 Motor 2 Factory Setting Control Methods Vit with PG Open Loop Vec tor Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vec tor Autotuning mode selec tion Tuning Mode Sel Set the autotuning mode 0 Rotational autotuning 1 Stationary autotuning 1 2 Stationary autotuning for line to line resistance only Shipping adjustment Stationary autotuning 2n Motor output power Mtr Rated Power Set the output power of the motor in kilowatts Motor rated voltage Rated Voltage Set the rated voltage of the motor in volts Motor rated current Rated Current Set the rated current of the motor in amps Motor base frequency Rated Fre quency Set the base frequency of the motor in hertz Number of motor poles Number of Poles Set the number of motor poles Motor base speed Rated Speed Set the base speed of the motor in min Number of PG pulses when turning PG Pulses Rev Set the number of pulses per revolution for the PG being used pulse generator or encoder without any multi plication factor Motor no load current No Load Current Set the current value recorded in the motor s test results for a motor without a load Displayed only when Station ary autotuning 2 is selected T1 01 4 Set T1 02 and
615. ue L6 02 or L6 05 Undertorque detection 1 NO or Undertorque detection 2 NO The undertorque detection disabled margin is approximately 1096 of the Inverter rated output current or motor rated torque Changing Overtorque and Undertorque Detection Levels Using an Ana log Input If you set constant H3 09 Multi function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection or H3 05 Multi function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection to 7 overtorque undertorque detection level you can change the overtorque undertorque detection level If you change the overtorque undertorque detection level using the multi function analog input only over torque undertorque detection level 1 will be enabled The following diagram shows the overtorque undertorque detection level using an analog input Detection level 100 9 Multi function analog input terminal A2 A3 input level 0 10 V 4 mA 20 mA Fig 6 40 Overtorque Undertorque Detection Level Using an Analog Input Multi Function Analog Input H3 05 H3 09 Control Methods Function Contents 100 PG 1 2 vertorque undertorque detection Motor rated torque for vector control 7 Overtorq eee de ord ee Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes level Inverter rated output current for V f control 6 56 Machine Protection NM Motor Overload Protection You can protect the motor from overload using the Inverter s built in electro
616. ue Rev Positive torque L7 01 m SENS No of Regenerative motor regenera Reverse Estate rotations tive torque limit Forward Negative torque Torq Lmt Fwd Rgn Reverse regenera tive torque limit Torq Lmt Rev Rgn 5 65 Control Methods Setti Open Open Description eting Vif Loop Flux Loop P Range with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Integral time set Set the integral time for the torque ting for limit When integral control is set for L7 06 torque the torque limit reduce this setting to 5 to 200 No No No A No No 4ACH 4 21 limit increase the change in frequency for 10 000 ms 6 46 the torque limit Torq Limit Normally handled with PRG 1030 Time Control method Select the control method for the selection torque limit during acceleration and for torque deceleration limit dur 9 Proportional control integral con i L7 07 ing accel tro during constant speed 0 1 0 No No No A No No 4C9H eration and 6 46 1 Integral control decelera Normally this constant does not need uon to be set Torque Normally handled with PRG 1030 Limit Sel mHardware Protection L8 User constants for hardware protection functions are shown in the following table Control Methods Open Loop Vec Vec Vec tor tor tor 1 2 Name Open Loop Con stant N
617. ues will double for 400 V Class Inverters Settings vary as shown in the following tables depending on the Inverter capacity and E1 03 The setting range for open loop vector 2 control is 0 to 66 0 0 to 132 0 for PRG 1030 1000 ms for Inverters of 200 V Class 30 to 110 kW and 400 V Class 55 to 300 kW nA wWN 8200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 0 4 to 1 5 kW Factory Setting 6 7 8 9 The setting shown are for 200 V Class Inverters The values will double for 400 V Class Inverters 8200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 2 2 to 45 kW Factory Setting 6 7 8 9 The setting shown are for 200 V Class Inverters The values will double for 400 V Class Inverters 5 88 User Constant Tables 8200 V Class Inverters of 55 to 110 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 55 to 300 kW Factory Setting Open Loop Vector Con trol 6 7 8 9 4 Open Loop Flux Vector Vector Con Con trol trol 2 The setting shown are for 200 V Class Inverters The va ues wi 1 double for 400 V Class Inverters 5 89 Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity 02 04 The factory settings of the followin
618. uit is damaged Replace the Inverter Display Table 7 1 Fault Displays and Processing Continued Meaning CPU Internal A D Converter Error Protective and Diagnostic Functions w Probable Causes Corrective Actions Try turning the power supply off and on again The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter A short circuit between V V and AC terminals occurred Overload in the control circuit ter minal Make sure that incorrect wiring has not been done Check the resistance and wir ing for the frequency setting potentiometer etc Check that the current for terminals V and V is 20 mA or less CPF05 External A D Err CPU External A D Converter Error Try turning the power supply off and on again The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter A short circuit between V V and AC terminals occurred Overload in the control circuit ter minal Make sure that incorrect wiring has not been done Check the resistance and wir ing for the frequency setting potentiometer etc Check that the current for terminals V and V is 20 mA or less Option Board Connection Error The option board is not connected properly Turn off the power and insert the board again The Inverter or option board is faulty Replace the option board or the Inverter ASIC Internal RAM Fault Try turning the
619. ull out the fan cover from the Inverter 4 Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover and replace it with a new one Mounting the Cooling Fan After attaching a new cooling fan reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket be sure that the airflow faces the top of the Inverter Front cover mounting screws li u li Front cover Terminal cover s KX N Terminal cover mounting screws Fan cover mounting screws Fan power relay board ZA Fan cover Control board mounting panel Control board mounting T SU RE fan g mounting screws C T p eo Control board mounting panel mounting screws Circulation fan 7 N amp Cooling fan power connector Cooling fan airflow direction 4 CN26 Gate drive board Fan cover a n a ac un Lm r1 D Cooling fan Control circuit terminal board Cooling fan mounting screws Cooling fan airflow direction Finger guard Note A finger guard is not provided on Inverters with slits Fig 8 8 Cooling Fan Replacement 200 V Class Inverters of 75 kW 8 11 _ 400 V Class Inverters of 90 kW and 110 kW Removing the Cooling Fan 1 Remove the terminal cover Inverter cover Digital Operator and front cover from the front of the Inverter 2 Remove the panel to which the control board the gate drive board
620. umber Setting Range Factory Setting Vit with PG Description Flux Display Protect selec tion for inter nal DB resistor Type ERF 0 Disabled no overheating protection 1 Enabled overheating protection DB Resistor Prot Sets the detection temperature for the Inverter overheat detection pre alarm in C The pre alarm detects when Overheat pre alarm level OH Pre Alarm Lvl the heatsink temperature reaches the set value 5 66 Operation selectionafter overheat pre alarm Sets the operation for when the Inverter overheat pre alarm goes ON 0 Ramp to stop Deceleration stop using Deceleration Time 1 C1 02 1 Coast to stop 2 Fast stop Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 3 Continue operation Monitor display only A fault will be given in set ting 0 to 2 and a minor fault will be given in setting 3 User Constant Tables _ Name Control Methods sun Open Open i Description Story Vif Loop Flux Loop Display P Setting with Vec Vec Vec PG tor tor tor 1 2 Input open 0 Disabled phase protec 1 Enabled Detects if input tion selection current open phase power supply voltage imbalance or main circuit L8 05 electrostatic capacitor Oorl 0 No A A A A 4BIH Ph Loss In deterioration occurs Sel This fault is detected if a
621. umber of the monitor selection item to be output U1 00 terminal from terminal FM FM 4 10 to 14 25 28 34 39 40 cannot be set 29 to 31 and 41 Terminal FM Sel are not used Gain ter Sets the multi function analog minal FM output 1 voltage level gain Sets whether the monitor item output will be output in multi ples of 10 V The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V A meter cali Terminal FM Gain bration function is available Bias termi Sets the multi function analog nal FM output 1 voltage level bias Sets output characteristic up down parallel movement as a percentage of 10 V The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V A meter cali Terminal FM Bias bration function is available Monitor Sets the number of the monitor selection item to be output U1 00 terminal from terminal AM AM 4 10 to 14 25 28 34 39 40 Terminal cannot be set 29 to 31 and 41 AM Sel are not used Gain ter Set the voltage level gain for minal AM multi function analog output 2 Set the number of multiples of 10 V to be output as the 100 output for the monitor items The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V A meter cali Terminal AM Gain bration function is available Bias termi Sets the multi function analog nal AM output 2 voltage level bias Sets output characteristic up down parallel movement as a percentage of 10 V The maximum
622. unction and Peak Hold Current Monitoring Function in Chapter 6 to confirm the output current during startup BlInitial Torque The startup and acceleration characteristics of the motor are restricted by the overload current ratings of the Inverter that is driving the motor The torque characteristics are generally less than those required when start ing using a normal commercial power supply If a large initial torque is required select an Inverter with a somewhat larger capacity or increase the capacity of both the motor and the Inverter ilEmergency Stop Although the Inverter s protective functions will stop operation when a fault occurs the motor will not stop immediately Always provide mechanical stop and protection mechanisms on equipment requiring an emer gency stop Inverter Application Precautions M BOptions Terminals B1 B2 O 1 2 03 are for connecting only the options specifically provided by Yaskawa Never connect any other devices to these terminals Installation Observe the following precautions when installing an Inverter Binstallation in Enclosures Either install the Inverter in a clean location not subject to oil mist air bourne matter dust and other contam inants or install the Inverter in a completely enclosed panel Provide cooling measures and sufficient panel space so that the temperature surrounding the Inverter does not go beyond the allowable temperature Do not in
623. und from the motor Check the monitor display to ensure that U1 03 Output Current is not too high Continuously driving a general purpose motor with its rated current at a speed of less than 20 Hz may cause motor overheat Further if a current exceeding 70 to 8096 of the load current flows for more than one minute while the motor is running at a low speed OL1 Motor Overload will be generated When neither a braking unit braking resistor nor a regenerative converter is connected some operation conditions may cause an overvoltage Check the DC bus voltage monitor U1 07 and adjust the accelera tion deceleration time etc as required 200 V class less than 350 V 400 V class less than 700 V Refer to Adjustment Suggestions on page 4 18 if hunting vibration or other problems originating in the control system occur Check and Recording User Constants 4 Use verify mode VERIFY will be displayed on the LCD screen to check user constants that have been changed for trial operation and record them in a user constant table Any user constants that have been change by autotuning will also be displayed in verify mode If required the copy function in constants 03 01 and 03 02 displayed in advanced programming mode can be used to copy the changed settings from the Inverter to a recording area in the Digital Operator If changed set tings are saved in the Digital Operator they can be easily copied back to the Inverter to speed up s
624. unstable When using more than one Inverter be careful not to loop the ground wire O X OK NO Le o io ans iE e t Fig 2 12 Ground Wiring 2 20 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals NM iConnecting the Braking Resistor ERF A Braking Resistor that mounts to the Inverter can be used with 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with outputs from 0 4 to 3 7 kW Connect the braking resistor as shown in Fig 2 13 Table 2 7 L8 01 Protect selection for internal DB resistor Enables overheat protection L3 04 Stall prevention selection during deceleration 0 Disables stall prevention function Select either one of them 3 Enables stall prevention function with braking resistor Braking resistor B1 Q Oo Fig 2 13 Connecting the Braking Resistor to any terminals other than B1 or B2 can cause the resistor to overheat resulting in damage to the equip 1 A F P The braking resistor connection terminals are B1 and B2 Do not connect to any other terminals Connecting e ment IMPORTANT il Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit LKEB and Braking Unit CDBR Use the following settings when using a Braking Resistor Unit Refer to Wiring Examples on page 10 20 for connection methods for a Braking Resistor Unit A Braking Resistor that mounts to the Inverter can also be used with Inverters with outputs from 0 4 to 3 7 kW Tabl
625. uration 2 5 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals 2 6 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals 2 22 Wiring Check wm 2 30 Installing and Wiring Option Boards 2 31 Connections to Peripheral Devices Examples of connections between the Inverter and typical peripheral devices are shown in Fig 2 1 Power supply Molded case a circuit breaker or ground fault 3 interrupter GOD 7 Magnetic con tactor MC AC reactor for power factor improvement Zero phase reactor Braking resistor Input noise filter Inverter e ur aera DC reactor for power t pm t factor improvement c p Ground Output noise filter Fig 2 1 Example Connections to Peripheral Devices Connection Diagram m Connection Diagram The connection diagram of the Inverter is shown in Fig 2 2 When using the Digital Operator the motor can be operated by wiring only the main circuits Thermal switch contact Thermal relay trip contact
626. urs after making this adjustment use open loop vector 1 control Do not use open loop vector 2 control for elevating machines Any other control method can be used Control Methods and Applications Application examples for the Inverter control methods are provided here EV f Control A1 02 0 V f control is suitable for applications where multiple motors are operated with a single Inverter such as with multi motor drives Thermal relay Inverter Fig 10 1 Varispeed G7 Control Methods NM MM B V f Control with PG A1 02 1 V f control with a PG enables precise control of machine line speed Speed control using the speed feedback of the machine shaft is possible in this mode Conveyor PG Speed Control Board PG A2 or PG D2 Fig 10 2 BOpen loop Vector Control A1 02 2 or 4 Open loop vector control enables the use of high performance drives without a speed detector PG pulse gen erator wiring is not required Inverter u Fig 10 3 iFlux Vector Control A1 02 3 Flux vector control is suitable for applications using high precision drives with PG feedback High precision positioning zero speed control and torque control are possible with this mode PG Speed Control Board PG B2 or PG X2 Fig 10 4 10 5 10 6 Inverter Application Precautions This section provides precautions for selecting installing setting and handling Inverters
627. ut frequency Fig 6 33 Slip Compensation Limit iSelecting Slip Compensation Function During Regeneration Set whether to enable or disable the slip compensation function during regeneration If the slip compensation function operates during regeneration you might have to use the braking option braking resistor Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit to momentarily increase the regenerative amount i Selecting Output Voltage Limit Operation If output voltage saturation occurs while the output voltage limit operation is disabled the output current will not change but torque control accuracy will be lost If torque control accuracy is required change the settings to enable the output voltage limit operation If the output voltage limit operation is enabled motor magnetic flux current is controlled automatically and torque control accuracy is maintained to limit the output voltage references Consequently the output current will increase by approximately 1096 maximum with rated load compared with when the output voltage limit operation is disabled so check the Inverter current margin Setting Precautions f using the device at medium to low speed only if the power supply voltage is 10 or more higher than the motor rated voltage or if the torque control accuracy at high speeds is insufficient it is not necessary to change the output voltage limit operation fthe power supply voltage is too low compared with the motor rated voltag
628. utput frequency as shown in the following diagram by setting C6 03 Carrier Frequency Upper Limit C6 04 Carrier Frequency Lower Limit and C6 05 Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain Carrier Frequency C6 03 C6 04 amp Output frequency x C6 05 x K gt Output frequency K is the coefficient determined by the set E1 04 value in C6 03 Max Output Frequency C6 03 10 0 kHz K 3 10 0 kHz gt C6 03 gt 5 0 kHz K 2 5 0 kHz lt C6 03 K 1 Fig 6 34 With vector control the carrier frequency is fixed to the Carrier Frequency Upper Limit in C6 03 if user set or by the carrier frequency set in C6 02 To fix the carrier frequency set C6 03 and C6 04 to the same value or set C6 05 to 0 If the settings are as shown below OPEI1 Constant setting error will occur If Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain C6 05 gt 6 and C6 03 C6 04 The Inverter overload current level can be reduced by the carrier frequency setting and an OL2 Inverter overload may be detected even if the overload current is smaller than 150 The reduction levels of the Inverter overload current are shown in the following figures Overload current reduction level A 100 80 50 200 V Class 22 kW 0 Carrier frequency 10 kHz 15 kHz Fig 6 35 Reduction Levels for V f V f with PG Open loop Vector 1 and Flux Vector Control Machine Protection
629. uts Observe the following precautions for wiring the main circuit power supply inputs Installing a Molded case Circuit Breaker Always connect the power input terminals R S and T and power supply via a molded case circuit breaker MCCB suitable for the Inverter Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1 5 to 2 times the Inverter s rated current For the MCCB s time characteristics be sure to consider the Inverter s overload protection one minute at 150 of the rated output current If the same MCCB is to be used for more than one Inverter or other devices set up a sequence so that the power supply will be turned OFF by a fault output as shown in Fig 2 6 Inverter Power supply 20P4 to 2030 3 phase 200 to 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 2037 to 2110 3 phase 200 to 230 VAC 50 60 Hz 40P4 to 4300 3 phase 380 to 460 VAC 50 60 Hz B Fault output NC For 400 V Class Inverters connect a 400 200 V transformer Fig 2 6 MCCB Installation Installing a Ground Fault Interrupter Inverter outputs use high speed switching so high frequency leakage current is generated At the Inverter pri mary side use a ground fault interrupter for Inverters with a countermeasure against high frequency to detect only the leakage current in the frequency range that is hazardous to humans and to ignore high frequency leak age current Use one or several ground fault interrupters with a total cumulative sensitivity amperage of at l
630. ve display In that case refer to Chapter 7 Troubleshooting The following display is an example of a display for faulty operation Display for fault operation DRIVE UV DC Bus Undervolt The display will differ depending on the type of fault A low voltage alarm is shown at left Trial Operation Procedures Basic Settings Switch to the quick programming mode QUICK will be displayed on the LCD screen and then set the fol lowing user constants Refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes for Digital Operator operating proce dures and to Chapter 5 User Constants and Chapter 6 Constant Settings by Function for details on the user constants Constants that must be set are listed in Table 4 1 and those that are set according to the application are listed in Table 4 2 Table 4 1 Constants that Must Be Set Con stant Description aud Bw Number 9 9 Set the control method for the Inverter 0 V f control A1 02 Control method 1 V f control with PG 0104 2 5 8 selection 2 Open loop vector 1 control 3 Flux vector 4 Open loop vector 2 control Set the frequency reference input method 0 Digital Operator 5 10 b1 01 Reference selec 1 Control circuit terminal analog input dd 1 6 2 tion 2 MEMOBUS communications T 6 76 3 Option board 6 94 4 Pulse train input Set the Run Command input method Te 5 10 Operon 0 Digital Operator 6 10 b1 02 i 5 is lection
631. ve mode is entered The input method for a 3 wire sequence is different than when operating by forward stop and reverse stop 2 wire sequence When 3 wire sequence is set the motor will not operate even when an input terminal suitable for forward run stop and reverse run stop is turned ON When using a 3 wire sequence refer to the timing chart and input the proper signals When using a 2 wire sequence set the multi function input terminal H1 01 through H1 10 terminals S3 to S11 to a value other than 0 The frequency reference is too low If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency the Inverter will not operate Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency There is a multi function analog input setting error If multi function analog inputs H3 05 Multi function Analog Input Terminal A3 Selection and H3 09 Multi function Analog Input Terminal A2 Selection are set to 1 frequency gain and if no voltage current is input then the frequency reference will be zero Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are correct iThe Inverter does not operate When the motor does not operate and there is no fault or alarm indication check the items listed below to find the cause and take corrective action Table 7 7 Troubleshooting when Motor Does Not Operate Probable Causes Run command is not sent Descriptions Inverter does n
632. verter Display Table 7 1 Fault Displays and Processing Continued Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions The wiring of the control power cir cuit is incorrect A Backup Capacitor Unit for Momentary Power Loss is not Try turning the power supply off and on 2 Control Power Fault AE e E attached to a 200 V 400 V Class Replace the Inverter if the fault CTLPS The control power supply voltage Undervolt dropped Inverter of 7 5 kW or less and the continues to occur Ppee value of the Momentary power loss Attach a Backup Capacitor Unit ridethru time L2 02 factory setting for Momentary Power Loss has been changed to the larger value Inrush Prevention Circuit Fault UV3 A pun occurred in the surge preven Ju The magnetic contactor in the main Try turning the power supply tion circuit Bacon want MC circuit failed off and on The magnetic contactor did not nd Answer The magnetic contactor excitation Replace the Inverter if the fault respond for 10 s even though the mag As 3 back coil is burned out continues to occur netic contactor ON signal has been output Main Circuit Voltage Fault i pa n x MID a the inp t The main circuit DC voltage oscillates P PP A momentary power loss occurred PF unusually not when regenerating The wiring terminals for the input This fault is detected if a load is 8 P Reset the fault after correcting its Inpu
633. w rate information and controls the flow rate highly accurately Flow rate sensor Tempera ture Con trol Feeds back temperature information and performs temperature adjustment control Thermocouple by rotating the fan Thermistor Related Constants Name Con stant Number Display PID control method selec tion PID Mode Description 0 Disabled Enabled Deviation is D controlled Enabled Feedback value is D controlled PID control enabled frequency reference PID output D control of deviation PID control enabled frequency reference PID output D control of feedback value Setting Range Factory Setting Change during Opera tion Individual Functions E Control Methods Vif with PG Open Loop Vector 1 Flux Vec tor Open Loop Vector 2 _ Proportional gain P PID Gain Sets P control proportional gain as a percentage P control is not performed when the setting is 0 00 Integral I time PID I Time Sets I control integral time in 1 second units I control is not performed when the setting is 0 0 Integral I limit PID I Limit Sets the I control limit as a per centage of the maximum output frequency Derivative D time PID D Time Sets D control derivative time in 1 second units D control is not performed when the setting is 0 00 PID upper limit PID Limit
634. was i An external baseblock signal was HS ing input roma multi function input ter input from a multi function input ter Check the external sequence i ut minal and the Inverter output was minal shut down Protective and Diagnostic Functions a ETa Display Table 7 3 Alarm Displays and Processing Continued Meaning Current Alarm The output current has exceeded the overcurrent alarm level over 150 of the rated current Probable causes The load is too heavy or the accel decel time is too short Corrective Actions Increase the acceleration deceleration time Either a specialized motor or an excessively large motor is being used Verify the setting for the Inverter capacity The current has risen too high while performing speed search either during a momentary loss in power or during a fault restart Momentary losses in power or fault restarts may occasionally trigger an overcurrent alarm and are not neces sarily indicators of an overcurrent problem LT C blink ing C Mainte nance LT F blink ing Fan Mainte nance Electrolytic Capacitor Maintenance Timer Monitor U1 61 has reached 10096 Cooling Fan Maintenance Timer Monitor U1 63 has reached 100 The electrolytic capacitors have reached their estimated maintenance time period The cooling fan has reached its esti mated maintenance time period Reset constant 02 18 to 0 aft
635. when deceleration to stop is selected When b2 01 is less than E1 09 E1 09 becomes the DC injection braking starting frequency DC injec tion brak ing current DCInj Cur rent Sets the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the Inverter rated current Name Display DC injec tion brak ing time at start DCInj Time Start Description Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at start in units of 1 second Used to stop coasting motor and restart it When the set value is 0 DC injection braking at start is not per formed Factory Setting Vif with PG Open loop Vec tor 1 Stopping Methods NM Control Methods Flux Vec tor DC injec tion brak ing time at stop DCInj Time Stop Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at stop in units of 1 second Used to prevent coasting after the Stop Command is input When the set value is 0 00 DC injection braking at stop is not performed 0 or for flux vector control and open loop vector 2 control iDeceleration to Stop If the Stop Command is input i e the Run Command is turned OFF when b1 03 is set to 0 the motor decel erates to a stop according to the deceleration time that has been set Factory setting C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 If the output frequency when decelerating to a stop falls below b2 01 the DC inj
636. when inputting a current to terminal A2 e A2 Set H3 06 to the correct setting for the type of input signal being used IMPORTANT Switch between 2 Step Speeds Master Auxiliary Speeds When switching between the master and auxiliary speeds connect the master speed frequency reference to control circuit terminal A1 or A2 and connect the auxiliary speed frequency reference to terminal A3 The ref erence on terminal A1 or A2 will be used for the Inverter frequency reference when the multi function input allocated to multi speed command 1 is OFF and the reference on terminal A3 will be used when it is ON E gee When switching between the master and auxiliary speeds set H3 05 Multi function analog input terminal A3 to 2 auxiliary frequency reference 2nd step analog and set on of the multi function input terminals to multi step speed reference 1 When inputting a current to terminal A2 for the master speed frequency reference set H3 08 Multi function analog input terminal A2 signal level selection to 2 current input and set H3 09 Multi function analog input terminal A2 function selection to 0 add to terminal A1 Inverter S5 Multi step speed reference 1 Power supply 15 V 20 mA Master speed frequency reference voltage input Master speed frequency reference current input 2kQ Auxiliary speed frequency reference 1 AC Analog common Fig 6 4 Switching between Master and Auxili
637. when the system is started up If that should occur use this section as a reference and apply the appropriate measures If the contents of the fault are displayed refer to Protective and Diagnostic Functions If Constant Constants Cannot Be Set Use the following information if an Inverter constant cannot be set BThe display does not change when the Increment and Decrement Keys are pressed The following causes are possible The Inverter is operating drive mode There are some constants that cannot be set during operation Turn the Inverter off and then make the settings Constant write enable is input This occurs when constant write enable set value 1B is set for a multi function input terminal H1 01 to H1 10 If the constant write enable input is OFF the constants cannot be changed Turn it ON and then set the constants Passwords do not match Only when a password is set If the constant A1 04 Password and A1 05 Password Setting numbers are different the constants for the initialize mode cannot be changed Reset the password If you cannot remember the password display A1 05 Password Setting by pressing the Reset Select Key and the Menu Key simultaneously while in the A1 04 display Then reset the password Input the reset password in constant A1 04 HN BOPEO1 through OPE11 is displayed The set value for the constant is wrong Refer to Operation Errors in this chapter and correct the se
638. wn in the following tables Name Control Methods Con Sett Fact Open Open stant y Description eung Factory Vif Loop Flux Loop Number Display k Range Setting sd vee Nee ea or or or 1 2 Terminal M1 M2 function selection contact Multi function contact output Term M1 M2 Sel Terminal P1 function selection Multi function contact output open collec tor Term P1 Sel Terminal P2 function selection Multi function contact output open collec tor Term P2 Sel Terminal P3 function selection Multi function contact output open collec 4 5 bi Term P3 Sel Terminal P4 function selection Multi function contact output open collec 4 tor Term P4 Sel 5 49 5 50 Multi function Contact Output Functions Function Control Methods Open V f Loop Flux with Vec Vec PG tor tor 0 During run ON Run Command is ON or voltage is being output Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 86 1 Zero speed Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 86 2 Frequency agree L4 02 used Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 51 3 Desired frequency agree 1 ON Output frequency L4 01 L4 02 used and dur Ves Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 51 ing frequency agree 4 Frequency FOUT detection 1 ON L4 01 output frequency L4 01 L4 02
639. xample Operations Key operations in advanced programming mode are shown in the following figure Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display i i H ENTER gt i RESET ADV ADV ADV ADV MainiMen a OOO s I ___ Select Language ___ Select Language _ Programmin EX 00 1 lt A1 yy 0 1 lt A1 00 y 1 8 8 Select Language English English 1 A ESC H A ESC aM ADE ony ey d t ADV VERIFYE m i Initialization Control Method Control Method Main Menu 02 22 ATE Z2 2 ee Ai1 02 6 Modified Consts i ontrol Method Open Loop Vector esc Open Loop Vector Main Menu Y fva A TUNE Auto Tuning ADV RESET ADV ADV PID Control yt PID Mode At PID Mode b5 0 O 0 b5 01 W 0 Disabled lt Disabled DRIVE Main Menu v ADV Operation LLL gt Fb los De QUICK Main Menu Quick Setting e SENS EV cs to Torque Limit Fwd Torque Limit Fwd Torque Limit Torque Limit Ewd Torque Limit Fwd I3 Tei ae ad L71 200 L7 01 00 Torque Limit Fwd 95605 9 5509 1 z Y H DATA ADV ADV ENTER ADV L7 ZE 200 Ur 20096 L7 04 00 Torq Lmt RevRgn 2009 nics OSEE ESC e puer Ea tu Fig 3 6 Operations in Advanced Program
640. xamples of settings for applications When using an Inverter mounted braking resistor ERF set L8 01 to 1 to enable ERF braking resistor overheating protection To prevent the machine from being operated in reverse set b1 04 to 1 to disable reverse operation To increase the speed of a 60 Hz motor by 10 set E1 04 to 66 0 Hz To use a 0 to 10 V analog signal for a 60 Hz motor for variable speed operation between 0 and 54 Hz 0 to 90 speed deduction set H3 02 to 90 0 To control speed between 20 and 80 to ensure smooth gear operation and limit the maximum speed of the machine set d2 01 to 80 0 and set d2 02 to 20 0 No load Operation To being no load operation without connecting the machine and the motor press the LOCAL REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator to change to LOCAL mode the SEQ and REF indicators on the Digital Operator should be OFF Always confirm safety around the motor and machine before starting Inverter operation from the Digital Operator Confirm that the motor works normally and that no errors are displayed at the Inverter Jog Frequency Reference d1 17 default 6 00 Hz can be started and stopped by pressing and releasing the JOG Key on the Digital Operator If the external sequence prevent operation from the Digital Operator con firm that emergency stop circuits and machine safety mechanisms are functioning and then start operation in REMOTE mode 1 e with a signal from the control signal term
641. y Use this function when inputting frequency references from the Digital Operator When 02 05 is set to 1 you can increment and decrement the frequency reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without using the Enter Key For example enter the Run Command using a 0 Hz reference and then continuously press the UP Key to increment the frequency reference by 0 01 Hz only for the first 0 5 s and then by 0 01 Hz every 80 ms for3 s thereafter Press and hold down the UP Key for 3 s minimum to reach the maximum output frequency 10 s after that The frequency reference that has been set will be stored in memory 5 s after the UP or DOWN Keys are released il Clearing Cumulative Operation Time Set the cumulative operation time initial value in time units in constant 02 07 Set 02 07 to 0 to clear U1 13 Inverter Operating Time il Clearing Inverter Cooling Fan Operation Time Set the fan operation time initial value in time units in constant 02 10 Set 02 10 to 0 to clear U1 40 Cooling Fan Operating Time Digital Operator Functions E Copying Constants The Digital Operator can perform the following three functions using the built in EEPROM non volatile memory Store Inverter constant set values in the Digital Operator READ Write constant set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter COPY Compare constant set values stored in the Digital Operator with Inverter constants VERIFY iRelated
642. ystem recovery if for any reason the Inverter has to be replaced The following functions can also be used to manage user constants Recording user constants Setting access levels for user constants Setting a password B Recording User Constants 02 03 If 02 03 is set to 1 after completing trial operation the settings of user constants will be saved in a separate memory area in the Inverter Later after Inverter settings have been changed the user constants can be initial ized to the settings saved in the separate memory area when 02 03 was set to 1 by setting A1 03 Initialize to 1110 BUser Constant Access Levels A1 01 A1 01 can be set to 0 monitoring only to prevent user constants from being changed A1 01 can also be set to 1 User specified Constants and used along with A2 constants to display only constants required by the machine or application in a programming mode iPassword A1 04 and A1 05 When the access level is set to monitoring only A1 01 0 a password can be set so that user constants will be displayed only when the correct password is input 4 17 Adjustment Suggestions If hunting vibration or other problems originating in the control system occur during trial operation adjust the constants listed in the following table according to the control method This table lists only the most commonly used user constants Control Method V f control A1 02 0 or 1 Name Constant Numb
643. z Pulse input common Pulse motor output terminal 12 VDC 10 20 mA max Pulse monitor output common BPG B2 Shield connection terminal The terminal specifications for the PG B2 are given in the following table Terminal Table 2 16 PG B2 Terminal Specifications Contents Specifications Power supply for pulse generator 12 VDC 5 200 mA max 2 0 VDC GND for power supply H 8 to 12V 3 L 1 V max A phase pulse input terminal Maximum response frequency 30 kHz TAI 4 Pulse input common H 8 to 12V 5 L 1 V max B phase pulse input terminal Maximum response frequency 30 kHz 6 Pulse input common 1 Open collector output 24 VDC 30 mA max A phase monitor output terminal 2 A phase monitor output common TA2 3 Open collector output 24 VDC 30 mA max B phase monitor output terminal 4 B phase monitor output common TA3 E Shield connection terminal 2 33 BPG D2 The terminal specifications for the PG D2 are given in the following table Table 2 17 PG D2 Terminal Specifications Terminal i Contents Specifications 1 12 VDC 45 200 mA max 2 Power supply for pulse generator 0 VDC GND for power supply 3 5 VDC 45 200 mA max TAI 4 Pulse input terminal Line driver input RS 422 level input 5 Pulse input terminal Maximu

Varispeed G7 INSTRUCTION MANUAL

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents